%% Chapters (letters) separated by ^L
%% Current tags: # % + = ? A B C D E I J L M N O P R S T U V X Z e u
%%  # and L both used for library call nos.
%%  Will add K using index
%% TODO: * Break long lines
%%       * Referize and unreverse reversed names?
%%       * Normalize tags
%%       * Perhaps eliminate predictable <>'s
%%       * Eliminate some x-refs?
%%          Some %X should be kept because they show diff spellings e.g.
%%          %A Chumsai,, Manit
%%          %X see Manich Jumsai
%%          Also, there is a distinction between "%X see" and %X see also".
%% Abbreviated years, as in 1978-9, have been expanded to 1978-79
%% %C has n.l. (not n.p.)
%% %D has n.d., nda., in progress, forthcoming, in preparation, to appear,
%%  in press
%% Queries now {\? ...} and %? and %[A-Z] ? and ??
%%  {\?? ...} for unidentified language of title
%% See lgs.el on language code {\language ...}
%% Done: A-K: English spelling checks on T, B, = bands.  Page-number checks.
%%  Use entry-check.el, etc.


%% A (Huffman pp. 1-13), input and edited by David Stampe, December 1995

%A A-Ly
%X see Aw\;oi-hathe, Aviong, A-T\'y, A-Ly, Cobbey, and Cobbey

%A A-T\'y
%X see Aw\;oi-hathe, Aviong, A-T\'y, A-Ly, Cobbey, and Cobbey

%A A Wang Dan Da
%D 1980
%T {\ch <Zhi zhe yu shi - Aan wen zi ci gai shu>}
%t A general description of the Tibetan lexicon
%C n.l.
%I Ethnic Publishing House

%A A Wang Que Tai Er
%D 1980
%T {\ch <Zang we gu ci qian she>}
%t Explanation of ancient Tibetan words
%C n.l.
%I Qinghai Ethnic Publishing House

%A A Zun Liang Nai Ba
%D 1958
%T {\ch <Zheng zi chu xue (Zang wen)>}
%t Introduction to writings (Tibetan)
%C n.l.
%I Sichuan Ethnic Publishing House

%A Aalto,, Pentti
%D 1972
%T Review of Sedl\'a\vcek, {\germ <Das Gemein-Sino-Tibetische>}
%J <Finnisch-ugrische Forschungen>
%V 39
%N 3
%P 592-5

%A Abadie,, Maurice
%D 1924
%T {\fr <Les races du Haut-Tonkin de Phong-Tho \`a Lang-Son>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I Soci\'et\'e des Editions G\'eographiques, Maritimes, et Coloniales
%Z 194p.
%O Ethnographic and demographic information on the TB (Lolo, Honi), MY (Meo, Yao) and Tai groups

%A Abadie,, Peggy
%D 1973
%T The `-e' suffix in Thakali
%M term paper, University of California/Berkeley
%Z 10p.

%A Abbey,, Anvita
%D 1978
%T Consonants of Khasi (Abstract)
%J <Proceedings of the International Congress of Anthropological And Ethnological Sciences>
%V 10
%N 2
%P 74

%A Abbott,, Barbara
%D 1972
%T Versatile verbs in Vietnamese
%M ms., University of California/Berkeley

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1959
%T Vocoder output and whispered speech in a tone language: Thai
%J <Journal of the Acoustical Society of America>
%V 31(1568).A

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1960
%X see Lotz,, J. A., A. S. Abramson, et al.

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1960
%T <The vowels and tones of standard Thai: acoustical measurements and experiments>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Columbia University
%Z iii, 211 leaves, ill.
%# University Microfilms; UH ASIA MICROFILM S00173 item 5

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1962
%T <The vowels and tones of standard Thai: acoustical measurements and experiments>
%S <International Journal of American Linguistics>
%u 28.2.3
%S <Indiana University Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics, Publications>
%u 20
%C Bloomington, IN
%I Indiana University Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics
%Z 146p.
%O Slightly revised version of 1960
%# UH ASIA GN2.I5 v.20

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1964
%X see Lisker,, Leigh, and A. S. Abramson

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1966
%T Review of Haas, <Thai--English student's dictionary>
%J <Word>
%V 22
%P 334-8

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1972
%T Tonal experiments with whispered Thai
%E Valdman,, A.
%B <Papers in linguistics and phonetics in memory of Pierre Delattre>
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%P 31-44

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1972
%T Word-final stops in Thai
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Noss,, Richard B.
%B <Tai phonetics and phonology>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute for English Language
%P 1-7

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1974
%T Experimental phonetics in phonology: vowel duration in Thai
%J <Pasaa>
%V 4
%N 1
%P 71-90

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1975
%T The coarticulation of tones: an acoustic study of Thai
%B <Proceedings of the International Congress of Phonetic Sciences>
%C ?
%V 8
%P 17-23

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1975
%T Pitch in the perception of voicing states in Thai: diachronic implications
%J <Haskins Laboratories Status Reports>
%V 41
%P 165-74

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1975
%T The tones of Central Thai: some perceptual experiments
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Chamberlain,, James R.
%B <Studies in Tai linguistics in honor of William J. Gedney>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 1-16

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1976
%T Thai tones as a reference system
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%B <Tai linguistics in honor of Fang-kuei Li>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 1-12

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1977
%T The phonetic plausibility of the segmentation of tones in Thai phonology
%B <Proceedings of the 12th International Congress of Linguists, Vienna, Aug. 28-Sept. 2, 1977> {\? publ. info?}

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1979
%T The coarticulation of tones: a study of Thai
%E Theraphan L. Thongkum
%E Panupong,, Vichin
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%E Tingsabadh,, M. R. Kalaya
%B <Studies in Tai and Mon-Khmer phonetics and phonology in honour of Eug\'enie J. A. Henderson>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 1-9

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%D 1979
%T Lexical tone and sentence prosody in Thai
%B <Proceedings of the International Congress of Phonetic Sciences>
%C Copenhagen
%I Institute of Phonetics, University of Copenhagen
%V 9
%P 380-7

%A Abramson,, Arthur
%A Erickson,, D. M.
%D 1978
%T Diachronic tone splits and voicing shifts in Thai: some perceptual data
%J <Haskins Laboratories Status Reports>
%V 53
%N 2
%P 85-96

%A Abu Jamal
%D 1892
%T <Burmese and Gujar\'ati vocabulary>
%O Termed {\guj <Myama saga arthavali>} in Gujarati characters
%C Surat
%Z 53p.

%A Achara Virabhand
%D 1965
%T <The incidence of speech and hearing problems in Pratom II children in Bangkok>
%U Unpublished dissertation, Chulalangkorn University, Board of Ed.

%A Achara Wangsotorn
%D 1976
%X see Parsart Brudhiprabha, Achara Wangsotorn, and Joe D. Palmer

%A Achara Wangsotorn
%D 1983
%T Analysis of language transfers from Thai to English in three types of discourse: explanatory, descriptive, and persuasive
%J <Pasaa>
%V June 1983; Special Issue in Memory of Ajarn M. L. Boonlua Debyasuvarn
%P 87-99

%A Acharya,, Baburam
%D 1970
%T Nepal, Newar, and the Newari language
%J <Regmi Research Series> (Kathmandu)
%V 2
%N 1
%P 1-15

%A Acharya,, K. P.
%D 1975
%T <Lotha phonetic reader>
%S <Central Institute for Indian Languages, Phonetic readers>
%u 14
%C Mysore
%I Central Institute for Indian Languages
%Z 104p.

%A Acharya,, K. P.
%D 1978
%T <Classified bibliography of articles in <Indian Linguistics>>
%S <Central Institute for Indian Languages, Occasional Monograph Series>
%u 12
%C Mysore
%I Central Institute for Indian Languages
%Z 106p.

%A Acimu,, To
%X see Kumar,, B., and Acimu

%A Adam,, John G.
%D 1892
%T <The Griffin's guide to Burmese>
%C Rangoon

%A Adams,, Karen L.
%D 1977
%T The occurrence of numeral classifiers in the Mon-Khmer branch of Austro-Asiatic
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 10 (Georgetown University, Washington, DC)

%A Adams,, Karen L.
%D 1979
%T Classifiers in Mon-Khmer
%M Third International Conference on Austroasiatic Languages, Helsing\/or, Denmark, October 24-26, 1979

%A Adams,, Karen L.
%D 1982
%T <Systems of numeral classification in the Mon-Khmer, Nicobarese, and Aslian subfamilies of Austroasiatic>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Michigan
%Z 507p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 43.10:3305-A; University Microfilms 8304433
%O Reference to Khasi, Palaungic, Mon, Khmer, Khmuic, Bahnaric, Katuic, Viet-M\;u\;ong, Jahaic, Senoic, Semelaic, and Nicobarese
%+ Published as 1989

%A Adams,, Karen L.
%D forthcoming
%T A comparison of the numeral classification of humans in Mon-Khmer
%E Svantesson,, Jan-Olaf
%B <Papers from the Helsing\/or symposium on Austroasiatic linguistics and literature>
%C Copenhagen/London
%I Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies/Curzon
%P 1-30

%A Adams,, Karen L.
%D 1989
%T <Systems of numeral classification in the Mon-Khmer, Nicobarese, and Aslian subfamilies of Austroasiatic>
%S <Pacific linguistics>
%u B.101
%C Canberra
%I Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University
%Z xiii, 219p., maps
%+ Reprint of 1982
%O Refers to Khasi, Palaungic, Mon, Khmer, Khmuic, Bahnaric, Katuic, Viet-M\;u\;ong, Jahaic, Senoic, Semelaic, and Nicobarese

%A Adams,, Karen L.
%A Becker,, Alton L.
%A Conklin,, Nancy Faires
%D 1975
%T Savoring the differences among classifiers
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 8 (University of California, Berkeley)
%O Deals primarily with Thai, Vietnamese, and Burmese

%A Adams,, Karen L.
%A Conklin,, Nancy Faires
%D 1973
%T Toward a theory of natural classification
%J <Papers of the Chicago Linguistic Society>
%V 9
%P 1-10
%O Report on 37 languages, including various AA, TB, and TK languages

%A Adams,, Karen L.
%A Conklin,, Nancy Faires
%D 1974
%T On the numeral classifier in Thai
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 7 (Georgia State University, Atlanta)
%O Data on the omission of classifiers in Thai

%A Adams,, T. S.
%D 1922
%T A vocabulary of Pangan
%J <Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 85
%P 97-123
%O AA: Jahai

%A Addiss,, Stephen
%D 1973
%T `Hat a dao', the sung poetry of North Vietnam
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 93
%P 18-31

%A Adelung,, Johann Christoph
%D 1806
%T {\germ <Mithridates, oder allgemeine Sprachenkunde...>}
%t Mithridates, or general linguistics
%C Berlin
%I Vossische Buchhandlung
%Z 2 vols.
%O Treats `Peguan' (i.e. Burmese) and Thai

%A Adkins,, Elmer H.
%D 1962
%T <A study of Montagnard names in Viet Nam>
%C Saigon
%I Public Safety Division, USOM
%% USOM ??

%A Adloff,, R.
%X see Thompson,, V., and R. Adloff

%A Agar,, Grace C.
%D n.d.
%T <Tibetan colloquial of Choni district, Kansu province, Northwest China>
%Z mimeo.

%A Agarwal,, R. C. S.
%D 1953
%T <Student Burmese--English dictionary>
%C Rangoon

%A Agarwal,, R. C. S.
%D 1970
%T <The Agarwal's English--Burmese dictionary>
%C Mandalay
%I Myawady Press
%Z 675p.

%A Ai Ch'ing [Ai Qing]
%D 1957
%T {\ch ??}
%t A note on the secret language of the women in the Miao community in Chien-chu Hsiang, in the district of Ku-ling in Szu-ch'uan
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 59
%P 15

%A Ai Ch'ing [Ai Qing]
%D 1972
%T A Miao secret language
%E Purnell,, Herbert C.
%B <Miao and Yao linguistic studies; selected articles in Chinese, translated by Chang Yu-hung, and Chu Kwo-ray>
%S <Cornell University Southeast Asia Program Data Paper>
%u 88
%C Ithaca
%I Cornell University Southeast Asia Program
%P 235-6
%O English translation of 1957

%A Ai Pun,, Saya
%X see Telford and Ai Pun

%A Ai Tang
%D 1962
%T {\ch Zang wen (Xiong di min zu wen zi jie shao)}
%t Introduction to Tibetan
%J <Wen zi gai ge>
%V 12

%A Aim-on Truwichien
%D 1982
%T Address avoidance in Thai
%J <W\=aras\=an manutsas\=at>
%V 10
%N 3
%P 31-9

%A Ajanta Prakashan
%D 1970
%T <Ajanta standard English--Manipuri dictionary>
%C Delhi
%I Ajanta Prakashan
%O TB: Meithei

%A Akagi Osamu
%X see Ishii, Akagi, and Endo

%A Akashi Etatsu
%D 1937
%T {\jap <Chibettogo bunten koyo>}
%t Outline grammar of Tibetan
%C Tokyo

%A Aksorn Vichapun
%X see Minnegerode,, B., and A. Vichapun

%A Alberty,, Jules
%X see Guilleminet and Alberty

%A Al\"esin,, P. I.
%X see Nguy\^en N\uang An, ed. by P I. Al\"esin and H\^ong H\`a

%A Al\"eshina,, I. E.
%D 1961
%T {\rus O formirovanii v'etnamskogo natsional'nogo literaturnogo iazyka}
%t Concerning the formation of the Vietnamese national literary language
%J <Norody Azii i Afriki>
%V 3
%P 139-46

%A Al\"eshina,, I. E.
%D 1964
%T {\rus Klassificatsiia predlozhenii vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Classification of sentences in Vietnamese
%B <Conference on languages of Southeast Asia, Moscow, 1964>
%C Moscow ?
%P 43-4

%A Al\"eshina,, I. E.
%D 1965
%T {\rus Zametki o sovremennom v'etnamskom literaturnom iazyke}
%t Remarks on the modern Vietnamese literary language
%E Serdiucheko,, G. P.
%B {\rus <Sovremennyi literaturnye iazyki stran Asii>}
%b The contemporary literary languages of the countries of Asia
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 132-40

%A Al\"eshina,, I. E.
%D 1970
%T {\rus Slozhnoe predlozhenie s prechino-sledstvennym otnoshenii vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Complex sentences with a causal-resultative relation in Vietnamese
%J <Uchenye Zapiski Moscow Institute of International Relations>
%V 4
%N 1
%P 152-69

%A Al\"eshina,, I. E.
%D 1971
%T {\rus Kriterii vydeleniia slozhnykh predlozhenii vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Criteria for identifying complex sentences in Vietnamese
%E Alieva,, N. F.
%E Syromiatnikov,, N. A.
%B {\rus <Vostochnye Iazyki>}
%b Oriental languages
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 230-7

%A Al\"eshina,, I. E.
%D 1971
%T {\rus Predlozheniie-opredelenie vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Sentence-determiners in Vietnamese
%E Rozhdestvenskii,, Iu. V.
%B {\rus <Vostochnaia filologiia: kharakterologicheskie issledovaniia>}
%b Eastern philology: typological studies
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 180-91

%A Al\"eshina,, I. E.
%D 1974
%T {\rus Ustoichivye i neustoichivye slozhnye predlozheniia (na materiale v'etnamskom iazyka)}
%t Idiomatic and non-idiomatic complex sentences (on material from Vietnamese)
%E Plam,, Iu. Ia.
%E Alieva,, N. F.
%B {\rus <Iazyki Kitaia i Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii>}
%b The languages of China and Southeast Asia
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 18-28

%A Al\"eshina,, I. E.
%D 1976
%X see Solntsev and Al\"eshina

%A Ali,, Ahmed [Aung Hmat,, U]
%D 1907
%T <The English, Hindustani, and Burmese manual>
%C Mandalay
%Z 115, 160p.

%A Ali,, Ahmed [Aung Hmat,, U]
%D 1926
%T <The student's English--Burmese and Burmese--English dictionary of useful plants, with Sanskrit synonyms of medicinal plants>
%C Rangoon
%I New Burma Press
%Z 77p.

%A Alieva,, N. F.
%D 1974
%X see Plam and Alieva

%E Alieva,, N. F.
%D 1980
%T {\rus <Iazyki iugo-vostochnoi azii: problemy povtorov>}
%t Southeast Asian languages: problems of reduplicatives
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%Z 271p.
%O Articles on the structure, semantics, and functions of reduplicatives in ST, AA, AN, and Tai languages
%O S

%E Alieva,, N. F.
%E Plam,, I. I.
%D 1971
%T {\rus <Iazyki kitaia i iugo-vostochnoi azii: problemy sintaksisa>}
%t Languages of China and Southeast Asia: syntactic problems
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%Z 299p.
%O S

%E Alieva,, N. F.
%E Syromiatnikov,, N. A.
%D 1971
%T {\rus <Vostochnye iazyki>}
%t Oriental languages
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%O S

%A Allen,, Keith
%D 1977
%T Classifiers
%J <Language>
%V 53
%N 2
%P 285-311
%O Reference to Burmese, Khmer, Thai, Nung, and Vietnamese

%A Allen,, N. J.
%D 1975
%T <Sketch of Thulung grammar, with three texts and a glossary>
%S <East Asian Papers>
%u 6
%C Ithaca, NY
%I Cornell University China-Japan Program
%Z 254p.

%A Allen,, N. J.
%D 1978
%T Sewala puja Bintila puja: notes on Thulung ritual language
%J <Kailash>
%V 6
%N 4
%P 237-56

%A Allen,, N. J.
%D 1981
%T Tibet and the Thulung Rai: towards a comparative mythology of the Bodic speakers
%E Aris,, M.
%E San Suu Aung
%B <Tibetan studies in honor of Hugh Richardson>
%C Atlantic Highlands, NJ
%I Humanities Press
%P 1-8

%A Allison,, Gordon H.
%D 1959
%T <Modern Thai, with exercises, vocabularies, answer key, and appendix>
%C Bangkok
%I Nibondh
%Z 252p.

%A Allison,, Gordon H.
%D 1961
%T <Simplified Thai, including useful Thai word-lists with accurate pronunciation of the words indicated in simple English throughout the book>
%C Bangkok
%I Nibondh
%Z 266p.

%A Allison,, Gordon H.
%D 1965
%T <Easy Thai: an introduction to the Thai language, with exercises and answer key>
%C Bangkok
%I Siri Aksornsat Press
%Z 113p.
%+ Reprinted 1969, Rutland, VT, Tuttle, 105p.

%A Allison,, Gordon H.
%D 1969
%T <Easy spoken Thai, a practical speaking dictionary of the Thai language, with explanations and easy English phonetics. A quick and easy way to be able to speak Thai>
%C Bangkok
%I Professional Services
%Z 154p.

%A Allison,, Gordon H.
%D 1969
%T <Easy Thai: an introduction to the Thai language, with exercises and answer key. A gradual cumulative system with little time wasted>
%C Rutland, VT
%I Charles E. Tuttle Co.
%Z 105p.
%O Reprint of 1965

%A Allison,, Gordon H.
%D 1972
%T <Compact Thai--English dictionary: a useful, concise dictionary of the Thai language>
%C Bangkok
%I Professional Services Publishers and Translators

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1959
%T Review of Cornyn and Musgrave, <Burmese glossary>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 22
%N 3
%P 601-3

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1959
%T Review of Cornyn, <Burmese chrestomathy>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 22
%N 3
%P 601-3

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1963-81
%X see Stewart,, J. A., et al., eds., 1940-81

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1965
%T Categories for the description of the verbal syntagma in Burmese
%E Milner,, G. B.
%E Henderson,, Eug\'enie J. A.
%B <Indo-Pacific linguistic studies>
%S <Lingua>
%u 14-15
%C Amsterdam
%I North Holland Publishing Co.
%V 2
%P 283-309

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1967
%T Grammatical tone in modern spoken Burmese
%J <Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der Karl-Marx Universit\"at Leipzig, Gesellschafts- und Sprachwissenschaftliche Reihe>
%V 16
%N 1-2
%P 151-61

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1967
%T South-East Asian studies in the USSR: languages and literature
%J <Mizan>
%V 9
%P 118-25

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1969
%T Review of Cornyn and Roop, <Beginning Burmese>
%J <Asia Major>
%V 15
%N 1
%P 119-21

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1970
%T Review of Cornyn and Roop, <Beginning Burmese>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 33
%N 3
%P 669-71

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1973
%T Review of Roop, <An introduction to the Burmese writing system>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 36
%N 1
%P 188

%A Allott,, Anna J.
%D 1973
%T Review of Minina and Kyaw Zaw, eds., {\rus <Birmansko--russki slovar'>} [= Burmese--Russian dictionary]; Kasevich, {\rus <Kratkii ocherk grammatiki birmanskogo iazyka>} [= Short grammatical outline of Burmese]; and Esche, {\germ <W\"orterbuch Burmesisch--Deutsch>} [= Burmese--German dictionary]
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 42
%N 1
%P 168-9

%A Altmann,, G.
%D 1966
%T Review of Voegelin and Voegelin, <Languages of the world: Indo-Pacific, fascicle four>
%J <Archiv Orient\'al\'ni>
%V 34
%P 148-9

%A Altmann,, G.
%D 1968
%T Review of Milner and Henderson, eds., <Indo-Pacific linguistic studies>
%J <Archiv Orient\'al\'ni>
%V 36
%N 3
%P 148-9

%A Aluk,, Tohua
%X see Kumar,, B., and Aluk

%A Amara Bhamoraput
%D 1972
%T <Final particles in Thai>
%U M.A. thesis, Brown University

%A Amara Prasithrathsint
%D 1974
%T Cooccurrences of final particles in Thai
%J <Bulletin of the Faculty of Arts>
%V 8
%P 74-9

%A Amara Prasithrathsint
%D 1982
%T {\thai Kham pasom lae kham phas\=an nai ph\=as\=a thai}
%t Compounds and derivatives in Thai
%J <W\=aras\=an manutsas\=at>
%V 10
%N 3
%P 20-30

%A Amara Prasithrathsint
%D 1982
%T {\thai Laksana kh\=\,ong k\=an y\=\,um ph\=as\=a lae watthanatham t\=ang prath\=et th\=i prokot nai ph\=as\=a thai}
%t The characteristics of foreign linguistic and cultural borrowings in Thai
%J <S\=at h\=aeng ph\=as\=a>
%V 2
%P 63-78

%A American University Alumni Association
%D 1963
%T <Beginning Thai, Units I-VII>
%C Bangkok
%I American University Alumni Association Language Center

%A Amiot,, Joseph
%D 1778
%T {\fr Lettre du P. Amiot, Missionaire de la Chine, sur la r\'eduction des Miao-tsu en 1775}
%t ?
%J {\fr <M\'emoires concernant l'historie, les sciences, les arts, les moeurs, les usages, etc. des Chinois, par les missionnaires de Pekin>}
%V 3
%P 387-422

%A Amipa,, Sherab Gyaltsen
%D 1974
%T {\tib <Dbyin-bod skad-g is slob-deb Blo-gsar nin'byed>}
%t Textbook of colloquial Tibetan
%C Rikon; Zurich
%I Tibetan Institute
%Z 97p.
%R Reviewed by J. Kolma\vs, <Kailash> 4(1976).3:237-40

%A Amirkha,, Rev.
%D 1931
%T {\khasi <Ka dikshoneri Phareng--Khasi>}
%t English--Khasi dictionary
%C Shillong
%I The Nepali Printing Works
%Z 146p.

%A Ammer,, Karl
%D 1969
%T Review of Rabel, <Khasi, a language of Assam>
%J <Zeitschrift f\"ur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft, und Kommunikationsforschung>
%V 22
%P 294-7

%A Amundsen,, Edward
%D 1903
%T <Primer of standard Tibetan>
%C Ghoom; Darjeeling
%Z 180p.

%A An Shixing
%D 1981
%X see Luo Bingfen and An Shixing

%A An Shixing
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t The historical development of Burmese final consonants
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A An Shixing
%D 1984
%T {\ch ??}
%t The Tibetan abbreviations
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1984
%N 2
%P 25-31
%O Includes Tibetan script and roman phonetics

%A Anake Navigamool
%D 1983
%T Folk songs from Suphanburi
%J <M\=\,uang B\=or\=an Journal>
%V 9
%N 2
%O Thai and English

%A Anan Songvitaya
%D 1981
%T {\thai <Laksana 'aks\=\,on lae 'akkharawithi c\=ar\,uk samai sukkh\=othai>}
%t The characteristics of the scripts and their orthography in the Sukhothai inscriptions
%U M.A. thesis, Silpakorn University
%Z 231p.
%O English summary

%A Anceaux,, J. C.
%D 1965
%T Linguistic theories about the Austronesian homeland
%J <Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land-, en Volkenkunde van Nederlandsch-Indi\"e>
%V 121
%P 417-32

%A Anderson,, Barbara
%D 1962
%T Review of Rabel, <Khasi, a language of Assam>
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 64
%P 1355

%A Anderson,, James Drummond
%D 1885
%T <A short list of words in the Hill Tippera language with their English equivalents. Also of words of the languages spoken by Lushais of the Sylhet frontier...>
%C Shillong
%Z 1, 13p.
%O TB: Bodo, Lushei, Tippera

%A Anderson,, James Drummond
%D 1895
%T <A collection of Kachari folk-tales and rhymes, intended as a supplement to Rev. S. Endle's Kachari grammar>
%C Shillong
%Z 61p.

%A Anderson,, James Drummond
%D 1896
%T <A short vocabulary of the Aka language>
%C Shillong
%I Assam Secretariat Press
%Z 20p.
%O Aka = Hruso

%A Anderson,, John
%D 1824
%T <Political and commercial considerations relative to the Malayan Peninsula and the British settlements in the Straits of Malacca>
%C Prince of Wales Island
%I William Cox
%Z 204p.
%O Kentak vocabulary xliv-xlvii

%A Anderson,, John
%D 1850
%T The Semang and Sakai tribes of the Malay Peninsula
%J <Journal of the Indian Archipelago>
%V 4
%P 424-32
%O Ethnography

%A Anderson,, John
%D 1871
%T <A report on the expedition to Western Yunnan via Bham\^o>
%C Calcutta
%I Supt. of Govt. Printing
%Z 458p., 5 plates, map
%O Vocabulary: TB: Achang, Lishaw [Lisu], Kachin; TK: Shan; AA: Palaung, 401-9

%A Anderson,, John
%D 1876
%T <Mandalay to Momien: a narrative of the two expeditions to Western China of 1868 and 1875 under Colonel Edward B. Sladen and Colonel Horace Browne>
%C London
%I Macmillan
%Z 479p., plates, maps
%O Vocabulary: TB: Achang, Lishaw [Lisu], Kachin; TK: Shan; AA: Palaung

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%D 1956
%T {\viet V\^an \-d\^e bihn th\;u\;ong hoa cach phat \^am ti\^eng Vi\^et}
%t The problem of standardization of pronunciation in Vietnamese
%J <T\^ap san Nghi\^en c\`uu V\uan S\`u \-Dia>
%V 18
%P 29-37

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%D 1958
%T {\rus K voprosu o proiskhozhdenii v'etnamskogo iazyka}
%t Toward the question of the origin of Vietnamese
%J <Sovetskoe Vostokovedenie>
%V 2
%P 101-11

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%D 1958
%T {\rus Struktura v'etnamskogo sloga}
%t The structure of the Vietnamese syllable
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 256
%P 152-7

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%D 1961
%X see Elovkov and Andreev

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%D 1961
%X see Osipov and Andreev

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%D 1963
%T Review of Cornyn and Musgrave, <Burmese glossary>
%J <Lexicographical collection>
%V 6
%P 189-90

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%A Batova,, D. A.
%A Panfilov,, V. S.
%A Petrov,, V. M.
%D 1958
%T {\rus Elementy nezavistimogo analiza vo v'etnamsko--russkom algoritme mashinogo perevoda}
%t Elements of independent analysis in Vietnamese--Russian algorithm of machine translation
%J <Materials for machine translation>
%V I
%P 199-208

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%A Bratus',, B. V.
%A Gordina,, M. V.
%D 1956
%T {\rus <V'etnamskaia transkiprsiia russkikh slov>}
%t Vietnamese transcription of Russian words
%C Leningrad

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%A Gordina,, M. V.
%D 1957
%T {\rus Sistema tonov v'etnamskogo iazyka (po eksperimental'nym dannym)}
%t The system of tones in the Vietnamese language (on experimental data)
%J <Vestnik Leningradskogo gosudarstvennogo Universiteta>
%V 8
%P 132-48

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%A Gordina,, M. V.
%D 1963
%T {\rus Tonal'naia sistema i udarenie v birmanskom i v'etnamskom iazykakh}
%t The tonal system and accent in Burmese and Vietnamese
%E Pinus,, E. M.
%E Ivanov,, S. N.
%B {\rus <Filologiia stran vostoka>}
%b Oriental philology
%C Leningrad
%I Izd. Leningrad U.
%P 59-64

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%A Gordina,, M. V.
%A Timofeeva,, O. A.
%D 1961
%T {\rus Sistema tonov birmanskogo iazyka (po eksperimental'nym dannym)}
%t The system of tones in Burmese (on experimental data)
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 294
%P 71-83

%A Andreev,, N. D.
%A Timofeeva,, O. A.
%D 1958
%T {\rus Struktura birmanskogo slog}
%t The structure of the Burmese syllable
%J <Vestnik Leningradskogo gosudarstvennogo Universiteta>
%V 20
%N 4

%A Andrianoff,, David I.
%D 1974
%T <The Meo of Southeast Asia: a bibliography>
%M unpublished ms.

%E Andronov,, M.
%E Morgenroth,, W.
%E Richter,, E.
%D 1981
%T {\germ <S\"udasiatische sprachwissenschaftliche Studien>}
%t Southeast Asian linguistic studies
%S {\germ <Linguistische Studien, Berlin>}
%u Reihe A, Arbeitsberichte 82
%C Berlin
%I Akademie der Wissenschaften der DDR
%O S

%E Angdu,, Soman
%D 1973
%T <Tibeto-Sanskrit lexicographical materials: the {\tib Sgra sbyor bam po g\~nis pa}, the {\tib Dag yig Za ma tog}, and the {\tib Dag yig Li \'si'i gur kha\:n}>
%S <Tibeto--Sanskrit--Hindi grammars and dictionaries>
%u I
%C Leh (Ladakh)
%I Basgo Tongspon Publications
%Z 4, 161, 66, 43, 148p.
%R Reviewed by J. W. deJong, <Indo-Iranian Journal> 19(1977):120-1

%A Angkap Palakornkul
%D 1972
%T <A sociolinguistic study of pronominal strategy in spoken Bangkok Thai>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Texas at Austin
%Z 144p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 33,9:5155A; University Microfilms 73-7613

%A Angkap Palakornkul
%D 1975
%T A sociolinguistic study of pronominal usage in spoken Bangkok Thai
%E Rubin,, Joan
%B <Sociolinguistics in Southeast Asia>
%S <International Journal of the Sociology of Language>
%u 5
%S <Linguistics>
%u 165
%P 11-42

%A Angkap Palakornkul
%D 1976
%T Some observations on variation and change in the use of classifiers in Thai
%E Prapart Brudhiprabha
%E Achara Wangsotorn
%E Palmer,, Joe D.
%B <A Festschrift for Richard B. Noss>
%S <Pasaa>
%u 6.1-2
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 186-99
%% format: book AND journal

%A Angkuravaranont,, Supa
%X see Supa Angkuravaranont

%A Angrup,, K.
%X see Varman and Angrup

%A Angwathanakun,, Sumitra
%X see Sumitra Angwathanakun

%A Anh-\-Dao
%A Huy-V\^an
%A Thanh-Nguy\^En
%A Tr\^an-Tr\^ong
%D 1957
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en Nga--Vi\^et th\;uc-dung>}
%t Practical Russian--Vietnamese dictionary
%C Hanoi
%I Bo Giao Duc
%Z 477p.
%R Reviewed by Mkhitarian, <Sovetskoe Vostokovendenie>
%V 1958
%N 5
%P 197

%A Anivan,, S.
%X see S. Anivan

%A Ankong,, Sanguan
%X see Sanguan Ankong

%A Annamalai,, E.
%A Pai,, Pushpa
%D 1973
%T The problem of free variation in structural phonology
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 34
%P 112-19
%O Variation between affricates and sibilants in Tippera

%A Anonymous
%D 1766
%T {\ch <Ch'in ting hsi y\"u t'ung wen chi>}
%t ?
%C n.l.
%Z 8 vols.
%+ Reprinted 1961 as <Kentsi saiiki dobunshi> (<Toyo Bunko Sokan> 16), Tokyo, 790p.
%O Geographical dictionary in Chinese, Manchu, Mongol, Tibetan, Kalmuk, and Jaghati; contains some 3000 geographical names from Central and Western Asia - BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D 1849
%T {\pali <Sandhi Nissaya>}
%t ??
%M palm-leaf ms.
%C n.l.
%Z 63p.
%O Grammatical treatise in Pali and Burmese - BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D 1852
%T {\rus <Slovar' siamskogo iazyka>}
%t Dictionary of the Siamese language
%I <I. Russk. Geograf. Obshch.> {\? full text?}
%C n.l.
%Z 5146p.

%A Anonymous
%D 1882
%T {\fr Dictionnaires annamites}
%t Annamite dictionaries
%J <Annals de l'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 4
%N 47
%P 367
%O Announcement of publication of M. Challamel, <Dictionnaire annamite>, and mention of the two-volume <Dictionarium Annamitico-Latinum>, vol. 1 by Ravier and vol. 2 by Theurel

%A Anonymous
%D 1894
%T {\fr Les Mo\"is de Ta-my (r\'egion de la Cannelle)}
%t ?
%J <Revue Indochinoise>, 1er s\'erie
%V 4
%P 82-113
%O 1450-word vocabulary of Sedang, with Vietnamese and French equivalents, 107-13 - SJS

%A Anonymous
%D 1914
%T {\fr La num\'eration chez les Khm\^ers ou Cambodgiens}
%t Counting among the Khmers or Cambodians
%J <L'Ethnographie> n.s.
%V 2
%P 69-79

%A Anonymous
%D 1915
%T Some Semang vocabularies obtained in Pahang and Perak
%J <Journal of the Federated Malay States Museum>
%V 6
%P 115-25

%A Anonymous
%D 1927-28
%T <Lai sinna lai bu - Chin reader, Kamhau dialect>
%C n.l.
%O For use in the Tiddim subdivision - BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D 1935
%T Further documents on the romanization of Siamese
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 28
%P 19-35
%O Thai and English texts - SJS

%A Anonymous
%D 1937
%T <Chei-zah ca-uk - First (Second, Fourth) reader in the Chinbok dialect of Chin>
%C n.l.

%A Anonymous
%D 1938
%T {\fr Arr\^et\'e relatif \`a la transcription alphab\'etique de la langue chame}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 38
%P 507-10

%A Anonymous
%D 1940
%T Romanization of Siamese. Two official systems
%J <Thai Government Gazette>
%V 20 (March 1940)

%A Anonymous
%D 1950
%T {\fr <Lexique franco--khm\'ere>}
%t French--Khmer lexicon
%C Phnom Penh

%A Anonymous
%D 1970
%T {\lahu <Ca law ca yi hen ve>}
%t Ca Law the Wise Man
%Z 2 vols.
%C Rangoon
%+ 2nd ed., Bangkok
%O Lahu reader

%A Anonymous
%D 1970
%T {\lahu <Lahu li-aw hkui pui hen tu ve>}
%t Lahu primer
%C Rangoon
%+ 2nd ed., Bangkok

%E Anonymous
%D 1971
%B {\fr <Etudes tib\'etaines d\'edi\'ees \`a la m\'emoire de Marcelle Lalou>}
%b Tibetan studies dedicated to the memory of Marcelle Lalou
%C Paris
%I Adrien Maisonneuve
%Z 573p.
%O S
%R Reviewed by P. Kvaerne, <Journal Asiatique> 259(1971):391-4

%A Anonymous
%D 1977
%T {\fr <Lexique fran\,cais--khmer expliqu\'e>}
%t French--Khmer lexicon elucidated
%C Sereika??
%Z 1016p.

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\tib <Bod-kyi brdai bye-brag gsal-bar byed-pa \:nag-gisgron-me>}
%C n.l.
%O Tibetan--Mongol dictionary - BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\tib <Bod-yul-gyi skad gsar rnyi\:n-gi rnam-par dbye-ba rta-bdun sna\:n-ba>}
%C n.l.
%O Tibetan dictionary of synonyms

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\tr <Dag-byed gsal-bai me-loh>}
%t Mirror of correct spelling
%C n.l.
%O BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T <Duyin hacin-i hergen qamciha buleku bithe>
%C n.l.
%O Manchu, Mongol, Tibetan, Chinese dictionary arranged by subject - BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\tib? <Kun p'an sna ts'oga sman sbyor \'zes bya-ba>}
%t ?
%C n.l.
%O Text in Mongol; 66 leaves, of which 10 have names of 179 drugs in Tibetan, Mongol, and Chinese - BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\tib <Mi\:n-brd\'zod-kyi sgo dbye-bai mdzod-kyi lde-mig t\'ses-bya>}
%t ?
%C n.l.
%O Tibetan dictionary - BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\tib <Mi\:n-gi m\:nom-brd\'zod pad-ma dkar-po \~ap're\:n-ba>}
%t ?
%C n.l.
%O Dictionary of Tibetan synonyms

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\?? <sKad b\'zi \'san-sbyar-bai me-lo\:n-gi yi-ge>}
%t ?
%C n.l.
%O Manchu, Mongol, Tibetan, Chinese dictionary - BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\tib <sMan mi\:n bod da\:n rgyai skad \'san sbyar-ba>}
%t ?
%C n.l.
%O Published near Temple Su\:n t\'su se; edition in Chinese style, 10ff., in Tibetan style, 14ff.; names of drugs in Tibetan and Chinese - BSTL

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\tib <Sum-t\'s'u-pai snyi\:n-po b\'zugs-so>}
%t ?
%C n.l.
%O Contains the principal parts of Tibetan grammar

%A Anonymous
%D n.d.
%T {\chin <Tsa siarn\'ak tsa uk>}; {\eng <Chin reader in the Laizo dialect, no. 4, for use in Haka and Falam subdivisions>}
%C n.l.
%O Laizo = Haka - BSTL

%A Anthony,, Edward M.
%D 1956
%T <A teacher's handbook of Thai students' English pronunciation difficulties>
%C Bangkok
%Z 34p.

%A Anthony,, Edward M.
%D 1958
%T Reading tone in Thai syllables
%J <Language Learning>
%V 8
%N 3-4
%P 21-6

%A Anthony,, Edward M.
%D 1962
%T <A programmed course in reading Thai syllables>
%C Ann Arbor
%I University of Michigan
%Z 132p.
%+ Reprinted 1979, <University of Hawaii Southeast Asia Papers> 12, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Center for Asian and Pacific Studies

%A Anthony,, Edward M.
%D 1964
%T Verboid constructions in Thai
%E Marckwardt,, Albert
%B <Studies in language and linguistics in honor of Charles C. Fries>
%C Ann Arbor
%I University of Michigan
%P 69-79

%A Anthony,, Edward M.
%A Gandour,, Jackson T., Jr.
%A Warotamasikkhadit,, Udom
%D 1968
%T <Foundations of Thai>, book II, parts 1 and 2
%C Ann Arbor
%I University of Michigan
%Z mimeo., 545p.
%+ Also published 1970, Washington DC: U.S. Office of Education, Department of Health, Education, and Welfare
%R Reviewed by Dellinger, <Linguistics> 76(1971):123-7
%R Reviewed by Gething, <Journal of Asian Studies> 19(1969).1:205-6
%R Reviewed by Noss, <Journal of the Siam Society> 58(1970).1:148-54

%A Antisdel,, C. B.
%D 1911
%T Elementary studies in Lahoo, Akha (Kaw), and Wa languages
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 1
%N 1
%P 41-64

%A Antisdel,, C. B.
%D 1911
%T Lahoo narrative of creation
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 1
%N 1
%P 65-9

%A Audretch,, C. C.
%A Chaffee,, C. C
%D 1969
%T <The Lahu tribes of Thailand and Burma: specific information, bibliographic references, and sources>
%C Bangkok
%I Battelle Memorial Institute, Thailand Information Center
%Z 16p.

%A Antomarchi,, Dominique
%D 1940
%X see Sabatier and Antomarchi

%A Antomarchi,, Dominique
%D 1946
%T {\jorai <T\;ol\;oi Br\^ao hr\uam l\uang hr\ua>}
%t Premier livre de lecture J\;orai
%? B\;oph\`un ng\ua
%Z 77p.

%A Antomarchi,, Dominique
%D 1946
%T {\rhade <Klei mr\^ao hri\uam dl\uang hr\ua>}
%t {\fr Premier livre de lecture rhad\'ee}
%t ?
%? Dua tal ng\ua th\`im
%Z 76p.

%A Antomarchi,, Dominique
%D n.d.
%T {\fr <Lexique franco--rhade>}
%t French--Rhade lexicon
%C n.l.

%A Anuchit,, Phraya
%D 1968
%T {\thai <R\=ach\=sap le kham 'athib\=ai>}
%t Royal vocabulary and commentary
%C Bangkok
%I Kasem Bannakich

%A Anuman Rajadhon,, Phraya
%D 1936
%T {\thai <R\=\,uang Thai--Ch\=in>}
%t ?
%C Bangkok
%I Rongphim Thai Khasem
%Z 134p., map
%O A study of the similarity between Thai and Chinese

%A Anuman Rajadhon,, Phraya
%D 1946
%T The phonetic value of the consonant <\~n>
%J <Bulletin of the Royal Institute Siam>
%V 3
%P 1-15

%A Anuman Rajadhon,, Phraya
%D 1952
%T {\thai <R\=\,uang kham phl\=aeng nai ph\=as\=a Thai>}
%t Concerning affixation in Thai
%C Bangkok
%I Royal Institute
%Z 45p.

%A Anuman Rajadhon,, Phraya
%D 1954
%T <The Thai language>
%C Bangkok
%I National Culture Institute
%Z 32p.

%A Anuman Rajadhon,, Phraya
%D 1956, 1971
%T {\thai <Niruktis\=at>, Ph\=ak 1\2}
%t Philology, Books 1-2
%C Bangkok
%I Rungruangtham Printers
%+ Reprinted 1971, Bangkok, Royal Institute
%O A general linguistics textbook used by Phraya Anuman at Chulalangkorn University; emphasis of the languages of Asia and their relationship to Thai

%A Anuman Rajadhon,, Phraya
%D 1961
%T <The nature and development of the Thai language>
%C Bangkok
%I Fine Arts Department

%A Anuntrawan,, Chakrit
%X see Chakrit Anuntrawan

%A Anusan,, Paiboon
%X see Paiboon Anusan

%A Aoki Bunky\=o
%X see G\=o, Aoki, Yamamoto, and Kitamura

%A Aoki Haruo
%D 1961
%T Review of Nishida, <Equivalence of tonemes in Tibetan and Burmese>
%J <International Journal of American Linguistics>
%V 27
%P 358

%A Apenchenko,, V. S.
%X see Bruk and Apenchenko

%A Aphinan Chuathai
%D in progress 1983
%T {\thai <'Anupray\=ok b\=\,ok khwa\=am m\=ai th\=i y\=u ton pray\=ok nai ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Assertive clause preposing in Thai
%U M.A. thesis, Department of Linguistics, Chulalangkorn University

%A Apiradee Udomanisawat
%D 1982
%T {\thai <Khw\=am samphan raw\=ang r\=up b\=aep kh\=\,ong s\=iang sra lae khw\=am m\=ai kh\=\,ong kham sam s\=\,ong phay\=ang nai ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Relations of vowel patternings and meanings of disyllabic reduplicatives in Thai
%U M.A. thesis, Department of Linguistics, Chulalangkorn University

%A Aporn Surintramont
%D 1967
%T {\thai R\=\,uang kh\=\,ong kham th\=i thai y\=\,um m\=a c\=ak th\=et}
%t Foreign loanwords in Thai
%J <Chantarakasem>
%V 77
%P 33-45

%A Aporn Surintramont
%D 1973
%T Some aspects of underlying syllable structure in Thai: evidence from `khamphuan', a Thai word game
%J <Studies in the Linguistic Sciences>
%V 3
%N 1
%P 121-42

%A Aporn Surintramont
%D 1975
%T Missing anaphora: pronominalization in Thai
%M unpublished paper, University of Illinois

%A Aporn Surintramont
%D 1977
%T The functional properties of the reflexive pronoun in Thai
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 10 (Georgetown University, Washington, DC)

%A Aporn Surintramont
%D 1979
%T <Some deletion phenomena in Thai>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Illinois
%Z 167p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 40.1:228-29A; University Microfilms 79-15-434

%A Appenzeller,, Heinz
%D 1949
%T {\germ <Einblicke in die Welt der Sprache: Grundriss der Thai-Sprache>}
%t Glimpses into the world of language: Fundamentals of the Thai language
%C Zurich
%I Energetica-Verlag
%Z 48p.

%A Appleton,, George
%D 1944
%T <Student's English--Burmese dictionary>
%C Rangoon
%I C.L.S. Press
%Z 145p.

%A Appleton,, George
%D 1945
%T <Three months hard labor. A handbook for learning colloquial Burmese>
%e 2nd ed.
%C Calcutta

%A Araphim Bunapha
%D 1969
%T {\thai <N\=uai s\=iang ph\=as\=a Ray\=\,ong>}
%t The phonemes of Rayong (Thai)
%U M.A. thesis, Chulalangkorn University

%A Arlotto,, Anthony
%D 1972
%T <Introduction to historical linguistics>
%C Boston
%I Houghton-Mifflin
%Z 274p.
%O Classification of ST, 50-4 - RTBL

%A Arms,, David
%X see Becker and Arms

%A Armstrong,, Lilias E.
%A Pe Maung Tin
%D 1925
%T <A Burmese phonetic reader, with English translations>
%C London
%O Reprinted 1960, Rangoon, University of Rangoon
%Z 65p.
%R Reviewed by H. O. Reynolds, <Journal of the Burma Research Society> 17(1927):119-25

%A Arokianathan,, S.
%D 1976
%T Temporal relations in Tangkhul Naga
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 37
%N 3-4
%P 182-6

%A Arokianathan,, S.
%D 1977
%T Sincerity of conditions of questions on Tangkhul Naga
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 38
%N 3
%P 151-5

%A Aromsook,, Tasanai
%X see Tasanai Aromsook

%A Art-Ong Jumsai
%X see Manich Jumsai, Sumet Jumsai, and Art-Ong Jumsai

%A Arutionov,, S. A.
%D 1961
%T {\rus O iazykakh `ksa'na severe v'etnama}
%t Concerning the `ksa' languages of northern Vietnam
%J <Short reports AN SSR Inst. Ethnog.> {\? full title?}
%V 37
%P 76-80
%O Ksa = Kha, i.e. montagnards of various families

%A Arutionov,, S. A.
%D 1964
%T {\rus Ob \`etno-linvisticheskom podkhode k izucheniiu iazykov Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii}
%t Concerning the ethnolinguistic approach to the study of Southeast Asian languages
%M <Conference on languages of Southeast Asia, abstracts>

%A <Asahi Shimbun>
%D 1942
%T {\jap ??}
%t Introduction to Vietnamese
%C Tokyo

%A Ashmun,, Lawrence F.
%D 1983
%T <Resettlement of Indochinese refugees in the United States: a selective and annotated bibliography>
%S <Center for Southeast Asian studies, Monograph series on Southeast Asia, Occ. Paper>
%u 10
%C DeKalb, IL
%I Northern Illinois University
%O Exclusive distribution by the Cellar Bookshop, 18090 Wyoming, Detroit, MI 48221
%O Some bibliography on teaching English as a second language to Indochinese refugees

%A Association for Asian Studies
%D 1947-80
%T <Bibliography of Asian Studies>
%C Ann Arbor, MI
%I Association for Asian Studies
%O Annual classified bibliography of Asian studies; 1947-55: <Bibliography of the Far Eastern Quarterly>

%A Asyik,, Abdul Gani
%D 1982
%T The agreement system in Achenese
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, XI
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%P 1-34
%O Relating to the theory of an Austroasiatic substratum in Achinese

%A Ata,, Kento
%X see Kumar,, B., and Ata

%A Atcharyasucha,, Wichet
%X see Wichet Atcharyasucha

%A Atthayothin,, Pricha
%X see Pricha Atthayothin

%A Au Chhieng
%D 1962
%T {\fr Etudes de philologie indo-khm\`ere, I et II}
%t Studies in Indo-Khmer philology, I and II
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 250
%N 4
%P 575-91

%A Au Chhieng
%D 1966
%T {\fr Etudes de philologie indo-khm\`ere, III et IV}
%t Studies in Indo-Khmer philology, III and IV
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 254
%N 1
%P 143-65

%A Au Chhieng
%D 1968
%T {\fr <B\=a\.n> et <r\.n\.noc>, deux th\`emes de r\'eflection methodologique pour l'\'etude du vieux khmer>}
%t <B\=a\.n> et <r\.n\.noc>, two themes of methodological reflection for the study of Old Khmer
%B {\fr <40e anniversaire de la fondation de l'Institut de Civilisation indienne de l'Universit\'e de Paris, 1967. M\'elanges d'indienisme \`a la m\'emoire de Louis Renou>}
%b ??
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Institut de Civilisation indienne>}
%u 8. s\'erie, 28
%C Paris
%I de Boccard
%P 43-51

%A Au Chhieng
%D 1969
%T {\fr Etudes de philologie indo-khm\`ere, V}
%t Studies in Indo-Khmer philology, V
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 256
%N 2
%P 185-201

%A Au Chhieng
%D 1971
%T {\fr Etudes de philologie indo-khm\`ere, VI}
%t Studies in Indo-Khmer philology, VI
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 259
%N 3-4
%P 297-308

%A Au Chhieng
%D 1974
%T {\fr Etudes de philologie indo-khm\`ere, VII}
%t Studies in Indo-Khmer philology, VII
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 262
%P 131-41

%A Aubaret,, G.
%D 1867
%T {\fr <Grammaire annamite suivie d'un vocabulaire fran\,cais--annamite et annamite--fran\,cais>}
%t Annamite grammar followed by a French--Annamite and Annamite--French vocabulary
%C Paris
%I Imprim\'erie Imp\'eriale
%Z 598p.

%A Aubin,, Fran\,coise
%D 1972
%T {\fr Travaux et tendances de la sinologie sovi\'etique recente}
%t Works and trends in recent Soviet sinology
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 58
%P 161-171

%A Aung Hmat,, U
%X see Ali,, Ahmed

%A Aung Shwe Zan
%D 1970
%T <Student's Burmese--English dictionary>
%C Rangoon
%I Guide Literature House
%Z 228p.

%A Aurousseau,, M.
%D 1922
%T Review of Souvignet, {\fr <Les origines de la langue annamite>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 22
%P 168-72

%A Aurousseau,, M.
%D 1941
%T Official romanization of Thai (Siamese)
%J <Geographical Journal>
%V 98
%P 154-5

%A Austen,, H. H. Godwin
%D 1866
%T A vocabulary of English, Balti and Kashmiri
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 35
%P 233-67

%A Austerlitz,, Robert
%D 1971
%T The Sino-Tibetan hypothesis in the light of Eurasia as a linguistic area
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 4 (Indiana University, Bloomington)

%A Avery,, John
%D 1885
%T On the Garo language
%J <Proceedings of the American Oriental Society>
%V 11
%P xxv-xxviii

%A Avery,, John
%D 1885
%T On the Khasi language
%J <Proceedings of the American Oriental Society>
%V 11
%P clxxiii-clxxv

%A Avery,, John
%D 1886
%T Ao Naga language of southern Assam
%J <American Journal of Philology>
%V 8
%P 27

%A Avery,, John
%D 1887
%T On the relationship of the Kachari and Garo languages of Assam
%J <Proceedings of the American Oriental Society>
%V 13
%P clvii-clxi

%A Aviong
%D 1969
%X see Cobbey,, V., Aviong, and Aw\;oi-hathe

%A Aviong
%D 1970
%T <R\;oglai-R\;oglai dictionary>
%C Bangoi, Vietnam
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics

%A Aviong
%D 1977
%T {\roglai <T\;u-\-di\^en ti\^eng R\;oglai>}
%t R\;oglai dictionary
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 35p., 1mf.

%A Aviong
%D 1977
%X see Aw\;oi-hathe, Aviong, A-T\'y, A-Ly, Cobbey, and Cobbey

%A Awbathabiwuntha,, Ashin
%D 1947
%T {\burm <Myamna abhidan I>}
%t Burmese dictionary
%O With translations in Burmese and Pali
%C Rangoon

%A Aw\;oi-hathe
%D 1969
%X see Cobbey,, V., Aviong, and Aw\;oi-hathe

%A Aw\;oi-hathe
%A Aviong
%A A-T\'y
%A A-Ly
%A Cobbey,, Maxwell
%A Cobbey,, Vurnell
%D 1977
%T {\roglai <Suraq vung\~a san\~ap Radlai>}: {\viet <Ng\;u-v\;ung R\;oglai>}: {\eng <Northern R\;oglai vocabulary>}
%t R\;oglai--Vietnamese--English vocabulary
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 163p.

%A Aye,, K. K.
%D 1964
%T <Repetitive forms in Burmese>
%U M.A. thesis, University of London

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1874
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire fran\,cais-cambodgien, pr\'ec\'ede d'une notice sur le Cambodge et d'un aper\,cu de l'\'ecriture et de la langue cambodgienne>}
%t French-Cambodian dictionary, preceded by a note on Cambodia and a sketch?? of the Cambodian script and language
%C Saigon
%I Imprimerie Nationale
%Z 58, 184p.

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1874
%T {\fr <Vocabulaire cambodgien--fran\,cais>}
%t Cambodian--French vocabulary
%C Saigon
%I Coll\`ege des stagiaires
%Z 4, 158p.

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1875
%T {\fr <Cours de cambodgien>}
%t A course in Cambodian
%C Saigon
%I Coll\`ege des stagiaires
%Z 216p.

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1877
%T {\fr <Cours \'el\'ementaire de cambodgien>}
%t An elementary course in Cambodian
%C Saigon
%I Coll\`ege des Administrateurs stagiaires
%Z 223p.

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1878
%T {\fr <Textes khmers. Publi\'ee avec une traduction sommaire>}
%t Khmer texts. Published with a summary translation
%C Saigon
%Z 84, 299p.

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1878
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire khmer--fran\,cais>}
%t Khmer--French dictionary
%C Saigon
%I Autographi\'e par S\;on Di\^ep
%Z 436p.

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1881-83
%T {\fr Recherches et m\'elanges dur les Chams et les Khmers}
%t ?
%J <Excursions and Reconnaissances>
%V 4(1881-82)/5(1882-83)
%P 319-50/167-86
%O An account of Cham, Bani (religious dialect), and Dalil (archaic sacred dialect), with Khmer comparisons - SJS

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1885
%T {\fr Notes sur l'Annam, Premi\`ere parties: Le Binh Thuan}
%t Note on Annam, first part: Binh Thuan
%J <Excursions et Reconnaissances>
%V 10
%P 199-340
%O Vocabulary: MA: Cham, Churu; AA: Kaho [Koho], 515-16; reprinted Saigon: Imprimerie Coloniale, 1885: 121-2

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1889
%T {\fr <Grammaire de la langue chame>}
%t Grammar of the Cham language
%C Saigon
%I Imprimerie Coloniale
%+ Also published 1889, <Excursions et Reconnaissances> 14:5-92

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%D 1892-94
%T {\fr <R> et <L>, voyelles en khmer}
%t <R> et <L>, vowels in Khmer
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 8
%P cxlvii-xlix

%A Aymonier,, Etienne Fran\,cois
%A Cabaton,, Antoine
%D 1906
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire \vcam--fran\,cais>}
%t Cham--French dictionary
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%u 7
%C Paris
%I Leroux
%Z 587p.
%R Reviewed by Blagdon, <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> (1907):1086-96
%R Reviewed by Durand, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 6(1906):347-8
%R Reviewed by Ferrand, <Journal Asiatique> 10(1907):381-8
%R Reviewed by Finot, <T'oung Pao>, 2e s\'erie, 8(1907):137-8
%R Reviewed by Schmidt, <Anthropos> 2(1907):330-2

%A Ayoub,, M.
%D 1959
%T Review of Bernot and Bernot, {\fr <Les Khyang des collines de Chittagong>}
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 61
%P 1127-8

%A Aze,, F. Richard
%D 1971
%T <Parengi (Gorum) phonemic summary>
%C Kathmandu
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z mimeo.

%A Aze,, F. Richard
%D 1973
%T Clause patterns in Parengi-Gorum
%E Trail,, Ronald L.
%B <Patterns in clause, sentence, and discourse in selected languages of India and Nepal>
%C Kathmandu
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%O Part 1: 235-312; Part 4: 1700-word vocabulary, 12-208

%A Aze,, F. Richard
%A Aze,, Trish
%D 1973
%T Parengi texts
%E Trail,, Ronald L.
%B <Patterns in clause, sentence, and discourse in selected languages of India and Nepal>
%C Kathmandu
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%O Part 3 (Texts): 213-362

%A Az\'emar,, H.
%D 1886
%T {\fr Dictionnaire Stieng. Receuil de 2,500 mots faits \`a Br\;ol\^am en 1865}
%t ?
%J <Excursions et Reconnaissances>
%V 12
%P 99-146, 251-344


%% B (Huffman 13-55), input by Caroline Steele (B-Banker), Alfred Maglalang (Banker-Bernard), \vSarka \vStivarova (Bernard-Bickner), Seiichiro Keach Inaba (Bickner-Boller), I-Ru Su (Bolsokhoeva-Bradley), David Stampe (Bradley-Bystrov), edited by David Stampe, December 1994

%A B.,, S.
%D 1933
%T <The up-to-date dictionary for students, English--Siamese>
%C Bangkok

%A Ba Han,, Maung
%D 1951, 1966
%T <The University English--Burmese dictionary>, vol. I:A-N (1951); vol. II:O-Z (1952)
%C Rangoon
%I Hanthawaddy Press
%Z 2292p.
%+ Reprinted 1966

%A Ba Sein,, Kenneth
%D 1952
%T <Everyday Burmese idioms and axioms, with explanations in Burmese and English equivalents>
%e 2nd ed.
%C Rangoon
%Z 54p.

%A Ba Shin
%D 1962
%T <Lokahteikpan: Early Burmese culture in a Pagan temple>
%C Rangoon
%O Chapter 3: Writing and language

%E Ba Shin
%E Boisselier,, Jean
%E Griswold,, A. B.
%D 1966
%T <Essays offered to G. H. Luce>
%S <Artibus Asiae, Supplementum>
%u XXIII
%Z 2 vols.
%C Leiden
%I E. J. Brill
%O S

%A Baber,, E. Colburne
%D 1886
%T Travels and researches in the interior of China, I: A Journey of exploration in western Ssu-ch'uan
%J <Royal Geographical Society, Supplemental Papers>
%V I
%P 1-152
%O Numerals in Lolo near Wa-shan and near Ma-pien, 72; Lolo of left bank of T'ung River, 73-8 - BSTL

%A Baccam Don
%A Brase,, James L.
%D 1977
%T <English--Thai Dam language lessons>
%S <Linguistic Series, Ethnic Minorities of Southeast Asia>
%u 26
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 78p.
%O In Black Tai, Lao, and romanized-Vietnamese scripts with English translations

%A Baccam Don
%A Brase,, James L.
%D 1977
%T {\fr <Le\,cons de fran\,cais--tai dam>}
%t French--Thai Dam lessons
%S {\fr <S\'erie linguistique, Ethnies minoritaires de l'Asie du Sud-Est>}
%u 26
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 78p.
%O French version of the preceding item
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 74(1979).2:502-3

%A Bachman,, Lyle F.
%X see Harris,, Jimmy G., and Lyle F. Bachman

%A Bacot,, Jacques
%D 1912
%T {\fr <L'\'ecriture cursive tib\'etaine>}
%t The Tibetan cursive script
%C Paris

%A Bacot,, Jacques
%D 1913
%T {\fr <Les Mo-so. Ethnographie des Mo-so, leurs religions, leur langue et leur \'ecriture>}
%t The Mo-so. Ethnography of the Mo-so, their religions, their language, and their script
%C Leiden
%I E.J. Brill

%A Bacot,, Jacques
%D 1928
%T {\fr <Une grammaire tib\'etaine du tib\'etain classique: les \'slokas grammaticaux de Thonmi Sambhota, avec leurs commentaires>}
%t A Tibetan grammar of Classical Tibetan: the grammatical rules of Thonmi Sambhota, with their commentaries
%S {\fr <Annales du Mus\'ee Guimet, Biblioth\'eque d'Etudes>}
%u 37
%C Paris

%A Bacot,, Jacques
%D 1930
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire tib\'etain-sanscrit par Tsi-ring-ouang-gyal. Che ri\:n dba\:n rgyal>}
%t ?
%S <Buddhica>
%u 2nd series, vol. 2
%C Paris
%R Reviewed by G. de Roerich, <J. of Urusvati> 3(1933):219
%R Reviewed by Poucha, <Archiv Orient\'al\'ni> 20(1951):330-2
%R Reviewed by Preston, <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 68(1948):74-5
%R Reviewed by Rahder, <Language> 24(1948):316-19
%R Reviewed by Thomas,, F. W., <Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies> 12(1947-48):450-3

%A Bacot,, Jacques
%D 1953
%T {\fr La structure du tib\'etain}
%t The structure of Tibetan
%J <Conf. Institut de Linguistique, Universit\'e de Paris>
%V 11
%P 115-35

%A Bacot,, Jacques
%D 1956
%T Review of Peter, <The aristocracy of Central Tibet>
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 244
%P 233-4

%A Bacot,, Jacques
%A Thomas,, F. W.
%A Toussaint,, Ch.
%D 1946
%T {\fr <Documents de Touen-houang relatifs \`a l'histoire du Tibet>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Annales du Mus\'ee Guimet, Biblioth\'eque d'Etudes>}
%u 51
%C Paris
%Z 206p.
%O Contains index of archaic words - BSTL

%A Badaraev,, Bal-Dorghi
%D 1967
%T {\rus <Ob osnovakh transkriptsii i transliteratsii dlia tibetskogo iazyka>}
%t The fundamentals of the transcription and transliteration of Tibetan
%C Ulan-Ude
%I Buriatskoi Knizhnoi Izd-Vo
%Z 192p.

%A Bahadur,, K. P.
%D 1977
%T <Caste, tribes, and cultures of India: Assam>
%S <Caste, tribes, and cultures of India>
%u 1
%C Delhi
%I Ess Ess Publications
%Z 117p.
%O Ethnographic information on the Garos, Kachari, Khasi, Mikir, Meithei, Naga, and Santhals

%A Bahadur,, K. P.
%D 1977
%T <Caste, tribes, and cultures of India: Bengal>
%S <Caste, tribes, and cultures of India>
%u 3
%C Delhi
%I Ess Ess Publications
%Z 143p.
%O Ethnographic information on the Bhuija, Juang, Bauri, Bagdi, Ho, Bhumij, Munda, Kandh, Kharia, Kochh, Mahili, Oraon, and Birhor

%A Bahl,, Kali Charan
%D in progress 1966
%T <A grammar and glossary of Korwa>
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 32(1966).1:80

%A Bahl,, Veena
%D 1980
%T Studies in Kharia linguistics
%E Sharma,, P. Dash
%B <The passing scene in Chotanagpur: Sarat Roy commemorative volume>
%C Ranchi
%I Maitryee
%P 123-36

%A Bailey,, D. R. Shakelton
%D 1953
%T Review of Weller, {\germ <Tibetisch--sanskritischer Index zum Bodhic\=aryavat\=ara, Pt. 1>}
%J <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung>
%V 48
%P 467

%A Bailey,, Thomas Grahame
%D 1854
%T <Ladak, physical, statistical, and historical, with notices of the surrounding countries>
%C London
%O Chapter 15 contains Milchang vocabulary

%A Bailey,, Thomas Grahame
%D 1905
%T <The languages of Chamba State>
%C Calcutta
%O Chamba Lahuli

%A Bailey,, Thomas Grahame
%D 1908
%T <Languages of the northern Himalayas>
%S <Royal Asiatic Society Monographs>
%u 12
%C London
%O TB: Chamba Lahuli grammar, vocab, and texts, chapter 3, 37-51

%A Bailey,, Thomas Grahame
%D 1909
%T A brief grammar of the Kanauri language
%J <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl\"andischen Gesellschaft>
%V 63
%P 661-87, with map
%+ Reprinted in Bailey, <Studies in North Indian languages>, London - BSTL

%A Bailey,, Thomas Grahame
%D 1911
%T <Kanauri vocabulary in two parts: English--Kanauri and Kanauri--English>
%S <Royal Asiatic Society Monographs>
%u 133
%C London
%O Reprint from <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> (1910):695-705; (1911):315-64

%A Bailey,, Thomas Grahame
%D 1920
%T <Linguistic studies from the Himalayas>
%S <Royal Asiatic Society Monographs>
%u 18
%C London
%O Lower Kanauri, 46ff.; Chitkuli dialect, 78ff.; Purik grammar, 1ff. - BSTL

%A Bailey,, Thomas Grahame
%D 1938
%T <Studies in North Indian languages>
%C London
%O Kanauri

%A Balbi,, Adriano
%D 1826
%T {\fr <Atlas ethnographique du globe, ou classification des peuples anciens et modernes d'apr\'es leurs langues>}
%t Ethnographic atlas of the world, or classification of ancient and modern peoples according to their languages
%C Paris
%O Vocabulary of Kentak, Tab. xxxvii, no. 103 - SJS

%A Balbir,, Jagbans Kishore
%D 1963
%T {\fr <L'histoire de Rama en tib\'etain d'apr\'es les manuscrits de Touenhouang>}
%t The story of Rama in Tibetan according to the manuscripts of Tun-huang
%S <Coll. Jean Przyluski>
%u 4
%C Paris
%I Adrien Maisonneuve
%Z 74p.
%O Edition and annotated translation of Ramayana in Tibetan
%% Huffman date 1936, correction checked in UH library
%# UH ASIA PK3655.F7 1963

%A Baldwin,, George B.
%D 1978
%T A visual aid for remembering Thai tone rules
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 66
%N 1
%P 129-32

%A Ball,, C. J.
%D 1892
%T The Accadian affinities of Chinese
%J <Transactions of the 9th Congress of Orientalists>
%V 2
%P 677-728

%A Ball,, C. J.
%D 1913
%T <Chinese and Sumerian>
%C London
%Z xxiii, 151, 14p.
%R Reviewed by Cordier, <T'oung Pao>, series 2, 15(1914):300-1
%R Reviewed by Franke, <Ostasiatische Zeitschrift> 4(1915):136-9
%R Reviewed by R. W., <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, North China Branch> 45(1914):157-9

%A Ball,, C. J. E.
%D 1964
%T Review of Shorto, ed., <Linguistic comparison in South-East Asia and the Pacific>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 27
%N 2
%P 483-4

%A Ballard,, Emilie M.
%D 1961-62
%T <Lessons in spoken Burmese>
%Z 2 vols.
%C Rangoon
%I U Maung University
%O Prepared in conjunction with the Language and Orientation Committee of the Burma Baptist Missionary Fellowship and published under the auspices of the Baptist Board of Publications, Burma Baptist Convention

%A Ballard,, W. L.
%D 1964
%T Ahom graphemics
%M ms.

%A Ballard,, W. L.
%D 1978
%T In re classical Tibetan orthography
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 11 (University of Arizona, Tucson)

%A Ballard,, W. L.
%D 1979
%T Chinese: a bastard at the Sino-Tibetan family reunion?
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Ballard,, W. L.
%D 1979
%T More on Tibetan orthographic practices
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Ballard,, W. L.
%D 1980
%T A slight offering on tone diffusion to stimulate debate
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 13 (University of Virginia, Charlottesville)
%O Mentions TK, VM, TB, and MY

%A Ballard,, W. L.
%D 1984
%T The linguistic history of South China: Miao-Yao and the southern dialects
%E Thurgood,, Graham
%E Matisoff,, James A.
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: the state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday>
%S <Pacific linguistics>
%u C.87
%C Canberra
%I Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University
%P 58-84

%A Ballard,, W. L.
%D 1984
%T Mother soup: a south Chinese recipe for tonometamorphogenesis
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 22
%P 43-64
%O Discusses mutual influences among ST, TK, AA, AN, and MY languages in South China

%A Bamphen Rawin
%D 1982
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=a t\=ang prath\=et nai ph\=as\=a th\=ai>}
%t Foreign languages in the Thai language
%C Chiengmai
%I Department of Thai, Faculty of Humanities, Chiengmai University
%Z 210p.

%A Bamphen Rawin
%A Vimol Saksailuang
%D 1979
%T {\thai <Sarawitthay\=a ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Thai phonology
%C Chiengmai
%I Department of Thai, Chiengmai University
%e mimeo.

%A Bamrungsuk,, Phimpha
%X see Phimpha Bamrungsuk

%A Ban Thu-th\;u S\^ong M\;oi
%D 1980
%T {\viet Ti\^eu T\;u-\-di\^en Phap--Vi\^et--Phap}
%t {\fr Dictionnaire de poche fran\,cais--vietnamien vietnamien--fran\,cais}
%t French--Vietnamese Vietnamese--French pocket dictionary
%C Paris
%I Institut de l`Asie du Sud-Est
%Z 352, 348p.

%A Banchob Bandhumedha
%D 1946
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=a B\=al\=i lae Sansakrit th\=i k\=iaw kh\=\,ong kap ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t The Pali and Sanskrit languages in their relationship to the Thai language
%U M.A. thesis, Chulalongkorn University
%Z 131p.

%A Banchob Bandhumedha
%D 1952-54
%T <Indo-Siamese glossary>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Banares University

%A Banchob Bandhumedha
%D 1961
%T {\thai <K\=al\=e,\=antai (Pai th\=iao b\=an thai)>}
%t Visiting a Thai village
%C Bangkok
%I Language And Book Society
%Z 363p.
%O Description of author's work among the Ahom of Assam; 23-page Ahom-Thai glossary

%A Banchob Bandhumedha
%D 1964
%T {\thai Laksana ph\=as\=a thai yai}
%t Characteristics of the Shan language
%J <Social Science Review>, Spec. No.
%V ?
%P 146-84

%A Banchob Bandhumedha
%D 1966
%T {\thai Laksana ph\=as\=a thai yai th\=iap kap ph\=as\=a thai krungth\=ep}
%t A comparison of the Shan and Bangkok Thai languages
%C Bangkok
%I <Sanwithay\=a>

%A Banchob Bandhumedha
%D 1971, 1975
%T {\thai <Laksana ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Principles of the Thai language
%C Bangkok
%I Teachers' Publishing House
%+ Also published 1975, Bangkok: Ramkhamhaeng University Press

%A Banchob Bandhumedha
%D 1978
%T {\thai <??>}
%t About Cambodian names
%C Bangkok
%I Rungruengsankanphim

%A Banchob Bandhumedha
%A et al.
%D 1974-80
%T {\thai <Photchan\=anukrom kham\-en--thai>}
%t Khmer--Thai dictionary
%S <Phraya Anuman Rajadhon Fund>
%u vol. 2-3
%? Rung Ruang Sasana

%A Banchob Bandhumedha
%A Boolva Kunjara,, M. L.
%D 1957
%T <The Thai language>
%C Bangkok
%O Reprint

%A Bandhu,, C. M.
%X see Caughley, Dahal, and Bandhu

%A Bandhu,, C. M.
%A Dahal,, B. M.
%A Caughley,, R. C.
%D 1970
%T Chepang segmental phonemes
%J <Tribhuvan University Journal>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 65-81

%A Bandhumedha,, Banchob
%X see Banchob Bandhumedha

%A Bandhumedha,, Navavan
%X see Navavan Bandhumedha

%A Banerjee,, G. C.
%D 1984
%T <Introduction to the Kharia language>
%C Calcutta
%Z 45p.

%A Banerjee,, N. K.
%X see Burman, Bhatnagar, and Banerjee

%A Bangalore
%D n.d.
%T {\zo <Manpga Jesu Gentwthute>}
%t Some parables in Zo
%C Bangalore
%I Scripture Gift, Ministry of India
%Z 28p.

%A Bangkok
%D 1850
%T <Introduction to the Siamese language>
%O English--Siamese vocabulary - BSTL

%A Bangkok
%D 1927
%T <Siamese dictionary>
%C Bangkok
%I Ministry of Education
%Z 906p.
%O Thai

%A Bangkok
%D 1930
%T {\thai <Prath\=anukrom>}
%t Government Thai dictionary
%e 2nd ed.
%C Bangkok

%A Bangkok
%D 1930
%T <Theochiu--Siamese dictionary>
%C Bangkok
%I Ministry of Education
%Z 342p.

%A Bangkok
%D 1950
%T <Siamese--Chinese--English dictionary>
%C Bangkok

%A Bangkok
%D 1957-70
%T {\thai <Prachum sil\=ach\=ar\,uk>}
%t Collection of Inscriptions
%Z Part 1 (1957): Inscriptions of Sukhothai; Part 2 (1961): Inscriptions of Dvaravadi; Part 3 (1965); Part 4 (1970)
%C Bangkok
%R Reviewed by Jacques, (Parts 1-3), <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 57(1970):230-6

%A Bangkok: Amnuay Silpa School
%% how to punct.??
%D 1932-36
%T <Scholars' Siamese--English dictionary. A useful manual for the students in both languages, containing more than 12,500 entries>
%C Bangkok
%I Silpa School
%Z 748p.
%+ 1st ed. 1932; 2nd ed. 1933; 3rd ed., revised and amended by A. G. Beaumont, 1936
%O SJS

%A Bangkok: Chulalongkorn University
%% how to punct.??
%D 1950
%T {\thai <Lak ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Principles of the Thai language
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University
%Z 308p.

%A Bangkok: Committee on Coining Terms
%% {\? how to punct.
%D 1956
%T {\thai <Banjat sap>}
%t Coining terms
%C Bangkok
%I Committee On Coining Terms
%Z 140p.

%A Bangkok: Language Institute
%% how to punct.??
%D 1977
%T <Bibliography of Thai language studies>
%C Bangkok
%I Language Institute, Indigenous Languages of Thailand Research Project, Mahidol University
%Z 78p., mimeo.
%O Extends to 1976 the coverage of the Thai languages section of Shorto, Jacob, & Simmonds, <Bibliographies of Mon-Khmer and Tai linguistics>, London: Oxford, 1963.

%A Bangkok: Military Press
%% how to punct.??
%D 1942
%T {\thai <??>}
%t New spelling dictionary of Thai
%C Bangkok
%I Military Press
%Z 241p.

%A Bangkok: Military Research and Development Center
%% how to punct.??
%D 1968
%T <Ethnographic map of Thailand>
%C Bangkok
%I Military Research and Development Center

%A Bangkok: Royal Institute
%% how to punct.??
%D 1941
%T Notification of the Royal Institute concerning the transcription of Thai characters into Roman (translation)
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 33
%P 49-65.

%A Bangkok: Vajira\~na\.na National Library
%% how to punct.??
%D 1914
%T <Sixteen tables of Thai alphabets current in Siam>
%C Bangkok
%I Vajira\~na\.na National Library
%Z 18p.

%A Bang-on Rutthaphon
%D 1970
%T {\thai <Kham kariy\=awis\=et nai ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Adverbs in the Thai language
%U M.A. thesis, Chulalongkorn University

%A Banker,, Betty F.
%X see also Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]

%A Banker,, Betty F.
%D n.d.
%T A comparison of Bahnar and Vietnamese
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics, University of North Dakota
%X see also Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]

%A Banker,, Betty F.
%D n.d.
%X see Banker,, J., and Banker

%A Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]
%X see Banker,, Betty F.

%A Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]
%D 1964
%T Bahnar affixation
%J <Mon-Khmer Studies>
%V I
%P 99-118

%A Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]
%D 1964
%T Bahnar reduplication
%J <Mon-Khmer Studies>
%V I
%P 119-34

%A Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]
%D 1964
%T Bahnar affixation
%J <Mon-Khmer Studies>
%V I
%P 99-118

%A Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]
%D 1964
%X see Banker,, J., and Banker

%A Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]
%D 1970
%T {\viet <La\ua p\;ot\;om m\;ohr\uam>}
%t Bahnar primer
%C Saigon
%I Department of Education
%Z 3 vols., 240p., illus.

%A Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]
%D 1979
%X see Banker,, J., E. Banker, and Siu M\;o

%A Banker,, Elizabeth [F.] [M.]
%D n.d.
%X see Banker,, J. and Banker

%A Banker,, Elizabeth M.
%A Siu M\;o
%D 1973
%T {\bahnar <T\;odrong p\;ohr\uam n\uor p\;oma>}; {\viet <Bai hoc ti\^eng Bahnar (Tinh Pleiku)>}; {\eng <Bahnar language lessons (Pleiku Province)>}
%C Saigon
%I Department of Education
%Z 40p.

%A Banker,, John E.
%D 1961
%T <Bahnar phonology>
%S <Vietnam linguistics papers>
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 15p.

%A Banker,, John E.
%D 1962
%X see Siu M\;o and Banker

%A Banker,, John E.
%D 1964
%T Transformational paradigms of Bahnar clauses
%J <Mon-Khmer Studies>
%V I
%P 7-40

%A Banker,, John E.
%D 1965
%T <Bahnar word classes>
%U M.A. thesis, Hartford Seminary Foundation
%Z 56p.

%A Banker,, John E.
%D 1972
%T Bahnar religion
%J <Southeast Asia>
%V 2
%N 1
%P 88-124

%A Banker,, John E.
%D 1976
%X see Siu M\;o and Banker

%A Banker,, John E.
%D 1978
%T <Bahnar word classes>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 57p., 2mf.

%A Banker,, John E.
%D n.d.
%T Preglottalized consonants in languages of Southeast Asia
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics, University of North Dakota
%Z 6p.

%A Banker,, John
%A et al.
%D 1964
%T <Mon-Khmer studies>, I
%S <Linguistic Circle of Saigon Publications>
%u 1
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Linguistic Circle of Saigon
%Z 163p.
%+ Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications, 2mf.
%R Reviewed by Capell, <Oceania> 35(1964).2:156-7
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 60(1965).2:255
%R Reviewed by Hohepa, <J. Polynesian Society> 75(1966):240-1
%R Reviewed by Jacob, <Lingua> 20(1968):111-12
%R Reviewed by Shorto, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 28(1965).2
%R Reviewed by Smalley, <Language> 43(1967).4:977-87

%A Banker,, John
%A Banker,, Betty
%D n.d.
%T <Bahnar texts>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics, University of North Dakota

%A Banker,, John
%D n.d.
%T <Bahnar--Vietnamese--English dictionary and texts>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics, University of North Dakota

%A Banker,, John
%A Banker,, Elizabeth
%A Siu M\;o
%D 1979
%T <Bahnar dictionary>
%S <Vietnam Minority Linguistics Series>
%u 20.1
%C Manila/Huntington Beach, CA
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 202p./204p.
%O A trilingual dictionary in the Plei Bong-Mang Yang dialect; Vietnamese--English with an introductory key to pronunciation in English; includes three corresponding tri- or bilingual glossaries and an English index

%A Banker,, John
%A Hin
%A Siu M\;o
%D 1971
%T {\viet <S\;op hlab\;oar h\;omon t\;odrong Bahnar S\;o ki>}
%t A Bahnar culture and folklore text
%C Saigon
%I Department of Education
%Z 104p.
%O In Bahnar and Vietnamese

%A Banker,, John
%A Yup
%A et al.
%D 1974
%T {\bahnar <Bai p\;ohram n\;or Bahnar Kontum>}; {\viet <Bai hoc ti\^eng Bahnar Kontum>}; {\eng <Kontum Bahnar language lessons>}
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z vi, 38p.

%A Baradat,, R.
%D 1941
%T {\fr <Les dialectes des tribus s\^amr\^e>}
%t The dialects of the S\^amr\^e tribe
%M ms., l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient, Paris
%Z 267p.

%A Baradat,, R.
%D 1941
%T {\fr Les Samr\^e ou P\'ear, population primitive de l'ouest du Cambodge}
%t The Samr\^e or P\'ear, a primitive population of western Cambodia
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 41
%P 1-150
%O Map, p.4

%A Barbe,, M.
%D 1845
%T Some account of the hill tribes in the interior of the District of Chittagong
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 14
%P 380-91
%O TB: Bom (Paangkhua), Langet

%A Barbe,, P.
%D 1846
%T Notice of the Nicobar Islands
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 15
%P 344-67
%O Nancowry vocabulary, 366-7 - SJS

%A Barbier,, Victor
%D 1912
%T {\fr Les expressions comparative dans la langue annamite}
%t Comparative expressions in Vietnamese
%J <Revue Indochinoise>
%V 1st sem. (1912)
%P 225-45; 356-69

%A Barbier,, Victor
%D 1920
%T {\fr Phon\'etique annamite}
%t Vietnamese phonetics
%J <Revue Indochinoise> n.s.
%V 34
%P 57-68

%A Barbier,, Victor
%D 1925
%T {\fr <Grammaire annamite>}
%t Vietnamese grammar
%C Hanoi
%I Imprimerie d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%Z 82p.

%A Bare,, Garland
%D 1961
%T The T'in and Kha Phai
%M unpublished background study

%E Bareh,, Hamlet
%D 1967
%T <The history and culture of the Khasi people>
%C Calcutta
%I Naba Mundran
%Z 485p.
%O Khasi language:19-22

%A Bareh,, Hamlet
%D 1969
%T <A short history of Khasi literature>
%C Shillong
%I Don Bosco Press
%Z 108p.

%A Bareh,, Hamlet
%D 1971
%T <Khasi fables and folk-tales>
%C Calcutta
%I K. L. Mukhopadhyay
%Z 87p.

%A Bareh,, U Mondon
%D 1929
%T <Khasi--English course and grammar for schools and colleges>
%C Shillong
%I Ri Khasi Press

%A Bareigts,, Andr\'e
%D 1981
%T {\fr <Les Lautu: contribution \`a l'\'etude de l'organisation sociale d'une ethnie chin de Haute-Birmanie>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I Soci\'et\'e d'Etudes Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de France
%Z 313p.
%O Considerable information on ethnography, demography, and toponymy of TB languages
%% Huffman has misspelling Bareights

%A Barinova,, A. N.
%D 1963
%T {\rus Povtory v kitaiskom i v'etnamskom iazykakh}
%t Reduplication in Chinese and Vietnamese
%B {\rus <Voprosy kitaiskoi filologii>}
%b Questions of Chinese philology
%C Moscow
%P 262-76

%A Barinova,, A. N.
%D 1964
%T {\rus Povtor v sovremennom v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Reduplication in contemporary Vietnamese
%U Moscow Lomonosov State University, Inst. of Oriental Languages, Candidate in Philological Sciences
%Z 213p.

%A Barinova,, A. N.
%D 1965
%T {\rus Nekotorye v'etnamsko--indoneziiskie paralleli}
%t Some Vietnamese--Indonesian parallels
%E Mazur,, Iu. N.
%B {\rus <Voprosy filologii stran Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii>}
%b Philological problems in the countries of South-East Asia
%C Moscow
%I Izd. Moskovkogo univ.
%P 47-57

%A Barinova,, A. N.
%D 1965
%T {\rus Pol'nyi i chastichnyi povtor vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Full and partial reduplication in the Vietnamese language
%E Mazur,, Iu. N.
%B {\rus <Voprosy filologii stran Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii>}
%b Philological problems in the countries of South-East Asia
%C Moscow
%I Izd. Moskovkogo univ.
%P 192-204

%A Barinova,, A. N.
%D 1965
%T {\rus <Uchebnik v'etnamskogo iazyka, I kurs>}
%t Textbook of the Vietnamese language, course I
%C Moscow
%I Izd. Moskovskogo univ.
%Z 320p.

%A Barataki,, S.
%D 1977
%T <The Khasis>
%C Pathsala, Assam
%I Bani Prakash
%Z 105p.
%O Ethnography

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D 1960-64
%T Linguistics
%J <Asian Perspectives>
%V 4(1960); 5(1961); 6(1962); 7(1963); 8(1964)
%N 1-2; 1; 1-2; 1-2; 1
%P 133-5; 107-8; 65-73; 86-100; 115-25
%O Annual bibliography on Far Eastern linguistics, primarily work by Summer Institute of Linguistics

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D 1963
%T Proto-Vietnam\;u\;ong initial labial consonants
%J <V\uan-hoa Nguy\^et-san>
%V 12
%N 3
%P 491-500

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D 1966
%T Vietnamese and M\;u\;ong tone correspondences
%E Zide,, Norman H.
%B <Studies in comparative Austroasiatic linguistics>
%S <Indo-Iranian monographs>
%u 5
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%P 9-25

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D 1968
%T The phonemes of M\;u\;ong
%J <Studies in Linguistics>
%V 20
%P 59-62

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D 1969
%T <M\;u\;ong clause structure>
%U M.A. essay, University of Illinois

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D 1969
%T The phonological adaptation of French loanwords in Vietnamese
%J <Mon-Khmer Studies>
%V III
%P 138-47

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D 1970
%X see Barker,, Muriel, and Milton Barker

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D 1980
%T House construction among M\;u\;ong refugees
%E Gregerson,, Marilyn
%E Thomas,, Dorothy
%B <Notes from Indochina on ethnic minority cultures>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Museum of Anthropology, Publication>
%u 6
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 1-10

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D n.d.
%T The phonological structure of M\;u\;ong
%M unpublished ms.

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%D n.d.
%T Proto-Vietnamuong final consonants and vowels
%M unpublished ms.

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%A et al.
%D 1977
%T <Articles on Proto-Viet-M\;u\;ong>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications
%Z 48p., 1mf.

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%A Barker,, Muriel
%D 1962
%T <M\;u\;ong--Vietnamese--English dictionary>
%M ms.

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%A Barker,, Muriel
%D 1974
%T <M\;u\;ong--Vietnamese--English alphabetization dictionary>
%M computer printout, Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%A Barker,, Muriel
%D 1976
%T {\muong <Bai hoc ti\^eng Mol>}; {\viet <Bai hoc ti\^eng M\;u\;ong>}: {\eng <M\;u\;ong language lessons>}
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 39p.

%A Barker,, Milton E.
%A Barker,, Muriel
%D 1976
%T <M\;u\;ong--Vietnamese--English dictionary>
%C Huntington Beach, CA
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 537p.
%+ Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications, 11mf.

%A Barker,, Muriel A.
%D 1962-77
%X see Barker,, Milton E., and Muriel Barker

%A Barker,, Muriel A.
%D 1970
%T Proto-Vietnamuong (Annamuong) final consonants and vowels
%J <Lingua>
%V 24
%N 3
%P 268-85

%A Barnard,, Joseph Terence Owen
%D 1934
%T <A handbook of the Raw\=ang dialect of the Nung language>
%C Rangoon
%Z xi, 118p.

%A Barnes,, W. D.
%D 1903
%T Review of W. Schmidt, `The Sakai and Semang languages in the Malay Peninsula and their relations to the Mon-Khmer languages'
%J <Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 39
%P 38-45

%A Barnett,, L. D.
%D 1903
%T Preliminary notice of the Tibetan manuscripts in the Stein collection
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1903
%P 109-14

%A Barnett,, L. D.
%A Francke,, A. H.
%D 1907
%T Tibetan manuscripts and graffiti discovered by Dr. M. A. Stein at Endere
%E Stein,, M. A.
%B <Ancient Khotan>
%C Oxford
%P 548-69 (Appendix N)

%A Barney,, George Linwood
%D 1950-54
%T <Hmong Njua materials>
%C Xieng Khouang, Laos

%A Barney,, George Linwood
%D 1961
%T <The Meo of Xieng Khouang Province>
%S <Laos Project Paper>
%u 13
%C Los Angeles
%I University of California/Los Angeles, Department of Anthropology and Sociology
%+ Reprinted in Peter Kunstadter, ed., <Southeast Asian tribes, minorities and nations>, Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1967:271-93

%A Barney,, George Linwood
%A Smalley,, William A.
%D 1952
%T <Report of conference on problems in Meo phonemic structure>
%Z mimeo.

%A Barney,, George Linwood
%A Smalley,, William A.
%D 1953
%T <Report of second conference on problems in Meo (Miao) phonemic structure and orthography>
%Z mimeo.

%A Barney,, George Linwood
%A Smalley,, William A.
%D 1953
%T <Third report on Meo (Miao): orthography and grammar>
%C Xieng Khouang, Laos
%Z mimeo.

%A Barnouw,, Victor
%D 1955
%T Eastern Nepalese marriage customs and kinship organization
%J <Southwestern Journal of Anthropology>
%V 11
%P 15-30
%O Kinship terms:29-30 - BSTL

%A Baron,, Stephen P.
%D 1973
%T The classifier-alone-plus-noun construction as an areal feature in Southeast Asia
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 6 (University of California/San Diego)

%A Baron,, Stephen P.
%D 1973
%T Sani etymological concordance and summary of correspondences
%M ms.

%A Baron,, Stephen P.
%D 1973
%T Tonal derivation vs. tone sandhi as a syntactic device
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 6 (University of California/San Diego)

%A Baron,, Stephen P.
%D 1974
%T On the tips of many tongues: apical vowels across Sino-Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 7 (Georgia State University, Atlanta)

%A Barooah,, Gangadhar Roy
%D 1949
%T {\?? <Abor Sikshak>;} {\eng <Abor teacher>}
%C Pashighat, NEFA, Assam
%O Abor grammar and vocabulary, in Abor, English, and Assamese - BSTL

%E Barrau,, Jacques
%E et al.
%D 1972
%T {\fr <Langues et techniques, nature et societe>} {\eng (<Volumes presented to Andr\'e G. Haudricourt on his 60th birthday>)}, {\fr vol. I: <Approche linguistique>; vol. II: <Approche ethnologique et naturaliste>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I Klincksieck
%O S

%A Bars,, E.
%D 1973
%T <Khasi--English dictionary>
%C Shillong, Meghalaya
%I Don Bosco

%A Barshudarov
%D 1963
%T Review of Zograph, {\rus <Iazyki Indii, Pakistana, Ceilona, i Nepala>}
%B {\rus <Voprosy Iazyke i literatury>}
%b Problems of language and literature
%V 2
%P 144-7

%A Barua,, Bimala Kanta
%A Deodhari Phukan,, N. N.
%D 1964
%T <Ahom lexicons, based on original Tai manuscripts>
%C Gauhati
%I Department of Historical and Antiquarian Studies in Assam
%Z 205p.

%A Barua,, Tushar Kanti
%D 1969
%T Review of Bernot, L., {\fr <Les \,Cak, contribution \`a l'\'etude ethnographique d'une population de la langue loi>}
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 55
%N 1
%P 235-8

%A Baruah,, T. K.
%D 1962
%T <The Idu Mishmi phrasebook>
%C ?
%I North-East Frontier Agency

%A Baruch,, J.
%D 1973
%T Review of Nguy\^en Phu Phong, {\fr <Le vietnamien fondamental>}
%J <Message d'Extr\^eme-Orient> (Belgium)
%V 3
%N 11-12
%P 908

%A Baruwa,, Ghanak\=anta
%D 1936
%T {\ahom <\=Ahom pr\=aim\=ar, by\=akaranar saite>}
%t Ahom primer, with grammar
%C Jorhat
%Z 58p.

%A Bass,, Jerry
%D 1978
%T Thai dictionary project
%J <Center for South and Southeast Asian Studies Review> (Berkeley?)
%V 1
%N 1
%P 4-6

%A Bastian,, Adolf
%D 1865
%T On some Siamese inscriptions
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 34
%P 27-38

%A Bastian,, Adolf
%D 1867
%T {\germ \"Uber die siamesischen Laut- und Tonaccente}
%t ?
%J <Monatsberichte der K\"oniglichen preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin>
%V 1867
%P 357-86

%A Bastian,, Adolf
%D 1868
%T Remarks on the Indo-Chinese alphabets
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> n.s.
%V 3
%P 65-80
%O Script specimens: AA: Khmer; TB: Burmese; TK: Lao, Shan, Thai; MA: Cham

%A Bastian,, Adolf
%D 1868
%T {\germ <Reise durch Kambodja nach Cochinchina>}
%t A trip through Cambodia to Cochinchina
%S {\germ <Die Voelker des Oestlichen Asien: Studien und Reisen von Dr. Adolf Bastian}
%u 4
%t ?
%C Jena
%I Hermann Costenoble
%Z x, 436p.
%O Vocabulary: AA: Bahnar (414-15), Chong (295-7), Khmer (253-7), Palaung (304-5), Samreh [Samr\^e] (89-90), Sedang (416), So (293-4), Stieng (305-7), Su\'e [Souei] (298-9); MA: Cham (243-5)

%A Bastian,, Adolf
%D 1870
%T {\germ <Sprachvergleichende Studien mit besonderer Ber\"ucksichtigung der indochinesischen Sprachen>}
%t Linguistic studies with special reference to the Indochinese languages
%C Leipzig
%I F. A. Brockhaus
%Z xxxviii, 344p.
%O Reference to Burmese, Tai

%A Bastian,, Adolf
%D 1883
%T {\germ <V\"olkerst\"amme am Brahmaputra, und verwandtschaftliche Nachbarn>}
%t ?
%C Berlin
%O Vocabulary: Dafla, Sandoway; reference to Sino-Tibetan

%A Batova,, D. A.
%X see Andreev, Batova, Panfilov, and Petrov 1958

%A Bauer,, Christian
%D 1982
%T <Morphology and syntax of spoken Mon>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
%Z xxix, 585p.

%A Bauer,, Christian
%D 1983
%T Classifiers in Mon
%M Australian Linguistic Society Conference, LaTrobe University, Melbourne, Aug. 31-Sept. 2, 1983

%A Bauer,, Christian
%D 1985
%T The verb complex in spoken Mon
%E Diffloth,, G\'erard
%E Theraphan L. Thongkum
%B <Mon and Nyah Kur linguistic studies>
%S <Monic language studies>
%u 3
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Printing House

%A Bauman,, James John
%D 1974
%T Pronominal verb morphology in Tibeto-Burman
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 1
%N 1
%P 108-55

%A Bauman,, James John
%D 1975
%T Pronominal roots in Tibeto-Burman
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 8 (University of California, Berkeley)w

%A Bauman,, James John
%D 1975
%T <Pronouns and pronominal morphology in Tibeto-Burman>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of California/Berkeley
%Z 319p.

%A Bauman,, James John
%D 1979
%T An historical perspective on ergativity in Tibeto-Burman
%E Plank,, Frans
%B <Ergativity: towards a theory of grammatical relations>
%C New York
%I Academic Press
%P 419-33

%A Baumeister,, Theofried
%D 1967
%T {\germ Ueber Sprache und Denken der Vietnamesen}
%t On the language and thought of the Vietnamese
%J <Vi\^et-Nam>
%V 3
%P 25-36

%A Bawden,, C. R.
%D 1960
%T Mongolian in Tibetan script
%J <Studia Orientalia>
%V 25
%N 3
%P 3-15

%A Bawden,, C. R.
%D 1973
%T A Tibetan--Mongol bilingual text of popular religion
%E Kaschewsky,, R.
%E Sagaster,, K.
%E Weiers,, M.
%B <Serta Tibeto--Mongolica>
%C Wiesbaden
%I Harrassowitz
%P 15-32

%A Baxter,, William H., III
%D 1985
%T Tibeto-Burman cognates of Old Chinese *-ij and *-\-ij
%E Thurgood,, Graham
%E Matisoff,, James A.
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: the state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday>
%S <Pacific linguistics>
%u C.87
%C Canberra
%I Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University
%P 242-63

%A Bayard,, D. T.
%D 1979
%T Comment on Shorto's `Linguistic protohistory of mainland South-East Asia'
%E Smith,, R. B.
%E Watson,, W.
%B <Early South East Asia>
%C London
%I Oxford University Press
%P 278-80

%E Bazell,, C. E.
%E Catford,, J. C.
%E Halliday,, M. A. K.
%E Robins,, R. H.
%D 1966
%T <In memory of J. R. Firth>
%C London
%I Longmans, Green and Co.
%Z xi, 500p.
%O S
%R Reviewed by Matthews, <Language> 44(1968).2:306-17

%A Be Viet Dang
%D 1975
%T The Yao in Vietnam
%J <Vietnamese Studies>
%V 41
%P 40-83
%O Ethnography; 25-word comparative wordlist in seven Yao dialects

%A Beames,, John
%D 1867, 1971
%T <Outlines of Indian philology and other philological papers>
%C Calcutta
%I Indian Studies Past and Present
%Z xi, 100p.
%O Reprint of 1867; appendix A: Santali numerals

%A Beames,, John
%D 1870
%T On the Magar language of Nepal
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 4
%P 178-228

%A Beauclair,, I\~nez de
%D 1941
%T Review of Fitzgerald, <The tower of five glories>
%J <Studia Serica>
%V 2
%P 150-1

%A Beauclair,, I\~nez de
%D 1950
%T Review of Bernatzik, {\germ <Akha und Meau>}
%J <Studia Serica>
%V 9
%N 2
%P 108-16

%A Beauclair,, I\~nez de
%D 1956
%T The representatives of the Lao in Kweichow province
%E Ruey Lih-Fu
%B {\?? <Kehlaot\^e tsutsu went'i>}
%b ?
%S <Academica Sinica Annals>
%u III
%P 302-9

%A Beauclair,, I\~nez de
%D 1960
%T A Miao tribe of Southeast Kweichow and its cultural configuration
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of Ethnology>
%V 10
%P 127-99

%A Beauclair,, I\~nez de
%D 1961
%T ``Miao'' on Hainan Island
%J <Current Anthropology>
%V 2
%P 394
%O Claims they are Yao

%A Beauvais,, J.
%D 1909
%T {\fr Rudiments d'un vocabulaire du dialecte des Tou-jen (Th\^o) de la r\'egion de Long-Tcheou}
%t Rudiments of a vocabulary of the Tou-jen (Th\^o) dialect of the Long-Tcheou region
%J <Revue Indochinoise>
%V 11
%P 330-42

%A Bechert,, Heinz
%D 1980
%T Review of Coed\'es, {\fr <Catalogue des manuscrits en P\=ali, Laotien, et Siamois provenant de la Thailande>}
%J <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl\"andischen Gesellschaft>
%V 30
%N 1
%P 151-2

%A Bechert,, Heinz
%A Daw Khin Khin Su
%A Daw Tin Tin Myint
%D 1979
%T <Burmese manuscripts, Part 1>
%S {\germ <Verzeichnis der orientalischen Handschriften in Deutschland>}
%s List of oriental manuscripts in Germany, 23
%u 23
%C Wiesbaden
%I Steiner
%Z 223p., 5 plates

%A Be\vcka,, Jan
%D 1962
%T <Particles and prepositions in modern Burmese>
%U Thesis, Dept. of Asian and African language, Charles University, Prague
%Z 130p.

%A Be\vcka,, Jan
%D 1969
%X see Be\vckov\'a and Be\vcka

%A Be\vcka,, Jan
%D 1979
%T Review of Novikov and Kolobkov, {\rus <Russko--birmanskii slovar'>}
%J <Archiv Orient\'al\'ni>
%V 38
%P 366-7

%A Becker,, Alton L.
%D 1968
%T Burmese tonemics: a discusssion of various points of view
%E Yamagiwa,, Joseph K.
%B <Papers of the CIC Far Eastern Language Institute>
%C Ann Arbor
%I Panel of Far Eastern Language Institutes of the Committee for Institutional Cooperation
%P 113-16
%% Huffman has 1964 for the paper

%E Becker,, Alton L.
%D 1969
%T <Burman linguistics>, vol. 1
%C Ann Arbor
%I University of Michigan, Publications of the Linguistics Department
%Z 221p.
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 65(1970-71).2:253

%A Becker,, Alton L.
%D 1975
%T A linguistic image of nature: the Burmese numerative classifier system
%E Rubin,, Joan
%B <Sociolinguistics in Southeast Asia>
%S <International Journal of the Sociology of Language>
%u 5
%S <Linguistics>
%u 165
%P 109-21

%A Becker,, Alton L.
%D 1975
%X see Adams,, K., Becker, and Conklin

%A Becker,, Alton L.
%D 1976
%T Grammatical restraints in Austro-Thai: the pronominal system
%M Meetings of the Association for Asian Studies

%A Becker,, Alton L.
%D 1985
%T Person in Austro-Thai: comments on the pronoun paradigm in Benedict's <Austro-Thai: Language and culture>
%E Thurgood,, Graham
%E Matisoff,, James A.
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: the state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday>
%S <Pacific linguistics>
%u C.87
%C Canberra
%I Dept. of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University
%P 324-33
%% Huffman has 1984 for the paper

%A Becker,, Alton L.
%A Arms,, David
%D 1969
%T Prepositions as predicates
%J <Papers of the Chicago Linguistic Society>
%V 5
%P 1-11

%A Beckh,, Hermann
%D 1908
%T {\germ Beitr\"age zur tibetischen Grammatik, Lexikographie, Stilistik, und Metrik}
%t Essays on Tibetan grammar, lexicography, stylistics, and metrics
%J <Abhandlungen, Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin>
%V 1908, 2nd Anhang {? put 2nd in German}
%Z 65p.

%A Be\vckov\'a,, Dagmar
%A Be\vcka,, Jan
%D 1969
%T A milestone in Burmese studies
%J <Archiv Orient\'al\'ni>
%V 37
%N 1
%P 82-6

%A Bee,, Peter J.
%D 1963
%T To which language family does Thai belong?
%J <Bulletin of the Faculty of Arts, Chulalangkorn University>
%V 2
%P 59-65

%A Bee,, Peter J.
%D 1965
%T Review of Haas, <Thai--English student's dictionary>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 28
%N 3
%P 663-6

%A Bee,, Peter J.
%D 1968
%T The analysis of Thai tones: an argument
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 56
%N 2
%P 272-87

%A Bee,, Peter J.
%D 1972
%T <Kan> in modern standard Thai
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 60
%N 2
%P 87-134

%A Bee,, Peter J.
%D 1973
%T Review of Phayaphrom, <The poem in four songs: a Northern Thai tetralogy>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 36
%N 1
%P 188-91

%A Bee,, Peter J.
%D 1975
%T Restricted phonology in certain Thai linker-syllables
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Chamberlain,, James R.
%B <Studies in Tai linguistics in honor of William J. Gedney>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 17-32

%A Bee,, Peter J.
%D 1975
%T Review of Udom, <Thai syntax: an outline>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 38
%N 3
%P 674-7

%A Beebe,, Leslie M.
%D 1971
%T Review of Vichin Panupong, <Inter-sentence relations in modern conversational Thai>
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 59
%N 1
%P 245-9

%A Beebe,, Leslie M.
%D 1974
%T <Socially conditioned variation in Bangkok Thai>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Michigan
%Z 181p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 35.7:4474-75-A; University Microfilms 75-628

%A Beebe,, Leslie M.
%D 1975
%T Initial consonant cluster reduction as a function of age group in Bangkok Thai speakers
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%B <A Tai festschrift for William J. Gedney on the occasion of his fifth cycle of life birthday anniversary, April 4, 1975>
%S <Southeast Asian Studies Working Paper>
%u 8
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Southeast Asian Studies Program
%P 13-42
%+ Also published in Gething,, Thomas W., and Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em, eds., <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 6>: <Tai studies in honor of William J. Gedney> (<Pacific Linguistics>, A.52), Canberra: Australian National University, 1979, 11-35

%A Beebe,, Leslie M.
%D 1975
%T Occupational prestige and consonant cluster simplification in Bangkok Thai
%E Rubin,, Joan
%B <Sociolinguistics in Southeast Asia>
%S <International Journal of the Sociology of Language>
%u 5
%S Linguistics>
%u 165
%P 43-62

%A Beebe,, Leslie M.
%D 1976
%T Social conditioning of grooved and flat fricatives in Thai
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%B <Tai linguistics in honor of Fang-kuei Li>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 13-27

%A Beebe,, Leslie M.
%D 1980
%T Listener ethnicity and linguistic accommodation: the case of Chinese Thais
%M Conference on Thai Studies in honor of Professor William J. Gedney (Ann Arbor, MI)

%A Beery,, Galen
%D 1973
%T <Basic spoken Lao>
%C Vientiane
%I Kaye Ando Technical Services
%Z 28p.

%A Beery,, Galen
%D 1977
%T <Basic spoken Lao in sixteen lessons>
%C Rutland, VT
%I Charles E. Tuttle
%Z 27p.

%A Begbie,, Peter James
%D 1834
%T <The Malayan Peninsula...>
%C Madras
%I Vepery Mission Press
%Z xviii, 524, xix pp., plates, maps
%O M\ueni' vocabulary: 14-18 - SJS

%A Begbie,, William Henry
%A Joseph,, Abraham
%D 1877
%T <Vocabulary, English, Burmese, Hindustani, and Tamil in English characters with the Burmese also in native letters...>
%C Rangoon
%I Albion Press
%Z 153p.

%A Begbie,, William Henry
%A Joseph,, Abraham
%D 1886
%T <Tamil--Hindustani--Burmese--English dictionary>
%C Singapore
%I Malayalam Printers
%Z 87p.

%A Behura,, N. K.
%D 1980
%T Structural analysis and Juang myths - a critique
%J <Journal of Social Research>
%V 23
%N 1
%P 59-72

%A Belakowicz,, I. de
%D 1906
%T {\fr Notes sur deux peuplades du Darlac (Laos): les Rad\`es et les Khar Pi}
%t Notes on two tribes of Darlac (Laos): the Rad\'e and the Khar Pi
%J <Revue coloniale> (Minist\`ere des Colonies)
%V 36, 37
%O 500-word vocabulary of Rad\'e, 37:234-45

%A Bell,, Charles A.
%D 1939
%T <Grammar of colloquial Tibetan>
%C Alipore
%I Government of Bengal Press
%Z 184p.
%+ Also published New York: Dover, 1977, 230p. (reprint of 2nd (1919) ed.)

%A Bell,, Charles A.
%D 1965
%T <English--Tibetan colloquial dictionary>
%C Alipore
%I West Bengal Government Press
%Z xxvi, 562p.
%+ 1st edition, Calcutta, 1920

%A Bell,, Charles A.
%D 1978
%T <Manual of colloquial Tibetan>
%C Nepal
%I Ratna Pustak Bhandar
%Z 562p.
%+ Reprint of 1905 edition

%A Belykh,, B. M.
%A Tseitin,, G. C.
%D 1961
%T {\rus <Kodirovka v'etnamskogo sova>}
%t Codification of the Vietnamese word
%? {\rus <AN SSSR Inst. nauch. inform. Doklad na Konf. po obrabotke inform., machin perevodu i avtomaticheskomn chteniiu teksta>, Vyp. 3}

%A Bendix,, Edward H.
%D 1974
%T Indo-Aryan and Tibeto-Burman contact as seen through Nepali and Newari verb tenses
%J <International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics>
%V 3
%N 1
%P 42-59

%A Bendix,, Edward H.
%D 1975
%T Review of Matisoff, `Lahu nominalization, relativization, and genitivization'
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 77
%N 4
%P 957

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1937-41
%X see Shafer and Benedict

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1939
%T Semantic differentiation in Indo-Chinese. Old Chinese <l\^ap n\^a>
%J <Harvard Journal of Asiatic studies>
%V 4
%P 213-29
%O Reference to Tai

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1940
%T Studies in Indo-Chinese phonology
%J <Harvard Journal of Asiatic studies>
%V 5
%P 101-27

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1941-42
%T A Cham colony on the island of Hainan
%J <Harvard Journal of Asiatic studies>
%V 6
%P 129-34
%O Huihui = a Chamic group which migrated to Hainan in the 12-13th centuries; according to Benedict, <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages> 1984, a tonal Chamic language

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1942
%T Chinese and Tibetan kinship terms
%J <Harvard Journal of Asiatic studies>
%V 6
%P 313-37

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1942
%T Thai, Kadai, and Indonesian: a new alignment in Southeastern Asia
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 44
%P 576-601
%+ Republished in Benedict 1975 {? expand ref}
%O Claims that the Kadai languages (Li on Hainana and Lati, Laqua and Kelao in southern China) form a link between Tai and Austronesian

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1943
%T Secondary infixation in Lepcha
%J <Studies in linguistics>
%V 1
%N 19
%P 2

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1943
%T Studies in Thai kinship terminology
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 63
%P 168-75

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1945
%T Chinese and Thai kin numeratives
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 65
%P 33-7

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1946-47
%T Languages and literatures of Indo-China
%J <Far Eastern Quarterly>
%V 6
%P 371-92

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1947
%T An analysis of Annamese kinship terms
%J <Southwestern Journal of Anthropology>
%V 3
%P 371-92

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1947
%T Review of Cornyn, <Outline of Burmese grammar>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 67
%P 65-7

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1948
%T Tonal systems in South-East Asia
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 68
%P 184-91

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1966
%T Austro-Thai
%J <Behavior Science Notes>
%V 1
%P 227-61
%+ Republished in Benedict 1975 {? expand ref}

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1967
%T Austro-Thai studies 3: Austro-Thai and Chinese
%J <Behavior Science Notes>
%V 2
%N 4
%P 275-336
%O Republished in Benedict 1975 {? expand ref}

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1968
%T Austro-Thai and Sino-Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 1 (Yale University, New Haven, CT)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1969
%T The birth of Sino-Tibetan tonal distinctions
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 2 (Columbia University, New York)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1970
%T A reconstruction schema for Sino-Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 3 (Cornell University, Ithaca, NY)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1971
%T Sino-Tibetan suffixed `-n'
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 4 (Indiana University, Bloomington)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1972
%T Notes for comments on F. K. Li, `Some dental clusters in Thai'
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 5 (University of Michigan, Ann Arbor)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1972
%T <Sino-Tibetan: a conspectus>
%S <Princeton-Cambridge studies in Chinese linguistics>
%u 2
%? contributing editor James A. Matisoff
%C New York
%I Cambridge University Press
%Z vi, 230p.
%O A systematic presentation of the basic linguistic features of Chinese, Karen, and the Tibeto-Burman languages (including Tibetan, Burmese, and more than 100 related languages), with particular emphasis on reconstructing the ancestral Sino-Tibetan language
%R Reviewed by Bodman, <Linguistics> 149(1975):89-97
%R Reviewed by Chang Kun, <Journal of Asian Studies> 32(1975).2:335-7
%R Reviewed by Chou Fa-kao, <Journal of the Institute for Chinese Studies> 5(1972).1:159-237
%R Reviewed by Coblin, <Monumenta Serica> 30(1972-73):635-42
%R Reviewed by Denwood, <Journal of Oriental Studies> 11(1973).2:261-2
%R Reviewed by Egerod, <Journal of Chinese Linguistics> 1(1973).3:498-505
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 68(1973).2:261-2
%R Reviewed by H. Hoffmann, <Language Sciences> 38(1976??):33
%R Reviewed by Lehman, <Language> 51(1975).1:215-19
%R Reviewed by R. Miller, <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 94(1974).2:195-204
%R Reviewed by G. Roy, <Journal of the Chinese Language Teachers Association> 9(1974): 153-6
%R Reviewed by Sedl\'a\vcek, <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl\"andischen Gesellschaft> 124(1974):153-6
%R Reviewed by W. Simon, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 36(1973).1:173-4
%R Reviewed by Sprigg, <Asia Major> 19(1974).1:100-106

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1972
%T The Sino-Tibetan tonal system
%E Barrau,, Jacques
%E et al.
%B {\fr <Langues et techniques, nature et soci\'et\'e>} <(Volume presented to Andre\'e G. Haudricourt on his 60th birthday)>
%b ?
%C Paris
%I Klincksieck
%P 25-34

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1973
%T Tibeto-Burman tones with a note on teleo-reconstruction
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 35
%P 127-38

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1974
%T Comment on E. W. Lee, `Southeast Asian features in Austronesian strata of the Chamic languages'
%M First International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics (Honolulu, Hawaii)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1974
%T The problem of tone assignment in Austro-Thai
%M First International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics (Honolulu, Hawaii)
%+ Summary in Benedict 1975

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1975
%T <Austro-Thai: language and culture, with a glossary of roots>
%C New Haven
%I Human Relations Area Files Press
%Z 490p.
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 71(1976):448-9
%R Reviewed by Diffloth, <Discussion Paper 82>, Kyoto: Kyoto University Center for Southeast Asian Studies, 1976
%R Reviewed by Diffloth, in Jenner,, Philip N., ed., <Mon-Khmer studies> VI, Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1977
%R Reviewed by Egerod, <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages> 6(1976):51-60
%R Reviewed by Gedney, <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages> 6(1976):65-82
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages> 6(1976):91-2
%R Reviewed by Shorto, <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages> 6(1976):95-104

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1975
%T Comment on Huffman's `An examination of lexical correspondences between Vietnamese and some other Austroasiatic languages'
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 8 (University of California, Berkeley)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1975
%T A note on Proto-Burmese-Lolo prefixation
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 2
%N 2
%P 289-91

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1975
%T Where it all began: memories of Robert Shafer and the `Sino-Tibetan Linguistics Project', Berkeley 1939-40
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 2
%N 1
%P 81-92

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1976
%T Austro-Thai and Austroasiatic
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%E Thompson,, Laurence C.
%E Starosta,, Stanley
%B <Austroasiatic studies>
%S <Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication>
%u 13
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%V 1
%P 1-36

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1976
%T Egerod: Benedict's Austro-Thai hypothesis and the traditional view of Sino-Thai relationship -- comment
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 6
%P 61-64

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1976
%T Gedney: On the Thai evidence for Austro-Thai -- comment
%P 83-6

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1976
%T Haudricourt: general overview -- comment
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 6
%P 91-2

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1976
%T Matisoff: Austro-Thai and Sino-Tibetan: an examination of body-part contact relationships -- comment
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 6
%P 93-4

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1976
%T Shorto: in defense of Austric -- comment
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 6
%P 105-8

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1976
%T Sino-Tibetan: another look
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 96
%N 2
%P 167-97

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1976
%T Formosan reflexes of PAN nasals/orals
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Southeast Asian linguistic studies> 2
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.42
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 237-51
%O Relates Proto-Austronesian to Austro-Thai

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1977
%T Proto-Sino-Tibetan vowels
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 10 (Georgetown University, Washington, DC)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1977
%T <Rhyming dictionary of written Burmese>
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 3
%N 1
%P 1-93
%O Special issue of <LTBA>, with an introduction by James A. Matisoff, iii-x; compiled under supervision of P. K. Benedict circa 1941

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1978
%T Chinese cryptoglyphics
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 11 (University of Arizona, Tucson)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1979
%T Linguistic prediction: the case of Saek
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1979
%T Four forays into Karen linguistic history: A note on the loss of final stops in Karen; A note on the reconstruction of Karen final -s; A note on the reconstruction of Karen preglottalized surd stops; A note on genital flip-flop
%? ed. and expurgated by James A. Matisoff
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 1-35

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1979
%T PAN consonant clusters
%E Naylor,, P. B.
%B <Austronesian studies: Papers from the 2nd Eastern Conference on Austronesian languages>
%C Ann Arbor
%I University of Michigan
%P 189-93
%O Relates Proto-Austronesian to Austro-Thai

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1979
%T Vocalic transfer: a Southeast Asian areal feature
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 40
%P 229-52

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1980
%T Comment on W. W. Gage, `Our present state of s\'\uac: glottal stops and Vietnamese tonogenesis'
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 13 (University of Virginia, Charlottesville)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1980
%T The PST tone/accent system: additional TB data
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 13 (University of Virginia, Charlottesville)
%O Proto-Sino-Tibetan, Tibeto-Burman

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1981
%T Comment on Thurgood: `The Sino-Tibetan copula *wiy'
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 14 (University of Florida, Gainesville)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1981
%T A further (unexpurgated) note on Karen genital flip-flop
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 6
%N 1
%P 103-4

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1981
%T TB/Karen cluster vs. prefix *s
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 14 (University of Florida, Gainesville)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1982
%T Vietnamese /s/ and /x/: the ch\;u n\^om evidence
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 6
%N 2
%P 105-6

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1983
%T Mulao: key to Kadai phonology
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 21
%P 1-5
%O Mulao is a Kam-Sui language

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1983
%T Proto-Karen final stops
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 7
%N 2
%P 112-23 {? problem with pagination, cf. following ??}

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1983
%T Qiang monosyllables: a third phase in the cycle
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 7
%N 2
%P 113-4 {? problem with pagination, cf. previous ??}
%O Qiang = Chiang

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1983
%T <This> and <that> in TB/ST
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 7
%N 2
%P 75-98

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D 1984
%T Austro-Thai parallel -- a tonal Chamic language on Hainan
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 22
%P 83-6
%O Huihui (Chamic)

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D forthcoming
%T Austroasiatic loanwords in Sino-Tibetan
%E Svantesson,, Jan-Olaf
%B <Papers from the Helsing\/or symposium on Austroasiatic linguistics and literature>
%C Copenhagen/London
%I Scandinavian Institute for Asian Studies/Curzon
%P ?

%A Benedict,, Paul K.
%D n.d.
%T <Kinship in southeastern Asia>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Harvard University
%O Ms. copies in Widener Library, Harvard University, Cambridge MA

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1966
%T Temiar social groups
%J <Federated Museums Journal>
%V 11
%P 1-25

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1967
%T Temiar kinship
%J <Federated Museums Journal> n.s.
%V 12
%P 1-25

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1968
%T Headmanship and leadership in Temiar society
%J <Federated Museums Journal> n.s.
%V 13
%P 1-43

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1968
%T Temiar personal names
%J <Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land-, en Volkenkunde van Nederlandsch-Indi\"e>
%V 124
%P 99-134

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1970
%T Review of Dentan, <The Semai>
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 72
%P 658-60

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1973
%X see Schebesta, with intro. by Benjamin

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1974
%T <Prehistory and ethnology in Southeast Asia: some new ideas>
%S <University of Singapore, Department of Sociology, Working Paper>
%u 25
%C Singapore
%I Department of Sociology, University of Singapore

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1976
%T Austroasiatic subgrouping and prehistory in the Malay Peninsula
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%E Thompson,, Laurence C.
%E Starosta,, Stanley
%B <Austroasiatic studies>
%S <Oceanic Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 13
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%V 1
%P 129-88

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1976
%T An outline of Temiar grammar
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%E Thompson,, Laurence C.
%E Starosta,, Stanley
%B <Austroasiatic studies>
%S <Oceanic Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 13
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%V 1
%P 129-88

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1976
%T Self and other in Temiar grammar
%M Second International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics, Mysore, India, Central Institute of Indian Languages

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D 1978
%T Temiar terms of reference and address
%M Second International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics, Mysore, India, Central Institute of Indian Languages

%A Benjamin,, Geoffrey
%D forthcoming
%T <Semang, Senoi, Malay: the societal traditions of the Malay Peninsula>
%C Singapore
%I Institute of Southeast Asian Studies

%A Bejawan Suntharagul
%D 1962
%T {\thai <N\=uai s\=iang kh\=\,ong ph\=as\=a Ch\=iangmai>}
%t The phonemes of the Chiengmai language
%U M.A. thesis, Chulalongkorn University
%Z 343p.

%A Bennett,, Cephas
%D 1875
%T <An Anglo-Karen vocabulary. Monosyllables. For the use of Karen schools>
%C Tavoy
%I Karen Mission Press
%+ First published 1846

%A Bennett,, Cephas
%D 1886
%T <Vocabulary and phrase book in English and Burmese>
%C Rangoon
%Z 157p.
%e 3rd edition, revised by M. H. Eveleth - BSTL

%A Bergelin,, L.
%D 1929
%T {\fr <Carte linguistique>}
%t Linguistic map
%e Maspero,, G.
%B {fr <Un empire colonial fran\,caise: l'Indochine>}
%C Paris
%I G. van Oest
%V 1
%P Appendix ix
%O Includes south-west Y\"unnan, Kwangsi, and most of Thailand - SJS

%A Bergen,, F. L. Werner von
%D 1875
%T <Passive verb of the Thai language>
%C Bangkok
%I Smith, S. J.
%Z 24p.

%A Bergen,, F. L. Werner von
%D 1936
%T <Scholars Siamese--English dictionary>
%C Bangkok

%A Berger,, Hermann
%D 1962
%T Review of Pinnow, {\germ <Versuch einer historischen Lautlehre der Kharia-Sprache>}
%J <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl\"andischen Gesellschaft>
%V 112
%P 416-21

%A Berger,, Hermann
%D 1964
%T Vowel assimilation in Bengali and Munda
%B <Proceedings of the 26th International Congress of Linguists>
%P 64-5
%O Abstract

%A Berger,, Hermann
%D 1966
%T Review of Rabel, <Khasi, a language of Assam>
%J <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung>
%V 61
%N 5-6
%P 268-9

%A Berger,, Hermann
%D 1967
%T Review of Pinnow, {\germ <Kharia-Texte>}
%J <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl\"andischen Gesellschaft>
%V 61
%N 2
%P 428-9

%A Berger,, Hermann
%D 1969
%T Review of Henderson, <Tiddim Chin>
%J <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung>
%V 64
%N 11-12
%P 600-1

%A Berlin,, Brent
%A Kay,, Paul
%D 1969
%T <Basic color terms: their universality and evolution>
%C Berkeley; Los Angeles
%I University of California Press
%Z xi, 178p.
%O Reference to Thai and Vietnamese
%R Reviewed by Hickerson, <International Journal of American Linguistics> 37(1971).4.1:257-70
%R Reviewed by Newcomer and Faris, <International Journal of American Linguistics> 37(1971).4.1:270-5

%A Berlitz,, V. A.
%D 1968
%T <Vietnamese phrase book and English--Vietnamese dictionary>
%S <A Signet reference book>
%C New York
%I New American Library
%Z 191p.

%A Berman,, Judith
%X see Derrick-Mescua, Berman, and Carlson

%A Bernard,, J. B.
%D 1902
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire cambodgien--fran\,cais>}
%t Cambodian--French dictionary
%C Hongkong
%I Imprimerie de la Soci\'et\'e des Missions Etrang\'eres, 48
%Z 386p.

%A Bernard,, Theos
%D 1943
%T <A simplified grammar of the literary Tibetan language>
%C Santa Barbara
%I Tibetan Text Society
%Z ix, 65p.

%A Bernardi,, A.
%A Zach,, Erich von
%D 1919
%T {\germ Einige Bemerkungen \"uber Si-hia-schrift und -Sprache}
%t Some remarks on Si-hia writing and language
%J <Ostasiatische Zeitschrift>
%V 7
%P 232-8

%A Bernath,, Frances A.
%D 1964
%T <Catalogue of Thai language holidays in the Cornell University Libraries through 1964>
%S <Cornell University Southeast Asia Program Data Paper>
%u 54
%Z 236p.

%A Bernatzik,, Emmy
%X see Bernatzik,, Hugo, and Emmy Bernatzik

%A Bernatzik,, Hugo
%D 1947, 1970
%T {\germ <Akha und Meau: Problem der angewandten Voelkerkunde in Hinterindien>}
%t ?
%C Innsbruck
%I Wagnerische Universitaets Buchdruckerei
%Z 2 vols.
%+ Translated into English 1970 by Alois Nagler, New Haven, Connecticut: Human Relations Area Files Press, 772p.
%O Ethnographic information on TB: Akha, Lahu Shi, Lisu; TK: Siamese; MY: Miao

%A Bernatzik,, Hugo
%A Bernatzik,, Emmy
%D 1938
%T {\germ <Die Geister der gelben Blatter. Forschungsreisen in Hinterindien>}
%t The spirits of the yellow leaves. Research expeditions in Farther India
%C M\"unchen
%I F. Br\"uckmann
%Z 240p. 104 plates, 2 maps
%O 180-word vocabulary of Phi Tong Luang [Mlabri], 237-40 - SJS

%A Bernatzik,, Hugo
%A Bernatzik,, Emmy
%D 1955
%T {\fr <Les esprits des feuilles jaunes>}
%t The spirits of the yellow leaves
%C Paris
%Z 240p. (Translation of 1938 by A. Tournier, with notes by G. Condominas)

%A Bernatzik,, Hugo
%A Bernatzik,, Emmy
%D 1958
%T <The spirits of the yellow leaves>
%C London
%I Robert Hale
%O (Translation of 1938 by E. W. Dickes)

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1957-58
%T {\fr Rapports phon\'etiques entre le dialecte marma et le birman}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 53
%P 273-94

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1958
%T {\fr <Birmanie: Musique classique et populaire>}
%t Burma: Classical and popular music
%S {\fr <L.D. 21 Musee de l'Homme>}
%C Paris
%I Mus\'ee de l'Homme, Department d'Ethnomusicologie
%Z 1 sound disc: 33 1/3 rpm; 7 inch
%O Contents: {\fr Musique classique: Yodaya (air siamois accompagnant un poeme birman. Musique de cour. Hautbois, tambour suspendu a 2 peaux, batterie circulaire de tambours a membrane, cymbales, gongs, claquettes de bambou (fragment)) -- Tedat (poeme d'amour. Chant de femme, xylophone, flute claquettes de bambou, paire de clochettes entrechoquees) -- Bondauk (musique de theatre. Chant d'homme, hautbois tambour suspendu a 2 peaux, batterie circulaire de tambours a membrane, cymbales, gons, claquettes de bambou (3eme partie) -- Province d'Arakan: Yadu (poeme lyrique. Chant d'homme (1ere partie)) -- Don tegyin (poeme epique. Chant de femme) -- Birmanie centrale: Yadu (poeme lyrique. Chant d'homme, xylophone) -- Le jasmin (chant populaire. Chant de femme)}
%# UCLA Ethno Arc ARLP 602
%% Needs french diacritics ??

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1959
%T {\fr Deux letters du vice-roi d'Arakan au sujet du rebelle king-Bering}
%t ?
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 47
%P 395-422
%O Burmese literature of about 1812; transcription, translation, and commentary

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1961
%T Review of Min Naing, {\fr <Les groupes ethnolinguistique de Birmanie>}
%J <Homme>
%V 1
%N 1
%P 134-8

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1963
%T {\fr Equisse d'une description phonologique du birman}
%t Sketch of a phonological description of Burmese
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 58
%N 1
%P 164-224

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1963
%T Review of Shorto, <Dictionary of modern spoken Mon>
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 50
%N 1-3
%P 355-9

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1965
%T The vowel systems of Arakanese and Tavoyan
%E Milner,, G. B.
%E Henderson,, Eug\'enie J. A.
%B <Indo-Pacific linguistic studies>
%S <Lingua>
%u 14-15
%C Amsterdam
%I North Holland Publishing Co.
%V 2
%P 463-74

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1968
%T {\fr <Bibliographie birmane, ann\'ees 1950-60>}
%t Burmese bibliography, years 1950-60
%S {\fr <Atlas ethno-linguistique, 3. s\'erie: Bibliographies>}
%C Paris
%I Centre de Documentation et de Recherche sur l'Asie due Sud-Est et le Monde Insulindien, Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales
%Z 231p.
%R Reviewed by Filliozat, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 57(1970): 219-21
%R Reviewed by Musgrave, <Journal of Asian Studies> 28(1969).4:902-3
%R Reviewed by Okell, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 32 (1969).1:200-1
%R Reviewed by Silverstein, J., <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 89(1969).3:677

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1969
%T Review of Henderson, <Tiddim Chin>
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 63
%N 2
%P 324-7

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1969
%T Review of Henderson, <Tiddim Chin>
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 54
%N 1-3
%P 224-6

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1969
%T {\fr L'orientation du proc\'es en birman}
%t ?
%J <Revue de l'Ec\^ole nationale des langues orientales>
%V 5
%P 97-112

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1970
%T Review of Okell, <A reference grammar of colloquial Burmese>
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 57
%P 221-4

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1970
%T Review of Okell, <A reference grammar of colloquial Burmese>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 33
%N 3
%P 671-2

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1971
%T {\fr L'\'epith\'ete en birman: contribution \`a l'\'etude des langues sans cat\'egorie adjectivale}
%t The epithet in Burmese: contribution to the study of languages without the adjective category
%J <La linguistique>
%V 7
%N 1
%P 41-53

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1971-72
%T Review of Cornyn and Roop, <Beginning Burmese>
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 66
%P 368-70

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1972
%T {\fr Contribution \`a la linguistique et \`a l'ethnographie des Intha Birmanie: une conte <'engsha>}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 3
%N 3
%P 9-26

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1972
%T {\fr Quelques correspondences entre maru et birman}
%t Some correspondences between Maru and Burmese
%E Barrau,, Jacques
%E et al.
%B {\fr <Langues et techniques, nature et soci\'et\'e (Volume presented to Andr\'e G. Haudricourt on his 60th birthday>})
%b ?
%C Paris
%I Klincksieck
%V I
%P 35-40

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1973
%T {\fr Unicit\'e syntaxique de la proposition en birman}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 68
%N 1
%P 249-53

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1973
%T {\fr <Le predicat en birman parl\'e>}
%t The predicate in spoken Burmese
%U Doctorat d'\'etat, Universit\'e Paris
%Z 447p.
%O At the Biblioth\'eque de la Sorbonne, catalog no. (1973)123-4

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1975
%T Influence of Burmese language on some other languages of Burma (writing systems and vocabulary)
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 63
%N 2
%P 96-109

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1976
%T Review of Mazaudon, {\fr <Phonologie tamang>}
%J <L'Homme>
%V 16
%P 171-2

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1979
%T {\fr Un point de syntaxe birmane}
%t A point on Burmese syntax
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1980
%T {\fr N\'eologismes en birman et en birman quotidien}
%t ?
%J <Journ\'ees d'\'etudes> (Sorbonne, Universit\'e de Paris)
%V 3
%P 5-14

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1980
%T {\fr <Le predicat en birman parl\'e>}
%t The predicate in spoken Burmese
%S {\fr <Langues et civilisations de l'Asie du Sud-Est et monde insulindien>}
%u 8
%C Paris
%I Soci\'et\'e d'Etudes Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de France
%Z 381p.

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1982
%T Are there adjectival and adverbial categories in the Burmese language?
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D 1982
%T {\fr <Bibliographie birmane, ann\'ees 1960-70>}
%t Burmese bibliography, years 1960-70
%? avec la collaboration de Gilles Garachon, et al.
%C Paris
%I Editions de la Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
%Z v.1, fascicle 1-2 (581p.); v. 2, fasc. 1-2 (xxvii, 643p.)

%A Bernot,, Denise
%D forthcoming
%T {\fr Litt\'erature birmane}
%t Burmese literature
%B {\fr <Dictionnaire des litt\'eratures>}
%b Dictionary of literatures
%C Paris
%I Tchou

%A Bernot,, Denise
%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1958
%T {\fr <Les Khyang des collines de Chittagong (Pakistan oriental), Mat\'eriaux pour l'\'etude linguistique des Chin>}
%t The Khyang of the Chittagong Hills (East Pakistan), materials for the linguistic study of Chin
%S {\fr <L'Homme>}
%u nouvelle s\'erie, 3
%C Paris
%I Plon
%Z 151p.
%R Reviewed by Ayoub, <American Anthropologist> 61(1959):1127-8
%R Reviewed by Bessaigner, ed., <Social Research in East Pakistan> (<Asiatic Society of Pakistan>, publication no. 5), Dacca: Asiatic Society of Pakistan (1960):374-5
%R Reviewed by Bright, <Language> 36(1960):184-6
%R Reviewed by Henderson, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 23(1960).2:429-30
%R Reviewed by L\"offler, <Anthropos> 56(1961):313
%R Reviewed by <Zeitschrift f\"ur Ethnologie> 84(1959):257-69
%R Reviewed by Shafer, <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 79 (1959):139-40

%A Bernot,, Denise
%A Condominas,, G.
%A et al.
%D 1972
%T {\fr Poivre et piment in asie du Sud-Est continentale et insulaire}
%t Pepper and chili in continental and island South-East Asia
%E Barrau,, Jacques
%E et al.
%B {\fr <Langues et techniques, nature et soci\'et\'e (Volume presented to Andr\'e G. Haudricourt on his 60th birthday>})
%b ?
%V II
%P 207-47
%O Annotated list of names

%A Bernot,, Denise
%A Mignot,, Lieu
%D 1980
%T {\fr `C'est bien ce que je pensait', et autres histoires pas s\'erieuses}
%t ?
%B {\fr <Cheminements: \'ecrits offerts \`a George Condominas>}
%b ?
%S {\fr <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>}
%V 11
%N 1-4
%P 529-37

%A Bernot,, Denise
%A Pemaungtin,, Brenda
%D 1966
%T {\fr Le vocabulaire concret du birman et les notions abstraites}
%t ?
%J <Revue de l'Ec\^ole nationale des langues orientales>
%V 3
%N 1
%P 1-18

%A Bernot,, Denise
%A Sribnai,, Jean-Pierre
%A Daw Yin Yin Myint
%A et al.
%D 1978-90
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire birman--fran\,cais>}
%t Burmese--French dictionary
%S {\fr <Langues et civilisations de l'asie du Sud-Est et du monde insulindien>}
%u 3
%C Paris
%I Soci\'et\'e d'Etudes Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de France
%Z 14 vols.

%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1958
%X see Bernot,, Denise, and Lucien Bernot

%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1960
%T Ethnic groups of the Chittagong Hill Tracts
%E Bessaignet,, Pierre
%B <Social Research in East Pakistan>
%S <Asiatic Society of Pakistan>
%u publication no. 5
%C Dacca
%I Asiatic Society of Pakistan
%P 137-71
%O Ethnographic and demographic information on the TB: Marma, Chakma, Tanchingya, Sak, Tippera, Mrung, Mru, Khyang, Banjogi, Khami, Lushei, Lakher, and Shendu

%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1966
%T {\fr El\'ements de vocabulaire \,Cak recueilli dans le Pakistan Oriental}
%t Elements of Sak vocabulary gathered in East Pakistan
%E Ba Shin
%E Boisellier,, Jean
%E Griswold,, A. B.
%B <Essays offered to G. H. Luce>
%S <Artibus Asiae, Supplementum>
%u XXIII, vols. I and II
%C Leiden
%I E. J. Brill
%V I
%P 67-91

%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1967
%T {\fr <Les \,Cak: contribution \`a l'\'etude ethnographie d'une population de langue loi>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Centre de Documentation sur l'Asie du Sud-Est, Atlas ethnolinguistique, Deuxi\'eme s\'erie, monographies>}
%u 1
%C Paris
%I Editions du centre de la recherche Scientifique
%Z 267p.
%R Reviewed by Barua, T.K., <T'oung Pao> 55(1969).1:235-8
%R Reviewed by Kauffmann, H., <Journal of the Siam Society> 57 (1969).1:179-83
%R Reviewed by L\"offler, <Tribus> 17(1968):200-1
%R Reviewed by Shorto, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 32(1969).2:412-4

%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1967
%T {\fr <Les paysans arakanais du pakistan oriental>}
%t The Arakanese peasants of East Pakistan
%Z 2 vols.
%C The Hague

%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1971
%T {\fr Atlas ethnolinguistique}
%t Ethnolinguistic atlas
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 2
%N 2
%P 1-15
%O TB

%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1971
%T {\fr Les langues tib\'eto-birmanes}
%t The Tibeto-Burman languages
%B {\fr <Ou en est l'atlas ethnolinguistique?>}
%b ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 2
%N 4
%P 11-24

%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1972
%T {\fr Contribution \`a la linguistique et \`a l'ethnographie des Intha (Birmanie): les iles flottantes de Inl\'e}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 3
%N 3
%P 1-8

%A Bernot,, Lucien
%D 1972
%T {\fr Pr\'esentation des feuilles de cartes de la famille tib\'eto-birmane et Cartes repli\'es et hors-texte, des langues et des mots <chien, dent, sel>}
%t ?
%B {\fr <Ou en est l'atlas ethnolinguistique?> (fascicle 3)}
%b ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 3
%N 4
%P 5-6

%A Berton,, L.
%D 1959
%T <Soviet works on Southeast Asia: a bibliography of non-periodical literature 1946-65>
%S <School of Politics and International Relations, University of Southern California, Far Eastern and Russian Research Series>
%u 3
%C Los Angeles
%I University of Southern California Press
%Z 201p.
%R Reviewed by McAlister, <Journal of Asian Studies> 28(1969).3:643-4
%R Reviewed by Shorto, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 32(1969).2:463-4

%A Bertrais-Carrier,, Fr. Yves
%D 1964, 1979
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire Hmong (m\'eo Blanc)--Fran\,cais>}
%t Hmong (White Meo) and French dictionary
%C Vientiane, Laos
%I Mission Catholique
%Z 600p.
%+ Reprinted 1979, Bankok: Assumption Press

%A Bessaignet,, Pierre
%D 1958
%T <Tribesmen of the Chittagong Hill Tracts>
%S <Asiatic Society of Pakistan Publication>
%u 1
%C Dacca
%I Asiatic Society of Pakistan.
%O Ethnographic information on the Tanchangya, Mogh, Chakma, and Mru
%R Reviewed by Dani, in Bessaignet,, Pierre, ed., <Social Research in East Pakistan> (<Asiatic Society of Pakistan>, publication no. 5), Dacca: Asiatic Society of Pakistan: 372-3

%A Bessaignet,, Pierre
%D 1960
%T Tribes of the northern border of East Pakistan
%E Bessaignet,, Pierre
%B <Social Research in East Pakistan>
%S <Asiatic Society of Pakistan>
%u publication no. 5
%C Dacca
%I Asiatic Society of Pakistan
%P 172-233
%O Ethnographic and demographic information on the Garo, Meithei, Tippera (TB) and the Khasi and Munda (AA)

%A Bessaignet,, Pierre
%D 1960
%T Review of Bernot and Bernot, {\fr <Les Khyangs des collines de Chittagong>}
%E Bessaignet,, Pierre
%B <Social Research in East Pakistan>
%S <Asiatic Society of Pakistan>
%u publication no. 5
%C Dacca
%I Asiatic Society of Pakistan
%P 374-5

%A Bevan,, T. W.
%X see Halladay and Bevan

%A Bhaduri,, Manindra Bhusan
%D 1931
%T <A Mundari--English dictionary>
%C Calcutta
%I Calcutta University Press
%Z 229p.

%A Bhamoraput,, Amara
%X see Amara Bhamoraput

%A Bhaopichitr,, Kamol
%X see Kamol Bhaopichtr

%A Bhaskara Pao,, Peri
%D 1969
%T Gadaba phonology
%J <Linguistic Survey Bulletin>
%V 14
%P 5:8
%O Gutob

%A Bhat,, D. N. Shankara
%D 1967
%T Some notes on Manipuri
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Calcutta>
%V 9
%P 12-17
%O Meithei

%A Bhat,, D. N. Shankara
%D 1968
%T <Boro vocabulary (with a grammatical sketch)>
%S <Deccan College Building Centenary and Silver Jubilee Series>
%u 59
%C Poona
%I Deccan College and Postgraduate Research Institute
%Z xii, 100p.
%+ Also published 1966-67, <Bulletin of the Deccan College Research Institute> 27.3-4:79-182
%O Tangkhul
%R Reviewed by Matisoff, <Language> 48(1972).2:476-9
%R Reviewed by Sprigg, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 34(1971).2: 427-8

%A Bhatia,, Kanta
%D 1981
%T <Doctoral dissertations on South Asia at the Univerity of Pennsylvania, 1898-1981>
%S <Occ. Papers, South Asia Regional Studies>
%C Philadelphia
%I University of Pennsylvania
%Z 249p.

%A Bhatnagar,, S. P.
%X see Burman,, B. K. Roy, ed., Bhatnagar and Banerjee

%A Bhattacharjee,, Prafulla Kr.
%D 1980
%T Tribal movement and process of conflict resolution in Nagaland
%E Dubey,, S. M. P.
%E Bodoloi,, K.
%E Borthakur,, B. N.
%B <Family, marriage, and social change on the Indian fringe>
%P 239-64

%A Bhattacharya,, Kamaleswar
%D 1962
%T {\fr <Recherches sur le vocabulaire des inscriptions sanskrites du Cambodge>}
%t Studies on the vocabulary of the Sanskrit inscriptions of Cambodia
%U Doctorat es-Lettres, U. Paris
%Z 131p.

%A Bhattacharya,, Kamaleswar
%D 1964
%T {\fr Recherches sur le vocabulaire des inscriptions sankrites du Cambodge}
%t Studies on the vocabulary of the Sanskrit inscriptions of Cambodia
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 53
%N 1
%P 273-8

%A Bhattacharya,, Kamaleswar
%D 1969
%T {\fr Suppl\'ement aux Recherches sur le vocabulaire des inscriptions sanskrites du Cambodge}
%t Supplement to studies on the vocabulary of the Sanskrit inscriptions of Cambodia
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 55
%P 145-52

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1954
%T Numeral definitives in the Bodo language of Assam
%J <Journal of Gauhati University>
%V 5
%P 1-13

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1955-56
%T Glimpses from Bodo folk songs
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 17
%P 240-44
%O Texts with translation

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1956
%X see Burling and Bhattacharya

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1957
%T <Boro folk songs and tales> {\? see melvyl entry}
%C Gauhati
%I New Press
%Z 52p.
%O In Bodo, with English translation

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1971
%T An introduction to the Boro language
%J <Assam Academy Review>
%V 1
%P 75-85
%O Bodo

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1975
%T Sino-Tibetan (Boro) elements in Assamese, Bengali, and North-Eastern Indic languages
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 36
%N 3
%P 240-6
%O Bodo

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1977
%T <A descriptive analysis of the Boro language>
%C Gauhati
%I Gauhati University Department of Publications
%Z 23, 380p., 2 maps
%O Bodo
%+ Originally presented as the author's thesis, University of Gauhati, 1965
%R Reviewed by Sprigg, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 42(1979).2:393-4

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1979
%T Phonemic features of Boro elements - a Sino-Tibetan language of India
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)
%O Bodo

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1979
%T Sino-Tibetan Boro elements in Indo-Aryan Assamese
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)
%O Bodo

%A Bhattacharya,, Pramod Chandra
%D 1982
%T Boro and Dimasa: two Sino-Tibetan languages of Assam in North Eastern India
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking), read by title only
%O Bodo

%A Bhattacharya,, Shyamsundar
%D 1975
%X see Das Gupta,, D., and Bhattacharya

%A Bhattacharya,, Shyamsundar
%D 1976
%T Classifiers in Tripuri
%J <Indian Journal of Linguistics>
%V 3
%N 1
%P 20-6
%O Tippera

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1954
%T Studies in the Parengi language
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 14
%N 3
%P 45-63
%O Gorum

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1955-56
%T Field notes on Nah\=ali
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 17
%P 245-58
%O Nihali

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1965
%T Glottal stop and checked consonants in Bonda
%J <Indo-Iranian Journal>
%V 9
%P 69-71
%O Remo

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1966
%T Some Munda etymologies
%E Zide,, Norman H.
%B <Studies in comparative Austroasiatic linguistics>
%S <Indo-Iranian monographs>
%u 5
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%P 28-40

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1968
%T <A Bonda (Remo) dictionary>
%C Poona
%I Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Institute, 212p.
%R Reviewed by Zide,, N., <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 92(1972).4:506-13

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1968
%T Some more Munda etymologies
%E Heesterman,, J. C.
%E Schokker,, G. H.
%E Subramorian,, V. I.
%B <{\skt Pratid\=anam}: Indian, Iranian, and Indo-European studies presented to Franciscus Bernardus Jacobus Kuiper on his 60th birthday>
%S <Janua linguarum, series major>
%u 24
%C The Hague and Paris
%I Mouton
%P 362-70

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1970
%T Kinship terms in the Munda languages
%J <Anthropos>
%V 65
%N 3-4
%P 444-65

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1970
%T The Munda languages and Southeast Asia
%J <Bulletin of the Indian Institute of Advanced Study>
%V 4
%N 3
%P 23-31

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1972
%T Dravidian and Munda
%E Agesthialingom,, I.
%E Shanmugam,, S. V.
%B <Third seminar on Dravidian linguistics> (Department of Linguistics publication no. 27)
%C Annamalainagar
%I Annamalai U
%P 241-56

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1975
%T Linguistics convergence in the Dravido-Munda culture area
%J <International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics>
%V 4
%N 2
%P 199-214

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1975
%T Munda studies: a new classification of Munda
%J <Indo-Iranian Journal>
%V 17
%P 97-101

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1975
%T <Studies in comparative Munda linguistics>
%C Simla
%I Indian Institute of Advanced Studies
%Z 205p.

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1976
%T Gender in the Munda languages
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%E Thompson,, Laurence C.
%E Starosta,, Stanley
%B <Austroasiatic studies>
%S <Oceanic Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 13
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%V I
%P 189-212

%A Bhattacharya,, Sudhibushan
%D 1977
%T The Munda languages in ancient India
%J <Journal of Ancient Indian History>
%V 55
%N 1-2
%P 25-33

%A Bhattacharya,, Vidhushekahra
%D 1939
%T <{\tib Bho\.ta-prak\=a\'sa}: a Tibetan chrestomathy, with introduction, skeleton grammar, notes, texts and vocabularies>
%C Calcutta
%I University of Calcutta
%Z lix, 578p.
%O Tibetan texts with Sanskrit translation, and one with English translation - BSTL

%A Bhinyo,, Chittatham
%D 1974
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=a (??) thin>}
%t Dialects (of Thai)
%C Songkhla
%I Songkhla Printers
%Z 177p.
%+ 1st ed. 1970
%O Comparative phonol. of Thai dialects

%A Bhongbhibhat,, Napa
%X see Napa Bhongbhibhat

%A Bhruksasri,, Wanat
%X see Wanat Bhruksasri

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%D 1978
%T Directional modification in Thai fiction: the uses of `come' and `go' in text building
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 11 (University of Arizona, Tucson)

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%D 1979
%T Thai tones and English loanwords: a proposed explanation
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 13 (University of Virginia, Charlottesville)

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%D 1981
%T <A linguistic study of a Thai literary classic>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Michigan
%Z 253p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 42/09A, p. 3979; University Microfilms 82-04597

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%D 1982
%T Thai literature and historical linguistics
%M paper presented to the Department of Anthropology, University of Chicago

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%D 1983
%T Linguistic analysis of a Thai literary classic
%M Council on Thai Studies, Annual meeting, DeKalb, IL, Northern Illinois University

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%D 1984
%T Linguistic analysis and Thai literary studies: the need for a new beginning
%M Chiengmai Symposium on Language and Linguistics, Chiengmai University, January 12-14

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%D 1984
%T Literary studies and historical reconstruction: the case of Thai
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 17 (University of Oregon, Eugene), read by title only

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%D forthcoming
%T Review of Kuo, W., <Teaching grammar of Thai>
%J <Journal of Asian Studies>

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%A Hudak,, Thomas J.
%D forthcoming
%T The myth of Standard Thai
%E Capola,, Carlo
%B <The city in South and Southeast Asian literature>
%C ?
%I ?
%P ?

%A Bickner,, Robert J.
%A Hudak,, Thomas J.
%A Patcharin Peyasantiwong
%D 1986
%T <Papers from a conference on Thai studies in honor of William J. Gedney>
%S <Michigan Papers on South and Southeast Asia>
%u 25
%C Ann Arbor
%I University of Michigan, Center for South and Southeast Asian Studies
%Z ix, 265p., ill., maps
%O To include the papers now labeled <CTSWJG> 1978 {\? identify?}
%# UCB S-S/EAsia PL4152 .P36 1986

%A Bielstein,, Hans
%D 1947
%T The census of China during the period 2-742 A.D.
%J <Bulletin of the Museum for Far Eastern Antiquities>
%V 19
%P 125-63

%A Bieri,, Dora
%D 1971, 1973
%T Schulze and Bieri

%A Bieri,, Dora
%D 1973
%X see Sunwar, Bieri, and Schulze

%A Bieri,, Dora
%D 1975
%T <Is Sunwar a pronominalized language?>
%C Kathmandu
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z mimeo.

%A Bieri,, Dora
%D 1978
%T Covariance relations in Sunwar
%E Grimes,, Joseph E.
%B <Papers on discourse>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications in linguistics and related fields>
%u 51
%C Arlington, TX
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 369-79
%O Sunwari

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%D 1969
%T <Sunwar phonemic summary>
%S <Tibeto-Burman phonemic summaries>
%u 6
%C Kirtipur
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%e mimeo.
%Z 31p.

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%D 1970
%T Sunwar texts
%E Hale,, Austin
%E Pike,, Kenneth L.
%B <Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman languages of Nepal>
%S <Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics>
%u 3
%C Urbana
%I University of Illinois
%V IV
%P 283-92

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%D 1970
%T Sunwar segmental synopsis
%E Hale,, Austin
%E Pike,, Kenneth L.
%B <Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman languages of Nepal>
%S <Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics>
%u 3
%C Urbana
%I University of Illinois
%V I
%P 328-44

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%D 1970
%T Sunwar tone and higher levels
%E Hale,, Austin
%E Pike,, Kenneth L.
%B <Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman languages of Nepal>
%S <Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics>
%u 3
%C Urbana
%I University of Illinois
%V I
%P 70-85

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%D 1971
%T <A guide to Sunwar tone>
%S <Guides to tone in Nepal>
%u 4
%C Kathmandu
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%Z 38p.

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%D 1971
%T <Independent declarative clause types in Sunwar>
%C Kirtipur
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 28p., mimeo.

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%D 1971
%T <Sunwar phonemic summary>, revised version
%S <Tibeto-Burman phonemic summaries>
%u 9
%C Kirtipur
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%Z 38p. mimeo.
%+ Also published Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 1 mf.

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%D 1971
%T <A vocabulary of the Sunwar language>
%S <Comparative vocabularies of the languages of Nepal>
%C Kirtipur
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%Z 40p.
%+ Also published Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 1 mf.

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%D n.d.
%T Clause patterns in Sunwar
%M ms.

%A Bieri,, Dora
%A Schulze,, Marlene
%A Hale,, Austin
%D 1973
%T An approach to discourse in Sunwar
%E Hale,, Austin
%B <Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal>
%C Kathmandu
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%V I
%P 401-62

%A Biet,, Alexandre
%D 1877
%T {\fr Vocabulaire lyssou recueilli \`a Ts\'ekou...}
%t Lisu vocabulary gathered from Tseku...
%J <M\'emoires de la Soci\'et\'e Acad\'emique Indochinoise>
%V 1
%P 21-41
%+ Also published 1879, St.-Quentin, 20p.

%A Bigandet,, Paul Ambrose
%D 1858
%T A comparative vocabulary of Shan, Kakying and Pa-laoung
%J <Journal of the Indian Archipelago> n.s.
%V 2
%P 221-32 {? SJS say 221-9}
%O Vocabulary: of Jinghpaw (TB), Shan (TK), and Palaung (AA)

%A Bigg-Wither,, F.
%D 1911
%T <A guide to the study of Shan>
%C Rangoon
%I American Baptist Mission Press
%Z xii, 235p.
%R Reviewed by Cochrane, <Journal of the Burma Research Society> 2(1912):107-12

%A Biligiri,, Hemmige Shriniwasarangachar
%D 1957
%X see Gumperz, in collaboration with H.S. Biligiri

%A Biligiri,, Hemmige Shriniwasarangachar
%D 1961
%T <A descriptive grammar of Kharia>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Deccan College
%+ Revision published 1965 as <Kharia - phonology, grammar, and vocabulary> Poona: Deccan College, xviii, 206p.

%A Biligiri,, Hemmige Shriniwasarangachar
%D 1965
%T The Sora verb, a restricted study
%E Milner,, G. B.
%E Henderson,, Eug\'enie J. A.
%B <Indo-Pacific linguistic studies>
%S <Lingua>
%u 14-15
%C Amsterdam
%I North Holland Publishing Co.
%V 2
%P 231-50

%A Biligiri,, Hemmige Shriniwasarangachar
%D 1965
%T <Kharia - phonology, grammar and vocabulary>
%S <Deccan College Building Centenary and Silver Jubilee Series>
%u 3
%C Poona
%I Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Institute
%Z xviii, 206p.
%+ Revision of Biligiri 1961
%R Reviewed by R. Harris, <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 87(1967).3:345-7
%R Reviewed by Pinnow, <Lingua> 18(1967).3:304-11

%A Biligiri,, Hemmige Shriniwasarangachar
%D n.d.
%T Soara {\? sic} constructions
%M unpublished ms.
%O Sora

%A Billard,, R.
%D 1965
%T {\fr Les cycles chronographiques chinois dans les inscriptions thaies}
%t The Chinese chronographic cycles in the Thai inscriptions
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 51
%N 2
%P 403-31

%A Bilmes,, Jack
%D 1975
%T Misinformation and ambiguity in verbal interaction: a northern Thai example
%E Rubin,, Joan
%B <Sociolinguistics in Southeast Asia>
%S <International Journal of the Sociology of Language>
%u 5; <Linguistics>, 165
%P 63-76

%A Bilmes,, Pongsuwan
%X see Gething and Bilmes

%A Binh Nguy\^en L\^oc
%D 1971
%T {\viet <Ngu\^on g\^oc Ma lai cua d\^an t\^oc Vi\^et Nam>}
%t The Malay origin of the Vietnamese people
%C Saigon
%I Bach B\^oc Xu\^at Ban
%Z 893p.
%R Reviewed by Nguy\^en Bat Tuy, <Ph\;u\;ong \-D\^ong> 14-15.8

%A Binh Nguy\^en L\^oc
%D 1974
%T {\fr A la recherche des Austroasiatiques par l'\'etude comparative des langues}
%t On Austroasiatic research for the comparative study of languages
%J <Vi\^et-Nam>
%V 8
%P 9-42

%A Binney,, Mrs. J. P.
%X see Wade and Binney

%A Bischoff,, F. A.
%D 1962
%T {\germ Der Zauberritus der Ucchu\.sm\=a, tibetisch und mongolisch (Tanjur-Text)}
%t ?
%J <Central Asiatic Journal>
%V 7
%P 205-11

%A Bischoff,, F. A.
%D 1965
%T {\fr Une incantation lamaique anti-chinoise}
%t An anti-Chinese Lamaic chant
%J <Central Asiatic Journal>
%V 10
%P 128-35
%O Rgya nag bgegs slog: Tibetan text, translation, and notes

%A Bischoff,, F. A.
%A Hartman,, Charles
%D 1972
%T Padmasambhava's invention of the <phur-bu>: {\fr Ms. Pelliot tib\'etain 44}
%B {\fr <Etudes tib\'etaines d\'edi\'ees \`a la m\'emoire de Marcelle Lalou>}
%b Tibetan studies dedicated to the memory of Marcelle Lalou
%C Paris
%I Adrien Maisonneuve
%P 11-28
%O Transcription with translation, glossary, and appendix, 14-16

%A Bismith,, Birendra Narayan
%D 1951
%T {\bodo <Khachari bima Khatha>}: {\assam <Kachari matri bhasha>}: {\eng <Kachari mother language>}
%C Goalpara, Rangjule, Assam
%O Elementary grammar and vocabulary; in Bodo and Assamese - BSTL

%A Bista,, Dor Bahadur
%D 1967
%T <People of Nepal>
%C Kathmandu
%I Ministry of Information and Broadcasting
%Z 176p.
%+ Reprinted 1972, Kathmandu: Ratna Pustak Bhandar

%A Bista,, Dor Bahadur
%A Shigero Iijima
%% reverse??
%A Hiroshi Ishii
%A Yasuhiko Nagano
%A Yoshio Nishi
%D 1982
%T <Anthropological and linguistic studies of the Gandaki area in Nepal>
%S <Monumenta Serindica>
%u 10
%C Tokyo
%I Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies
%Z 191p.

%A Biswas,, Sukumar
%D 1966
%T The use of substantive verbs in Khamti
%J <Bulletin of the Philological Society of Calcutta>
%V 6
%P 130-6

%A Bitard,, Pierre
%D 1952
%T {\fr Carte ethno-linguistique de la r\'egion de Voeunsai (Cambodge)}
%t Ethnolinguistic map of the region of Voeunsai (Cambodia)
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 27
%N 1
%P 5-7
%O Map: AA, TK, and MA

%A Bitard,, Pierre
%D 1956
%T {\fr Note sur le m\^on et les dialectes m\^on-khm\`ers (Etudes khm\`eres)}
%t Note on Mon and the Mon-Khmer dialects (Khmer studies)
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 31
%N 4
%P 303-8

%A Bitard,, Pierre
%D 1956
%T {\fr La l\'egende de Nang T\^eng On}
%t The legend of Nang T\^eng On
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 31
%N 2
%P 113-24

%A Bitard,, Pierre
%D 1958
%T {\fr Boua Rah, L\^egende Tay-lu}
%t Boua Rah, a Tay-lu legend
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 33
%N 4
%P 451-70
%O Tai L\"u

%A Black,, John
%D 1959
%T The inscriptions of Khao Prah Vihar
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 47
%N 1
%P 1-58

%A Blackwell,, George E.
%D 1954
%T <The Anglo-Karen dictionary> (based on the dictionary compiled by J. Wade and Mus. J. P. Binney, revised and abridged by Blackwell and Karen writers), Rangoon: Baptist Board of Publications
%Z 543p.

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1894
%T Early Indo-Chinese influence in the Malay Peninsula, as illustrated by some of the dialects of the aboriginal tribes
%J <Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 27
%P 21-56
%O AA: Comparative vocabulary of Aslian languages (Benua, Besisi, Endau, Johor, Mentra, Sakai, Semang, Senoi, Tembe) with various other MK languages (Bahnar, Bru, Chong, Hin, Khmer, Khmu, Lamet, Mi, Mon, Nanhang, Pnong, Por, Samre, Saoch, So, Souei, Stieng, and Vietnamese):27-40

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1902
%T A Malayan element in some of the languages of southern Indo-China
%J <Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 38
%P 1-28
%O Reference to Khmer, Cham, Jarai and Rad\'e

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1903
%T The comparative philology of the Sakai and Semang dialects of the Malay Peninsula - a review
%J <Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 39
%P 47-63
%O Review of Schmidt, `Die Sprachen der Sakai und Semang...', 1901

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1906
%X see Skeat and Blagden

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1907
%T The chronicle of Pegu: a text in the Mon language
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1907
%P 367-74

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1907
%T Review of Aymonier and Cabaton, {\fr <Dictionnaire \vcam--fran\,cais>}
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1907
%P 1986-96

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1909
%T From Central India to Polynesia: a new linguistic synthesis
%J <Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 53
%P 163-73
%O Review article on Schmidt, "Die Mon-Khmer-V\"olker", 1906

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1910
%T {\fr Quelques notions sur la phon\'etique du talain et son \'evolution historique}
%t Some thoughts on the phonetics of Talaing and its historical evolution
%J <Journal Asiatique>, 10. s\'erie
%V 15
%P 477-505
%O Mon

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1911
%T A preliminary study of the fourth text of the Myazedi inscriptions
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1911
%P 365-88
%O Pyu

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1912
%T Notes on Talaing epigraphy
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 2
%P 38-43
%O Mon

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1913
%T The classification of the Annamese language
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1913
%P 427-32
%O Supports Maspero's (1912) affiliation of Vietnamese with Thai

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1914
%T Etymological notes. I. Talaing. II. Mon and Rama\~n\~nadesa
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 4
%P 57-60

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1914
%T The Myazedi inscriptions
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1914
%P 1063-9

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1914
%T The transliteration of Old Burmese inscriptions
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 4
%P 136-9

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1915
%T Etymological notes. V. Krit. VI. Thaton. VII. Mon, Rman, R\=ama\~n\~na. IX. On certain Mon words
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 5
%P 25-7, 28-30

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1915
%T Some etymological notes: VIII. Some alleged Chinese words in Burmese
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 5
%P 27-8

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1916
%T {\burm Kla\~njo-khe:z\=u}
%t ?
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 6
%P 92-5
%O Burmese

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1917
%T The Pyu inscriptions
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 7
%P 37-44

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1919-36
%X see Duroiselle and Blagden

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1921
%X see Milne, with an intro. by Blagden

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1926-28
%X see Schebesta, translated by Blagden

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1929
%T Achinese and Mon-Khmer
%P 35-8

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1931
%X see Schebesta, translated by Blagden

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1940
%T Certain words of the Pegu language
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 30
%P 371-5
%O Mon

%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1940-42
%X see Edwards and Blagden

%A Blagonravova,, I. L.
%D 1963
%T {\rus Sposoby vyrazheniia atributivnoi sviazi v imennykh slovosochetaniiakh sovremennogo taiskogo iazyka}
%t Methods of expression of attributive connections in nominal word combinations in modern Thai
%E Serdiuchenko,, G. P
%B {\rus <Iazyki Kitaia i Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii>}
%b The languages of China and Southeast Asia
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 102-14

%A Blagonravova,, I. L.
%D 1964
%T {\rus Sposoby vyrazheniia atributivnoi sviazi v slovosochetaniiakh s glagol'nym i kachestvennym opredeleniem v sovremennom taiskom iazyke}
%t Ways of expressing attributive connections in word combinations with the verb and qualitative attributes in Thai
%J <Katkie soobshcheniia Instituta narodov Azii>
%V 68
%P 151-60

%A Blagonravova,, I. L.
%D 1966
%T {\rus <Atributivnye otnosheniia v sovremennom taiskom iazyke}>
%t Attributive relationships in modern Thai
%U Moscow, Institut narodov Azii Akademii nauk SSSR, Cand. in Philological Sciences

%A Blagonravova,, I. L.
%D 1967
%T {\rus Mesto kompozitivnykh obrazovanii v sisteme nominativnykh edinits sovremennogo taiskogo iazyka}
%t The place of compound formations in the system of nominative units in modern Thai
%E Gorgoniev,, Iu. A.
%E Morev,, L. N.
%E Solntsev,, N. V.
%B {\rus <Iazyki Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii>}
%b The languages of South-East Asia
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 239-48

%A Blagonravova,, I. L.
%D 1971
%T {\rus Differentsial 'nye priznake atributivnogo slovosochetaniia v taiskom iazyke}
%t Differential features of attributive word combinations in Thai
%E Rozhdestvenskii,, Iu. V.
%B {\rus <Vostochnaia filologiia: kharakterologicheskie issledovaniia>}
%b Eastern philology: typological studies
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 148-64

%A Blagonravova,, I. L.
%D 1971
%T {\rus O predsubstantivnoi pozicii klassifikatorov v sovremennom taiskom (siamskom) iazyke}
%t On the presubstantive position of classifiers in modern Thai
%E Alieva,, N. F.
%E Plam,, Iu. Ia.
%B {\rus <Iazyki Kitaia i Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii: Problemy sintasksisa>}
%b The languages of China and Southeast Asia: Syntactic problems
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 104-18

%A Blagonravova,, I. L.
%D 1974
%T {\rus Bytiinye predlozheniia s postpozitivnym podlezhanshchim v sovremennom taiskom iazyke}
%t Existential sentences with a postpositional subject in modern Thai
%E Plam,, Iu. Ia.
%E Alieva,, N. F.
%B {\rus <Iazyki Kitaia i Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii>}
%b The languages of China and Southeast Asia
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 54-78

%A Blagonravova,, I. L.
%D 1974
%T {\rus O grammaticheskom i leksicheskom znachenii klassifikatorov v sovremennom taiskom iazyke}
%t On the grammatical and lexical significance of classifiers in modern Thai
%E Plam,, Iu. Ia.
%E Alieva,, N. F.
%B {\rus <Iazyki Kitaia i Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii>}
%b The languages of China and Southeast Asia
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 78-88

%A Blah,, U Edington
%D 1966, 1971
%T <Chaplala's Anglo-Khasi dictionary>
%C Shillong
%I Chapala Book Stall
%Z 400p.
%+ revised ed. 1971

%A Blanchard,, Wendell
%A et al.
%D 1958
%T <Thailand: its people, its society, its culture>
%S <Country survey series>
%u 8
%C New Haven
%I Human Relations Area Files Press
%Z x, 528p.
%O Ethnic groups and languages 56-86

%A Blinov,, A. I.
%D 1956
%T {\rus K voprosu o sushchestvovanii austroaziatiskoi sem'i iazykov}
%t Towards the question of the existence of the Austroasiatic language family
%J <Sovetskoe Vostokovendenie>
%V 2
%P 153-7

%A Blofeld,, John
%D 1955
%T Some hill tribes of North Thailand (Miaos and Yaos)
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 43
%N 1

%A Blondeau,, Anne-Marie
%D 1972
%T {\fr <Mat\'eriaux pour l'\'etude de l'hippologie et de l'hippiatrie tib\'etaines, \`a partir des manuscrits de Touen-houang>}
%t Materials for the study of Tibetan hippology and hippiatry??, according to the manuscripts of Touen-houang
%S {\fr <Ec\^ole Pratique des Hautes Etudes, Paris, IVe section, S\'erie Hautes Etudes Orientales>}
%u 2
%C Paris
%I Minard
%Z 428p.

%A Blondeau,, Anne-Marie
%D 1973
%T {\fr Cinquante ans d'orientalisme en France. Les \'etudes tib\'etaines}
%t ? years of Orientology in France. Tibetan studies
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 261
%P 153-74

%A Blondeau,, Anne-Marie
%D 1979
%T Review of Helffer, {\fr <Les chants de l'\'epop\'ee tib\'etaine>}
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 267
%P 221-5

%A Blood,, David L.
%D 1962
%T A problem in Cham sonorants
%J <Zeitschrift f\"ur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft, und Kommunikationsforschung>
%V 15
%P 111-14

%A Blood,, David L.
%D 1964
%T Applying the criteria of patterning in Cham phonology
%J <V\uan-hoa Nguy\^et-san>
%V 13
%N 4
%P 515-20

%A Blood,, David L.
%D 1964
%T <Phonological units in Cham>
%U M.A. thesis, Indiana University
%O Abstract in <Anthropological Linguistics> 9.8:15-32 (1967)

%A Blood,, David L.
%D 1966
%X see Thomas,, David, Nhuy\^en \-Dinh Hoa, and David Blood

%A Blood,, David L.
%D 1967
%T Phonological units in Cham
%J <Anthropological Linguistics>
%V 9
%N 8
%P 15-32
%O Abstract of 1964 M.A. thesis, Indiana University

%A Blood,, David L.
%D 1974
%T Review of David Thomas, <Chrau grammar>
%J <Lingua>
%V 34
%N 2
%P 283-5

%A Blood,, David L.
%D 1977
%T A three-dimensional analysis of Cham sentences
%E Thomas,, David
%E Lee,, Ernest W.
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 4>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.48
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%V 4
%P 53-76

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%D 1961
%T <Cham--Vietnamese--English dictionary>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%D 1968
%T Eastern Cham anthropological notes, kinship
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics
%+ Also published Dallas: <Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications>, 1 mf., 1980

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%D 1971
%T <Cham dictionary>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/Vietnam Branch

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%D 1980
%T <Eastern Cham ethnographic texts>
%C Dallas
%I <Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications>
%Z 5 mf.

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%D 1980
%T <Eastern Cham field notes; doublets>
%C Dallas
%I <Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications>
%Z 6 mf.

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%D 1980
%T <Eastern Cham working dictionary>
%C Dallas
%I <Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications>
%Z 3 mf.

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%D 1980
%T <Romanization of the Cham language>
%C Dallas
%I <Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications>
%Z 1 mf.

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%D n.d.
%T <Eastern Cham ethnographic field notes and kinship system>
%C ?
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 1 mf.

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%D n.d.
%T <Eastern Cham field notes on phonemic distribution>
%C ?
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 1 mf.

%A Blood,, David
%A Blood,, Doris
%A Thi\^en Sanh Canh
%D 1976
%T <Eastern Cham vocabulary: Eastern Cham--Vietnamese--English thesaurus, a computer printout>
%C Huntington Beach, CA
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 59p.
%+ Dallas: <Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications>, 2 mf.

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1961
%T Women's speech characteristics in Cham
%J <Asian Culture>
%V 3
%N 3-4
%P 139-43

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1961
%X see Blood,, David, and Doris Blood

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1962
%T Reflexes of Proto-Malayo-Polynesian in Cham
%J <Anthropological Linguistics>
%V 4
%N 9
%P 11-20

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1968
%X see Blood,, David, and Doris Blood

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1971
%X see Blood,, David, and Doris Blood

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1976
%X see Blood,, David, Doris Blood, and Thi\^en Sanh Canh

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1976
%X see Thi\^en Sanh Canh, Thanh Pho Quy\^en, and Doris Blood

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1977
%T Clause and sentence final particles in Cham
%E Thomas,, David
%E Lee,, Ernest W.
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 4>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.48
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 39-51

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1978
%T Some aspects of Cham discourse structure
%J <Anthropological Linguistics>
%V 20
%N 3
%P 110-32

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1980
%T Aspects of Cham culture
%E Gregerson,, Marilyn
%E Thomas,, Dorothy
%B <Notes from Indochina on ethnic minority cultures>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Museum of Anthropology>
%u publication no. 6
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 11-34

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1980
%T Script as a cohesive factor in Cham society
%E Gregerson,, Marilyn
%E Thomas,, Dorothy
%B <Notes from Indochina on ethnic minority cultures>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Museum of Anthropology>
%u publication no. 6
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 35-44

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D 1980
%X see Blood,, David, and Doris Blood

%A Blood,, Doris E.
%D n.d.
%X see Blood,, David, and Doris Blood

%A Blood,, Doris
%A Thi\^en Sanh Canh
%D 1970
%T {\cham? <Aday bach akh\uar Ch\uam birau>}
%t Cham primer
%C Saigon
%I Department of Education
%Z 3 vols, 330p., illus.
%O In Cham and Vietnamese

%A Blood,, Evangeline E.
%D 1960
%T Final particles in Vietnamese
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics

%A Blood,, Evangeline E.
%D 1963
%T Some fauna terms in Mnong R\;ol\;om
%E Thomas,, David D.
%B <Papers on four Vietnamese languages>
%S <Te Reo reprints>
%u 2
%C Auckland
%I Linguistic Society of New Zealand
%P 23-7

%A Blood,, Evangeline E.
%D 1976
%T <Eastern Mnong vocabulary: Eastern Mnong--Vietnamese--English thesaurus, a computer printout>
%C Huntington Beach, CA
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 54p.
%+ Dallas, <Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications> 2 mf.

%A Blood,, Evangeline E.
%D 1961-76
%X see Blood,, Henry, and Evangeline Blood

%A Blood,, Evangeline E.
%D 1976
%X see Blood,, Henry, Evangeline Blood, and Y Tang Hmok

%A Blood,, Evangeline E.
%D 1980
%T Mnong L\uam texts on sacrifice and shamanism
%E Gregerson,, Marilyn
%E Thomas,, Dorothy
%B <Notes from Indochina on ethnic minority cultures>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Museum of Anthropology>
%u publication no. 6
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 45-60

%A Blood,, Henry F.
%D 1963
%T The vowel system of Uon Nju\~n Mnong R\;ol\;om
%J <V\uan-hoa Nguy\^et-san>
%V 12
%P 951-65

%A Blood,, Henry F.
%D 1967, 1968, 1974
%T <A reconstruction of Proto-Mnong>
%U M.A. thesis, Indiana University
%+ Also published 1968, Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota, 115p.; republished 1974, 122p. (Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 2 mf.)
%O Treats six Mnong dialects: Preh, Bun\;or, R\;ol\;om, Gar, Kua\~n, and Chil

%A Blood,, Henry F.
%D n.d.
%T Mnong language texts
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Blood,, Henry F.
%D n.d.
%T Mnong Lam thesaurus
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Blood,, Henry F.
%D 1976
%T The phonemes of Uon Nju\~n Mnong R\;ol\;om
%J <Mon-Khmer Studies>
%V V
%P 4-24

%A Blood,, Henry F.
%D 1976
%T <Mnong R\;ol\;om field notes>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%P 10 mf.

%A Blood,, Henry
%A Blood,, Evangeline
%D 1961
%T <Mnong--Vietnamese--English dictionary>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/Vietnam Branch

%A Blood,, Henry
%A Blood,, Evangeline
%D 1966
%T The pronoun system of Uon Nju\~n Mnong R\;ol\;om
%J <Mon-Khmer Studies>
%V II
%P 103-11
%+ Also published 1965, <V\uan-hoa Nguy\^et-san> 14:1379-87

%A Blood,, Henry
%A Blood,, Evangeline
%D 1969
%T The origin of Dak Nue': a Mnong R\;ol\;om legend obtained from Mnom N\;om
%J <Mon-Khmer Studies>
%V II
%P 61-3
%O Text and translation

%A Blood,, Henry
%A Blood,, Evangeline
%D 1976
%T <Mnong R\;ol\;om ethnographic texts>
%C Huntington Beach, CA
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 619p.
%O Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 12 mf.

%A Blood,, Henry
%A Blood,, Evangeline
%A Y Tang Hmok
%D 1976
%T <Mnong R\;ol\;om dictionary>
%C Dallas
%I <Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications>
%Z 826p., 14 mf.

%A Blood,, Henry
%A Blood,, Evangeline
%A Y Tang Hmok
%D 1976
%T <Mnong R\;ol\;om dictionary and thesaurus>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 422, 155, 141p., 13 mf.

%A B\^o Giao Duc
%D 1968-69
%T {\bru <Doc parnai Br\~u: l\;op tapo\^at; Doc ti\^eng Bru: l\;op sau>}
%t Advanced Bru reader
%? Trung t\^am hoc li\^eu, B\^o Giao Duc
%% previous line insufficiently analyzed??

%A B\^o Giao Duc
%D 1972
%T {\? <Dok t\;otayh Jeh>}
%t Jeh primer
%C Saigon
%I Department of Education
%Z 3 vols., 311p., illus.
%O In Jeh and Vietnamese

%A Bo Yang
%D 1957
%T {\ch Zhuang yu jie han wen ti}
%t Questions about Chinese loanwords in Chuang
%J <Guangxi Ri Bao>
%V April 5 1957

%A Bochet,, Gilbert
%D 1951
%T {\fr <El\'ements de conversation franco--koho. Us et coutumes des montagnards de la province de Haut-Donnai>}
%t Elements of French--K\"oho conversation. Ways and customs of the Montagnards of Haut-Donnai province
%C Dalat
%I Service g\'eographique de l'Indochine
%Z 83p., illus., map

%A Bochet,, Gilbert
%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1953
%T {\fr <Lexique polyglotte: k\"oho, fran\,cais, vietnamien, r\;oglai>}
%t ?
%C Saigon
%I Editions France-Asie
%Z xxvi, 135p.
%R Reviewed by Smalley, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 47(1955):653-61

%A Bodding,, Paul Olaf
%D 1923-29
%T <Materials for a Santali grammar (Part 1: mostly phonetic, 1923; Part 2: mostly morphological, 1929)>
%C Benegaria
%I Santal Mission Press
%Z iv, 336p.

%A Bodding,, Paul Olaf
%D 1925-29
%T <Santal folk tales>
%Z 3 vols.
%C Oslo
%I Instituttet for Sammenlignende, Kulturforsning

%A Bodding,, Paul Olaf
%D 1926
%T The meaning of the words <buru> and <bongo> in Santali
%J <Journal of the Bihar and Orissa Research Society>
%V 12
%P 3-77, 286-8

%A Bodding,, Paul Olaf
%D 1929, 1944, 1952
%T <A Santali grammar for beginners>
%C Benegaria
%I Santal Mission Press
%e (1st ed. 1929, 2nd ed. 1944, 3rd ed. 1952)
%Z 121p.

%A Bodding,, Paul Olaf
%D 1929-36
%T <A Santal dictionary>
%Z 5 vols.
%C Oslo
%I I Kommisjon Hos Jacob Dybwab (Norwegian Acad. of Science and Letters)

%A Bodding,, Paul Olaf
%D 1944
%X see Skefsrud, translated by Bodding

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1967
%T China: historical linguistics
%E Sebeok,, Thomas A.
%B <Linguistics in East Asia and Southeast Asia>
%S <Current trends in linguistics>
%u 2
%C The Hague and Paris
%I Mouton
%P 3-58

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1969
%T A sampling of Chinese--Tibetan correspondences
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 2 (Columbia University, New York)

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1969
%T Tibetan <sdud> `folds of garment', the character {\# Chinese char}, and the *st- hypothesis
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 39
%P 327-45

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1970
%T Some Tibeto-Burman correspondences to Chinese <l-> and related matters
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 3 (Cornell University, Ithaca, NY)

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1971
%T Some phonological correspondences between Chinese and Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 4 (Indiana University, Bloomington)

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1972
%T Old Chinese <s>- clusters, some dialect alternatives, and traces of the Sino-Tibetan <s>- causative
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 5 (University of Michigan, Ann Arbor)

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1973
%T Some Chinese reflexes of Sino-Tibetan <s>- clusters
%J <Journal of Chinese Linguistics>
%V 1
%N 3
%P 383-96

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1974
%T Some random observations on Paul K. Benedict's `The Chinese *<s>- orgy'
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 7 (Georgia State University, Atlanta)

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1974
%T Tibetan evidence for the <*ps>-, <*ts>-, and <*ks>- origin of part of the Chinese <ch'\"u-sheng>
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 7 (Georgia State University, Atlanta)

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1975
%T Review of Benedict, <Sino-Tibetan: a conspectus>
%J <Linguistics>
%V 149
%P 89-97

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1975
%T Tibeto-Burman correspondence to the Chinese <teng> (divisions 1, 2, 3, 4) and the concept of `primary yod' in Sino-Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 8 (University of California, Berkeley)w

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1976
%T Syllabic types and yod in Sino-Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 9 (Copenhagen)

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1978
%T Old Chinese reflexes of Sino-Tibetan *<-{\# glottalstop}>, *<-:k> and related problems
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 11 (University of Arizona, Tucson)

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1980
%T Proto-Chinese and Sino-Tibetan: data towards establishing the nature of the relationship
%E Van Coetsam,, ??
%E Waugh,, Linda
%B <Contributions to historical linguistics: issues and materials>
%P 34-199
%O Reference to ST, TB: Bahing, Chepang, Khaling, Khulung, Magar, Tamang, Kanauri, Lhota Naga, Rawang, Adi, Garo, Gyarong, Jinghpaw, Lepcha, Mikir, Tangkhur, Thulung, Tibetan; AA: Khmu, Proto-Hre-Sedang, Proto-Mnong, Proto-North Bahnaric, Proto-Viet-M\;u\;ong, Proto-Wa; TK: Proto-Tai, Thai

%A Bodman,, Nicolas C.
%D 1985
%T Evidence for <l> and <r> medials in Old Chinese
%E Thurgood,, Graham
%E Matisoff,, James A.
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: the state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday>
%S <Pacific linguistics>
%u C.87
%C Canberra
%I Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University
%P 146-67
%O Reference to TB, TK, AA, MY, and VM loans in Old Chinese

%A Boell,, Paul Victor
%D 1899
%T {\fr <Contribution \`a l'\'etude de la langue lolo>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%Z 2, 21p.
%O Ahi, Nosa, Nyi - BSTL

%A Bofman,, Theodora Helene
%D 1978
%T The poetics of the <Ramakian>
%U Ph.D. dissertation (Linguistics), University of Michigan
%Z 354p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 39.19:6136-37A; University Microfilms 7907033
%% Spelling <Ramakian> vs <Ramakien> below, sic

%A Bofman,, Theodora Helene
%D 1984
%T <The poetics of the Ramakien>
%S <Monograph series on Southeast Asia>
%u <Spec. report 21>
%C DeKalb, Ill.
%I Northern Illinois University Center for Southeast Asian Studies
%Z 263p.
%% Spelling <Ramakien> vs <Ramakian> above, sic

%E Bogoliubov,, M. N.
%D 1964
%T {\rus <Voprosy grammatiki iazykov stran azii>}
%t Grammatical problems of Asian languages
%C Leningrad
%I Izd. Leningraskogo univ.
%Z 194p.
%O S

%A Bogoslovskii,, V. A.
%D 1958
%T {\rus K voprosu o nekotorykh terminakh v tibetskikh dokumentakh VII-IX vv}
%t On the question of some terms in Tibetan documents of the 7th-9th centuries
%B {\rus <Filologiia i istoriia mongol'skikh narodov>}
%b ?
%C Moscow
%P 323-32.

%A Bogoslovskii,, V. A.
%D 1960
%T {\rus O nalogovykh terminakh v tibetiskikh dokumentakh VII-XI vv}
%t On tax terms in Tibetan documents of the 7th-11th centuries
%B {\rus <Kitai, Iaponiia>}
%b ?
%C Moscow
%P 58-65

%A Bogoslovskii,, V. A.
%D 1966
%T Review of Roerich, {\rus <Tibetskii iazyk>}
%J <Norody Azii i Afriki>
%V 4
%P 242-3

%A Boham,, Noksam
%X see Kumar,, B., Wangjen, and Boham

%A Boisselier,, Jean
%X see Ba Shin, Boisselier, and Griswold

%A B\;oju Jrang
%A Fuller,, Eugene E.
%D 1974
%T Cross-cousin marriage as revealed in Chru kinship terminology
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 22p.
%O Glossary of Chru kinship terms

%A Boller,, A.
%D 1869
%T {\germ Die Pr\"afixe mit vocalischem und gutteralem Anlaute in den einsilbigen Sprachen}
%t Prefixes with with initial vowels and gutterals in monosyllabic languages
%J <Akademie der Wissenschafter, Wien>
%V 61
%P 445-91

%A Bolsokhoeva,, N. D.
%D 1971
%T {\rus Proshedshe vremia glagola v sovremennom tibetsom iazyke pri perevode na russkii iazyk}
%t Past tense of the Tibetan verb in Russian translation
%E Semichov,, B. V.
%B {\rus <Tibetika, Materialy tibetologicheskogo seminara>}
%b ?
%C Ulan-Ud\'e
%I Sibirskoe otdelenie, Buriatskii filial, In-t obshchestvennykh nauk
%P 14-17

%A Bolsolkhoeva,, N. D.
%D 1971
%T {\rus Vremia tibertskogo glagola v perevoda na russkii iazyk}
%t Tibetan verb tense in Russian translation
%E Semichov,, B. V.
%B {\rus <Tibetika, Materialy tibetologicheskogo seminara>}
%b ?
%C Ulan-Ud\'e
%I Sibirskoe otdelenie, Buriatskii filial, In-t obshchestvennykh nauk
%P 21-4

%A Bolozky,, S.
%D 1969
%T On `copying' in Shan and on some other matters
%M ms., University of Illinois Shan Project

%A Boltz,, William G.
%D 1968
%T Bibliography of Chinese materials on Tai linguistics
%J <Unicorn>
%V 2
%P 33-40

%A Bonaparte,, Roland Napol\'eon
%D 1895
%T {\fr <Documents de l'\'epoque mongole des XIIIe et XIVe si\`ecles>}
%t ?
%C Paris

%A Bondet de la Bernardie,, J.
%D 1949
%T {\fr Le dialecte des Kha Boloven}
%t The dialect of the Kha Boloven
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises> n.s.
%V 24
%N 3
%P 57-78
%O AA: Loven

%A Bonet,, Jean
%D 1899-1900
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire annamite--fran\,cais>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I Imprimerie nationale
%Z 2 vols., xxv, 440, 532p.

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1904
%T {\fr Les groups ethniques de la Rivi\`ere Claire}
%t ?
%J <Revue Indochinoise>
%V 2
%P 1-16
%O Deals with MY: Man Deo-tien (Man Tien), Man Ta-Pan (Man-Coc), Man Pateng, and Man Khsanh, with some general remarks on their languages

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1904-05
%T {\fr Monographie des Mans Quan-coc}
%t Monograph on the Quan-coc Man
%J <Revue Indochinoise>
%V 1904
%N 2
%P 726-34824-32; 1905.1:138-48
%O Courtship songs in Yao, with Chinese and French translations, 824-32

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1905
%T {\fr Etude sur les langues parl\'ees par les populations de la haute Rivi\`ere Claire}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 5
%P 306-27
%O Vocabulary, TK: Laqua, Lao, Man koanh, Th\^o; TB: Burmese, Chin, Hwethom, Kachin

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1905
%T {\fr Monographie des Mans Cao-lan}
%t Monograph on the Cao-lan Man
%J <Revue Indochinoise>
%V 1905
%N 2
%P 899-928
%O TK; ethnography

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1906
%T {\fr Etude sur les coutumes et la langue des La-ti}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 6
%P 271-8

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1907
%T {\fr Etude sur les Cao-Lan}
%t ?
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 8
%P 429-38
%O Provides a vocabulary of Tai words in Cao-lan (149 items, 429-32); comments on sound changes from Tai to Cao-lan (432-3), Cao-lan syntax (433-4), and Cao-lan writing (434-60)

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1907
%T {\fr Etude sur les T\`ay de la Rivi\`ere Claire, au Tonkin et dans la Chine m\'eridionale (Y\"unnan et Kouangsi)}
%t ?
%J <T'oung Pao>, 2. s\'erie
%V 8
%P 77-98
%O Vocabulary, TK: Gi\^ay (Dioi), Nung An Nung Ch\;u\;ong, Th\^o blanc, Th\^o noir, Trung ch\ua (Cao-lan), and Trung ch\ue (Chungchia) BSTL

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1908
%T {\fr Etude sur les coutumes et la langue des Lolo et des La-qua du Haut Tonkin}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 8
%P 531-58
%O Vocabulary, TB: Black Lolo, White Lolo M\;ung; TK: Laqua, Man Koanh (553-6)

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1908
%T {\fr Monographie de Pa-teng et des Na-\^e}
%t Monograph on the Pa-teng and the Na-\^e
%J <Revue Indochinoise>
%V 10
%P 696-706, 773-86

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1915
%T {\fr La f\^ete t\`ay du H\^o b\^o}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 15
%P 17-23

%A Bonifacy,, Auguste Louis
%D 1919
%T {\fr <Cours d'ethnographie indochinoise>, Profess\'e aux \'el\'eves de l'Ecole Superieure d'Agriculture et de Sylviculture}
%t ?
%C Hanoi-Haiphong
%I Imprimerie d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%Z 110p.

%A Bonin,, Charles-Eudes
%D 1897
%T {\fr Note sur un manuscrit mosso}
%t Note on a Mosso manuscript
%B <Actes 11e Congr. Or.>  {\? expansion?}
%P 1-10
%O Moso

%A Bonin,, Charles-Endes
%D 1903
%T {\fr Vocabulaires recuellis par C.-E.Bonin}
%t Vocabularies gathered by C.-E. Bonin
%J <T'oung Pao>, 2. s\'erie
%V 4
%P 117-26
%O 84-word vocabulary, with Vietnamese and French equivalents, recorded between Tourane and Attopeu, AA: Moi (Sedang); TB: Mau-tse (Lolo), Meli (Moso), Moso
%% SJS

%A Bonnerjea,, Biren
%D 1930
%T {\hung ??}
%t On the Munda languages of India
%J <Magyar Nyelvor>
%V 64
%P 99-102, 124-30

%A Bonnerjea,, Biren
%D 1935-36
%T Contribution to Garo linguistics and ethnology
%J <Anthropos>
%V 30(1935)/31(1936)
%P 509-32, 837-50/141-57, 456-69
%O Vocabulary, TB: Abeng, Atong, Garo, Jalpaiguri, Ruga

%A Bonnerjea,, Biren
%D 1936
%T Phonology of some Tibeto-Burman dialects of the Himalayan region
%J <T'oung Pao>, 2. s\'erie
%V 32
%P 238-58

%A Bonnerjea,, Biren
%D 1937
%T Morphology of some Tibetan-Burman dialects of the Himalayan region
%J <T'oung Pao>, 2. s\'erie
%V 33
%P 301-60

%A Boolva Kunjara,, M. L.
%X see Banchob and Boolva

%A Boon Chuey Srisavasdi
%D 1955(?)
%T {\thai <L\=u: khon thai nai prath\=e t c\=in (Thai sip song panna, lem 2)>}
%t L\"u: Thai of China (Thai of Sipsongpanna, vol.2)
%C Bangkok
%I Rong Phim Rap Phim
%Z 532p.
%O Glossary, 487-531

%A Boon Chuey Srisavasdi
%D 1963
%T <The hill tribes of Siam>
%C Bangkok
%I Khun Aroon

%A Boon Thom Boonyavong
%D 1962
%T <English--Lao dictionary>
%? compiled by Boon Thom Boonyavong, under the supervision of John de Noia, with technical assistance of G. Edward Roffe
%C Vientiane
%I Lao-American Association
%Z 367p.

%A Boonlua Debyasuvarn,, M. L.
%D 1973
%T The sociolinguistic situation in Thailand
%B <Report of the regional workshop on the feasibility of a sociolinguistic survey of Southeast Asia>
%P 78-9

%A Boonprakong,, Prasarn
%X see Prasarn Boonprakong

%A Boonprasert,, Chaluay
%X see Chaluay Boonprasert

%A Boonrueng,, Suthipon
%X see Suthipon Boonrueng

%A Boonsorn,, La-orsri
%X see La-orsri Boonsorn

%A Boonyavong,, Boon Thom
%X see Boon Thom Boonyavong

%A Boosakorn Tanticharusthum Vijchulata
%D 1978
%T <The surface syntactic structure of the simple clauses in Thai: a stratificational model with (deep) case hypothesis>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Florida
%Z 157p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 39.4:2227-A; University Microfilms 78-17, 464

%A Boonyuen,, Meethanee
%X see Meethanee Boonyuen

%A Bor,, N. L.
%D 1978
%T Yano Dafla grammar and vocabulary
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal - Let.> {\? Let.?}
%V 4
%P 217-81
%O Vocabulary, TB: Apa Tanang, Dafla, Tagen, Yano

%A Bor,, N. L.
%A Hutton,, J. H.
%D 1927
%T The use of tones in Sema Naga
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1927
%P 103-9

%A Bor,, N. L.
%A Pawsey,, C. R.
%D 1938
%T English--Sema vocabulary
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal - Let.> {\? Let.?}
%V 4
%P 309-49

%A Bora,, A.
%D 1978
%T <Miju dictionary>
%C Shillong
%I Research Department, Arunachal Pradesh Administration
%Z 210p.

%A Boriphandh Dhuraratsadorn,, Luang
%D 1923
%T The White Meo
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 17
%N 3
%P 153-89

%A Borovikov,, A. I.
%X see Kyin We and Borovikov

%A Borua,, Golap Chandra
%D 1920
%T <Ahom--Assamese--English dictionary>
%? compiled by Rai Sahib Golap Chandra Borua
%C Calcutta
%I Baptist Mission Press
%Z 327p.

%A Borua,, Golap Chandra
%D 1930
%T <Ahom-Buanji (with parallel English translation), from the earliest times to the end of Ahom rule>
%C Calcutta
%I Baptist Mission Press

%A Boscher,, Winfried
%D 1967
%X see H\^o Gia H\;u\;ong, \-D\^o Ngoan, and Winfried Boscher

%A Boscher,, Winfried
%A Phan Trung Li\^en
%D 1978
%T {\germ <W\"orterbuch Vietnamesisch--Deutsch>}
%t Vietnamese--German dictionary
%C Leipzig
%I VEB Verlag Enzyklop\"adie
%Z 738p.
%+ Also published 1980, M\"unchen, Hueber
%R Reviewed by Davidson, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 44(1981).1:207-9
%R Reviewed by Klinderova, <Archiv Orient\'al\'ni> 48(1980):260-1
%R Reviewed by Maier, <Zeitschrift f\"ur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft, und Kommunikationsforschung> 31(1978).6:652-3

%A Bose,, Jyotsna Kanta
%D 1934
%T The religion of the Aimol Kukis
%J <Man in India>
%V 14
%P 1-14
%O Names of Aimol gods, Aimol text of two short incantations, one translated, one summarized in English - BSTL

%A Bose,, Jyotsna Kanta
%D 1934
%T Social organization of the Aimol Kukis
%J <Journal of the Department of Letters, University of Calcutta>
%V 25
%P 1-24
%O Kinship terms, 8-9 - BSTL

%A Bose,, Jyotsna Kanta
%D 1936
%T The <nokrom> system of the Garos
%J <Man>
%V 36
%P 53-55
%O Explains the social terms <nokrom>, <chowary>, <jik-mamung>, <jik-mong-ma>, <jik-gite>, <mahari> - BSTL

%A Bouchet,, Alfred L.
%D 1925
%T {\fr <Cours \'el\`ementaire d'annamite>}
%t ?
%e 3e ed., enti\'erement revue et corrig\'ee
%C Hanoi
%I Imprimerie Thanh-Hien
%Z 423p.

%A Bouchet,, Alfred L.
%D 1936
%T {\fr Contribution \`a une \`etude sur les tribus X\`a de la province de Son La, II}
%t ?
%J <Revue de folklore fran\,cais et de folklore colonial>
%V 7
%P 15-31
%O Contains short vocabularies of the X\`a (Kha) Xu\^ak and X\`a Khao

%A Bouda,, Karl
%D 1936
%T {\germ Jenisseisch--tibetische Wortgleichungen}
%t Jenissei-Tibetan word comparisons
%J <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl\"andischen Gesellschaft>
%V 90
%P 149-59

%A Bouda,, Karl
%D 1938
%T {\germ Die Beziehungen des Sumerischen zum Baskischen, Westkaukasischen und Tibetischen}
%t The relationship of Sumerian to Basque, West Caucasian, and Tibetan
%J <Mitt. der Altorientalischen Gesellschaft>
%V 12
%N 3
%P 1-23

%A Bouda,, Karl
%D 1950
%T {\germ Die tibetisch--kaukasische Sprachverwandtschaft}
%t The Tibetan-Caucasian language relationship
%J <Lingua>
%V 2
%P 140-69

%A Bouda,, Karl
%D 1957
%T {\germ Die Sprache der Jenissejer, genealogische und morphologische Untersuchungen}
%t The language of the Jenissei, genealogical and morphological investigations
%J <Anthropos>
%V 52
%P 65-134

%A Boudet,, Paul
%D 1967
%T {\fr <Bibliographie de l'Indochine, t. IV, 1930-35>}
%t Bibliography of Indo-China, vol. IV, 1930-35
%C Paris
%I Adrien-Maisonneuve
%Z 709p.

%A Bouez,, Marine
%X see also Carrin-Bouez

%A Bouez,, Marine
%D 1978
%T Narrativity and event in a Santal folktale
%M Second International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics, Mysore, India, Central Institute of Indian Languages

%A Bouez,, Marine
%A Bouez,, Serge
%D 1975
%T {\fr Le mythe de cr\'eation santal}
%t The Santal creation myth
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 6
%N 4
%P 125-62

%A Bouez,, Serge
%D 1975
%T {\fr Parent\'e et hi\'erarchie chez les Santal}
%t ?
%J <L'Homme>
%V 15
%N 3-4
%P 109-28
%O Kinship terminology

%A Bouez,, Serge
%D 1975
%X see Bouez,, Marine, and Serge Bouez

%A Boulbet,, Jean
%D 1957
%T {\fr Trois l\'egendes maa}
%t Three Maa legends
%J <France-Asie>
%V 139
%P 399-402

%A Boulbet,, Jean
%D 1957
%T {\fr Quelques aspect du coutumier (N'dri) des Cau Maa}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 32
%N 2
%P 113-78
%O Ma texts and translation

%A Boulbet,, Jean
%D 1960
%T {\fr <B\;orde> au rendezvous des g\'enies}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 35
%P 627-50
%O Scattered texts in Ma, with translation

%A Boulbet,, Jean
%D 1960
%T {\fr Description de la v\'eg\'etation en pays maa}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 35
%P 545-74

%A Boulbet,, Jean
%D 1964
%T {\fr Modes et technique artisanales du pays Ma}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 39
%N 2
%P 1-5-288
%O Ma--French glossary, 275-86

%A Boulbet,, Jean
%D 1965
%T {\fr Modes et techniques du pays maa?}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 52
%N 2
%P 359-414, 60 pl.
%O Glossary, 397-411

%A Boulbet,, Jean
%D 1967
%T {\fr <Pays des Maa', domaine des g\'enies: Nggar Maa' nggar Yaang. Essai d'ethnohistoire d'une population proto-indochinoise du Viet Nam centrale>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%Z 152p., 36 photos, 6 pl., 3 cartes, glossaire, bibliographie

%A Boulbet,, Jean
%D 1972
%T {\fr <Dialogue lyrique des Cau Maa' (Tam p\"ot maa')>}
%t Lyric dialog of the Cau Maa' (Tam p\"ot Maa')
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%u 85
%C Paris
%I Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%Z 116p., 30 photos, 4 cartes, glossaire, index, bibliographie

%A Boulbet,, Jean
%D 1975
%T {\fr <Paysans de la for\^et>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%u 15
%C Paris
%I Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%Z 147p., bibliography, maps, illus.
%O Deals with Ma, Stieng Budih, Mnong of Mondolkiri, Khmer of Phnom Kulen, and Thai (i.e. Tai), among others
%R Reviewed by Dournes, <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien> 9(1978)1-2:189-92

%A Boulnois,, L.
%D 1975
%T {\fr <Bibliographie du N\'epal, vol. 1: Sciences humaines, R\'ef\'erences en langues europ\'eenes, supplement 1967-73>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
%Z 435p., indices

%A Boulnois,, L.
%A Millot,, H.
%D 1969
%T {\fr <Bibliographie du N\'epal, vol. 1: Sciences humaines, R\'ef\'erences en langues europ\'eenes>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
%Z 289p., indices
%R Reviewed by J. de Jong, <Indo-Iranian Journal> 14(1972):256-7

%A Bounlieng Phommasouvanh
%D 1975
%T Annotated bibliography of researches and studies on the minority/ majority languages in Laos
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 63
%N 2
%P 133-44

%A Bounmy Soukbandith
%D 1983
%T <Modern English--Lao, Lao--English dictionary>, San Diego, Kongseng Soukbandith
%Z 719p.

%A Bounmy Soukbandith
%D 1983
%T <Self-taught English phrases for Lao speakers>, San Diego, Kongseng Soukbandith
%Z 74p.

%A Bourlet,, Antoine
%D 1907
%T {\fr Les thay IV: Origine des thay d'apr\`es leurs mythes et l\'egendes}
%t ?
%J <Anthropos>
%V 2
%P 921-32
%O Includes "L'origine des thay d'apr\`es leur langue et leur \'ecriture", 926-32, with comparative table of Thai and Lao scripts; on a Black Tai community of Hoi Xu\^an, Laos - SJS

%A Bourne,, Frederick Samuel Augustus
%D 1888
%T <Report of a journey in southwestern China, with short vocabularies of the Lolo, Shan, and Miao-tzu dialects>, British Government Blue Book
%Z 92p.

%A Bouth Neang
%D 1957
%T {khm <??>}
%t {\fr M\'ethode pratique d'\'ecriture khm\`ere et fran\,caise}
%t Practical method of Khmer and French writing
%e 4th ed.
%C Phnom Penh
%I Librairie Bouth-Neang

%A Boutin,, Andre
%D 1937
%T {\fr Monographie de la province de Houa-Phan}
%t Monograph on the Houa-Phan province
%J <Bulletin des Amis du Royaume Lao>
%V 1
%N 1
%P 69-119

%A Boutin,, Andre
%D 1938
%T {\fr Croyances et superstitions chez les Thay Rouges}
%t Beliefs and superstitions among the Red Tai
%J <Bulletin des Amis du Royaume Lao>
%V 2
%N 2
%P 65-79
%O Red Tai

%A Bowen,, Peggy
%X see Evans,, Helen, and Bowen

%A Bowles,, Gordon T.
%D 1943
%T Linguistic and racial aspects of the Munda problem
%J <Papers of the Peabody Mus. of Amer. Archeol. and Ethnol.>
%V 20
%P 81-101

%A Boxwell,, J.
%D 1887
%T On the Santali language
%J <Transactions of the Philological Society>
%V 1887
%P 380-5

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1903
%T The Siamese vowels and diphthongs
%J <Transactions of the American Philosophical Association>
%V 34l
%P xxi-lxxii

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1904
%T The Siamese vocabulary: its formal and conceptual features
%J <Transactions of the American Philosophical Association>
%V 35lxxx
%O Summary of a paper in the Proceedings for Dec. 1904 - SJS

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1907
%T Indications of a consonant-shift in Siamese since the introduction of alphabetical writing
%J <Transactions of the American Philosophical Association>
%V 38
%P 19

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1907
%T On certain determinatives of direction in Siamese
%J <Transactions of the American Philosophical Association>
%V 38
%P xxxi-xxxii
%O Summary of a paper in the <Proceedings> for Dec. 1907 - SJS

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1909
%T Graphical analysis of the Siamese `tones'
%J <Transactions of the American Philosophical Association>
%V 40
%P xci-xcvii
%O Summary of a paper in the <Proceedings> for Nov. 1909 - SJS

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1909
%T The oldest known writing in Siamese: the inscription of Phra Ram Kamhaeng of Sukotai, 1293 A.D.
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 6
%P 1-69
%O Includes a description of the alphabet and language - SJS

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1911
%T Graphic analysis of the tone-accents of the Siamese language
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 31
%P 282-9
%R Reviewed by H. Maspero, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 12(1912):21-2

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1912
%T The proximate source of the Siamese alphabet
%J <Transactions of the American Philosophical Association>
%V 43
%P 23-33
%+ Also published in <Journal of the Siam Society> 10(1913).1:1-12
%O Plate also contains ancient Burmese letters

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1916
%T On plotting the inflections of the voice
%J <University of California Publications in American Archeology and Ethnology>
%V 12
%P 195-218, 5 plates
%O On the graphical representation of Thai tones - SJS

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1917
%T The history of Sukhothai letters
%J <Transactions of the American Philosophical Association>
%V 48
%P 63-72

%A Bradley,, Cornelius Beach
%D 1924
%T Some features of the Siamese speech and writing
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 44
%P 11-28
%+ Also published 1924, <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society Centenary Supplement>:11-31
%O On phonology, tone, syntax, syllabary, and its history, with a popular Siamese tone exercise - SJS

%A Bradley,, Dan Beach
%D 1873
%T <Dictionary of the Siamese language>, Bangkok
%Z 804p.
%+ Reprinted Bangkok: Khurusapha Press, 1971

%A Bradley,, Dan Beach
%D 1971
%T <Dictionary of the Siamese language>
%C Bangkok
%I Khurusapha Press
%Z 828p.
%O Photographic reproduction of the 1873 work
%R Reviewed by Napa Bhongbhibhat, <Journal of the Siam Society> 61(1973).1:360-3

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1968
%T The Akha dialect of Aru
%M ms.

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1968
%T Comparison of Nishida's and Lewis' Akha materials
%M ms.

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1969
%T Problems in Akha phonology: synchronic and diachronic
%M ms., Columbia University
%Z 42p.

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1969
%T Shan loanwords in Lahu and Akha
%M ms.

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1969
%T Two Akha dialects in Thailand: Aru and Saenchi
%M ms.

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1970
%T Prosodic phonology of Akha: first approximation
%M ms.

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1971
%T Prefixes and suffixes in Tibeto-Burman and Burmese-Lolo
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 4 (Indiana University, Bloomington)

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1971
%T Prosodies in Akha: questions to investigate
%M ms.

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1973
%T Phunoi today
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 6 (University of California/San Diego)

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1974
%T Lahu Shi: ban-lan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 7 (Georgia State University, Atlanta)

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1975
%T <Lahu dialects and Proto-Loloish>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of London, School of Oriental and African Studies

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1975
%T Nahsi and Proto-Burmese-Lolo
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 2
%N 1
%P 93-150

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1976, 1977
%T Akha and southern Loloish
%E Hashimoto,, Mantar\=o J.
%B <Genetic relationship, diffusion and typological similarities of East and Southeast Asian languages>, Papers of the 1st Japan-U.S. Joint Seminar on East and Southeast Asian linguistics
%C Tokyo
%I Japan Society for the Promotion of Science
%V 1976
%P 101-45
%+ Also published in Bradley,, David, ed., <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 5> (<Pacific Linguistics>, A.49), Canberra: Australian National University 23-65

%E Bradley,, David
%D 1977
%T <Papers in South East Asian linguistics> 5
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.49
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%Z iv, 98p.
%O S

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1977
%T Phunoi or C\^o\^ong
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 5>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.49
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 67-98

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1977
%T Proto-Loloish tones
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 5>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.49
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 1-23

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1978
%T Diglossia in Burmese
%J <Osmania University Working Papers in Linguistics>
%V 3
%P 1-12

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1978
%T Identity, dialect, and sound changes in mBisua and 'ugong
%J <Working Papers in Linguistics, University of Melbourne>
%V 4
%P 37-46

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1979
%T Arakanese vowels
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1979
%T <Lahu dialects>
%S <Oriental Monograph Series>
%u 23
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%Z 259p.

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1979
%T <Proto-Loloish>
%S <Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies, monograph series>
%u 23
%C London
%I Curzon Press
%Z 452p.
%R Reviewed by Thurgood, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 44(1981).3:662-3
%R Reviewed by Wheatley, <Journal of Asian Studies> 41(1982).2:411-12

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1979
%T Speech through music: the Sino-Tibetan gourd reed organ
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 42
%P 535-40

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1980
%T Phonological convergence between languages in contact: Mon-Khmer structural borrowing in Burmese
%J <Proceedings of the Berkeley Linguistic Society>
%V 6
%P 259-67

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1981
%T The linguistic position of Jino
%M ms.
%Z 14p.

%E Bradley,, David
%D 1982
%T <Papers on Southeast Asian linguistics> 8: <Tonation>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.62
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%Z 159p.
%O S

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1982
%T Register in Burmese
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Papers in South-East Asian linguistics 8>: <Tonation>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.62
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 117-32
%+ Also published in Jan-Olaf Svantesson, ed., <Papers from the Helsing\/or symposium on Austroasiatic linguistics and literature>, Copenhagen/London: Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies/Curzon, {\? date?}

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1982
%T Uncles and aunts: Burmese kinship changes
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1983
%T Identity: the persistence of minority groups
%E McKinnon,, John
%E Wanat Bhruksasri
%B <Highlanders of Thailand>
%C Kuala Lumpur
%I Oxford University Press
%P 46-55
%O Ethnographic and nomenclature of AA, TK, TB, and MY groups

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1983
%T Nasality in Bisu and Bisoid
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 16 (University of Washington, Seattle)

%A Bradley,, David
%D 1985
%T The Arakanese dialect of Burmese and Proto-Burmish reconstruction
%E Thurgood,, Graham
%E Matisoff,, James A.
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: the state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday>
%S <Pacific linguistics>
%u C.87
%C Canberra
%I Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University
%P 180-200

%A Bradley,, David
%A et al.
%D 1991
%T <Thai hill tribes phrasebook: Lahu, Lisu, Karen, and other hill tribes>
%C Hawthorn, Vic., Australia/Berkeley, CA
%S <Lonely Planet language survival kit>
%I Lonely Planet
%Z 181p., ill.
%O Lahu, Lisu, Karen, Kaw, Hmong, Yao
%L UCSD Central P381.T5 B83 1991 Reference

%E Bradley,, David
%D 1985
%T <Language policy, language planning, and sociolinguistics in South-East Asia>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.67, <Papers in South-East Asian linguistics>, 9
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%Z vi, 214p., ill., maps
%# UCSC McHenry P11.L53 no. 67
%% cited by Huffman as forthcoming with title Sociolinguistics in South East Asia

%A Bradley,, David
%A Bradley,, Maya
%D 1984
%T <Problems of Asian students in Australia: language, culture, and education>
%C Canberra
%I Australian Government Publishing Service
%Z 357p.

%A Bradley,, David
%A Chan Fook-chuen
%D 1973
%T Nahsi orthographic data and Li-Ch'iang town dialect lexical material
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 6 (University of California/San Diego)

%A Bradley,, David
%A Leach,, E. R.
%D 1978
%T Sound symbolism in Jinghpaw (Kachin)
%J <Man>
%V 13
%N 4
%P 659-62

%A Bradley,, Mrs. E. R.
%D 1860
%T <Elementary tables and lessons in the Siamese language prepared by Mrs. E. R. Bradley. Revised and enlarged by D. B. Bradley>
%e 4th ed.
%C Bangkok
%I A. M. A. Press
%Z 131p.

%A Brahma,, Shri M. M.
%D 1981
%T Some ideas on peculiar characteristics of Bodo language
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 14 (University of Florida, Gainesville)

%A Braine,, Jean Critchfield
%X see also Critchfield,, Jean

%A Braine,, Jean Critchfield
%D 1970
%T <Nicobarese grammar (Car dialect)>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of California/Berkeley
%Z 269p.
%X see Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 31,12:6577-A; University Microfilms 71-15,730

%A Braine,, Jean Critchfield
%D 1976
%T Numeration in Car Nicobarese
%E Diffloth,, G\'erard
%E Zide,, Norman H.
%B <Austroasiatic number systems>
%S <Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 174
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%P 21-30

%A Braine-Hartnell,, A. C.
%D 1955
%T Thai substitution tables
%J <Thought and Word>
%V 1
%N 7
%P 52-7

%A Braine-Hartnell,, A. C.
%D 1955
%T Tips on Thai (Colloquial Thai I); Colloquial Thai II, III, IV, V, VI
%J <Thought and Word>
%V 1
%N 1
%P 49-53; 1.2:54-5; 1.3:55-8; 1.4:51-3; 1.5:56-9; 1.8:57-61

%A Braine-Hartnell,, A. C.
%D 1955
%T Thai word-list I, II, II
%J <Thought and Word>
%V 1
%N 6
%P 48-60; 1.9:57-64; 1.10:59-67
%O Thai--English vocabulary of c. 2500 most useful Thai words

%A Brandreth,, E. L.
%D 1878
%T On the non-Aryan languages of India
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> n.s.
%V 10
%P 1-32, map
%O Vocabulary, TK: Ahom, Aiton, Khamti, Lao, Mow, Thai; AA: Mon-Khmer, Khasi; TB: a language of Nepal

%A Brandt,, John H.
%D 1961
%T The Negrito of Peninsular Thailand
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 49
%N 2
%P 123-59

%A Brandt,, John H.
%D 1965
%T The Southeast Asian Negrito: further notes on the Negrito of South Thailand
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 53
%N 1
%P 27-43

%A Brase,, James L.
%X see Baccam and Brase

%A Bratus,, B. V.
%X see Andreev, Bratus, and Gordina

%A Brengues,, Jean
%D 1905
%T {\fr Note sur les populations de la r\'egion des montagnes des Cardamones}
%t ?
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 2
%P 19-47
%O Porr (Pear) vocabulary, phrases, and linguistic notes, 39-47 - SJS

%A Breton,, Roland J. L.
%D 1964, 1968
%T {\fr <Les languages de l'Inde depuis l'ind\'ependence, \'etude de g\'eographie culturelle du monde indien: Inde, Pakistan, N\'epal, Ceylan>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Publications des Annales de la Facult\'e des Lettres, Aix-en-Provence, S\'erie travaux et m\'emoires>}
%u 29
%C Aix-en-Provence
%I la Pens\'ee universitaire
%Z 255p.

%A Breton,, Roland J. L.
%D 1973
%T {\fr <G\'eographie des languages et des ethnies de l'Inde et du subcontinent (Bangladesh, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, N\'epal, Bhoutan, Sikkim)>}
%t ?
%U {\fr Th\`ese de doctoral d'Etat, University de Nice}

%A Breton,, Roland J. L.
%D 1973
%T {\fr Les r\'esultats linguistiques du recensement n\'epalais de 2018 (1969)}
%t The linguistic results of the 1969 census of Nepal
%J <Cahiers de linguistique, d'orientisme et de slavistique> (Aix-en-Provence)
%V 1-2
%P 39-51

%A Breton,, Roland J. L.
%D 1976
%T {\fr <Atlas g\'eographique des langues et des ethnies de l'Inde et du subcontinent: Bangladesh, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, N\'epal, Bhoutan, Sikkim>}
%t Geographic atlas of the languages and cultures of India and the subcontinent: Bangladesh, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Nepal, Bhutan, Sikkim
%C Qu\'ebec
%I Presses de l'Universit\'e Laval
%Z 648p.

%A Brianskii,, M. G.
%D 1971
%T {\rus O terminakh <bdag> i <ga\.n-zag>}
%t ?
%E Semichov,, B. V.
%B {\rus <Tibetika, Materialy tibetologicheskogo seminara>}
%b ?
%C Ulan-Ud\'e
%I Sibirskoe otdelenie, Buriatskii filial, In-t obshchestvennykh nauk
%P 86-98

%A Bridges,, James Emile
%D 1906
%T <The Burmese manual>
%C London and Rangoon
%Z viii, 309p.

%A Bridges,, James Emile
%D 1915
%T <Burmese grammar>
%C Rangoon
%I British Burma Press
%Z 2 vols, 146p.

%A Bri\`ere,, Eug\`ene
%A Sinuan Chaichanpong
%D 1980
%T An investigation of Thai interference in selected American English phonemes
%J <Papers and Studies in Contrastive Linguistics> (Pozn\'an)
%V 11
%P 101-17

%A Briggs,, Lawrence Palmer
%D 1945
%T How obsolete are the theories of Professor Dixon and Pater Schmidt?
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 65
%P 56-9

%A Briggs,, Lawrence Palmer
%D 1949
%T The appearance and historical uses of the terms Tai, Thai, Siamese, and Lao
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 69
%P 60-73

%A Briggs,, W. A.
%D 1904
%T <First lessons in the study of the Laos language>
%C Chieng Mai
%I American Presbyterian Mission
%Z 2, 64, 2, 7p.

%A Bright,, William
%D 1955-56
%T Singing in Lushai
%J <Linguistics>
%V 17
%P 24-8

%A Bright,, William
%D 1956
%T An English--Lushai word list
%Z mimeo.

%A Bright,, William
%D 1957
%T Alternations in Lushai
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 18
%N 1-2
%P 101-10
%O On alternative Lushai verb forms

%A Bright,, William
%D 1957
%T Lushai word and tone list
%M ms.

%A Bright,, William
%D 1960
%T Review of Bernot and Bernot, {\fr <Les Khyang des collines der Chittagong>}
%J <Language>
%V 36
%P 184-6

%A Bright,, William
%D 1961
%T Review of Pinnow, {\germ <Versuch einer historischen Lautlehre der Kharia-Sprache>}
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 63
%P 451-2

%A Bright,, William
%D 1964
%T Lushai verbs
%M ms.

%A Bright,, William
%D 1968
%T Review of Mitra, <Census of India 1961: Language tables>
%J <Language>
%V 44
%N 3
%P 684-7

%A Bright,, William
%D 1979
%T Review of Weidert, <Tai-Khamti phonology and vocabulary>
%J <Language>
%V 55
%N 2
%P 490

%A Bronson,, M.
%D 1868
%T <Phrases in English and Garo>
%C Calcutta
%I Baptist Mission Press
%Z 40p.

%A Broomhall,, Marshall
%D 1917
%T Some tribes of south-west China: their languages, customs, and religion
%J <International Review of Missions>
%V April 1917
%P 267-81

%A Brough,, J.
%A Clark,, T. W.
%D n.d.
%T <Kathmandu Newari sentences of 4 tapes, with written texts in devanagari and written translation in Nepali>
%M ms., School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London

%A Brown,, George Eustace Riou Grant
%D 1910
%T <Half the battle in Burmese, a manual of the spoken language>
%C Oxford
%Z x, 149p.

%A Brown,, George Eustace Riou Grant
%D 1911
%T The Tamans of the Upper Chindwin, Burma
%J <Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute>
%V 41
%P 305-17

%A Brown,, George Eustace Riou Grant
%D 1920
%T The Kadus of Burma
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies>
%V 1
%N 2
%P 1-28
%R Reviewed by L. F. Taylor, <Journal of the Burma Research Society> 12(1922):50-4

%A Brown,, George Eustace Riou Grant
%D 1931
%T The representation of Burmese sounds
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 21
%P 26-30
%R Reviewed by Pe Maung Tin, <Journal of the Burma Research Society> 21(1931): 30-1

%A Brown,, J. Coggin
%X see Rose and Brown

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1962
%T <From ancient Thai to modern dialects>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Cornell University
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 23.2:628; University Microfilms 62-2505
%O Published 1965, Bangkok: Social Science Association Press of Thailand, ix, 180p.

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1965
%T <From ancient Thai to modern dialects>
%C Bangkok
%I Social Science Association Press of Thailand
%Z ix, 180p.
%O Publication of Ph.D. dissertation, Cornell, University, 1962
%R Reviewed by Gedney, <Social Science Review> 3(1965).2:107-12
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 62(1967-68).2:208-9
%R Reviewed by Smalley, <Journal of the Siam Society> 55(1967).1:124-9

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1966
%T The language of Sukhothai. Where did it come from? And where did it go?
%J <Social Science Review>
%V 3
%P 40-2

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1967-69
%T <American University Alumni Association Language Center Thai Course, Vols. I, II, and III>
%C Bangkok
%I American University Alumni Association Language Center
%Z 239, 273, 126p.

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1971
%T Phonemics without sounds
%M Conference on Tai Phonetics and Phonology held at the English Language Center, Office of State Universities, Bangkok, May 17-21, 1971

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1975
%T The great tone split: did it work in two opposite ways?
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Chamberlain,, James R.
%B <Studies in Tai linguistics in honor of William J. Gedney>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 33-48

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1976
%T Dead consonants or dead tones?
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%B <Tai linguistics in honor of Fang-kuei Li>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 28-38

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1976
%T Thai dominance over English and the learning of English by Thais
%E Prapart Brudhiprabha
%E Achara Wangsotorn
%E Palmer,, Joe D.
%B <A Festschrift for Richard B. Noss>
%S <Pasaa>
%u 6.1-2
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 67-85

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1979
%T <American University Alumni Association Language Center Thai course: Reading and writing, vol. 1: Text (mostly reading); vol. 2: Workbook (mostly writing)>
%C Bangkok
%I American University Alumni Association Language Center
%Z 140, 93p.

%A Brown,, J. Marvin
%D 1979
%T Vowel length in Thai
%E Theraphan L. Thongkum
%E Panupong,, Vichin
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%E Tingsabadh,, M. R. Kalaya
%B <Studies in Tai and Mon-Khmer phonetics and phonology in honour of Eug\'enie J. A. Henderson>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 10-25

%A Brown,, Nathan
%D 1837
%T Alphabets of the Tai language
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 7
%P 17-21
%O Plates, TK: Ahom, Khamti, Lao, Shan, Thai; TB: Burmese

%A Brown,, Nathan
%D 1837
%T Comparison of Indo-Chinese languages
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 7
%P 1023-38
%O Vocabulary, TB: Abor, Champhung, Hruso, Garo, Jili, Khoibu, Kwoireng (Liangmai), Luhupa, Maram (Khoirao), Maring, Meithei, Mishmi (Digaro), Singpho (Kachin), Songpu (Kabui); TK: Khamti

%A Brown,, Nathan
%D 1849
%T On the aborigines of the eastern frontier
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 18
%P 967-75
%O Vocabulary, TB: Miri, Namsang (Nocte), Nowgong (Chungli)

%A Brown,, Nathan
%D 1850
%T Aborigines of the north east frontier
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 19
%P 309-16

%A Brown,, Nathan
%D 1851
%T Specimens of the Naga language of Assam
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 2
%P 157-65
%O Vocabulary, TB: Angwanku (Tableng), Banpara, Chungli, Khari, Mulung, Muthun, Namsangia, Nowgong, Tengima, Tengsa

%A Brown,, Nathan
%D 1854
%T Comparative vocabulary of the Sgau and Pwo Karen dialects
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 4
%P 317-26

%A Brown,, R. J. R.
%D 1900
%T <Elementary handbook of the Red Karen language>
%C Rangoon
%Z 83p.

%A Brown,, Roger
%D 1983
%T <Homophones and homographs in Thai>
%Z 103p., ms.

%A Brown,, William Barclay
%D 1895
%T <An outline grammar of the Deori Chitya language spoken in upper Assam>
%C Shillong
%Z viii, 84p.

%A Brudhiprabha,, Prapart
%X see Prapart Brudhiprabha

%A Bruk,, Solomon Il'ich
%D 1958
%T {\rus ??}
%t Distribution of national minorities in the People's Republic of China
%J <Sovetskaia Ethnografiia>
%V 1 ??
%+ Reprinted in English in Stephen P. Dunn and Ethel Dunn, eds., <Introduction to Soviet ethnography>, Berkeley: Highgate Road Social Science Research Station, 2:629-54

%A Bruk,, Solomon Il'ich
%D 1959
%T {\rus <Karta narodov Indokitaia>}
%t Map of the peoples of Indochina
%C Moscow
%O With explanatory booklet, 26p.

%A Bruk,, Solomon Il'ich
%D 1959
%T {\rus <Nasaleniya indokitaia: Poyasnitel'naia zapiski k karte narodov>}
%t The peoples of Indochina: explanatory notes to the map of the peoples
%C Moscow
%I Institut Etnografii imeni Miklukho-Maklay, Akademii Nauk SSSR
%+ Translated into English 1961 by U.S. Joint Publication Research Service, Publication no. 6914

%A Bruk,, Solomon Il'ich
%D 1959
%T {\rus <Naselenie kitaia, MNR i korei: Poyasnitel'naia zapiski k karte narodov>}
%t Ethnographic map and booklet on China, Mongolia, and Korea
%C Moscow
%I Institut Etnografii imeni N. N. Miklukho-Maklaia, Akademii Nauk SSSR
%O Translated into English as U.S. Joint Publication Research Service, Publication no. 3710

%A Bruk,, Solomon Il'ich
%D 1961
%T <The peoples of Indochina>
%S <U.S. Joint Publication Research Service, Publication>
%u 6914
%C Washington, DC
%I U.S. Joint Publication Research Service
%Z 31p.
%+ Translation of Bruk, 1959, <Naseleniya indokitaia>
%O General ethnographic data on TB, TK, MY, VM, and AA groups

%E Bruk,, Solomon Il'ich
%E Apenchinko,, V. S.
%D 1964
%T {\rus <Atlas narodov mira>}
%t Ethnographic atlas
%C Moscow
%I Institut Etnografii imeni N. N. Miklukho-Maklaia, Akademii Nauk SSSR

%A Brun,, Viggo
%D 1973
%T An English--Akha vocabulary
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 35
%P 139-60

%A Brun,, Viggo
%D 1976
%T <Sug, the trickster who fooled the monk: a northern Thai tale with vocabulary>
%S <Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies, monograph series>
%u 27
%C London
%I Curzon Press
%Z 191p.
%R Reviewed by Chitakasem, <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> 1978:101-2
%R Reviewed by Lindell, <Acta Orientalia> 39(1978):302-4

%A Bstan-'dzin-dpal-'byor,, Rdo-rin Bka'-blon
%D 1979
%T <A detailed commentary on the fundamental principles of Tibetan grammar as set forth in the work of Thonmi Sambho-ta>
%C New Delhi
%I Ngawang Sopa
%Z 77p.

%A Buahame,, Wudh
%X see Wudh Buahame

%A Buahame,, Wudh (see Wudh Buahame)
%D 1798
%T A comparative vocabulary of some of the languages spoken in the Burma empire
%J <Asiatick Researches>
%V 5
%P 219-40
%O Vocabulary, TB: Arakanese, Meithei, Yaw; TK: Tay-nay (Thai), Tai-yay (Shan), Tai-loong (Khamti); AA: Mon (50 words)

%A Buck,, Stuart H.
%D 1969
%T <Tibetan--English dictionary, with supplement>
%S <Publications in the languages of Asia>
%u 1
%C Washington, DC
%I Catholic University of America Press
%Z 833p.
%R Reviewed by Miller,, R. A., <Language> 46(1970).4:975-80
%R Reviewed by Ruegg, <Linguistics> 100(1973):101-3
%R Reviewed by Sedl\'a\vcek, <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl\"andischen Gesellschaft> 123(1973):191-2
%R Reviewed by Semichov, <Indo-Iranian Journal> 13(1972).4:319

%A Buckingham,, H. W.
%X see Gandour, et al., 1982

%A Bucknell,, Roderick
%D 1979
%T Further aids in learning Thai tone classes and alphabetic sequence
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 67
%N 2
%P 193-6

%A Buddhist Institute
%D 1958
%T {\khm <??>}
%t {\fr <Inscriptions modernes d'Angkor>}
%t Modern inscriptions of Angkor
%e 2nd ed.
%C Phnom Penh
%I Institut Bouddhique
%Z 106p.

%A Buddhist Institute
%D 1966
%T {\khm <??>}
%t {\fr <Glossaire R\'eamker>}
%t ?
%e 3e ed.
%C Phnom Penh
%I Institut Bouddhique

%A Buddhist Institute
%D 1967-78
%T {khm <Waccanaanukr\^am kmae>}
%t Khmer dictionary
%Z Tome I: K-M, 5e ed., 1967, 938p. (1st ed. 1938); tome II: Y-A, 5e ed., 1968, 939-1858p. (1st ed. 1943)
%C Phnom Penh
%I Editions de l'Institut Bouddhique
%+ Reprinted and distributed by the Institut d l'Asie du Sud-Est, 269 rue St.-Jacques, 75005 Paris; also by Libraire de l'Assomption, Oriental Lane, Bangkok; and International Rescue Committee, Khao-I-Dang Printing Project, 14/16 Sukhumvit, Soi 1, Bangkok
%R Reviewed by Coed\`es, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 38(1938):314-21 (Tome I)

%A Buddhist Research Center
%D 1962
%T <Pali--Thai--English dictionary>
%C San Francisco
%I Buddhist Research Center, Asia Foundation

%A Buhda,, T. T.
%X see Fisher,, J, and Buhda

%A Bui \-Dinh
%D 1950
%T {\viet <Tim hi\^eu \-d\^ong bao mi\^en nui Vi\^et Nam>}
%t Research on the mountain tribes of Vietnam
%C Hanoi
%Z 114p., illus.

%A Bui \-Dinh My
%D 1971
%T {\rus Nekotorye razlichia v vyrazhenii adnogo i togo zhe poniatiinogo vo v'etnamskom i russkom iazykakh (v sviazi s problemo peroveda rodnoi iazyky)}
%t Some differences in the expression of the very same conceptual content in Vietnamese and Russian (in connection with the problem of translation into the native language)
%E Leont'ev,, A. A.
%E Riabova,, T. V.
%B {\rus <Voprosy psikholingvistiki i prepodavanie russkogo iazyka kak inostrannogo>}
%b Questions of psycholinguistics and the teaching of Russian as a foreign language
%C Moscow
%I Idz. Mosk. un-ta
%P 79-87

%A Bui \-Dinh My
%D 1974
%T {\viet Bu\^oc \-d\^au tim hi\^eu v\^an \-d\^e \-d\uac tr\;ung n\^oi dung cua ng\^on ng\;u d\^an t\^oc}
%t First steps in understanding the internal characteristics of our language
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1974
%N 2
%P 1-9

%A Bui \-D\;uc Tinh
%D 1948
%T {\viet <Nh\;ung nh\^an-xet v\^e v\uan-pham Vi\^et Nam>}
%t Some observations on Vietnamese grammar
%C Saigon
%I \-Dai-chung
%Z 86p.

%A Bui \-D\;uc Tinh
%D 1952
%T {\viet <V\uan-pham Vi\^et-Nam>}
%t Vietnamese grammar
%C Saigon
%I P. V\uan-T\;u\;oi
%Z 359p.

%A Bui \-D\;uc Tinh
%D 1967
%T {\viet <V\uan-pham Vi\^et-Nam>}
%t Vietnamese grammar
%C Saigon
%I Khai Tu
%Z 526p.
%e 2nd ed. with corrections and linguistic section

%A Bui \-D\;uc Tinh
%D 1972
%T {\viet <V\uan-pham Vi\^et-nam gian-di va th\;uc dung>}
%t Simple and practical Vietnamese grammar
%C Saigon
%I B\^o Giao Duc
%Z 231p.

%A Bui Kh\uac Vi\^et
%D 1969
%T {\viet M\^ot s\^o kinh nghi\^em bi\^en soan t\;u \-di\^en ng\^on ng\;u \;o cac n\;u\;oc ch\;u nghia}
%t Some experiences in preparing dictionaries in socialist countries
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1969
%N 2
%P 27-31

%A Bui Kh\uac Vi\^et
%D 1971
%T {\viet V\^e quy\^en Vi\^et Nam t\;u \-di\^en xu\^at ban \;o Saigon}
%t About the Vietnamese dictionary published in Saigon
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1971
%N 4
%P 34-41

%A Bui Khanh Th\^e
%D 1971
%T {\viet Ti\^eng Lao (nh\;ung \-d\uac \-di\^em v\^e ch\;u vi\^et, ng\;u \^am, t\;u v\;ung va ng\;u phap)}
%t The Lao language (some characteristics of the writing system, vocabulary, and grammar)
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1971
%N 1
%P 1-20

%A Bui Khanh Th\^e
%D 1972
%T {\viet Th\;u tim m\^ot vai \-d\uac \-di\^em chung va ri\^eng cua danh gn\;u trong ti\^eng Vi\^et va ti\^eng Lao}
%t Looking for similarities and differences between Vietnamese and Lao
%J <Th\^ong bao khoa hoc, v\uan hoc, ng\^on ng\;u>
%V 5
%P 114-23

%A Bui Khanh Th\^e
%D 1973
%T {\viet V\^an \-d\^e thu\^at ng\;u \;o vung giai phong Lao}
%t Problems of technical vocabulary in the Lao liberated zone
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1973
%N 2
%P 37-44

%A Bui Khanh Th\^e
%D 1974
%T {\viet Hai t\;u <gi\^et> va <ch\^et> va suy nghi v\^e m\^ot hi\^en t\;u\;ong bi\^en \-d\^oi ng\^on ng\;u}
%t The two words <gi\^et> and <ch\^et> and reflections on a case of language change
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1974
%N 4
%P 39-49

%A Bui Khanh Th\^e
%D 1974
%X see Nguy\^en Tai C\^an, et al.

%A Bui Khanh Th\^e
%D 1977
%T {\viet V\^e guy\^en <Ng\;u phap ti\^eng Vi\^et> cua Nguy\^en Tai C\^an}
%t Review of Nguy\^en Tai C\^an, <Vietnamese grammar>
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1977
%N 4
%P 59-63

%A Bui Khanh Th\^e
%A Vilay Keomani
%D 1972
%T {\viet Vai nh\^an xet b\;u\;oc \-d\^au v\^e t\;u v\;ung ti\^eng Lao hi\^en \-dai}
%t Some preliminary observations on modern Lao vocabulary
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1977
%N 4
%P 59-63

%A Bui Ky
%D 1943
%X see Tr\^an Trong Kim, Pham Duy Khi\^em, and Bui Ky

%A Bui Ky
%D 1960
%X see Tr\^an Trong Kim, w/ Bui Ky and Pham Duy Khi\^em

%A Bui Quang Khanh
%A Vu Qu\^oc Th\^ong
%D 1962
%T {\viet <T\;u \-di\^en hanh chanh c\^ong-quy\^en Vi\^et--Anh--Phap>}
%t Dictionary of terms and idioms of public administration, Vietnamese--English--French
%C Saigon
%I Hi\^en \-Dai
%Z 275p.

%A Bui V\uan Bao
%D 1972
%T <Vietnamese spelling book>
%C Scarborough, Ontario, Canada

%A Bui V\uan Nguy\^en
%D 1972
%T {\viet M\^ay v\^an \-d\^e c\^an \-d\;u\;oc xac minh th\^em trong v\uan tho Nguy\^en Trai}
%t Some problems which need solutions in the work of Nguy\^en Trai
%J <T\^ap chi v\uan hoc>
%V 138
%P 35-51

%A Bui V\uan Nguy\^en
%D 1977
%T {\viet Th\;u tim hi\^eu giong noi ngh\^e tinh trong h\^e th\^ong giong noi chung ca n\;u\;oc}
%t Investigation of the place of the Nghe tinh dialect in the national standard language
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1977
%N 4
%P 34-41

%A Bui Y
%X see \-Dang and Bui

%A Bulteau,, R.
%D 1953
%T {\fr <Cours d'annamite (langue vietnamienne)>}
%t A course in Annamite (Vietnamese language)
%e 4th ed.
%C Paris
%I LaRose
%Z xix, 292, xp.

%A Bun Intharamphan
%D 1957
%T {\viet Khr\=\,uang m\=ai wak t\=\,on nai ph\=as\=a thai}
%t Punctuation marks in Thai
%J <W\=aras\=an manutsas\=at>
%V 2
%N 1
%P 1-13

%A Bunapha,, Araphim
%X see Araphim Bunapha

%A Bunchuea,, Kirti
%X see Kirti Bunchuea

%A Bunker,, Alonzo
%D 1872
%T On a Karen inscription plate
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 10
%P 172-6
%O Not deciphered - BSTL

%A Bunnag,, Suriya
%X see Suriya Bunnag

%A Bunphan,, Jaroon
%X see Jaroon Bunphan

%A Bunruang Chuensuwimol
%D 1982
%T {\thai Ph\=as\=a kap r\=aengng\=an thai nai t\=ang d\=aen}
%t The language of Thai laborers abroad
%J <R\=uam bot khw\=am ph\=as\=a lae ph\=as\=as\=at>
%V 1
%N 1

%A Bunyam\=anopph\=anit,, Luang
%D 1953
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=a lae nangs\=\,u>}
%t (Thai) language and letters
%C Bangkok
%I Samnakphim Ruamsan
%Z 354p.

%A Buraminhan,, Suchitra
%X see Suchitra Buraminhan

%A Burawat,, Samak
%X see Samak Burawat

%A Burgman,, Arnold
%D 1961
%T Review of Cadi\`ere, {\fr <Syntax de la langue vietnamienne>}
%J <Anthropos>
%V 55
%N 1-2
%P 283

%A Burintavanij,, Sum-Ang
%X see Sum-Ang Burintavanij

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1955-56
%T Lushai phonemics
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 17
%P 148-55

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1956
%T Garo kinship terminology
%J <Man in India>
%V 36
%P 203-18

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1959
%T Proto-Bodo
%J <Language>
%V 35
%P 433-53
%O Vocabulary, TB: Atong, Bodo, Baro, Wanang (Jalpaiguri)

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1959
%T Language development of a Garo and English speaking child
%J <Word>
%V 15
%P 45-68

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1960
%T Angami Naga phonemes and word list
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 21
%P 51-60

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1961
%T <A Garo grammar>
%S <Deccan College monograph series>
%u 25
%C Poona
%I Deccan College Postgraduate and Research Institute
%Z x 95p.

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1962
%T Review of Smalley, <Outline of Khmu' structure>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 82
%N 2
%P 246-9

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1963
%T A generative sketch of Burmese
%Z mimeo., 66p.

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1963
%T Garo kinship terms and the analysis of meaning
%J <Ethnology>
%V 2
%P 50-85

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1963
%T <Rengsanggri: Family and kinship in a Garo village>
%C Philadelphia
%I University of Pennsylvania Press
%Z 377p.
%O Kinship terminology 348-57; ethnolinguistic reference to Khasi 358-9

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1964
%T Garos
%E LeBar,, Frank M.
%E Hickey,, Gerald C.
%E Musgrave,, John K.
%B <Ethnic groups of mainland Southeast Asia>
%C New Haven
%I Human Relations Area Files Press
%P 55-7

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1965
%T Burmese kinship terminology: a semantic analysis
%E Hammill,, E. A. 
%B <Formal semantic analysis>
%S <AmAn 67.5.2>
%P 106-17

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1965
%T How to choose a Burmese numeral classifier
%E Spiro,, Melford E.
%B <Context and meaning in cultural anthropology>
%C New York
%I The Free Press
%P 243-64

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1966
%T The addition of final stops in the history of Maru
%J <Language>
%V 42
%N 3
%P 581-6

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1966
%T A problem in Lahu phonology
%E Ba Shin
%E Boisellier,, Jean
%E Griswold,, A. B.
%B <Essays offered to G. H. Luce>
%S <Artibus Asiae, Supplementum>
%u XXIII, vols. I and II
%C Leiden
%I E. J. Brill
%V 1
%P 97-101

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1966
%T The role of meaning in the study of language: a defense of reference
%J <Word>
%V 22
%N 1-3
%P 138-62
%O Info. on Burmese classifiers and kinship system

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1966
%T Review of Henderson, <Tiddim Chin>
%J <Journal of Asian Studies>
%V 25
%N 3
%P 547

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1967
%T <Proto-Lolo-Burmese>
%S <Indiana University Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics>
%u publication no. 43 = <International Journal of American Linguistics> 33.1.2
%C Bloomington/The Hague
%I Indiana University/Mouton
%Z vi, 101p.
%O Reconstruction based on Burmese, Atsi, Maru, Lisu, Lahu, and Akha
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 63(1968-69).2:327
%R Reviewed by K\"unstler, <Przeglad Orientalistyczny> 1970:375-7
%R Reviewed by Lehman, <American Anthropologist> 74(1972):103-4
%R Reviewed by Matisoff, <Language> 44(1968).4:879-97
%R Reviewed by R. Miller, <Indo-Iranian Journal> 12(1970).2:146-59
%R Reviewed by Sprigg, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 31(1968).3:648-9

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1969
%T Proto-Karen: a reanalysis
%E Becker,, Alton L.
%B <Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics>
%C Ann Arbor, MI
%I University of Michigan
%V 1
%P 1-116
%R Reviewed by R. B. Jones, <Journal of Asian Studies> 30(1970).1:230-1

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1970
%T <Man's many voices: language in its cultural context>
%C New York
%I Holt, Rinehart, and Winston
%Z 222p.
%O Burmese numeral classifiers 58-62, Burmese kinship terms 62-5, Garo kinship terms 71-2

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1971
%T The historical place of Jinghpaw in Tibeto-Burman
%E Lehman,, F. K.
%B <Papers on Tibeto-Burman historical and comparative linguistics from the second annual meeting on Sino-Tibetan reconstruction>
%S <Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics>
%u 2
%C Urbana
%I University of Illinois
%V 2
%P 1-54

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1977
%T Review of Sreedhar, <Naga pidgin>
%J <Language>
%V 53
%N 1
%P 243-5

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1979
%T Noun compounding in Garo
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1980
%T Review of Matisoff, <Variational semantics in Tibeto-Burman>
%J <Language>
%V 56
%N 4
%P 888-91

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1981
%T Garo spelling and Garo phonology
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 6
%N 1
%P 61-82

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1982
%T The `San' languages: the Jinghpaw-Northern-Naga-Bodo sub-group of Tibeto-Burman
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A Burling,, Robbins
%D 1983
%T The Sal languages
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 7
%N 2
%P 1-32
%O Reference to Boro, Baro, Wanang, Konyak, Nocte, Tangsa, and Jinghpaw - all languages in which the word for `sun' can be reconstructed as *sal

%A Burling,, Robbins
%A Bhattacharya,, P. C.
%D 1956
%T Lexico-statistical dating of the Garo-Bodo separation
%J <Journal of Gauhati University>
%V 7
%P 67-73

%A Burling,, Robbins
%A Maran,, LaRaw
%D 1965
%T Notes on Jinghpaw
%M ms.

%A Burma
%D 1867-69
%T <The three-tongued book: English, Karen, and Burmese>
%C Toungoo, Burma
%Z 2 parts

%A Burma
%D 1880
%T <British Burma Gazeteer>, vol. 1
%C Rangoon
%O Vocabulary, TB: Arakanese 151, Bghai (Bwe) 172-3, Karenni 172, Pwo 171-3, Sgaw 171-3

%A Burma
%D 1889
%T <An Anglo-Burmese grammatical reader for beginners>
%e revised ed.
%C Rangoon
%Z 79p.

%A Burma
%D 1900
%T <Tables for transliteration of Shan names into English>
%C Rangoon
%I Superintendent, Government Printing and Stationery
%Z 2, 13p.
%+ Previously published 1891 - SJS

%A Burma
%D 1917
%T <Linguistic survey of Burma: preparatory stage or linguistic census>
%C Rangoon
%I Government Preparatory and Stationery
%Z 67p.
%+ Reprinted 1950
%O Demographic data on TB, TK, AA, and MY groups, 24-42

%A Burma Baptist Mission
%D 1955
%T <Conversation in spoken Burmese>
%C Rangoon
%e mimeo.
%Z 158p.

%A Burma Education Department
%D 1890
%T <Revised Burmese orthographical vocabulary ... as the standard of Burmese spelling in the province>
%C Rangoon
%I Burmese Education Department
%Z 98p.

%A Burma Education Department
%D 1891
%T <Fourth standard Burmese reader>
%C Rangoon
%I Burmese Education Department
%Z 148p.

%A Burma Textbook Committee
%D 1895
%T <List of authorized geographical names>
%C Rangoon
%I Burma Textbook Committee
%Z 50p.

%A Burma Textbook Committee
%D 1895
%T <List of authorized terms used in arithmetic, algebra, and geometry>
%C Rangoon
%I Burma Textbook Committee
%Z 20p.

%A Burman,, A. D.
%D 1977
%T {\rus ??}
%t Standardized forms of address to royalty in Burmese drama of the 19th century
%B {\rus <??>}
%b Theoretical problems in the study of Far Eastern languages
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P ??-??

%A Burman,, B. K. Roy
%D 1970
%T <Census of India 1961: Demographic and socio-economic profiles of the hill areas of North-East India>
%C New Delhi
%I Office of the Registrar General, Ministry of Home Affairs
%Z 379p., appendices
%O Demog. information on TB, AA, and TK groups

%A Burman,, B. K. Roy
%A Bhatnagar,, S. P.
%A Banerjee,, N. K.
%D n.d.
%T <Bibliography of publications in tribal languages>
%S <Census of India 1961>
%C New Delhi
%I Office of the Registrar General
%Z iv, 98p.
%O Includes works in some TB and Munda languages
%R Reviewed by N. Zide, <Language> 45(1969).3:673-8

%A Burnay,, Jean
%D 1926
%T Review of Naylor, <A practical handbook of the Chin language>
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 20
%P 59-65

%A Burnay,, Jean
%D 1931
%T Siamese {\# Thai char}
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 24
%P 80

%A Burnay,, Jean
%D 1938
%T Notes siamoises
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 38
%P 281-4
%O Notes on Kh\'a and T\uu; a note by `Vidya' relative to these notes appeared in <Journal of the Siam Society> 33(1941):167-8 - SJS

%A Burnay,, Jean
%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1926
%T {\fr Notes d'etymologie tai I: Le nom de nombre <cent>}
%t Tai etymological notes I: the name of the number <hundred>
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 20
%N 1
%P 49-52
%O Reference to Thai, Lao, Shan, Khamti, Th\^o, Black Tai, White Tai, Nung, and Dioi - SJS

%A Burnay,, Jean
%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1928
%T {\fr Note sur notre transcription des parlers tai}
%t Note on our transcription of the Tai languages
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 21
%P 83-5

%A Burnay,, Jean
%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1928
%T {\fr {\# Thai char} et {\# Thai char} et leur origine}
%t ?
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 21
%P 119-26

%A Burnay,, Jean
%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1928
%T {\fr Note sur les tons et les initials du vieux siamois \`a l'\'epoque de Sukhodaya}
%t Note on the tones and initials of Old Siamese in the epoch of Sukhodaya
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 21
%P 103-17

%A Burnay,, Jean
%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1928
%T The origins of the Sukhodaya script
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 21
%P 87-102

%A Burnham,, Eugene C.
%D 1976
%T <The place of Haroi in the Chamic languages>
%U M.A. thesis, University of Texas at Arlington
%Z 87p.

%A Burrard,, Sidney Gerald
%D 1931
%T <Mount Everest and its Tibetan names>
%S <Survey of India professional paper>
%u 26
%C Dehra Dun
%I Survey of India
%O A review of Sven Hadin's book - BSTL {\? Hadin book not in Huffman}

%A Burrow,, Thomas
%D 1963
%T Review of Kuiper, <Nahali: a comparative study>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 26
%P 436-7

%A Burrows,, Lionel
%D 1915
%T <Ho grammar (with vocabulary)>
%C Calcutta
%Z 194p.
%O AA: Munda

%A Burton,, Eva
%D 1964
%T Communication in Vietnamese poetry
%J <V\uan-hoa Nguy\^et-san>
%V 13
%N 9
%P 1265-73

%A Burton,, Eva
%D 1966
%X see Maier and Burton

%A Burton,, Eva
%D 1969
%T A brief sketch of Cua clause structure
%J <Mon-Khmer Studies>
%V III
%P 5-8
%+ Also published <V\uan-hoa Nguy\^et-san> 15(1966).1:187-90

%A Burton,, Eva
%D 1976
%X see Maier and Burton

%A Burton,, Eva
%A Maier,, Jacqueline
%D 1976
%T <Cua ethnographic texts>
%C Huntington Beach, CA
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 66p.
%+ Also published Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 2 mf.

%A Burton-Page,, John
%D 1954
%T The name <Nepal>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 16
%N 3
%P 592-7

%A Burton-Page,, John
%D 1955
%T An analysis of the syllable in Boro
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 16
%P 334-44

%A Burton-Page,, John
%D 1955
%T Two studies in Gurung Kura: I: Tone; II: Rhotacisation and reflexion
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 17
%P 111-18

%A Burudsaphat,, Samsong
%X see Samsong Burudsaphat

%A Bushell,, S. W.
%D 1896
%T The Hsi Hsia dynasty of Tangut, their money and peculiar scripts
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, North China Branch>
%V 30
%P 142-60

%A Butler,, John
%D 1873
%T A rough comparative vocabulary of some of the dialects spoken in the `Naga Hills' district
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 42
%N 1: appendix
%P i-xxix
%O Vocabulary, TB: Dimasa, Empeo, Lotha, Mikir, Rengma, Tengima, Thado

%A Butler,, John
%D 1873
%T A rough comparative vocabulary of two more of the dialects spoken in the Naga Hills
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 44
%N 1
%P 216-27
%O Jaipuria (Nocte), Namsangia

%A B\;uu C\^am
%D n.d.
%T {\viet <D\^an nh\^ap nghi\^en-c\;uu chu\;u-n\^om>}
%t Introduction to the study of Ch\;u-n\^om
%C Saigon
%R Reviewed by Durand, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 50(1962):561

%A B\;uu K\^e
%D 1965, 1968
%T {\viet <T\^am nguy\^en t\;u di\^en. C\^o-v\uan-hoc t\;u-ng\;u t\^am-nguy\^en. 5,000 t\;u-ng\;u \-di\^en-tich>}
%t ?
%C Hue
%I Nam C\;u\;ong
%O 5,000-word etymological dictionary

%A B\;uu Khai
%D 1972
%T <A formalized syntax of Vietnamese>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Georgetown University
%Z 295p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 33,8:4387-A; University Microfilms 73-4190

%A B\;uu Khai
%D 1974
%T Review of D\;u\;ong Thanh Binh, <A tagmemic comparison of the structure of English and Vietnamese>
%J <Journal of Oriental Studies>
%V 12
%P 128-30

%A By V\uan Nguy\^et
%D n.d.
%T Man Cao-lan of Ti\^eu-a, huy\^en of Phu-ninh, province of Phu-tho
%M ms. 207, Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%Z xi, 8p.

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1961
%T {\rus K voprosu o klassifikatsii chastei rechi vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t On the question of classification of parts of speech in the Vietnamese language
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 305
%P 3-14

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1961
%T {\rus Nekotorye glagol'nye konstruktsii vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Some verb constructions in the Vietnamese language
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 294
%P 92-9

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1961
%X see Gordina and Bystrov

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1962
%T {\rus Glagoly napravlennogo dvizheniia vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Verbs of direction in the Vietnamese language
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 306
%P 45-53

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1962
%T {\rus Materialy po klassifikatsii glagolov vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Materials on the classification of verbs in the Vietnamese language
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 306
%P 54-62

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1963
%T {\rus Priznaki perekhodnosti i neperekhodnosti glagolov vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Features of transitivity and intransitivity of verbs in the Vietnamese language
%E Serdiuchenko,, G. P
%B {\rus <Iazyki Kitaia i Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii>}
%b The languages of China and Southeast Asia
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 81-8

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1963
%T {\rus Sviazki vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Copulas in Vietnamese
%J <Vestnik Leningradskogo gosudarstvennogo Universiteta>
%V 20
%N 4
%P 131-2

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1964
%T {\rus Pobuditel'naia konstruktsiia vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t The hortative construction in Vietnamese
%E Bogoliubov,, M. N.
%B {\rus <Voprosy grammatiki iazykov stran Azii>}
%b Grammatic problems of Asian languages
%C Leningrad
%I Leningrad University
%P 26-36

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1964
%X see Gordina and Bystrov

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1966
%T {\rus <Klassifikatsiia glagolov vo v'etnamskom iazyke>}
%t The classification of verbs in Vietnamese
%U Kand. dissertation, Leningrad University
%Z 336p.

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1967
%T {\rus O razgranichenii znamenatel'nykh i sluzhebnykh funktsii glagolov napravlennogo dvizheniia vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t On the determination of the independent and dependent functions of Vietnamese directional verbs
%J <Vestnik Leningradskogo gosudarstvennogo Universiteta>
%V 1967
%N 1
%P 135-8

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1967
%X see Gordina and Bystrov

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1970
%T {\rus Opyt vydeleniia glagol'nykh konfiguratsii vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t An attempt at classifying verbal configurations in Vietnamese
%E Solntsev,, N. V.
%B {\rus <Iazyki Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii: voprosy morfologii, fonetiki i fonologii>}
%b South-East Asian languages: morphological, phonetic and phonological studies
%C Moscow
%I Nauka: 100-11

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1970
%X see Gordina and Bystrov

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1971
%T {\rus Konstruktsii s postpozitivnym podlezhanshchim vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Constructions with postpositive subjects in Vietnamese
%E Beljaev,, V. I.
%E Dolinina,, A. A.
%B {\rus <Voprosy filologii stran Azii i Afriki I>}
%b Philological problems in the countries of Asia and Africa I
%C Leningrad
%I Leningrad University
%V 1
%P 45-52

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%D 1971
%T {\rus Opyt primeneniia transformatsionnoga kriteriia dlia vydeleniia i klassificatsii sluzhebnykh slov vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t An attempt at using transformational criteria for the isolation and classification of auxiliary words in Vietnamese
%E Alieva,, N. F.
%E Plam,, Iu. Ia.
%B {\rus <Iazyki Kitaia i Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii: Problemy sintasksisa>}
%b The languages of China and Southeast Asia: Syntactic problems
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 68-81

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%A C\^an,, Nguy\^en Tai
%A Stankievich,, Nonna V.
%D 1975
%T {\rus <Grammatika v'etnamskogo iazyka>}
%t Grammar of the Vietnamese language
%C Leningrad
%I Izd-vo Leningr. un-ta
%Z 224p.

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%A Stankievich,, Nonna V.
%D 1961
%T {\rus Sposoby vyrazheniia vremeni vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Means of expressing time in the Vietnamese language
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 294
%P 84-91

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%A Stankievich,, Nonna V.
%D 1974
%T {\rus K voprosu o passive i passivnykh konstruktsiiakh vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t On the question of passive and passive constructions in Vietnamese
%E Kholodovich,, A. A.
%B {\rus <Tipologii passivuykh konstruktsii: diatezy i zalogi>}
%b Typology of passive constructions: diathesis and voice
%C Leningrad
%I Nauka
%P 113-20

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%A Stankievich,, Nonna V.
%D 1974
%T {\rus Nekotorye tendentsii v sovremennom v'etnamskom slovoobrazovanii}
%t Some tendencies in modern Vietnamese word formation
%E Plam,, Iu. Ia.
%E Alieva,, N. F.
%B {\rus <Iazyki Kitaia i Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii>}
%b The languages of China and Southeast Asia
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 88-104

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%A Stankievich,, Nonna V.
%D 1978
%T {\rus Osobennosti v'etnamskikh antroponimov}
%t Peculiarities of Vietnamese personal names
%J <Norody Azii i Afriki>
%V 1978
%N 4
%P 153-61

%A Bystrov,, I. S.
%A Stankievich,, Nonna V.
%D 1981
%T {\rus Zalogovye konstruktsikh vo v'etnamskom iazyke}
%t Voice constructions in Vietnamese
%E Khrakovoskii,, V. S.
%B {\rus <Zalogovye konstruksii v razhnostrukturnykh iazykakh>}
%b Voice constructions in languages of various structures
%C Leningrad
%I Nauka
%P 103-14


%% C (Huffman pp. 55-87), input by David Stampe, June 1995

%A Ca,, S. Leli
%X see Kumar,, B., and Ca

%A Ca Ui
%X see Lewis, Yohan, and Ca Ui

%A Ca V\uan Thinh
%D 1961
%T {\viet Tham ju\^an cai ti\^en ch\;u qu\^oc ng\;u}
%t Discussing the improvement of the national script
%B <V\uan \-d\^e cai ti\^en ch\;u qu^oc ng\;u>
%C Hanoi
%I Nha xu\^at ban v\uan hoa
%P 301-7

%A Ca Zhu,, Ang wang Luo Sang
%D 1959
%T {\ch <Zang wen wen fa jiang yi>}
%t Outline of Tibetan grammar
%C ?
%I Ethnic Publishing House

%A Cabaton,, Antoine
%D 1901
%T {\fr <Nouvelles recherches sur les Chams>}
%t Recent research on the Chams
%C Paris
%I Leroux
%Z 4, 215p.

%A Cabaton,, Antoine
%D 1905
%T {\fr Dix dialectes indochinois recueillis par Prosper Odend'hal. Etude linguistique par Antoine Cabaton}
%t Ten Indochinese dialects collected by Prosper Odend'hal. Linguistic study by Antoine Cabaton
%J <Journal Asiatique>, 10. s\'erie
%V 5
%P 265-344
%O Vocabulary, AA: Khmer, Vieux Khmer, Cr\uau (Chrau), Pno\:n (Pnong), Por (Pear), Samr\^e, Stie\:n (Stieng), Alak, Bahnar, Boloven (Loven), Hala\:n (Halang), Seda\:n (Sedang), Kahov (K\;oho), Kase\:n (Kaseng), Kon-tu (Kantu), Lav\'e, Niah\;on (Nyaheun), Mon, So, Kuoi (Kuy); TB: Lyssou (Lisu), Ho-\~ni (Woni), Kato, Kho (Akha?), Khuy (?), Lolo, Mu-tse (Lahu), Y-kia (Yi?), Min-kia (Minchia); MA: Cam (Cham), Jara, Rad\'e, Curu (Churu), Kan\vco (?), Kha Bi (Bih); MY: Man-tse (Yao), Miao-tse (Miao)

%A Cabaton,, Antoine
%D 1905-06
%T {\fr La transcription du \vcam}
%t The transcription of Cham
%J <M\'emoires de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 13
%P 258-67

%A Cabaton,, Antoine
%D 1906
%X see Aymonier and Cabaton

%A Cabaton,, Antoine
%D 1925
%T {\fr A propos d'une langue sp\'eciale de l'Indochine}
%t On a special language of Indochina
%B {\fr <Etudes asiatiques publi\'ees \`a l'occasion du vingt-cinqui\`eme anniversaire de l'Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient par ses membres et ses collaborateurs>}
%b Asiatic studies published on the occasion of the twenty-fifth anniversary of l'Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient by its members and collaborators
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%u 19
%V I
%P 103-23
%O Khmer royal vocabulary; mystic language use by Cham aloes-wood gatherers; vocabulary 118-22 - SJS

%A Cabaton,, Antoine
%D n.d.
%T {\fr Vocabulaire Key d\`ek recuelli \`a Kompong Thom (Cambodge)}
%t Key d\'ek vocabulary gathered from Kompong Thom (Cambodia)
%M ms.

%A Cadi\`ere,, L\'eopold
%D 1902
%T {\fr <La phon\'etique annamite (dialecte du Haut-Annam)>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%u 3
%C Paris
%I Leroux
%Z 113p.
%R Reviewed by H. Cordier, <T'oung Pao> 3(1892):190-1

%A Cadi\`ere,, L\'eopold
%D 1904
%T {\fr Monographie de <a>, voyelle finale non-accentu\'ee en annamite et en sino-annamite}
%t Monograph on <a>, final unaccented vowel in Annamite and Sino-Annamite
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 4
%P 1065-81

%A Cadi\`ere,, L\'eopold
%D 1905
%T {\fr Les haute vall\'es du S\^ong-giang}
%t The high valleys of S\^ong-giang
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 5
%P 349-67
%O Vocabulary, VM: Ngu\^on, S\uach

%A Cadi\`ere,, L\'eopold
%D 1908-10
%T {\fr Monographie de la semivoyelle labiale en annamite et en sino-annamite}
%t Monograph on the labial semivowel in Annamite and Sino-Annamite
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 8(1908); 9(1909); 10(1910)
%P 93-148, 381-85; 51-89, 315-45, 543-7, 681-6; 61-93, 287-337

%A Cadi\`ere,, L\'eopold
%D 1911
%T {\fr Le dialecte du Bas-Annam}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 11
%P 67-110

%A Cadi\`ere,, L\'eopold
%D 1940
%T {\fr Note sur les Mo\~i du Qu\^ang-tri}
%t Note on the Mo\~i of Qu\^ang-tri
%J <Institut Indochinois pour l'Etude de l'Homme (Bulletins et Travaux)>
%V 3
%N 1
%P 101-7
%O Vocabulary, AA: Bahnar, Biat, Ca-Lo (Kal\;o), K\;oho

%A Cadi\`ere,, L\'eopold
%D 1958
%T {\fr <Syntaxe de la langue vietnamienne>}
%t Syntax of the Vietnamese language
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%u 42
%C Paris
%Z xxvii, 208p.
%R Reviewed by Burmann, <Anthropos> 55(1961).1-2:283
%R Honey, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 23(1960).2:430

%A Cadi\`ere,, L\'eopold
%A Pelliot,, Paul
%D 1904
%T {\fr Premi\`ere \'etude sur les sources annamite de l'histoire d'Annam}
%t First study of the Annamite sources of the history of Annam
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 4
%P 617-71

%A Cai Dan Xia Rong
%D 1954
%T {\ch <Zang wen wen fa xiang jie>}
%t Precise explanation of Tibetan grammar
%C ?
%I Qing Hai Peoples' Publishing House

%A Cai Dan Xia Rong
%D 1955
%T {\ch <Zang Han ci hui (Shang ce)>}
%t Tibetan--Chinese lexicon, vol. 1
%C ?
%I Qing Hai People's Publishing House

%A Cai Dan Xia Rong
%D 1957
%T {\ch <Zang Han ci hui (Xia ce)>}
%t Tibetan--Chinese lexicon, vol. 2
%C ?
%I Qing Hai People's Publishing House

%A Caillat,, C.
%D 1967
%T Review of Lienhard, {\? <Nev\=ar\=itima\~njar\=i>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 53
%P 488-90
%% Huffman has v 63, prob a typo

%A Calder,, J.
%D 1882-83
%T Notes on Hainan and its aborigines
%J <China Review>
%V 11
%P 42-50
%O Li vocabulary

%A Callaway,, C. W.
%X see Callaway,, Lois, and Callaway

%A Callaway,, Lois
%A Callaway,, C. W.
%D 1976
%T Mien (Yao)
%E Smalley,, William A.
%B <Phonemes and orthography: language planning in ten minority languages of Thailand>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.43
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 221-38

%A C\^am Bich
%D 1960
%T {\viet V\^an \-d\^e chon \^am ti\^eu chu\^an trong vi\^ec cai ti\^en ch\'u Thai \;o T\^ay B\uac}
%t The problem of choosing standard sounds for the improvement of the Thai script in T\^ay B\uac
%J <T\^ap san d\^an t\^oc> (Hanoi)
%V 17
%P 38-40

%A C\^am Trong
%X see \-D\uang, C\^am, Kha, and Tong

%A Cambefort,, Gaston
%D 1950
%T {\fr <Introduction au cambodgien>}
%t Introduction to Cambodian
%S {\fr <Les langues de l'Rient I. Manuels>}
%C Paris
%I Maisonneuve
%Z vii, 80p.

%A Cambodia, Ministry of Education
%D 1969
%T {khm <Santanianukr\^am baarang--kmae: piak paccaekkateeh>}
%t French--Khmer glossary: technical terminology
%C Phnom Penh
%Z 506p.

%A Campbell,, Andrew
%D 1839
%T Note on the Mechis together with a small vocabulary of the language
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 8
%P 623-31

%A Campbell,, Andrew
%D 1840
%T Note on the Lepchas of Sikkim
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 9
%P 379-93
%O Lepcha language 388-93

%A Campbell,, Andrew
%D 1840
%T Note on the Limboos and other hill tribes hitherto undescribed
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 9
%P 595-615
%O Vocab, TB: Limbu, Murmi

%A Campbell,, Andrew
%D 1855
%T Note on the Limboo alphabet of the Sikkim Himalaya
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 24
%P 202-3, pl.

%A Campbell,, Andrew
%D 1899-1902
%T <A Santali--English dictionary>
%O Part 1, 1899; Part 2, 1900; Part 3, 1902
%C Pokhuria
%I The Santal Mission Press
%Z iii, 707p.

%A Campbell,, Andrew
%D 1905
%T <English--Santali: Index to Santali--English dictionary>
%C Pokhuria
%I Santali Mission Press

%A Campbell,, Andrew
%A Macphail,, R. M.
%D 1933
%T <A Santali--English and English--Santali dictionary>
%C Pokhuria
%I Santal Mission Press

%A Campbell,, George
%D 1866
%T The ethnology of India
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>, supplement
%V 35
%N 2
%P 1-52
%O Santali vocabulary, appendix B

%A Campbell,, George
%D 1874
%T <Specimens of the languages of India, including those of the aboriginal tribes of Bengal, the Central Provinces and the Eastern Frontier>
%C Calcutta
%I Bengal Secretariat Press
%Z iv., 303p.
%O Vocabulary, AA: Khasi (220-35, 272-83), Mon (286-303), Santali (ch. 5); TK: Ahom, Khamti, Aiton (283ff), Aka (Hruso, 238ff.), Angami (205 ff.) Bodo (169), Chulikata (239ff), Dafla (238ff), Deka Haimong (267ff), Digaro (239ff), Dopdarya (254ff), Garo (188ff), Hallamee (204ff), Hati Garya (Monsen, 254ff), Hojai (169ff), Kachari (188f), Kukee of Cachar (Thado, 204ff), Luckimpore (Nocte, 221ff), Lushai (189ff), Manipuri (Meithei, 205, 220, 286), Mech (150ff), Mikir (204ff), Miklai (lotha, 254ff), Miri (221ff), Mru (189ff), Newari (151ff), Seebsaugor (Banpara, 220ff), Singpho (Kachin, 221ff), Tablungia (Tableng, 254ff), Hill Tipperah (Tippera, 181ff, 104ff)

%A Campbell,, Russell N.
%D 1960
%T <English for Thai speakers. vol. 1: Pronunciation>
%C Bangkok
%Z 148p.
%+ Also published Arlington, VA: ERIC Document reproduction service, 151p.

%A Campbell,, Russell N.
%D 1964
%T <Noun substitutes in modern Thai>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Michigan
%Z 92p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts 25,6:3562; University Microfilms 64,570

%A Campbell,, Russell N.
%D 1969
%T <Noun substitutes in modern Thai: a study in pronominality>
%S <Janua linguarum series practica>
%u 65
%C The Hague and Paris
%I Mouton
%Z 70p.
%R Reviewed by Cooke, <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 92(1972).2:362-3
%R Reviewed by Dellinger, <Linguistics> 100(1973):103-5
%R Reviewed by Egerod, <Lingua> 26(1970-71).3:333-4
%R Reviewed by Gething, <Journal of Asian Studies> 29(1969-70).3:732-3
%R Reviewed by K. Rosenberg, <Oriens> 23-4(1974):637-9

%A Campbell,, Russell N.
%D 1972
%T Review of Cooke, <Pronominal reference in Thai, Burmese, and Vietnamese>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 92
%N 1
%P 158-9

%A Campbell,, Stuart
%A Chuan Shaweewongse
%D 1957
%T <Fundamentals of the Thai language>
%C Bangkok
%I S. Bunyasiribhandu
%Z 271p.

%A Campbell,, Stuart
%A Chuan Shaweewongse
%D 1968
%T <The fundamentals of the Thai language>
%e 4th ed.
%C New York
%I Paragon Book Gallery
%Z 523p.

%A Cang,, Thungdi
%X see Kumar,, B., and Cang

%A Cao Cuiyun (Ts'ao Ts'ui-y\"un)
%D 1958
%X see (see Pan Yuenen and Cao Cuiyun)

%A Cao Cuiyun (Ts'ao Ts'ui-y\"un)
%D 1961
%T {\ch Qian dong Miao yu zhuang ci chu tan}
%t Exploration of Miao adverbs in Eastern Guizhou
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 103
%P 36-42, 48

%A Cao Cuiyun (Ts'ao Ts'ui-y\"un)
%D 1972
%T A preliminary study of descriptive words in the Miao language of Eastern Kweichow
%E Purnell,, Herbert C.
%B <Miao and Yao linguistic studies; selected articles in Chinese, translated by Chang Yu-hung, and Chu Kwo-ray>
%S <Cornell University Southeast Asia Program Data Paper>
%u 88
%C Ithaca
%I Cornell University Southeast Asia Program
%P 187-210
%O English translation of Cao 1961

%A Cao Cuiyun (Ts'ao Ts'ui-y\"un)
%D 1972
%X see (see Pan and Cao)

%A Cao Cuiyun (Ts'ao Ts'ui-y\"un)
%D 1981
%T {\ch ??}
%t Ti{\# superscript 13} - the copula of the eastern Guizhou dialect of the Miao language
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1981
%N 3
%P 54-6
%O Examples in roman

%A Cao Cuiyun (Ts'ao Ts'ui-y\"un)
%D 1982
%T (See Zhang Yongxiang and Cao)

%A Cao Guangqu (Ts'ao Kuang-ch'\"u)
%D 1954
%T {\ch Jie shao Buyi yu (shao shu Min zu Yu wen jie shao)}
%t Introduction to Pu-yi
%J <Yu wen zhi shi>
%V April 1954
%P 34ff

%A Cao Guangqu (Ts'ao Kuang-ch'\"u)
%D 1956
%T {\ch ??}
%t A secret Pu-yi language
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 45
%P 39-40

%A Cao Guangqu (Ts'ao Kuang-ch'\"u)
%D 1959
%T {\ch Shi tan zhuang yu yu fa zhong de xin ci xu}
%t Discussion of new word orders in Chuang grammar
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 1959
%N 5
%P 219-21

%A Cao Guangqu (Ts'ao Kuang-ch'\"u)
%D 1983
%T {\ch ??}
%t A preliminary analysis of the words related to Chinese in the Kam-Tai languages
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1983
%N 2
%P 51-55
%O With romanized citations

%A Cao Guangqu (Ts'ao Kuang-ch'\"u)
%D 1984
%X see (see Dong, Cao, and Yan)

%A Cao Xu\^an Hao
%D 1962
%T {\viet Ban v\^e cach giai thuy\^et \^am vi hoc m\^ot so v\^an m\^au co nguy\^en \^am ngj\uan trong ti\^eng Vi\^et}
%t Toward a phonetic explanation for some short-vowel rhymes
%J <Th\^ong bao khoa hoc ng\`u v\uan>
%V 1
%P 146-54

%A Cao Xu\^an Hao
%D 1975
%T The problem of the phoneme in Vietnamese
%J <Vietnamese Studies>
%V 40
%P 96-123

%A Cao Xu\^an Thi\^en
%D 1923
%T {\fr <Manuel de la langue th\^o>}
%t Manual of the Th\^o Language
%C Hanoi
%I Imprimerie Vinh et Thaun
%Z 43p.
%O In Th\^o, Vietnamese, and French

%A Capell,, Arthur
%D 1961
%T Review of Salzner, {\germ <Sprachenatlas des indopazifischen Raumes>}
%J <Oceania>
%V 32
%P 72-3

%A Capell,, Arthur
%D 1962
%T Oceanic linguistics today
%J <Current Anthropology>
%V 3
%N 4
%P 371-428
%O Reference to Chamic languages; extensive discussion of Southeast Asian linguistic relationships, with good bibliography

%A Capell,, Arthur
%D 1962
%T Review of Rabel, <Khasi, a language of Assam>
%J <Oceania>
%V 33
%N 1
%P 61-2

%A Capell,, Arthur
%D 1963
%T Review of Shorto, <Linguistic comparison in South-East Asia and the Pacific>
%J <Oceania>
%V 35
%P 81-2

%A Capell,, Arthur
%D 1964
%T Review of Banker, et al., <Mon-Khmer studies I>
%J <Oceania>
%V 35
%N 2
%P 156-7

%A Capell,, Arthur
%D 1971
%T Review of Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em, et al., eds., <Papers in South East Asian Linguistics 1>
%J <Oceania>
%V 42
%P 71

%A Capell,, Arthur
%D 1979
%T Further typological studies in Southeast Asian languages
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Southeast Asian linguistic studies>, 3
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 1-41
%O Includes Burmese, Thai, Vietnamese, Khmer, and Jarai

%A Caplan,, L.
%D 1967
%T Review of Pign\`ede, {\fr <Les Gurungs>}
%J <Man>
%V 2
%N 4
%P 654

%A Carey,, F.
%D 1814
%T <A grammar of the Burman language>
%C Serampore
%Z 351p.

%A Carey,, Haji Dr. Iskandar
%D 1961
%T <Tengleq kui serok: a study of the Temiar language with an ethnographical summary>
%C Kuala Lumpur
%I Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka
%Z 195p.
%O Part 1, Structure, 1-20; Part 2, Texts, 21-87; Part 3, Vocabulary lists, 88-134; Part 4, Ethnographic summary, 135-95

%A Carey,, Haji Dr. Iskandar
%D 1968
%T Mendrik kinship terminology
%J <Federated Museums Journal> n.s.
%V 13
%P 49-56
%O Mendriq

%A Carey,, Haji Dr. Iskandar
%D 1970
%T The Kensiu Negritos of Baling, Kedah
%J <Journal of the Malaysian Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 43
%N 1
%P 143-54
%O Kensiu kinship terminology, 153

%A Carey,, Haji Dr. Iskandar
%D 1970
%T A Mendrik vocabulary
%J <Federated Museums Journal>
%V 15
%P 183-91
%O Mendriq

%A Carey,, Haji Dr. Iskandar
%D 1973
%T A brief account of the Mah Meri
%J <Journal of the Malaysian Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 46
%N 2
%P 185-94

%A Carey,, Haji Dr. Iskandar
%D 1976
%T The administration of the aboriginal tribes of western Malaysia
%E Banks,, David J.
%B <Changing identities in modern Southeast Asia>
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%P 43-69
%O Political status, history, and ethnography of the Orang Asli

%A Carey,, Haji Dr. Iskandar
%D 1976
%T <Orang Asli: the aboriginal tribes of peninsular Malaysia>
%C Kuala Lumpur
%I Oxford University Press
%Z 376p.

%A Carlson,, Mary Beth
%X see Derrick-Mescua, Berman, and Carlson

%A Carnegy,, Patrick
%D 1877
%T <Kachari technicalities: a glossary of terms, rural, official and general in daily use in the courts of law and in illustration of the tenures, customs, arts and manufacture of Hindustan>, Allahabad

%A Carpani,, Melchiore
%A Mantegazza,, C.
%D 1776
%T <Alphabetum Barmanorum seu Regni Avensis>
%C Rome
%+ 2nd ed., 1787

%A Carpenter,, C. H.
%D 1875
%T <The Anglo-Karen handbook and reader>

%A Carrin-Bouez,, Marine
%X see also Bouez,, Marine

%A Carrin-Bouez,, Marine
%D 1978
%T {\fr <La fleur et l'os: symbolisme et rituel chez les Santal (Orissa, Inde)>}
%t ?
%U {\fr Th\'ese de 3e cycle, Paris, Universit\'e Paris X}

%A Carrin-Bouez,, Marine
%D 1979
%T {\fr Le retour de l'origine: mythe, chant et rite dans une f\^ete santal}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 10
%N 2-4
%P 87-117
%O Santali text, 88-98
%% Huffman has chat for chant

%A Carrin-Bouez,, Marine
%D 1980
%T {\fr Des maux et des mots}
%t ?
%J <L'Homme>
%V 20
%N 3
%P 85-107
%O Santali medical vocabulary, 99-104; phonetic table, 105

%A Carson,, Mrs. L. H.
%D 1911
%T <Chin reader in the Lai dialect, no. 1>
%C Rangoon
%Z 68p.

%A Cartwright,, Basilxx Osborne
%D 1906
%T <An elementary handbook of the Siamese language>
%C Bangkok; London
%I American Presbyterian Mission Press; Luzac
%Z xiv, 371p.

%A Cartwright,, Basil Osborne
%D 1907
%T <A Siamese--English dictionary>
%C Bangkok
%I American Presbyterian Mission Press
%Z 731p.

%A Cartwright,, Basil Osborne
%D 1915
%T <The student's manual of the Siamese language>
%C Bangkok; London
%I American Presbyterian Mission Press; Luzac
%Z vii, 307p.
%O Revised edition, parts 1-2, 1929 - SJS

%A Cartwright,, Basil Osborne
%D 1917
%T {\eng <English--French--Siamese word and phrase book.>} {\fr <Petit livre de conversation anglais--fran\,cais--siamois>}
%C Bangkok
%I American Presbyterian Mission Press
%Z v, 239p.

%A Cartwright,, Basil Osborne
%D 1930
%T <Siamese self-taught: the student's manual of the Siamese language>
%e revised ed.
%C Bangkok
%I Sugh Pakya Press

%A Carvell,, J. M.
%A Thengkur
%D 1904
%T <Mikir reader>, 2nd book
%C Calcutta

%A Carvell,, J. M.
%A Mosendra
%D 1907
%T <Mikir reader>, 3rd book
%C Calcutta
%Z 77p.

%A Cassaigne,, Jean
%D 1929
%T {\fr <Lexique mo\"i--annamite--fran\,cais (pour la r\'egion Djiring-Dalat)>}
%t M\"oi--Annamite--French lexicon (for the Djiring-Dalat region)
%C Saigon-Tandinh
%I Imprimerie de la Mission
%Z 108p.
%O K\;oho

%A Cassaigne,, Jean
%D 1930
%T {\fr <Petit manuel de conversation courtante en langue mo\"i (Koho et Cau Sor\^e), \`a l'usage des planteurs, chasseurs, tourists (r\'egion Djiring-Dalat)>}
%t ?
%C Tandinh-Saigon
%I Imprimerie de la Mission
%Z 64p.
%O K\;oho, Sr\^e

%A Cassaigne,, Jean
%D 1935
%T {\fr <Manuel de conversation fran\,cais-koho>}
%t Manual of French-K\"oho conversation
%e 2nd ed.
%C Saigon
%I Imprimerie de l'Union
%Z 104p.

%A Castor,, R. H.
%D 1922
%T <Nomenclature of diseases in Burma>
%C Rangoon
%Z 54p.

%A Caswell,, J.
%D 1870
%T Treatise on the tones of the Siamese language
%J <Siam Repository>
%V 2
%P 93-101

%A Catford,, J. C.
%D 1966
%X see (see Bazell, Catford, Halliday, and Robins)

%A Catlin,, Amy R.
%D 1981?
%T <Music of the Hmong singing voices and talking reeds>
%C Providence, RI
%I Center for Hmong Lore, Museum of Natural History
%Z 17p., ill.
%L UCB S-SEAsia GR312 .C375; UCLA Music * ML 3560 H5 C38 1981 Oversize Area

%A Catlin,, Amy R.
%D 1982
%T Speech surrogate systems of the Hmong: from singing voices to talking reeds
%E Downing,, Bruce T.
%E Olney,, Douglas P.
%B <The Hmong in the West: observations and reports>, Papers from the 1981 Hmong Research Conference, University of Minnesota
%C Minneapolis
%I Center for Urban and Regional Affairs
%P 170-97

%A [Catlin,, Amy]
%D c1987
%T <Virgins, orphans, widows & bards: songs of Hmong women>
%C [Van Nuys, CA]
%I [Amy Catlin]
%Z 1 sound cassette (39 min.) : analog, 1 7/8 ips, 4-track, stereo., Dolby processed; 3 7/8 x 2 1/2in.
%O Sung in the Hmong language. Recorded in Thailand in 1979 and in California, 1982-1985, by Amy Catlin. Notes by Amy Catlin inserted in container
%O Contents: Orphan's song -- Daughter-in-law's song -- Love song -- Widow's song -- Song of homesickness -- Schooling song
%L UCLA Ethno Arc ARC 555. Two copies.

%A Caughley,, Kathleen
%D 1970, 1973
%X see (see Caughley, Ross, and Caughley)

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1969
%T <Chepang phonemic summary>
%S <Tibeto-Burman phonemic summaries>
%u 4
%C Kirtipur
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%Z 36p.

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1970
%T Chepang segmental synopsis
%E Hale,, Austin
%E Pike,, Kenneth L.
%B <Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman languages of Nepal>
%S <Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics>
%u 3
%C Urbana
%I University of Illinois
%V 1
%P 279-99

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1970
%T Pitch, intensity, and higher levels in Chepang
%E Hale,, Austin
%E Pike,, Kenneth L.
%B <Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman languages of Nepal>
%S <Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics>
%u 3
%C Urbana
%I University of Illinois
%V 1
%P 143-57

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1971
%T Chepang as a pronominalized language
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/Nepal
%Z 10p.

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1971
%T Some performative markers in Chepang
%M ms., Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 4p.

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1971
%T Some restrictions on focus in Chepang
%M ms., Kathmandu: Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 7p.

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1972
%T <A vocabulary of the Chepang language>
%S <Comparative vocabularies of languages of Nepal>
%C Kirtipur
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Institute of Nepal Studies
%Z 40p.
%+ Also published Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 1 mf.

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1973
%X see (see Chepang, Caughley, and Caughley)

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1975
%T <Chepang pronominalization>
%C Kathmandu
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z mimeo.

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1978
%T Participant rank and verbal cross-reference in Chepang
%E Grimes,, Joseph E.
%B <Papers on discourse>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Publications in linguistics and related fields>
%u 51
%C Arlington, TX
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 163-78

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1978
%T Selection for verbal cross-reference in Chepang
%M Conf. of the Australian Linguistic Society

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D 1981
%T <The syntax and morphology of the verb in Chepang>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Australian National University
%Z 291p.
%+ Published 1982 as <Pacific Linguistics> B.84, Canberra: Australian National University, xvi, 269, 19p.

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D forthcoming
%T <The verb in Chepang>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u B.(??)
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%% This is perhaps Caughley 1981

%A Caughley,, Ross
%D n.d.
%T Clause patterns in Chepang
%M ms.

%A Caughley,, Ross
%A Caughley,, Kathleen
%D 1970
%T Chepang texts
%E Hale,, Austin
%E Pike,, Kenneth L.
%B <Tone systems of Tibeto-Burman languages of Nepal>
%S <Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman linguistics>
%u 3
%C Urbana
%I University of Illinois
%V 4
%P 1-130

%A Caughley,, R. S.
%A Dahal,, B. M.
%A Bandhu,, C.
%D 1971
%T Notes on Chepang culture
%J <Tribhuvan University Journal>
%V 6
%N 1
%P 77-89

%A Cawang,, L.
%X see Kumar,, B., and Cawang

%A C\'edok
%D 1984(??)
%T {\fr <Karenni, une courte bibliographie, avec des commentaires>}
%t Karenni, a short bibliography with some commentary
%C Lausanne, Switzerland
%I C\'edok
%Z 116p.

%A Cefola,, Penusee Lertadsin
%D 1981
%T <A study of interference of English in the language of Thai bilinguals in the United States>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Georgetown University
%Z 273p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 43.3:786-A; University Microfilms 8218300

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1975
%T <A brief look at the Vietnamese language>
%S <Indochinese Refugee Education Guides/General Information Series>
%u 6
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics, National Indochinese Clearinghouse
%Z 15p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1975
%T <Teaching English pronunciation to speakers of Black Tai (Tai Dam)>
%S <Indochinese Refugee Education Guides/General Information Series>
%u 10
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 16p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1976
%T <Teaching English structures to Vietnamese>
%S <Indochinese Refugee Education Guides/General Information Series>
%u 11
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 23p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1977
%T <English pronunciation exercises for speakers of Vietnamese>
%S <Indochinese Refugee Education Guides/General Information Series>
%u 7
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 51p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1978
%T <An annotated bibliography of materials on the Hmongs of Laos>
%S <Indochinese Refugee Education Guides/General Information Series>
%u 17
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 30p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1978
%T <Teaching English to Cambodian students>
%S <Indochinese Refugee Education Guides/General Information Series>
%u 18
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 39p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1978
%T <The Hmong language: sentences, phrases, and words>
%S <Indochinese Refugee Education Guides/General Information Series>
%u 15
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 46p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1978
%T <The Hmong language: sounds and alphabets>
%S <Indochinese Refugee Education Guides/General Information Series>
%u 14
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 38p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1979
%T <English pronunciation lessons for Hmong>
%S <Language and Orientation Resource Center, General Information Series>
%u 21
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 45p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1979
%T <Teaching English to speakers of Lao>
%S <Language and Orientation Resource Center, General Information Series>
%u 19
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 57p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1980
%T <English--Khmer phrasebook with useful wordlist (for Cambodians)>
%? adapted and translated by Samnang Soeur and Chantavy Soeur
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 131p., map
%O Khmer--English and English--Khmer wordlists, 93-131

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1980
%T <English--Lao phrasebook with useful wordlist (for Laotians)>
%? Adapted and translated by Khamchong Luangpraseut
%C Washington, DC
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 152p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D 1981
%T <English--Hmong phrasebook with useful wordlist (for Hmong speakers)>
%? adapted and translated by Cheu Thao
%C Washington, DC
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%L UCI Main Lib PE1130.H66 C5 1981 Southeast Asian Archive; UCLA URL PE 1130 M5 E5

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D nda.
%T <Selected annotated bibliography for teaching English to speakers of Vietnamese: a supplement>
%S <Language and Orientation Resource Center, General Information Series>
%u 12
%C Washington, DC
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 29p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D nda.
%T <Teaching English to speakers of Vietnamese>
%S <Language and Orientation Resource Center, General Information Series>
%u 23
%C Washington, DC
%I Center for Applied Linguistics

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D n.d.
%T <Teaching English to Vietnamese: Textbooks>
%S <Language and Orientation Resource Center, General Information Series>
%u 5
%C Washington, DC
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 10p.

%A Center for Applied Linguistics
%D n.d.
%T <Testing the reading ability of Cambodians>
%S <Language and Orientation Resource Center, General Information Series>
%u 7
%C Washington, DC
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 7p.

%A Centre de Documentation et Recherche sur l'Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien
%D 1971-72
%T {\fr Ou en est l'Atlas ethnolinguistique sur l'Asie du Sud-Est et le Monde Insulindien?}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 2(1971); 3(1972); 3(1972)
%N 4; 1; 4

%A Chaband,, Edmond
%A Diew Lingx Gnimz
%D 1951
%T {\fr <Cours de langue tai>}
%t Tai language course
%? Lai-chaur
%O Black Tai, White Tai; described in F. Martini, Review of Shorto, Jacobs, & Simmonds, <Bibliographies of Mon-Khmer and Tai linguistics>, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 53(1966-67):300-3

%A Chafe,, Wallace L.
%D 1963
%T Review of Smalley, <Outline of Khmu structure>
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 65
%N 6
%P 1407-8

%A Chaffee,, C. C.
%X see Audretch and Chaffee

%A Chai Yeh-t'ang
%D 1963
%T {\ch Tsang-y\"u kai-k'ung}
%t A descriptive sketch of the Tibetan language
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 1963
%N 6
%P 511-28

%A Chaichana,, Nuphuk
%X see Nuphuk Chaichana

%A Chaichanpong,, Sinuan
%X see Sinuan Chaichanpong

%A Chaichua,, Charoen
%X see Charoen Chaichua

%A Chijon Chuchat
%D 1959
%T {\thai <Sap banjat>}
%t Coined terms
%C Bangkok
%Z 344p.

%A Chainangun,, Virul
%X see Virul Chainangun

%A Chaiwasu,, Op
%X see Op Chaiwasu

%A Chaiyaratana,, Chalao
%X see Chalao Chaiyaratana

%A Chak Worasin
%D 1969
%T {\thai <Photchan\=anukrom Chin--Thai>}
%t Chinese--Thai dictionary
%C Bangkok

%A Chakesamga,, Pusazo
%X see Kumar,, B., Sarma Chakesamga, Gautama, and Mamdal

%A Chaklader,, Dr. Snehanoy
%D 1978
%T Language shift among the Santals in West Bengal: synopsis
%J <Proceedings of the International Congress of Anthropological And Ethnological Sciences>
%V 10
%N 2
%P 74

%A Chakraborty,, Ashit Ranjan
%D 1978
%T <Read Lepcha: an introduction to the Lepcha or Rong script and a self-instruction for reading the language>
%C Calcutta
%I C. Chakraborty
%Z 29, 80p.

%A Chakraborty,, Ramnath
%D 1876
%T <English, Bengali, and Garo vocabulary>
%C Calcutta
%Z 54p.

%A Chakravarti,, Adhir
%D 1978
%T <The Sdok Kak Thom inscription, Part I: a study in Indo-Khmer civilization>
%S <Calcutta Sanskrit College research series>
%u 111
%? with a preface by Ramesh Chandra Majumdar
%C Calcutta
%I Sanskrit College
%Z 255p.
%R Reviewed by Jenner, <Journal of Asian Studies> 43(1983).1:197-8

%A Chakravarti,, Adhir
%D 1980
%T <The Sdok Kak Thom inscription, Part II: text, translations, and commentary>
%S <Calcutta Sanskrit Commentary research series 112>
%? with a preface by Dinesh Chandra Sircar
%C Calcutta
%I Sanskrit College
%Z 255p.
%R Reviewed by Jenner, <Journal of Asian Studies> 43(1983).1:197-8

%A Chakravarti,, Adhir
%D 1982
%T A glossary of Old Khmer
%J <Indian Journal of Linguistics>
%V 9
%N 1; 2
%P 1-16 [follows p. 58]; 46-53

%A Chakravarty,, L. N.
%A et al.
%D 1963
%T <A dictionary of the Taraon language>, produced for the use of officers of the NEFA administration by the philology section
%C Shillong
%I Research Department, North East Frontier Agency
%O Digaro

%A Chakrit Anuntrawan
%D 1978
%T {\thai <Rabop s\=iang nai ph\=as\=a tha dam, m\=u b\=an n\=a p\=a n\=at, tambon khao k\=ew, 'amph\=oe ch\=iang kh\=an, changwat l\=oei>}
%t The phonemic system of Thai Dam dialect, Muban Napanat, Tambon Khao Kaeo, Amphoe Chiang Kham, Changwat Loei
%U M.E. thesis, Srinakharinwirot University
%Z 138p.
%O English summary

%A Chalao Chaiyarantata
%D 1961
%T <A comparative study of English and Thai syntax>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Indiana University
%Z 288p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts 22,6:1986; University Microfilms 61-4428

%A Chalao Chaiyarantata
%D 1965
%T <Let's speak Thai>
%C Bangkok
%I Social Science Association of Thailand
%Z 188p.

%A Calermnit
%D 1961
%T <Guide to Thai conversation: all you need in Thailand>
%C Bangkok
%I Nai Prayura Phisnaka
%Z 283p.
%+ 2nd ed. 1966

%A Chalid Rinprom
%D 1976
%T {\thai <Rabop n\=uai si=iang nai ph\=as\=a thin kh\=or\=at>}
%t The phonemic system of the Korat dialect
%U M.A. thesis, Chulalongkorn University
%O Thai; English summary

%A Chualuay Boonprasert
%D 1982
%T <Discourse structure in Phuan>
%U M.A. thesis, ILCRD, Mahidol University {\? ILCRD?}

%A Cham Cultural Center
%D 196(??)
%T {\viet <R\^oh twah `s\;uu-t\^am', s\^o \-d\uac bi\^et ng\^on ng\;u Cham, n\^oi-san nghi\^en-c\;uu>}
%t Special number on the Cham language
%C Phanrang
%Z 28p.

%A Cham Cultural Center
%D 1974
%T {\viet <Khao luc nguy\^en cao Cham>}
%t ??
%S {\fr <Archives des manuscrits Cham>}
%u vols. 1-2
%C Phan Rang, Vietnam
%I Cham Cultural Center
%Z 2 vols., 95, 132p.
%O Seven Cham texts in Cham script

%A Cham Thongkhamwan
%D 1965
%T {\thai <Sannitth\=an th\=iap k\=an kh\=ian 'aks\=\,on thai kap 'aks\=\,on kh\=\,om nai samai ph\=\,o khun r\=amkhamh\=aeng>}
%t An essay on the comparison of Thai and Khom scripts in the time of King Ramkhamhaeng
%C Bangkok
%I Municipal Government Press

%A Cham Thongkhamwan
%D 1976
%T {\thai <Sannith\=an th\=iap 'aks\=\,on thai kap 'aks\=\,on kh\=\,om nai samai ph\=\,o khun r\=amkhamh\=aeng>}
%t Assumptions concerning a comparison of the Thai and Khom scripts at the time of King Ramkhamhaeng
%C Bangkok
%I Khurusapha Press
%Z 51p.

%A Cham Thongkhamwan
%D 1977
%T {\thai <Lak ph\=as\=a kham\=en>}
%t Principles of the Khmer language
%C Bangkok
%I Khurusapha Press
%Z 72p.

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1969
%T <A generative approach to tone in Vientiane Lao>
%U M.A. thesis, Michigan State University

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1971
%T <A workbook in comparative and historical Tai linguistics>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%Z 35p.

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1972
%T The origin of southwestern Tai
%J <Bulletin des Amis du Royaume Lao>
%V 7-8
%P 233-44

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1972
%T Tone borrowing in five northeastern dialects
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Noss,, Richard B.
%B <Tai phonetics and phonology>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute for English Language
%P 43-6
%O Tai

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1972
%X see Panh, Sisaveuy, and Chamberlain

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1972
%X see Soulang, Prachit, Phone, and Chamberlain

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1973
%T {\fr <Lexique fran\,cais--lao, termes linguistiques>}
%t French--Lao lexicon, linguistic terms
%? with Soulang Dejwongsa, et al.
%C Vientiane
%I Royal Lao Academy

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1973
%T The distribution of Lao dialects and the Tai migrations
%E Dor\'e,, Amphay
%E Barber,, Martin
%B <Colloquium of researchers in the human sciences in Laos>
%C Luang Probang, Laos
%O Reprinted in <Sangkhomkhady>, Vientiane, 1974

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1974
%T The standardization of Lao
%E Perez,, A. Q.
%B <Papers of the Second Conference on Asian Languages>
%C Manila
%I Asian Association of National Languages
%P ?

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1974
%T Tone system patterns and classification of Tai languages: how reliable are they?
%M Paper read at the Tai Linguistics Symposium, Bangkok, April 1974

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1975
%T {\thai Kamn\=oet ph\=as\=a thai thin tawan tok ch\=iang tai}
%t The origins of southwestern Tai
%? translated by Phongphan Manirat
%J <Bulletin of the Faculty of Arts, Chulalangkorn University>
%V 9
%P 65-79

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1975
%T Tone in Tai: a new perspective
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%B <A Tai festschrift for William J. Gedney on the occasion of his fifth cycle of life birthday anniversary, April 4, 1975>
%S <Southeast Asian Studies Working Paper>
%u 8
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Southeast Asian Studies Program
%P 140-7
%+ Also published in Gething & Nguy\^en, eds., 1979

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%T Tone in Tai: a new perspective
%D 1979
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 6>: <Tai studies in honor of William J. Gedney>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.52
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 119-23
%+ Also published in Gething, ed., 1975

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1975
%T A new look at the history and classification of the Tai languages
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Chamberlain,, James R.
%B <Studies in Tai linguistics in honor of William J. Gedney>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 49-66

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1975
%X see (see Harris,, J., and Chamberlain)

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1977
%T Proto-Tai zoology: lizards and crocodilians
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 10 (Georgetown University, Washington, DC)

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1977
%T <An introduction to Proto-Tai zoology>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Michigan
%Z 227p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 38.11:6687-A; University Microfilms 7804666

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1978
%T An outline of Proto-Tai zoology
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 11 (University of Arizona, Tucson)

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1979
%T Language standardization in Laos
%E Perez,, A. Q.
%E Santiago,, A. O.
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Liem
%B <Papers from the conference on the standardization of Asian languages, Manila, Philippines, Dec. 19-21, 1974>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.47
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 267-74

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1979
%T Proto-Tai zoology: chelonians
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1980
%T Proto-Tai zoology: amphibians
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 13 (University of Virginia, Charlottesville)

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1981
%T Proto-Tai zoology: serpents
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 14 (University of Florida, Gainesville)

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D 1982
%T Proto-Tai zoology: arthropods I
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)
%O Read by title only

%A Chamberlain,, James R.
%D forthcoming
%T <Thao Hung> or <Cheuang>: a Lao epic poem
%E Svantesson,, Jan-Olaf
%B <Papers from the Helsing\/or symposium on Austroasiatic linguistics and literature>
%C Copenhagen/London
%I Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies/Curzon
%P 65-93

%A Chambers,, Arthur
%D 1929
%X see Schebesta, Paul

%A Chambers,, O. A.
%D 1889
%T <Handbook of the Lushai country>
%C Calcutta
%O Shandu vocabulary

%A Chamlong Khambunchu
%D in progress 1983
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=a thin y\=\,oi kh\=\,ong kham m\=\,ang nai changwat lamp\=ang: k\=an s\,uks\=a sap>}
%t The Kammuang dialect in Lampang Province: a lexical study
%U M.A. thesis, Department of Thai, Chulalongkorn University

%A Chamlong Phitsanakha
%D 1974
%T {\thai <Photchan\=anukrom ch\=in kl\=ang, t\=aechiu, 'angkrit, thai>}
%t Mandarin--Taechiw--English--Thai dictionary
%C Bangkok
%I Bandansan

%A Chamnan Rodhetbhai
%D 1974
%T {\thai <??>}
%t An annotated collection of Thai-Lue folktales
%U M.E. thesis, Srinakharinwirot University
%O With English abstract

%A Chamniroksan,, Dutsadiphon
%X see Dutsadiphon Chamniroksan

%A Chamnong Thongprasert
%D 1973
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=a kh\=\,ong rao>}
%t Our language
%C Bangkok
%I Prae Phittaya
%O Thai

%A Chan Fook-Chuen
%X see Bradley,, David, and Chan

%A Chan Sungsi Yananda
%A Luang Nonwakorn
%D 1925
%T The Yao
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 19
%N 2
%P 83-128
%O Translated by E. G. Sebastian, 83-93; Thai version 95-112; Thai--Yao--English vocabulary of 400 words, with Yao in Thai script 113-28

%A Chandhuri,, Sambhar Chandra
%D 1940
%T North Bengali dialects: Rajshahi
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 8
%P 418-31
%O Ref to AA: Bhumij, Kol, Nihali; TB: Koch

%A Chandorin,, G. A.
%D 1957
%T {khm <??>}
%t Khmer--Russian conversation
%C Phnom Penh
%I Librairie Nguon Huot
%Z 58p.

%A Chandra Khonthasen
%D 1923
%T The Red Karens
%? Translated by E. J. Walton
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 17
%N 2
%P 74-99
%O Vocabulary, 80-99

%A Chandra Lokesh
%X see Lokesh,, Chandra

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%X see also Shefts,, Betty

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1964, 1965, 1967
%X see (see Chang Kun and Betty Shefts Chang)

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1968
%T Glottalization and the falling tone
%J <Monthly internal memorandum, Phonology Laboratory>
%V May 1968
%P 10-22
%O Tib.

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1968
%T Lhasa Tibetan vowels I: <e:\'e>
%J <Monthly internal memorandum, Phonology Laboratory>
%V April 1968
%P 8-18

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1968
%T Notes on the Tibetan vowel system
%J <Monthly internal memorandum, Phonology Laboratory>
%V June 1968

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1968
%T Notes on length and tone in Tibetan
%J <Monthly internal memorandum, Phonology Laboratory>
%V March 1968
%P 8-13

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1968
%T Sedl\'a\vcek's `The tonal system of Tibetan (Lhasa dialect)'
%J <Monthly internal memorandum, Phonology Laboratory>
%V July 1968
%P 8-13

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1968
%T Voice and aspiration in Lhasa Tibetan
%J <Monthly internal memorandum, Phonology Laboratory>
%V August 1968

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1968
%X see (see Chang Kun and Chang)

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1970
%T The Tibetan causative
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 3 (Cornell University, Ithaca, NY)

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1971
%T The Tibetan causative: phonology
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 42
%N 4
%P 623-765

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1972
%T Two parallels to the Tibetan causative: Jyarung and Liang Shan Lolo
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 5 (University of Michigan, Ann Arbor)

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1975, 1978, 1980, 1981
%X see (see Chang Kun and Chang)

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%A Chang Kun
%D 1976
%T The prenasalized stop initials of Miao-Yao, Tibeto-Burman and Chinese: a result of diffusion or evidence of a genetic relationship?
%E Hashimoto,, Mantar\=o J.
%B <Genetic relationship, diffusion and typological similarities of East and Southeast Asian languages>, Papers of the 1st Japan-U.S. Joint Seminar on East and Southeast Asian linguistics
%C Tokyo
%I Japan Society for the Promotion of Science
%P 315-58
%+ Also published <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology> 47(1976).3:467-502

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%A Chang Kun
%D 1977
%T Tibetan prenasalized initials
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 48
%N 2
%P 229-43

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%A Chang Kun
%D 1967-81
%T <Spoken Tibetan texts>
%S <Academia Sinica / Institute of History and Philology, Special Publ.>
%u 74
%C Taipei
%I Academia Sinica / Institute of History and Philology
%X see also Chang Kun and Chang, 1978-81

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%A Chang Kun
%D 1980
%T Ergativity in spoken Tibetan
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 51
%N 1
%P 25-32

%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%A Chang Kun
%D 1981
%T Perfective and imperfective in spoken Tibetan
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 52
%P 303-21

%A Chang Chi-min
%X see Zhang Jimin

%A Chang Chi-jen (Zhang Jiren)
%D 195l6
%T <The minority groups of Yumman, and Chinese political expansion into Southeast Asia>
%U Ph.D. dissertation {\? where?}
%Z 199p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts 17.6:1308

%A Chang Hongen
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t The phonemic system of Yumman Lahu and the problem of planning an orthography
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A Chang Junru
%D 1980
%T {\ch ??}
%t A tentative study of the categories of initials of Proto-Tai
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1980
%N 2
%P 31-40

%A Chang Kun
%D 1944
%X see Li Lin-tu'an, Chang Kun, and Ho Ts'ai

%A Chang Kun
%D 1945
%X see Li Lin-tu'an, Chang Kun, and Ho Ts'ai

%A Chang Kun
%D 1947
%T {\ch Miao-Yao-yu sheng-tiao wen-t'i}
%t On the tonal system of the Miao-Yao languages
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 16
%P 93-110
%O Contains short comparative word lists

%A Chang Kun
%D 1953
%T On the tone system of the Miao languages
%J <Language>
%V 19
%N 3
%P 374-8

%A Chang Kun
%D 1957
%T The phonemic system of the Yi Miao dialect
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 19
%N 1
%P 11-19

%A Chang Kun
%X see Li Lin-ts'an, Chang Kun, and Ho Ts'ai

%A Chang Kun
%D 1966
%T A comparative study of the Tao tone system
%J <Language>
%V 42
%N 2
%P 303-10
%O Contains 115-item comparative word list

%A Chang Kun
%D 1967
%T China: descriptive linguistics
%E Sebeok,, Thomas A.
%B <Linguistics in East Asia and Southeast Asia>
%S <Current trends in linguistics>
%u 2
%C The Hague and Paris
%I Mouton
%P 59-90

%A Chang Kun
%D 1967
%T China: national linguistics
%E Sebeok,, Thomas A.
%B <Linguistics in East Asia and Southeast Asia>
%S <Current trends in linguistics>
%u 2
%C The Hague and Paris
%I Mouton
%P 151-76
%O Surveys the work done in Chinese 1951-61 on the non-Chinese languages of China, including MY, TK, TB; includes annotated bibliography

%A Chang Kun
%D 1967
%T A comparative study of the Southern Ch'iang dialects
%J <Monumenta Serica>
%V 26
%P 422-44

%A Chang Kun
%D 1967
%X see Li Lin-ts'an, Chang Kun, and Ho Ts'ai

%A Chang Kun
%D 1967
%X see Shefts,, Betty, and Chang Kun

%A Chang Kun
%D 1968
%T The phonology of the Gyarong dialect
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 38
%P 251-75

%A Chang Kun
%D 1969
%T Review of Lombard, <Yao--English dictionary>
%J <Journal of Asian Studies>
%V 28
%N 2
%P 441-3

%A Chang Kun
%D 1970
%T Sino-Tibetan words for <needle>
%J <Monumenta Serica>
%V 28
%N 2
%P 230-45

%A Chang Kun
%D 1971
%T Review of Heimbach, <White Meo--English dictionary>
%J <Journal of Asian Studies>
%V 30
%N 2
%P 503-4

%A Chang Kun
%D 1972
%T Sino-Tibetan `iron': <*qhleks>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 92
%N 3
%P 436-46
%O Claims the word for `iron' is cognate in ST, MY, and TK

%A Chang Kun
%D 1973
%T The reconstruction of Proto-Miao-Yao tones
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 44
%N 4
%P 541-628
%O Extensive bibliography

%A Chang Kun
%D 1973
%T Review of Benedict, <Sino-Tibetan: a conspectus>
%J <Journal of Asian Studies>
%V 32
%N 2
%P 335-7

%A Chang Kun
%D 1975
%X see Chang,, Betty, and Chang Kun

%A Chang Kun
%D 1976
%T Proto-Miao initials
%E Hashimoto,, Mantar\=o J.
%B <Genetic relationship, diffusion and typological similarities of East and Southeast Asian languages>, Papers of the 1st Japan-U.S. Joint Seminar on East and Southeast Asian linguistics
%C Tokyo
%I Japan Society for the Promotion of Science
%P 146-209
%+ Also published <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology> 47(1976).2:155-218

%A Chang Kun
%D 1976
%X see Chang,, Betty Shefts, and Chang Kun

%A Chang Kun
%D 1977
%T The Tibetan role in Sino-Tibetan comparative linguistics
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 48
%P 93-108

%A Chang Kun
%D 1977
%T Review of Lyman, <Dictionary of Mong Njua>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 97
%N 3
%P 347

%A Chang Kun
%D 1977
%X see Chang,, Betty Shefts, and Chang Kun

%A Chang Kun
%D 1978-81
%X see Chang,, Betty Shefts, and Chang Kun

%A Chang Kun
%D 1980
%X see Chang,, Betty Shefts, and Chang Kun

%A Chang Kun
%D 1981
%X see Chang,, Betty Shefts, and Chang Kun

%A Chang Kun
%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1964
%T <A manual of spoken Tibetan (Lhasa dialect)>
%? with the help of Nawang Nornang and Lhadon Karsip
%C Seattle
%I University of Washington Press
%Z xii, 286p.
%R Reviewed by R. A. Miller, <Language> 41(1965).4:680-92

%A Chang Kun
%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1965
%T A morphophonemic problem in the spoken Tibetan of Lhasa
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 85
%N 1
%P 34-9

%A Chang Kun
%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1967
%T Spoken Tibetan morphophonemics: <p>
%J <Language>
%V 43
%P 512-25

%A Chang Kun
%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1968
%T Vowel harmony in spoken Lhasa Tibetan
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 40
%P 53-124

%A Chang Kun
%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1975
%T Gyarong historical phonology
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 46
%P 391-524

%A Chang Kun
%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1978
%T <Spoken Tibetan texts, vol. 2>
%? with the help of Nawang Nornag and Lhadon Karsip
%S <Academia Sinica / Institute of History and Philology, Special Publication>
%u 74
%C Taipei
%I Academia Sinica
%Z 295 p.
%O For vol. 1, see Chang,, B., and Chang 1978

%A Chang Kun
%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1980
%T <Spoken Tibetan texts, vol. 3>
%S <Academia Sinica / Institute of History and Philology, Special Publication>
%u 74
%C Taipei
%I Academia Sinica
%Z 248 p.

%A Chang Kun
%A Chang,, Betty Shefts
%D 1981
%T <Spoken Tibetan texts, vol. 4>
%? with the help of Nawang Nornag and Lhadon Karsip
%S <Academia Sinica / Institute of History and Philology, Special Publication>
%u 74
%C Taipei
%I Academia Sinica
%Z 330 p.

%A Ch'ang Kung-ko
%D 1958
%T {\ch Tsai y\"u Han y\"u ch'i fen hsi chung k'an T'ai y\"u tung ssu 'au ti lai y\"uan ho yung fa}
%t The use of the Thai particle <'au> and its translation
%J <Shao-shu min-tsu yu-wen lun-chi>
%V 1
%P 64-72
%O Examples from Pu-yi and L\"u

%A Chang Yin-tang
%D 1945
%T Some anthropological features of the Shans and their geographical environment in southwest Yunnan
%J <Journal of the West China Border Research Society>
%V 16
%P 39-51
%O Vocabulary of 244 Shan words and phrases from Meng Ting and Hopan, 45-51 - BSTL

%A Chang y\"u-hung
%D 1972
%X see translation: see Purnell,, Herbert C., ed.

%A Chang y\"u-hung
%D 1973
%T <Clear-muddy>, tongue root, and syllable register
%M Linguistic Society of America summer meeting, Ann Arbor, MI

%A Chang Yung-yen
%D 1958
%X see Ch'en Shih-min, Huang Chia-chiao, and Chang Yung-yen

%A Chang Yung-yen
%D 1960
%T {\ch Han-tsang-y\"u tz'u-wie <-pa>}
%t The Sino-Tibetan suffix <-pa>
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 1960
%N 11
%P 369

%A Changkhwamphoen,, Valaya
%X see Valaya Changkhwamphoen

%A Changkhwanyun,, Pricha
%X see Pricha Changkhwanyun

%A Chanisa Pintusan
%D 1983
%T {\thai <Wannakam thai-r\=aman, tombon b\=ang khan m\=ak, 'amph\=oe m\=uang, changwat lopbur\=i>}
%t Thai Raman literature, Tombon Bang Kanmak, Amphoe Muang, Changwat Lopburi
%U M.A. thesis, Sri Nahkarinwirot University
%Z 134 p.
%O Mon of Lopburi; 250-word Mon--Thai glossary (in Thai)

%A Chantanakhom,, Wanna
%X see Wanna Chantanakhom

%A Chantavibulya,, Vichintana
%X see Vichintana Chantavibulya

%A Chathabur\=inar\=\,un\=at, Phrachaob\,oromawongth\=oe Kromphra
%D 1970
%T {\thai Path\=anukrom b\=al\=i thai 'angkrit sansakrit}
%t Pali--Thai--English--Sanskrit dictionary
%C Bangkok
%I Mah\=amukotr\=achawithay\=alai

%A Chanthara Masupong
%D 1983
%T {\thai Rabop s\=iang ph\=as\=a lung c\=ow}
%t The phonology of the Lungchow language
%J <B\=or\=anakhad\=i> (Bangkok, Faculty of Archeology, Silpakorn University)
%V 26
%P 242-5

%A Chantrupanth,, Dhanan
%X see Dhanan Chantrupanth

%A Chants,, L J. D.
%D 1965
%T Jarai
%J <L'Afrique et l'Asie>
%V 70
%P 30-35

%A Chao Yuen-ren
%D 1930
%T <Phonetics of the Yao folksongs>
%S <Academia Sinica/National Research Institute of History and Philology>
%u Monograph A.1
%C Peiping
%I Academia Sinica

%A Chao Yuen-ren
%D 1930
%X see Yu Tao Ch'\"uan and Chao Yuen-ren

%A Chao Yuen-ren
%D 1943
%T Languages and dialects in China
%J <Geographical Journal>
%V 102
%P 63-71

%A Chao Yuen-ren
%D 1951
%T Preface to the study of some Tai-Shan linguistic material
%S <Academia Sinica / Institute of History and Philology, Special publication>
%P 61-6

%A Charan Promchan
%X see Huffman,, Franklin E., and Charan Promchan

%A Charency,, de
%D 1902
%T {\fr Les noms de nombre dans les dialectes de l'Himalaya}
%t The number names in the dialects of the Himalayas
%J <Journal Asiatique>, 9. s\'erie
%V 10
%P 14-17

%A Charanyanda,, Isara
%X see Isara Charanyanda

%A Charoen Chaichua
%D 1954
%T {\thai <Path\=anukrom thai>}
%t Thai dictionary
%C Bangkok
%I Khasem Bannakit
%Z 680 p.

%A Charoenma,, Narumol
%X see Narumol Charoenma

%A Charoenrat,, Chirat
%X see Chirat Charoenrat

%A Charria,, Sylvain
%D 1905
%T {\fr Les inscriptions lolo de Lou-k'iuan}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 5
%P 195-7

%A Chartchai Phromphriksa
%X see Dhanan Chantrupanth and Chartchai

%A Charumwan Phumphriksa
%D 1982
%T {\thai K\=an chai kham sapphana\=am kh\=\,ong khr\=u '\=achan nai changwat lopbur\=i}
%t The use of pronouns among teachers in Lopburi province
%U M.A. thesis, ILCRD, Mahidol University {\? ILCRD?}

%A Chase,, Dormer Augustus
%D 1890
%T <Anglo-Burmese handbook, or guide to a practical knowledge of the Burmese language>
%e revised ed., edited by F. D. Phinney
%Z 209p.

%A Chase,, Pliny Earl
%D 1861
%T Chinese and Indo-European roots and analogues
%J <Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society>
%V 8
%P 5-48

%A Chatasem,, Kamon
%X see Kamon Chatasem

%A Chatterjee,, B. K.
%A Mitra,, A. K.
%D 1941-42
%T Dravidian and Mon-Khmer speakers or Austroloids: a study in variation
%J <Indian Culture>
%V 8
%P 829-68

%A Chatterji,, Suniti Kumar
%D 1943
%T <Languages and the linguistic problem>
%S <Oxford Pamphlets on Indian Affairs>
%u 11
%C Oxford
%Z 32p.
%O Classification of Munda languages

%A Chatterji,, Suniti Kumar
%D 1953
%T The languages of the Adivasis
%J <March of India>
%V 6
%N 2
%P 14-6
%O Calls Santali `an Adivasi language of Austric origin'

%A Chatterji,, Suniti Kumar
%D 1963
%T <Languages and literatures of modern India>
%C Calcutta
%I Bengal Publishers Private Ltd.
%Z 380p.
%O Chap. 1 contains discussion of various language families of India, including AA and TB; ethnolinguistic map of India, p. 24ff.

%A Chatterjee,, Suhas
%D 1963
%T On Didei nouns, pronouns, numerals, and demonstratives
%M Chicago, mimeo.
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 31(1965).4:131
%O Gata{\# glottalstop}
%% Corrected entry, wrongly attributed by Huffman to S. K. Chatterji - Stampe

%A Chatterjee,, Suhas
%D 1965
%T Notes on Gata{\# glottalstop}
%M Unpublished paper
%O Gata{\# glottalstop}
%% Corrected entry, wrongly attributed by Huffman to S. K. Chatterji - Stampe

%A Chaudhury,, Kailash Chandra
%D 1932
%T {\beng Bodo bhasha sangraha}
%t Bodo language collection
%C Bangshigami, Serphangguri, Assam
%O Elementary grammar and vocab; in Bodo and Bengali - BSTL

%A Chavannes,, Edouard
%D 1906
%T {\fr Trois inscriptions relev\'ees par M. Sylvain Charria}
%t ?
%J <T'oung Pao>, 2. s\'erie
%V 7
%N 2
%P 671-701
%O Lolo - BSTL

%A Chavannes,, Edouard
%D 1910
%T Review of Cadi\`ere, {\fr <Monographie de la semi-voyelle en sino-annamite>}
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 11
%N 2
%P 694-5

%A Chavannes,, Edouard
%D 1911
%T Review of Diguet, {\fr <Etude de la langue th\^o>}
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 12
%P 96

%A Chavannes,, Edouard
%D 1911 (?)
%T Review of Csoma de K\"or\"os, <Sanskrit--Tibetan--English vocabulary>
%J <T'oung Pao>, series 2
%V 13
%P 436

%A Chawalittamrong,, Prasit
%X see Chuan Siawcholit

%A Che Qian
%D 1981
%T {\ch ??}
%t Introductory remarks on <gcig> - Concerning the aspiration of initials of voiceless plosives and affricates in ancient Tibetan
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1981
%N 2
%P 36-9

%A Che Qian
%A Hu Shujin
%D 1982
%T {\ch Zang yu de bin yu he jie gou zhu ci {\# Tibetan chars}}
%t Objects and the structure particle {\# Tibetan chars} in Tibetan
%B {\ch <Minzu yuwen yan jiu wenji>}
%b Collection of studies on minority languages
%C Qinghai
%I Qinghai People's Publishing House
%P 130-49

%A Che-brtan-phun-chogs
%X see Sankrityayana and Che-brtan-phun-chogs

%A Chea Tuon
%D 1963
%T {khm <Sou-sap piaq kmae: piaq mian sou douc n\-ing sr\^adiang knia, s\^asei pseing knia>}
%t Khmer vocabulary: words pronounced alike but spelled differently
%C Phnom Penh
%I Seng Nguon Huot
%Z 182p.

%A Ch\'eang Tek
%D n.d.
%T {\fr <Alphabet cambodgien, anim\'e par les h\'ers du Ramayana. Illustrations du Ch\'eang Tek, dessinateur \`a la Biblioth\`eque Royale du Cambodge>}
%t ?
%C Phnom Penh
%Z 62p.

%A Cheminaud,, Guy
%D 1906
%T {\fr Nouvelle dictionnaire fran\,cais-laotien, contenant plus de cinq mille cinq cent mots appuy\'es par des locutions famili\`eres}
%t ?
%C Tulle
%I Imprimerie Crauffon
%Z 198p.

%A Chemjong,, Imam Singh
%D 1962
%T <Limbu--Nepali--English dictionary>
%C Kathmandu
%I Royal Nepal Academy
%Z 58, 376p.
%O In N\=agari characters

%A Chemjong,, Imam Singh
%D 1970
%T <Lapcha--Nepali--English dictionary>
%C Kathmandu
%I Royal Nepal Academy
%Z 340p.
%O Lepcha

%A Ch'en Ch'i-khuang
%X see also Chen Qiguang

%A Ch'en Ch'i-khuang
%D 1952
%X see Li Yung-sui, Ch'en K'e-chiung, and Ch'en Ch'i-khuang

%A Ch'en Ch'i-khuang
%D 1972
%X see Li Yu??ng-sui, Ch'en K'e-chiung, and Ch'en Ch'i-khuang

%A Chen,, John Hsueh-Ming
%D 1973
%T <Vietnam: a comprehensive bibliography>
%C Metuchen, NJ
%I The Scarecrow Press
%Z ix, 314p.
%# UH ASIA REF Z3228.V5C47
%% Huffman has New York - Stampe

%A Ch'en Chin
%D 1
%T {\ch ??}
%t Suggestions on the translations of new terms into the Li language
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 67
%P 46-7

%A Ch'en Chin-ho
%D 1950
%T {\ch Y\"ueh-nan Tung-ching ti-fang chih t'e-ch'eng <ke>}
%t The morpheme <ke> in the place names in Tonkin, Vietnam
%J <Wen Shih Tse Hs\"ueh Pao>
%V 1
%P 201-35

%A Ch'en Chin-ho
%D 1950
%T {\ch An-nan i-y\"u k'ao-shih}
%t Study of Chinese loanwords in Vietnamese, part 1
%J <Wen Shih Tse Hs\"ueh Pao>
%V 5
%P 149-240

%A Ch'en Chin-ho
%D 1950
%T {\ch An-nan i-y\"u k'ao-shih}
%t Study of Chinese loanwords in Vietnamese, part 2
%J <Wen Shih Tse Hs\"ueh Pao>
%V 6
%P 161-227

%A Ch'en Chin-ho
%D 1966-68
%T A bibliographical and linguistic study of the <An-nan yi-yu>
%J <Shigaku>
%V 39(1966); 40(1967); 41(1968)
%P 3-4; 1; 1-3

%A Ch'en Chin-ho
%D 1970
%T <A collection of ch\;u n\^om scripts, with the pronunciations in qu\^oc ng\;u>
%C Tokyo
%I Keio University

%A Chen Chun
%X see Headley,, R., Kylin Chhor, Lam Kheng Lim, Lim Hak Kheang, and Chen Chun

%A Chen Kang
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t The morphophonemic changes of the future progressive aspect of verbs in the Tujia language
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1982
%N 1
%P 35-6
%O Tudja

%A Chen Kang
%A Peng Xiumo
%A Ye Deshu
%D 1983
%T {\ch ??}
%t The aspects of the verb in the Tujia language
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1983
%N 6
%P 26-9
%O Tudja words in roman transcription

%A Chen,, Kenneth
%D 1951
%T Review of Lalou, {\fr <Manuel \'el\'ementaire de tib\'etain classique>}
%J <Harvard Journal of Asiatic studies>
%V 14
%P 608-10

%A Ch'en K'e-chiung
%D 1959
%X see Li Yong-sui, Ch'en K'e-chiung, and Ch'en Ch'i-khuang

%A Ch'en K'e-chiung
%D 1972
%X see Li Yong-sui, Ch'en K'e-chiung, and Ch'en Ch'i-khuang

%A Chen Qiguang
%X see also Ch'en Ch'i-khuang
%% added

%A Chen Qiguang
%D 1979
%T {\ch Miao yao yu ru sheng de fa zhan}
%t Development of the `checked sound' in the Miao-Yao languages
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1979
%N 1
%P 25ff.

%A Chen Qiguang
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t The position of the She languages among the Miao-Yao languages
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A Chen Qiguang
%A Li Yongsui
%D 1981
%T {\ch ??}
%t Some examples of the genetic affinity between Chinese and Miao-Yao
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1981
%N 2
%P 13-26
%O With roman citations

%A Ch'en Shih-lin
%X see also Chen Shihlin

%A Ch'en Shih-lin
%D 1963
%T {\ch I-y\"u kai-k'uang}
%t Descriptive sketch of the Yi language
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 125 {\? check?}
%N 4
%P 334-47

%A Chen Shilin
%X see also Ch'en Shih-lin

%A Chen Shilin
%D 1951
%T {\ch Xi kang yi zu la ding hua xin wen zi jie shao}
%t Introduction to the new romanization for the Yi people in Xikang
%J <Guang ming ri bao>
%V September 26 1951

%A Chen Shilin
%D 1952
%T {\ch Liang nian lai yi zu yu yan wen zi de fa zhan}
%t The development of spoken and written Yi for the past two years
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 6
%P 30-1

%A Chen Shilin
%D 1979
%T {\ch ??}
%t The practical effect and several problems of the standardized Yi script
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1979
%N 4
%P 241-8

%A Chen Shilin
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t An examination of the express of ordinal numbers in Yi
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A Chen Shilin
%D 1982
%T {\ch Xun gu zha ji - Han yu <yue>, <yun> yu yi yu <di {\? Chao low falling?}>, <di {\? Chao high mid level?}> de bi jiao}
%t Comparison of <yue>, <yun> in Chinese and <di {\? Chao low falling?}>, <di {\? Chao high mid level?}> in Yi
%B {\ch <Minzu yuwen yan jiu wenji>}
%b Collection of studies on minority languages
%C Qinghai
%I Qinghai People's Publishing House
%P 70-89

%A Ch'en Shih-min
%A Huang Chia-chiao
%A Chang Yung-yen
%D 1958
%T {\ch ??}
%t The phonemic system of the Li language of Pao-t'ing, Hainan Island
%J <Hsueh-shu lun-t'an> (<Bulletin of Amoy University>)
%V 17
%P 1-12

%A Chen Xiangmu
%X see Svantesson, Wang, and Chen

%A Chen Xiangmu
%X see Wang Jingliu and Chen

%A Chen Yi-sien
%D 1968
%T {\ch ??}
%t The ancient Tai from the earliest times down to A.D. 220
%J <Journal of Southeast Asian Researches>
%V 4
%P 25-49

%A Chen Yi-sien
%D 1970
%T <A model Burmese--English dictionary>
%I Tokyo Bunko
%Z 682p.
%O Reprint of 1962 edition, Rangoon

%A Chen Yongqing
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t On the meaning of <oya> and other phrases in the Li language
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1982
%N 2
%P 58

%A Chen Zhulin
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t Comments on how to deal with Han loanwords in compiling and translating works of written Chuang
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1982
%N 4
%P 39-60

%A Ch'eng Ch'ing-ho
%X see Ch'en Chin-ho

%A Cheng Fang
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t An investigation of the bilingualism of the Jing nationality
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1982
%N 6
%P 39-43
%O With roman citations
%O VM: Kin

%A Ch'eng Mo
%D 1956
%T {\ch ??}
%t A short note on the Tsaiwa language
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 53
%P 41-4
%O Discusses phonology, word formation, and grammar

%A Cheng Te-k'un
%A Liang Ch'ao-t'ao
%D 1945
%T An introduction to the southwestern peoples of China
%J <Journal of the West China Border Research Society>
%V 16
%P 23-38
%O Map faces p. 24 - BSTL

%A Cheng,, Theresa M.
%D 1973
%T The phonology of Taishan
%J <Journal of Chinese Linguistics>
%V 1
%N 1
%P 256-322

%A Cheng Tsong-tse
%X see Mao, Meng, and Cheng

%A Cheng Wo-lung
%X see Ho Ch'eng, Cheng Wo-lung, Chung Fu-tan, and Wang Te-lun

%A Cheng Yi-ch'ing
%X see Zheng Yiqing

%A Chengtu
%D 1956
%T {\tib <Dag-yig nyer-mk'o bsdus-pa>}
%t ?
%C Chengtu
%Z 22p.
%O On correct usage and writing of Tibetan; reprint of xylograph by Rdzo\.n-sar monastery in Sde-sge - BSTL

%A Ch\'eon,, Jean Nicolas
%D 1890
%T {\fr Notice sur la langue des Chraus ou Mo\"is de l'arrondissement de Bi\^en-h\`oa}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 20
%P i-xiii

%A Ch\'eon,, Jean Nicolas
%D 1901
%T {\fr <Cours de langue annamite>}
%t A course on the Annamite language
%C Hanoi
%I F. H. Schneider
%Z iv, 656p.

%A Ch\'eon,, Jean Nicolas
%D 1903
%T {\fr <Receuil de cent textes annamites annot\'es et traduits>}
%t ?
%C Hanoi
%I Schneider

%A Ch\'eon,, Jean Nicolas
%D 1905
%T {\fr Note sur les M\;u\;ong de la Province de S\;ont\^ay}
%t Note on the M\;u\;ong of the S\;ont\^ay province
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 5
%P 328-68

%A Ch\'eon,, Jean Nicolas
%D 1907
%T {\fr Note sur les dialectes Ngu\^on-S\uac et M\;u\;ong}
%t Note on the Ngu\^on-S\uac and M\;u\;ong dialects
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 7
%P 87-100

%A Ch\'eon,, Jean Nicolas
%A Mougeot,, Dr. A.
%D 1890
%T {\fr Essai de dictionnaire de la langue chr\uau (dialect mo\"i) [comprenant 1400 mots et un grand nombre d'eexpressions et d'idiotismes receuillis par M. Ch\'eon \`a But Doc (arrondissement de Bi\^en-h\`oa), Cochinchine fran\,caise]}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 20
%P 1-106

%A Chepang,, Bhobikan
%A Caughley,, Ross
%A Caughley,, Kathleen
%D 1973
%T Chapang wordlists
%E Hale,, Austin
%B <Clause, sentence and discourse patterns in selected languages of Nepal>
%C Kathmandu
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%V 4
%P 46-312

%A Chernishev,, V. A.
%X see Vardul', Nokol'skii, and Chernishev

%A Chew,, S.
%D 1980
%T Review of F. K. Li, <Handbook of comparative Tai>
%J <Journal of Southeast Asian Studies>
%V 11
%N 1
%P 228-30

%A Chhorn Iem
%A Touch Lak
%D 1973
%T The language and sociolinguistic situation in the Khmer Republic
%B <Report of the regional workshop on the feasibility of a sociolinguistic survey of Southeast Asia>
%C Singapore
%I Regional English Language Center, Southeast Asian Ministers of Education Organization
%P 40-45

%A Chien Chiu Publishing Co.
%D 1972
%T {\ch ??}
%t Ethnic groups of China
%C Hongkong
%I Chien Chiu Publishing Co.

%A Ch'ien Sun
%X see Wang Li and Ch'ien Sun

%A Chim Peov
%D 1959
%T {\khm <Kaap-saah>}: {\fr <Po\'esie: Etude de la versification (Adapt\'e au programme de l'Enseignemente Secondaire)>}
%t ?
%C Phnom Penh
%I Vichay Seri
%O In Khmer

%A Chimphaibun,, Wali
%X see Wali Chimphaibun

%A Chin,, Yong Lin
%D 1983
%T {\thai <Samn\=uan c\=in lae samn\=uan thai>}
%t Chinese and Thai idioms
%U M.A. thesis, Thai Department, Chulalongkorn University

%A [China]
%D 1932
%T {\ch <Kuo-li P'ei-p'ing t'u-shu kuan kuan-k'an>}
%t ?
%S <Bulletin of the National Library of Peiping>
%u 4.3 (1930), Special number on Hsi-hsia studies
%C Peking
%Z 1, 40, 1, 404, 2p.
%R Reviewed by Gaspardone, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 32(1932):559-64

%A [China]
%D 1953
%T {\tib <rGya-bod mi\.n-ts'ig gsar-bsgrigs>}
%C Lanchou
%Z 437p.
%O Chinese--Tibetan - BSTL

%A [China]
%D 1954
%T {\ch <Han zang xin ci hui (Di yi ji)>}
%t Chinese--Tibetan new lexicon, vol. 1
%C ?
%I Ethnic Publishing House

%A [China]
%D 1955
%T {\ch <Han zang xin ci hui (Di er ji)>}
%t Chinese--Tibetan new lexicon, vol. 2
%C ?
%I Ethnic Publishing House

%A [China]
%D 1956
%T {\tib <Bod-kyi skad-yig>}
%t ?
%C Chengtu
%I Southwestern Institute for National Minorities
%Z 542p.
%O Derge; detailed grammatical explanations in Chinese - BSTL

%A [China]
%D 1956
%T {\tib <sGra-sbyor slob-deb>}
%t ?
%C Peking
%Z 132p.
%O On the orthography and orthoepy of the Lhasa dialect of Tibetan - BSTL

%A [China]
%D 1957
%T {\tib <Bod-kyi brda sprod-pa sum-t\'su-pa-da\.n rtags-kyi \~ad\'zug-pahi mts'an-\~agrel mdor bsdus-te brdsod-pa, \.no-mts'ar-\~ap'rul-gyi lde-mig t\'ses-bya-ba b\'zugs-so>}
%t ??
%e 2nd ed.
%C Peking
%Z 280p.
%O Tibetan - BSTL

%A [China]
%D 1957
%T {\tib <Bod-kyi skad-yig>}
%t A grammar of the Aba dialect [TB language spoken in Kashmir]
%C Chengtu
%Z 234p.

%A [China]
%D 1957
%T {\tib <Bod-yig bslab-deb>}
%t ?
%C Lanchow
%Z 175p.
%O Amdo

%A [China]
%D 1957
%T {\tib <rGya-bod \'san-sbyar-gyi k'a-skad tsig-mdzod, Lha-sahi yul-skad>}
%t Lhasa Tibetan--Chinese dictionary
%C Peking
%Z 396p.

%A [China]
%D 1957
%T {\manchu <Sunja hacin-i hergen kamciha manj??u gisun-i buleku bithe. Skad-l\.na san-sbyan-gyi manydzui skad gsal-bai me-lo\.n. Tabun j\"uil-\"u qabsuru{\? ??gamma?}san manj??u \"ugen-\"u toli bi\vcig. Wu-t'i ch'ing-wen chien>}
%t The Manchu dictionary in five scripts
%C Peking
%Z 3 vols.
%O Manchu--Tibetan--Mongolian--Turkish--Chinese dictionary

%A [China]
%D 1957
%T {\ch <Yunnan Tai-na wen-zi gai-jin fang-an (cau-an)>}
%t {\fr Projet d'am\'elioration de l'ecriture Tai-n\"ua du Yun-nan}
%t ?
%Z 47p.

%A [China]
%D 1958
%T {\tib <Bod-yig nos-\~adzin bslab-deb>}
%t ?
%C Hsining
%Z 191p.

%A [China]
%D 1958
%T {\ch <Chuanqian dian fangyen Hmongh-Shuad hianming cidan>}
%t Szechuan--Kweichow--Yunnan Miao--Chinese dictionary
%C n.l.
%I Editions of the minorities of Kweichow
%Z 451p.

%A [China]
%D 1958
%T {\ch <Qiangdong fangyen Hmub-Diel jianming cidan>}
%t Eastern Kweichow Miao--Chinese pocket dictionary
%C n.l.
%I Editions of the minorities of Kweichow
%Z 418p.

%A [China]
%D 1959
%T {\ch <Ha-Han tui-chau hsiao ts'u-hui. Gaqniq pyulniul soqmiav niq pyu hu zzaol e nilgenei soqhhavq>}
%t Little Hani--Chinese comparative vocabulary
%C n.l.
%I Publications on Yunnan minorities
%Z 108p.

%A [China]
%D 1959
%T {\ch <Miao yu chuan qian dian fan yan yu uin ji ben zhi shi>}
%t Basic knowledge of the phonetics of the Chuan, Qian, Dian dialects of the Miao language
%C n.l.
%I Guizhou Ethnic Publishing House

%A [China]
%D 1962
%T {\ch ??}
%t A brief description of the Ch'iang language
%J <Chung-kuo Y"u-wen>
%V 121
%P 561-71

%A [China]
%D 1964
%T {\ch <Han zang ci hui>}
%t Chinese--Tibetan lexicon
%C n.l.
%I Ethnic Publishing House

%A [China]
%D 1965
%T {\ch <Dai zu xue han yu (sang ce)>}
%t The Tai people learn Chinese, vol. 1
%C n.l.
%I Yunnan Ethnic Publishing House

%A [China]
%D 1980
%T {\ch <Han zang dui zhao cheng yu>}
%t Chinese--Tibetan idioms
%C n.l.
%I Ethnic Publishing House

%A Chinachot,, Kannika
%X see Kannika Chinachot

%A Chinda Ngamsutdi
%D 1977
%T <Passivization in Thai>
%U M.A. thesis, University of the Philippines

%A Chinda Ngamsutdi
%D 1979
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=as\=at ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Thai linguistics
%C Mahasarakham {\? place?}
%I Department of Thai and Oriental languages, Faculty of Humanities, Srinakharinwirot University
%Z 270p.

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1956
%T {\ch <Wu ming zhuang yu yu fa>}
%t Grammar of Wuming Chinese
%C Guangxi
%I First Minority Languages Survey Team, Chinese Academy of Sciences, Guangxi Ethnic Publishing House

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1956
%T {\ch <Ahuang yu fang yan ji ge wen ti de yu fa bi jiao>}
%t Comparative studies of grammars of Chuang dialects
%C Guangxi
%I First Minority Languages Survey Team, Chinese Academy of Sciences, Guangxi Ethnic Publishing House

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1957
%T {\ch <??>}
%t An outline of Chuang grammar
%C Guangxi
%I Research Center of the committee on language research of the autonomous region for the Chuang People in Guangxi and the first team of field workers on the national languages, Chinese Academy of Sciences

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1958
%T {\ch <??>}
%t A Chuang--Chinese dictionary (preliminary version)
%C Guangxi
%I Research Center of the committee on language research of the autonomous region for the Chuang People in Guangxi and the first team of field workers on the national languages, Chinese Academy of Sciences

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1958
%T {\ch <Zhuang Han yu fa chu bu bu jiao>}
%t Comparative studies of Chuang and Chinese grammar
%C n.l.
%I First Minority Languages Survey Team, Chinese Academy of Sciences, Guangxi Ethnic Publishing House

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1959
%T {\ch <Ch'ing-p'o y\"u y\"u-fa kang yao>}
%t Outline of Kachin grammar
%C Peking
%I Chinese Academy of Sciences
%Z vi, 176p.
%O Tones recorded

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1959
%T {\ch <??>}
%t Concise Kam--Chinese dictionary (preliminary draft)
%C Guizhou
%I Second working group of the Minority Language Survey Team, Guizhou People's Press
%Z 11, 254p.

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1959
%T {\ch <Lisu y\"u y\"u-fa kang-yao>}
%t An outline of Lisu grammar
%C Peking
%I Institute of National Languages, Chinese Academy of Sciences
%Z vi, 164p.
%% This is one of two entries with identical dates and pagination, but slightly different Chinese and issuers

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1959
%T {\ch <Li-y\"u y\"u-fa kang-yao>}
%t An outline of Li grammar
%C Peking
%I Institute of racial minorities and languages, Chinese Academy of Sciences
%Z vi, 164p.
%% This is one of two entries with identical dates and pagination, but slightly different titles and issuers

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1959
%T {\ch <??>}
%t An outline of word formation in the Chuang language and a concise Chuang--Chinese basic vocabulary (preliminary version)
%C Guangxi
%I Research Center of the committee on language research of the autonomous region for the Chuang People in Guangxi and the first team of field workers on the national languages, Chinese Academy of Sciences

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1959
%T {\ch <Pu-yi-y\"u t'iao-ch'a pao-kao>}
%t Report on the survey of the Pu-yi language
%C Peking
%I Institute of racial minorities and languages, Chinese Academy of Sciences

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1959
%T {\ch <Zhong guo shao shu min zu yu yan jian zhi (Miao yao yu zu bu fen)>}
%t Outline of Chinese minority languages (section on Miao-Yao languages)
%C n.l.
%I Department of Minority Languages, Sciences Publishing House

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1961
%T {\ch ??}
%t A brief description of the Chinese language
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 109
%P 72-9

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1961
%T {\ch ??}
%t The role of the Chinese language in enriching the languages of the Yao people
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 109
%P 62-71, 87

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1962
%T {\ch <Buyi han jian ming ci dian>}
%t Concise Pu-yi--Chinese dictionary
%C Guizhou
%I Guizhou Ethnic Publishing House

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1962
%T {\ch ??}
%t Chinese loanwords in the Chuang language
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 116
%P 251-64

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1962
%T {\ch ??}
%t Chinese loanwords in the Miao language
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 115
%P 218-29

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1962
%T {\ch <Miao-y\"u kai-k'uang>}
%t Descriptive sketch of the Miao language
%C <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 1962
%N 1
%P 28-37

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1972
%T A brief description of the Miao language
%E Purnell,, Herbert C.
%B <Miao and Yao linguistic studies; selected articles in Chinese, translated by Chang Yu-hung, and Chu Kwo-ray>
%S <Cornell University Southeast Asia Program Data Paper>
%u 88
%C Ithaca
%I Cornell University Southeast Asia Program
%P 1-26

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1972
%T The role of the Chinese language in the enrichment and development of the Yao language
%E Purnell,, Herbert C.
%B <Miao and Yao linguistic studies; selected articles in Chinese, translated by Chang Yu-hung, and Chu Kwo-ray>
%S <Cornell University Southeast Asia Program Data Paper>
%u 88
%C Ithaca
%I Cornell University Southeast Asia Program
%P 257-82
%+ English translation of Chinese Academy of Sciences 1961

%A [Chinese Academy of Sciences]
%D 1981
%T {\ch <??>}
%t Va--English dictionary
%C Peking
%I Nationality Research Institute, Chinese Academy of Social Sciences
%O AA: Wa (Palaungic)

%A Chinowat,, Ekawit
%X see Ekawit Chinowat

%A Chintana,, B.
%D 1958
%T {\thai Lawa Chao Bon}
%t ??
%J <Silpakorn> (Bangkok)
%V 2
%N 1/2
%P 52-62/34-45
%O Nyah Kur

%A Chintana Tantivejkul
%D 1971
%T {\fr <L'\'etude comparative des classes de mots tha\"i et fran\,cais>}
%t Comparative study of Thai and French word classes
%U Doctorat de 3e cycle en linguistique, Dijon
%Z 260p.

%A Chintana Trisuwan
%X see Somchai Krabuangsaeng and Chintana Trisuwan

%A Chiraporn Chotithiarawong
%D 1981
%T {\thai <K\=an s\,uks\=a pr\=iap th\=iap k\=an chai kham santh\=an nai samai sukh\=othai 'ayutthay\=a, kap samai patchuban>}
%t A comparative study of the use of conjunctions in the Sukhothai, Ayuthaya, and modern periods
%U M.S. thesis, Department of Thai, Chulalongkorn University

%A Chiraporn Patrapanupat
%D 1978
%T {\thai <Th\=\,oi kham thi chai pen samn\=uan nai ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Thai words or word groups used as idiomatic expressions
%U M.A. thesis, Dept of Thai, Chulalongkorn University
%Z 204p.

%A Chirat Charoenrat
%D 1982
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=a k\=uai (s\=uai) th\=i changwat suphanbur\=i>}
%t The Kuay (Suay) language of Suphanburi province
%U M.A. thesis, Department of Oriental Languages, Sinlapakorn University
%Z 360p.
%O English summary
%O Kuy

%A Chit Phumisak
%D 1976
%T {\thai <Khw\=an pen m\=a kh\=\,ong kham sayam, thai, l\=ao, lae kh\=\,om lae laksana th\=ang sangkhom kh\=\,ong ch\=\,u chon ch\=at>}
%t The origin of the words <Siam>, <Thai>, <Lao>, and <Khom>, and their social contexts
%C Bangkok
%I Sociology and Anthropology Text book Foundation, Sociology Association of Thailand
%Z 629p.
%+ Reprinted 1981, Bangkok: Duang Kamol, 186p.
%O Thai

%A Chit Phumisak
%D 1978
%T {\thai <Lah huh Nah uh: ph\=as\=a lahu r\=\,u m\=s\=oe>}
%t The Lahu or Musso language
%C Bankok
%I Mai Ngam Printers
%Z 133p.
%+ written in 1963; 2nd printing 1983
%O Lahu texts in romanization with Thai translation

%A Chit Phumisak
%D 1979
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=a lae niruktis\=at>}
%t Language and linguistics
%C Bangkok
%I Duang Kamol
%Z 186p.
%O Thai

%A Chit Rattanakomut
%A Prawit Wimuktalop
%A Sa-at Intharasadi
%D 1952
%T {\thai <Lak ph\=as\=a thai lae naenam r\=iangkhw\=am>}
%t Principles of the Thai language and introduction to writing-composition
%C Bangkok
%I Borikan S. S.
%Z ix, 308p.
%+ 4th edition, 1959
%O Textbook by instructors at Chulalongkorn Preparatory School

%A Chitakasem,, Manas
%X see Manas Chitakasem

%A Chitraporn Kiatipaibool
%D 1981
%T {\thai <Kham th\=am b\=aep t\=\,op rap-patis\=et nai ph\=as\=a thai: K\=an wikhr\,o ch\=oeng 'athas\=at>}
%t Yes-no questions in Thai: a semantic analysis
%U M.A. thesis, Department of Linguistics, Chulalongkorn University
%Z 88p.
%O English summary

%A Chittasobhon,, Em-on
%X see Em-on Chittasobhon

%A Chmeleva,, I. M.
%X see Gorgoniev, Souverova, and Chmeleva

%A Cho Cho So (pseudonym)
%D 1956
%T {\thai <Photchan\=anukrom ph\=as\=a ph\=ak n\=eua>}
%t Dictionary of the Northern (Thai) language
%C Bangkok
%Z viii, 480p.

%A Chob Kacha-Ananda
%D 1977
%T {\fr <Etude ethnographique du groupe ethnique Yao en Tha\"ilande du nord>}
%t Ethnographic study of the Yao ethnic group in northern Thailand
%U Doctorat de 3e cycle, Universit\'e de Paris V
%# Sorbonne library catalog no. I 4328-4
%+ Published 1976 by S. I. Kacha-Ananda, 286p.

%A Chob Kacha-Ananda
%D 1979
%T {\thai <Photchan\=anukrom thai--y\=ao>}
%t Thai--Yao dictionary
%C Chiengmai
%I Tribal Research Centre
%Z 146p.
%O In Thai, without romanization

%A Chomaitong,, Kannikar
%X see Kannikar Chomaitong

%A Choo,, Nai
%D 1893
%T {\germ <Siamesisch--Deutsches Gespr\"achbuch>}
%t ?
%C Leipzig
%I Drugulin
%Z viii, 104p.

%A Choron-Baix,, Catherine
%D 1983
%T {\fr <Mo Lam du Sud Laos r\'efugi\=es en France>}
%t ?
%U {\fr Th\`ese de doctorat de 3e cycle en ethnologie, EHESS} {\? Ecole ... haut etudes ...?}
%Z 369p.
%+ Position de th\`ese, <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien> 14(1983).1-2:183-8

%A Chotibut,, Panit
%X see Panit Chotibut

%A Chotikasathian,, Phatchani
%X see Phatchani Chotikasathian

%A Chotisukharat,, Sanguan
%X see Sanguan Chotisukharat

%A Chotithiarawong,, Chiraporn
%X see Chiraporn Chotithiarawong

%A Chou Fa-kao
%D 1972
%T {\ch ??}
%t Archaic Chinese and Sino-Tibetan
%J <Journal of Institute of Chinese Studies of the Chinese University of Hongkong>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 159-237
%O Review article on Benedict, <Sino-Tibetan: A conspectus>

%A Chou Shu-chia
%D n.d.
%T {\lat <De canonibus Buddhisticis scripto Tangutico (Hsi-hsia) exaratis qui in Bibliotheca Nationali Pekinensi conservantur>}
%t ?
%J <Fu Jen Journal>
%V 2
%N 2
%P 55-63

%A Chou,, Tsu-yao (Zhou Zuyao)
%D 1962, 1972
%X see Mao Tsung-wu and Chou Tsu-Yao

%A Choudhury,, Bhupendranath
%D 1958
%T <Some cultural and linguistic aspects of the Garos>
%C Gauhati
%Z vi, 84p.
%O Short grammar, 47-72 - BSTL

%A Ch'\"u Ai-tang
%X see Qu Aitang

%A Chu-Kwo-ray (translator)
%X see Purnell, ed., 1972

%A Chu T'ing
%D 1957
%T {\ch Dui `Miao yu de she hui fang yan' yi wen de yi jiaw}
%t A comment on `A Miao secret language'
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 62
%P 36
%+ English translation Chu T'ing 1972

%A Chu T'ing
%D 1972
%T A comment on `A Miao secret language'
%E Purnell,, Herbert C.
%B <Miao and Yao linguistic studies; selected articles in Chinese, translated by Chang Yu-hung, and Chu Kwo-ray>
%S <Cornell University Southeast Asia Program Data Paper>
%u 88
%C Ithaca
%I Cornell University Southeast Asia Program
%P 237-8
%+ English translation of Chu T'ing 1957

%A Chu Van Nhat
%D n.d.
%T <Man Cao-lan of Y\^en-son, province of Tuy\^en-quang>
%M Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme Orient ms. 207, XVI, 2

%A Chuan Shaweevongs
%A et al.
%D 1960
%T <An intermediate-advanced level Thai refresher course>, Books I-IV
%C Washington, DC
%I English Language Services, Inc.
%Z 4 vols, 269, 257, 402, 514p.

%A Chuan Shaweevongs
%A et al.
%D 1968
%X see Campbell, Stuart, and Chuan Shaweevongs

%A Chuan Siawcholit (Prasit Chawalittamrong)
%D 1963
%T {\thai <Photchan\=anukrom Thai--Ch\=in>}
%t Thai--Chinese dictionary
%e new and revised edition
%C Bangkok

%A Chuanphit Itharat
%D 1974
%T {\thai <K\=an chai kham lae samn\=uan thai nai samai sukh\=thai>}
%t The use of Thai words and idioms in the Sukhothai period
%U M.A. thesis, Thai Department, Chulalongkorn University

%A Chuathai,, Apinan
%X see Apinan Chuathai

%A Chuchat,, Chaijon
%X see Chaijon Chuchat

%A Chucheun,, Katanyu
%X see Katanyu Chucheun

%A Chuenkongchoo,, Terd
%X see Terd Chuenkongchoo

%A Chuensuwimol,, Bunruang
%X see Bunruang Chuensuwimol

%A [Chulalongkorn University]
%D 1960
%T <Bibliography of material about Thailand in Western languages>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University

%A [Chulalongkorn University]
%D 1981
%T {\thai <Photchan\=anukrom ph\=as\=a thai krungth\=ep--thai ch\=iangmai>}
%t Bangkok Thai--Chiengmai Thai dictionary
%C Bangkok
%I Department of Linguistics, Faculty of Arts, Chulalongkorn University

%A Chumsai,, Manit
%X see Manich Jumsai

%A Chun Prahbhavivadhana
%X see Prae Pittya 1966

%A Chung Fu-tan
%X see Ho Ch'eng, Ch'eng Wo-lung, Chung Fu-tan, and Wang Te-lun

%A Chung See Liu
%D 1940
%T Preliminary study of the origins of the tribes of Hainan Island
%J <Meridio-Occidentale Sinense>
%V 1
%P 1-23

%A Chuong Dong San [?]
%D 1972
%T {\rus <Frazeologicheskie oboroty v russkom iazyke i sposoby iykh peredachi va v'etnamskii iazyke>}
%t Phraseological constructions in Russian and the means for their reproduction in Vietnamese
%C Moscow

%A Chuong Dong San [?]
%D 1977
%T {\rus <Frazeologizmy v iazyke i rechi (na materiale russkogo i v'etnamskogo iazykov)>}
%t Phraseology in language and speech (based on Russian and Vietnamese materials)
%U Doktor nauk in Philological Sciences, Moskovskii godusarskvennyi universitet imeni M. V. Lomonosova

%A Chutima Keawsilpa
%D 1982
%T <A description of Pho Karen: a Tibeto-Burman language>
%U M.A. thesis, ILCRD, Mahidol U. {\? ILCRD?}
%O Pwo

%A Civera,, Marco Bernard
%D 1971
%T <The distinctive phonology of Lhasa Central Tibetan: results of a field tripo to study the Himalayas as an ethno-linguistic area>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Georgetown University
%Z 196p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 32.4:2076-A; University Microfilms 71-25,225

%A Clammer,, J. R.
%D 1976
%T <Sociological approaches to the study of language and literacy in Southeast Asia>
%S <University of Singapore Sociology working paper>
%u 56
%C Singapore
%I Chopmen Enterprises
%Z 27p.

%A Clark,, Ephraim W.
%D 1879
%T A specimen of the Zoongee (or Zurngee) dialect of a tribe of Nagas
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> n.s.
%V 2
%P 278-86
%O Chungli

%A Clark,, Ephraim W.
%D 1911
%T <Ao-Naga dictionary>
%C Calcutta
%I Baptist Mission Press
%Z 977p.
%O Chungli - BSTL

%A Clark,, Mrs. Ephraim W.
%D 1893
%T <Ao-Naga grammar>
%C Shillong
%I Assam Secretariat Printing Office
%Z 181p.
%+ Reprinted 1981, Delhi: Gian Publishing
%O Chungli

%A Clark,, G. W.
%D 1894
%T <Kweichow and Yun-nan provinces>
%C Shanghai
%I Shanghai Mercury Office
%Z 269p.
%O Vocabulary, TB: Minkia (Minchia) 293-6; TK: Chong-chai-tse (Chungchia) 287-92; MY: Heh Miao (Black Miao) 271-86

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1969
%T Is <bi> really passive and will Vietnamese find the true ergative?
%M University of Hawaii Linguistics 650 term paper

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1971
%T Passive and ergative in Vietnamese
%J <Working Papers in Linguistics, University of Hawaii>
%V 3
%N 8
%P 103-17
%+ Also published 1974, <SALS> 1:75-88

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1971
%T Submissive verbs as adversatives in some Asian languages
%J <Working Papers in Linguistics, University of Hawaii>
%V 1
%P 119-42
%+ Also published 1974, <SALS> 1:89-110
%O Deals with Japanese, Vietnamese, Thai, Lao, Mandarin, Cambodian, English

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1972
%T Some possible grammatical areal features in Southeast Asian languages
%M Paper presented at Southern Illinois University Center for Vietnamese Studies, August 22, 1972

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1974
%T Passive and ergative in Vietnamese
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Southeast Asian linguistic studies> 1
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.31
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 75-88
%+ Originally published 1971, <Working Papers in Linguistics, University of Hawaii> 3.8:103-17

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1974
%T Submissive verbs as adversatives in some Asian languages
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Southeast Asian linguistic studies> 1
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.31
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 89-110
%+ Originally published 1971, <Working Papers in Linguistics, University of Hawaii> 1:119-42
%O Deals with Japanese, Vietnamese, Thai, Lao, Mandarin, Cambodian, English

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1977
%T Ditransitive goal verbs in Vietnamese
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, VI
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%P 1-38

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1978
%T <Coverbs and case in Vietnamese>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u B.48
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%Z 215p.
%R Reviewed by L. C. Thompson, <Journal of Asian Studies> 102(1982).3:581-2

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1978
%T An introduction to the Hmong people and language
%M Paper presented to the Mekong River Festival, University of Hawaii, April 29, 1978

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1978
%X see Vangkua Cheurtong, Marybeth Clark, and Thomas Huebner

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1979
%T Coverbs: evidence for the derivation of prepositions from verbs; new evidence from Hmong
%J <Working Papers in Linguistics, University of Hawaii>
%V 11
%N 2
%P 1-12

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1980
%T Derivation between goal and source verbs in Hmong
%J <Working Papers in Linguistics, University of Hawaii>
%V 12
%N 2
%P 51-60

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1980
%T Source phrases in White Hmong
%J <Working Papers in Linguistics, University of Hawaii>
%V 12
%N 2
%P 1-50

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1982
%T Some auxiliary verbs in Hmong
%E Downing,, Bruce T.
%E Olney,, Douglas P.
%B <The Hmong in the West: observations and reports>, Papers from the 1981 Hmong Research Conference, University of Minnesota
%C Minneapolis
%I Center for Urban and Regional Affairs
%P 125-41

%A Clark,, Marybeth
%D 1982
%T The two <have>'s of Hmong
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A Clark,, T. W.
%X see Brough and Clark

%A Clarke,, H.
%D 1870 (?)
%T The Phrygian, Etruscan, and Caucaso-Tibetan
%J <The Phoenix>
%V I
%P 54ff.

%A Clarke,, H.
%D 1870 (?)
%T Tibetan affinities of the palaeo-Georgian language
%J <The Phoenix>
%V I
%P 54ff.

%A Clarke,, Hyde
%D 1878
%T {\ital <Osservazione sulla lingua onorifica ovvero ceremoniale della tribu Lepcha or Rong di Dorjeling, nella regione Himalaia>}
%t ?
%J <Proceedings of the 4th International Congress of Orientalist> (Florence)
%V 2
%P 117-22
%O Comments in Shafer,, Robert, et al., eds., <Bibliography of Sino-Tibetan languages>, Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, 1963, 2:122

%A Clarke,, Hyde
%D 1882
%T The Lolo character of western China
%B <Report of the British Association for the Advancement of Science>
%C Southampton
%I British Association for the Advancement of Science
%P 607-8

%A Clarke,, Hyde
%D 1882
%T Lolo and Vei characters
%J <The Athenaeum>
%V 2
%P 370

%A Clarke,, Samuel R.
%D 1911
%T <Among the tribes in Southwest China>
%C London
%I Morgan and Schott
%Z 315p.
%O Vocabulary, TB: Kang-I (Yi), Lisu, Lolo, Nosu, Sifan; TK: Chungchia, Keh-Lao (Kelao?), Ya-Ch'io Miao, Hua Miao, 307-15

%A Clauson,, Gerard
%D 1964
%T The future of Tangut `Hsi-Hsia' studies
%J <Asia Major>
%V 11
%N 1
%P 54-77

%A Clauson,, Gerard
%D 1970
%T Review of Kepping, et al., {\rus <More pismen': faksimile tangutskikh ksilografov>}
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 33
%P 221-2

%A Clauson,, G. L. M.
%A Yoshitake,, S.
%D 1929
%T On the phonetic value of the Tibetan characters <'a> and <\_ha> and the equivalent characters in the hphags-pa alphabet
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1929
%P 843-62

%A Clerk,, F. V.
%D 1911
%T <A manual of the Lawngwaw or Maru language...>
%C Rangoon
%I American Baptist Mission Press
%Z 243p.

%A Clifford,, Hugh
%D 1866
%T The Sakai language
%J <Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 17
%P 102-3

%A Clifford,, Hugh
%D 1891
%T Some notes on the Sakai dialects of the Malay Peninsula
%J <Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 24
%P 13-29

%A Clifton,, J. M.
%X see Maran,, LaRaw, and J. M. Clifton

%A Coates,, J. M.
%D 1875
%T <Vocabulary of seven languages or dialects of Chota Nagpore>
%C Calcutta
%I Bengal Secretariat Press
%Z 136 p.
%O Santali, Larka Kol, Mundari, Korwa, and Birja (AA)

%A Cobbey,, Maxwell
%D 1977
%X see Aw\;oi-hathe, Aviong, A-T\'y, A-Ly, Cobbey, and Cobbey

%A Cobbey,, Maxwell
%D 1979
%T A statistical comparison of verbs and nouns in R\;oglai
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Southeast Asian linguistic studies> 4
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.49
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 207-12

%A Cobbey,, Maxwell
%D 1980
%T A first case of historiography among the R\;oglai
%E Gregerson,, Marilyn
%E Thomas,, Dorothy
%B <Notes from Indochina on ethnic minority cultures>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Museum of Anthropology>
%u publication no. 6
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 61-84

%A Cobbey,, Maxwell
%D n.d.
%X see Lee,, Earnest W., Lois Lee, Cobbey, and Cobbey

%A Cobbey,, Maxwell
%A Cobbey,, Vurnell
%D 1980
%T <DuLong R\;oglai ethnographic texts>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 1 mf.

%A Cobbey,, Maxwell
%A Cobbey,, Vurnell
%D 1980
%T <English - Northern R\;oglai dictionary>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 5 mf.

%A Cobbey,, Maxwell
%A Cobbey,, Vurnell
%D 1980
%T <Northern R\;oglai ethnographic texts>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 3 mf.

%A Cobbey,, Maxwell
%A Cobbey,, Vurnell
%D 1980
%T <Northern R\;oglai field notes>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 2 mf.

%A Cobbey,, Vurnell
%A Aviong
%A Aw\;oi-hathe
%D 1969
%T {\roglai <Bai hoc ti\^eng R\;oglai>}; {\eng <Northern R\;oglai language lessons>}: {\viet <R\;oglai--Vi\^et--Anh>}
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z iii, 33p., mimeo.
%+ published 1976, Manila: Summer Institute of Linguistics, v, 32p.

%A Coblin,, W. South
%D 1972-73
%T Review of Benedict, <Sino-Tibetan: a conspectus>
%J <Monumenta Serica>
%V 30
%P 635-42

%A Coblin,, W. South
%D 1974
%T An early Tibetan word for <horse>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 94
%N 1
%P 124-5

%A Coblin,, W. South
%D 1974
%T Review of Matisoff, <The Loloish tonal split revisited>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 94
%N 4
%P 522-4

%A Coblin,, W. South
%D 1976
%T Notes on Tibetan verbal morphology
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 62
%N 1-3
%P 45-70

%A Coblin,, W. South
%D 1977
%T A new study of the Pai-lang songs
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 10 (Georgetown University, Washington, DC)

%A Cochrane,, Wilbur Willis
%D 1908
%T <Easy Shan exercises in translation.> <Part 1: simple stories.> <Part 2: Official writings>
%C Rangoon
%I American Baptist Mission Press
%Z 85p.

%A Cochrane,, Wilbur Willis
%D 1911
%T An Ahom (Shan) legend of creation (from an old MS.)
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1911
%P 1132-42
%O An alternative translation to that by Briefson in <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> (1904):181-232 - BSTL

%A Cochrane,, Wilbur Willis
%D 1912
%T Review of Bigg-Wither, <A guide to the study of Shan>
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 4
%P 230-2

%A Cochrane,, Wilbur Willis
%D 1914
%T Burmese philology and the Shan language
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 4
%P 230-2

%A Cochrane,, Wilbur Willis
%D 1915
%T <The Shans, vol. 1>
%C Rangoon
%I Superintendent, Government Printing
%Z xx, 227p.
%+ Reprinted 1981, New York: AMS Press
%O Language, affinities and letters - 82-112 - SJS

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1908
%T Review of Schmidt, {\germ <Grundz\"uge einer Lautlehre der Mon-Khmer-Sprachen>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 8
%P 249-52

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1918
%T {\fr Notes critiques sur l'inscription de Rama Khamhaeng}
%t Critical notes on the inscription of Rama Khamhaeng
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 12
%P 1-27

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1923
%T {\fr Nouvelles notes critiques sur l'inscription de Rama Khamhaeng}
%t New critical notes on the inscription of Rama Khamhaeng
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 17
%N 3
%P 113-20

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1924
%T {\fr <Receuil des inscription du Siam. Premi\`ere partie: Inscriptions de Sukhodaya>}
%t ??
%C Bangkok
%Z 168, 177p.
%O Text also in Thai; note on transcription, 10-12 of French text - SJS

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1925
%T {\thai <Tamn\=an 'aks\=\,on thai>}
%t History of Thai writing (i.e. alphabet)
%C Bangkok
%Z 4, 12p., 10 plates, 5 tables

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1926, 1927
%X see Burnay and Coed\`es

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1929
%T {\fr <Receuil des inscription du Siam. Deuxi\'eme partie: inscriptions de Dv\=Aravat\=i, de \,Cr\=ivijaya et de Lavo>}
%t ??
%C Bangkok
%I Bangkok Times Press

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1929
%T Review of Goupillon, {\fr <Essai de vocabulaire fran\,cais-chau-ma>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 29
%N 359-61
%% v 29 corrected for Huffman's v 19, on basis of 1929 date if that's right ??

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1931
%T {\fr Notre transcription du siamois}
%t Our transcription of Siamese
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 31
%P 355-9

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1932
%T Review of Martini, {\fr <M\'ethode de lecture cambodgienne>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 32
%P 511

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1933
%T Review of M\'en\'etrier, {\fr <Le vocabulaire cambodgienne dans ses rapports avec le sanscrit et le pali>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 33
%P 994-7

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1935
%T {\fr L'Origine du cycle des douze animaux aux Cambodge}
%t The origin of the cycle of twelve animals in Cambodia
%J <T'oung Pao>, 2e s\'erie
%V 32
%P 315-29

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1937-66
%T {\fr <Inscriptions du Cambodge>}
%t Inscriptions of Cambodia
%S {\fr <Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme Orient, collections de textes et documents sur l'Indochine>}
%u III
%O edited and translated
%Z Vol. I, Hanoi: IDEO, 1937; vol. II, Hanoi: IDEO; vol. III, Paris: de Bocard, 1951; vol. IV, Paris: de Boccard, 1952; vol. V, Paris, de Boccard, 1953; vol. VI, Paris: de Boccard, 1954; vol. VII, Paris: Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme Orient, 1964; vol. VIII, Paris: Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme Orient, 1966 {\? IDEO??}

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1939
%T {\fr La plus ancienne inscription en langue cham}
%t The oldest inscription in the Cham language
%J <New Indian Antiquary> (<M\'elanges F. W. Thomas>), extra s\'erie
%V 1
%P 46-9

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1940
%T {\fr Mots portugais en cambodgien}
%t Portuguese words in Cambodian
%J <Institut Indochinois pour l'Etude de l'Homme (Bulletins et Travaux)>
%V 3
%N 1
%P 73-6

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1940-48
%T {\fr Les langues de l'Indochine}
%t The languages of Indo-China
%J <Conf. de l'Institut de Linguistique de l'Universit\'e de Paris>
%V 8
%P 63-81

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1944
%T {\fr Une nouvelle inscription d'Ayuthya}
%t A new inscription of Ayuthya
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 35
%N 1
%P 73-6

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1948
%T {\fr Le siamois a l'Ecole Nationale des Langues Orientales Vivantes}
%t Siamese in the National School of Living Oriental Languages
%E Deny,, Jean
%E et al.
%B {\fr <Cent-Cinquantenaire de l'Ecole des Langues Orientales...>}
%b ??
%C Paris
%I Imprimerie nationale de France
%P 245-8

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1952
%T {\fr A propos de deux fragments d'inscription r\'ecement d\'ecouverts \`a P'ra Pathom (Thailande)}
%t On two inscription fragments recently discovered in P'ra Pathom (Thailand)
%B {\fr <Cinquantenaire de la fondation de l'Ecole Fran\,cais d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%b ??
%C Paris
%P 27-31

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1954
%T {\fr La st\`ele de T\^uol Rolom Tim: essai d'interpretation par la langue bahnar d'un texte juridique khm\`er du Xe si\`ecle}
%t The stele of T\^uol Rolom Tim: interpretative essay on the Bahnar language of a Khmer legal text of the 10th century
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 242
%N 1
%P 49-67

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1958
%T {\fr Nouvelles donn\'ees \'epigraphiques sur l'Indochine occidentale}
%t New epigraphic contributions on western Indo-China
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 246
%P 127-8

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1961
%T {\fr Les expressions {\oldkhm <Vra\.h kamrate\:n A\~n>} {\fr et} {\oldkhm <Kamrate\:n jagat>} {\fr en vieux Khmer}
%t The expressions {\oldkhm <Vra\.h kamrate\:n A\~n>} and {\oldkhm <Kamrate\:n jagat>} in Old Khmer
%J <Adyar Library Bulletin>
%V 25
%P 447-60

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1964
%T {\fr Le Mons de Dv\=aravat\=i}
%t The Mons of Dv\=aravat\=i
%E Ba Shin
%E Boisellier,, Jean
%E Griswold,, A. B.
%B <Essays offered to G. H. Luce>
%S <Artibus Asiae, Supplementum>
%u XXIII, vols. I and II
%C Leiden
%I E. J. Brill
%P 112-7

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1964, 1983
%T {\thai <Tamn\=an 'aks\=\,on thai; tamn\=an phra phim; k\=ankhutkhon th\=i phong tuk; sinlapa thai samai sukh\=othai>}
%t The history of the Thai alphabet; the history of stamped Buddha images; the excavations at Phong Tuk; the arts of Sukhothai
%C Bangkok
%I Ongkankha khong Khurusapha
%Z 151p.
%+ 2nd ed. 1983

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1965
%T {\fr Documents \'epigraphiques provenant de Tenasserim}
%t Epigraphic documents originating from Tenasserim
%B <Felicitation volumes of Southeast Asian studies II>
%C Bangkok
%I Siam Society
%P 203-9

%A Coed\`es,, Georges
%D 1966
%T {\fr <Catalog des manuscrits en Pali, Laotien, et Siamois provenant de la Thailande>}
%t Catalog of manuscripts in Pali, Laotian, and Siamese originating from Thailand
%S <Catalogue of oriental manuscripts, xylographs, etc., in Danish collections, vol. 2, Part 2>
%C Copenhagen
%I Biblioth\`eque Royale
%Z 116p.
%R Reviewed by Bechert, <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl"andischen Gesellschaft> 130(1980).1:151-2

%A Cohen,, Nancy
%D 1976
%T Some interclausal relations in Jeh
%E Gregerson,, Kenneth
%E Thomas,, David
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, V
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 153-64

%A Cohen,, Nancy
%D 1980
%T Jeh music
%E Gregerson,, Marilyn
%E Thomas,, Dorothy
%B <Notes from Indochina on ethnic minority cultures>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Museum of Anthropology>
%u publication no. 6
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 85-98

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%D 1964
%X see Gradin and Cohen

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%D 1966
%T <Jeh computer concordance>
%? Produced under the auspices of the Summer Institute of Linguistics through the University of Oklahoma under NSF grant no. RS00307

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%D 1966
%T Presyllables and reduplication in Jeh
%E Thomas,, David D.
%E Nguy\^en \-Dinh Hoa
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, II
%S <Linguistic Circle of Saigon>
%u publication no. 3
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Linguistic Circle of Saigon
%P 91-103
%+ Also published 1965, <V*an-hoa Nguy^et-san> 14:887-98

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%D 1970
%X see Gradin and Cohen

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%D 1976
%T The noun phrase in Jeh
%E Gregerson,, Kenneth
%E Thomas,, David
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, V
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 139-52

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%D 1976
%X see Th\^ong, Cohen, and Gradin

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%D 1979
%X see Th\^ong, Cohen, and Gradin

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%D 1980
%T <Jeh ethnographic texts>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 5 mf.

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%D 1980
%T <Jeh rhyming dictionary>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 6 mf.

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%A Gradin,, Dwight
%D n.d.
%T <Jeh concordance project texts>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics, University of North Dakota

%A Cohen,, Patrick
%A Th\^ong
%A Gradin,, Dwight
%D 1979
%T {\jeh <Chu chih to totayh Jeh>}: {\viet <Ng\;u-v\;ung Jeh>}: {\eng <Jeh vocabulary>}
%S <Vietnam Minority Linguistic Series>
%u 15.1
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z xvii, 244p.

%A Cole,, F. T.
%D 1879
%T List of words and phrases with their Santali equivalents
%J <Indian Antiquary>
%V 8
%P 194-6

%A Cole,, F. T.
%D 1906
%T <Santali primer>
%e 2nd ed.
%C Pokhuria
%I Santal Mission Press
%Z 128p.

%A Collings,, H. D.
%D 1949
%T A Temoq word list and notes
%J <Bulletin of the Raffles Museum>, Series B
%V 4
%P 69-85

%A Collings,, H. D.
%D 1949
%T Aboriginal notes
%J <Bulletin of the Raffles Museum>, Series B
%V 4
%P 86-94
%O Notes 2-5 on Semelai

%A Collins,, D. G.
%D 1906, 1972
%T <An English--Laos dictionary>
%e 2nd ed.
%C Chieng Mai
%I Mission Press
%+ Reprinted by Westmead, Farnborough, Hants: Gregg, 1972, 237p.
%O The Kammuang (Northern Thai) language of Chiengmai
%R Reviewed by Purnell, <Journal of the Siam Society> 61(1973).2:364-7

%A Collins,, Ira V.
%D in progress
%T <The Austro-Asiatic substratum of Atjehnese>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of California at Berkeley

%A Collins,, Vaugn
%% ??sic
%D 1969
%T The position of Atjehnese among Southeast Asian languages
%E Johnston,, Richard
%E et al.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, III
%S <Linguistic Circle of Saigon>
%u publication no. 4
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Linguistic Circle of Saigon
%P 48-60
%O Contains 211-item wordlist of Achinese and R\;oglai; supports Dyen's classification of Achinese with Malay rather than Cham

%A Colney,, Sapchhawna
%D 1977
%T <The Anglo-Mizo dictionary of idioms and phrases for all>
%C Aizawa
%I Colney
%Z 275p.

%A Compton,, Carol J.
%D 1971
%T A study of the nasalization of vowels following /h/ in some Southwestern Tai languages and dialects
%M ms.

%A Compton,, Carol J.
%D 1975
%T Lam Khon Sawan: a traditional form and a contemporary theme
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%B <A Tai festschrift for William J. Gedney on the occasion of his fifth cycle of life birthday anniversary, April 4, 1975>
%S <Southeast Asian Studies Working Paper>
%u 8
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Southeast Asian Studies Program
%P 55-82
%+ Also published in Gething,, Thomas W., and Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em, eds, <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 6>: <Tai studies in honor of William J. Gedney> (<Pacific Linguistics>, A.52), Canberra: Australian National University, 45-74, 1979

%A Compton,, Carol J.
%D 1977
%T <Linguistic and cultural aspects of the Lam: the song of the Lao Mohlam>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Michigan
%Z 391p.

%A Compton,, Carol J.
%D 1977
%T Tone patterns, rhyme schemes, and grammatical devices in two forms of Laotian oral poetry
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 10 (Georgetown University, Washington, DC)

%A Compton,, Carol J.
%D 1979
%T <Courting poetry in Laos: a textual and linguistic analysis>
%S <Northern Illinois University, Center for Southeast Asian Studies, Special report series>
%u 18
%C DeKalb, IL
%I Northern Illinois University Center for Southeast Asian Studies
%Z 252p., map, photos, tables, bibliography, index
%R Reviewed by Wiersma, <Journal of Asian Studies> 42(1983).3:715-16

%A Compton,, Carol J.
%D 1979
%T Lam Khon Sawan: a traditional form and a contemporary theme
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 6>: <Tai studies in honor of William J. Gedney>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.52
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 45-74
%+ Originally published in Gething,, Thomas W., ed., <A Tai festschrift for William J. Gedney on the occasion of his fifth cycle of life birthday anniversary, April 4, 1975> (<Southeast Asian Studies Working Paper>, no. 8), Honolulu: University of Hawaii Southeast Asian Studies Program, 55-82, 1975

%A Compton,, Carol J.
%D 1983
%T Notes on Lao script and typeface
%M Council on Thai Studies, Annual meeting (Northern Illinois University, DeKalb, IL)

%E Compton,, Carol J.
%E Hartmann,, John F. (John Ferdinand)
%D 1992
%T <Papers on Tai languages, linguistics, and literatures, in honor of William J. Gedney on his 77th birthday>
%S <Monograph series on Southeast Asia>
%u <Occasional paper>, no. 16
%C De Kalb
%I Northern Illinois University, Center for Southeast Asian Studies
%Z xxi, 302p., ill.
%# UCB S-S/EAsia PL4111 .P34 1992

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1953
%T {\fr Les Cambodgiens}
%t The Cambodians
%E Leroi-Gourhan,, Andr\'e
%B {\fr <Ethnologie de l'Union Fran\,caise>}
%b Ethnology of the French Union
%V 2
%C Paris
%I Presses universitaires
%P 588-619
%O Includes ethnography of the minorities

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1953
%T {\fr Chansons Mnong-gar}
%t Mnong-Gar songs
%J <France-Asie>
%V 87
%P 648-56

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1953
%T {\fr L'Indochine}
%t Indo-China
%E Leroi-Gourhan,, Andr\'e
%B {\fr <Ethnologie de l'Union Fran\,caise>}
%b Ethnology of the French Union
%V 2
%C Paris
%I Presses universitaires
%P 514-678
%O Ethnolinguistic data on minorities

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1954
%T {\fr Enqu\^ete linguistique parmi les populations montagnardes du sud indochinois}
%t ??
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 46
%N 2
%P 573-97
%O Part I: Place occup\'ee par la linguistique empirique dans l'enqu\^ete ethnologique en pays mnong-gar; Part II: Le nouveau mode de transcription de koho; Part III: Enqu\^etes sur les dialectes rhad\'e, j\;orai, et bahnar et essai d'application du nouveau mode de transcription \`a ces dialectes
%O AA: Bahnar, Koho, Mnong Gar; MA: Jarai, Rad\'e

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1955
%T {\fr Notes sur le T\^am b\^o mae baap aa ku\^on; Echange de sacrifices entre un enfant et ses p\`ere et m\`ere (Mnong rl\^am)}
%t ??
%J <International Archives of Ethnography>
%V 47
%P 127-59
%O Appendix contains Mnong texts with translations

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1957
%T {\fr <Nous avons mang\'e la for\^et (de la pierre-g\'enie g\^oo)>}
%t We have eaten the forest
%C Paris
%I Mercure de France
%O Appendix contains brief Mnong Gar glossary

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1965
%T Two brief notes concerning Mnong Gar
%E Milner,, G. B.
%E Henderson,, Eug\'enie J. A.
%B <Indo-Pacific linguistic studies>
%S <Lingua>
%u 14-15
%C Amsterdam
%I North Holland Publishing Co.
%V 2
%P 48-52

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1970
%T {\fr Atlas ethno-linguistique sur l'Asia du Sud-Est et le Monde Insulindien}
%t Ethnolinguistic atlas of South-East Asia and Indonesia
%J <Cahiers de l'Institut de Science Economique Appliqu\'ee>
%V VII
%N 8
%P 397-9

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1971
%T {\fr Notes sur l'histoire lawa. A propos d'un lieu dit <Lua> (<Lawa>) en pays karen (Amphoe Chom Thong, Changwat Chiengmai)}
%t ??
%B <Commemorative volume for the {\? missing material in Huffman??} Museum>
%C Bangkok
%P 146-64, 2 maps

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1975
%T {\fr Notes sur les tons en L\`ac (parler austro-asiatique de la r\'egion de Dalat, Vietnam central)}
%t Notes on the tones in L\`ac (an Austroasiatic language of the Dalat region, central Vietnam)
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 6
%N 4
%P 93-6
%+ Reprint of 1974, with diacritics added

%A Condominas,, Georges
%D 1979
%T An observation on Mnong Gar language
%M Third International Conference on Austroasiatic Languages, Helsing\/or, Denmark, October 24-26, 1979

%A Condominas,, Georges
%A Haudricourt,, Andr\'e-Georges
%D 1952
%T {\fr Premi\`ere contribution \`a l'ethnobotanique indochinoise. Essai d'ethnobotanique Mnong Gar (Proto-Indochinois du Vietnam)}
%t First contribution to Indo-Chinese ethnobotany. Essay on Mnong Gar ethnobotany (proto-Indo-Chinese of Vietnam)
%J <Revue Internationale de Botanique appliqu\'ee et d'Agronomie tropicale>
%V 32
%P 19-27, 169-80

%A Conklin,, Nancy Faires
%D 1973-75
%X see Adams,, Karen L., and Conklin,, Nancy Faires

%A Conklin,, Nancy Faires
%D 1975
%X see Adams,, Karen L., Becker,, Alton L., and Conklin,, Nancy Faires

%A Conklin,, Nancy Faires
%D 1981
%T <The semantics and syntax of numeral classification in Tai and Austronesian>
%U Ph.D dissertation, University of Michigan
%Z 500p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 42/06A-2652; University Microfilms 81-25890

%A Conlon,, Frank F.
%D 1980
%T Review of Pearson, <South Asian bibliography>
%J <Journal of Asian Studies>
%V 39
%N 2
%P 345-6

%A Conrady,, August
%D 1891
%T {\germ Das New\^ar\^i, Grammatik und Sprachproben}
%t Newari grammar and language structure
%J <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl"andischen Gesellschaft>
%V 45
%P 1-35

%A Conrady,, August
%D 1893
%T {\germ Ein Sanskrit-New\^ar\^i W\"orterbuch, aus dem Nachlasse Minayeff's herausgegeben}
%t A Sanskrit-Newari dictionary, edited from the literary remains of Minayeff
%J <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl"andischen Gesellschaft>
%V 47
%P 539-73

%A Conrady,, August
%D 1896
%T {\germ <Eine indochinesiche Causativ-Denominativ-Bildung und ihr Zusammenhang mit den Tonaccenten. Ein Beitrag zur vergleichenden Grammatik der Indochinesischen Sprachen, insonderheit das Tibetischen, Barmanischen, Siamesischen und Chinesischen>}
%t An Indochinese causative-denominative formation and its relationship to tone. An essay on the comparative grammar of the Indochinese languages, especially Tibetan, Burmese, Siamese, and Chinese
%C Leipzig
%I Otto Harrassowitz
%Z xx, 208p.
%R Reviewed by Egerod, <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages> 6(1976):51
%R Reviewed by Schafer, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 13(1950):718-21
%R Reviewed by Zach, <T'oung Pao>, series 1, 8(1897):117-8

%A Conrady,, August
%D 1916
%T {\germ Ein merkw\"urdige Beziehung zwischen den austrischen und den indochinesischen Sprachen}
%t A notable relationship between Austric and the Indochinese languages
%B {\germ <Aufs\"atze zur Kultur- und Sprachgeschichte, vornehmlich des Orient, Ernst Kuhn zum 70>}
%b ??
%C Breslau
%I Marcus
%P 475-504

%A Conrady,, August
%D 1920
%T {\germ Neue austrisch--indochinesische Parallelen}
%t New Austric--Indochinese parallels
%B <Hirth anniversary volume (Asia Major introductory volume)>
%C London
%I Probsthain
%P 475-504
%# UCB Main PL1026.H57 1923
%% ?? Huffman's date for vol. wrong?

%A Conze,, Edward
%D 1954
%T <{\skt Abhisamay\=ala\:nk\=ara}. Introduction and translation from original texts>
%S {\ital <Serie Orientale Roma>} 6
%C Rome
%I ?
%Z 223p.
%O Sanskrit--Tibetan--English vocabulary, 107-78; Tibetan--Sanskrit, 179-223

%A Conze,, Edward
%D 1960
%T <Sanskrit--Tibetan Sanskrit--English index to the {\skt Prahj\~n\=aparamit\=a ratna gu\.na sa\:mcaya g\=ath\=a}>
%? edited by E. Obermiller
%C s'Gravenhage
%I ?
%Z 157p.
%O Sanskrit and Tibetan text; reprint of Leningrad ed. 1937 - BSTL

%A Cook,, Walter Anthony, S.J.
%D 1965
%T <A descriptive analysis of Mundari. A study of the structure of the Mundari language according to the methods of linguistic science, with particular attention to the units of sound, the units of meaning, the units of grammar, and their mutually contrastive arrangement patterns>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Georgetown University
%Z 315p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts 26,7:3938-9; University Microfilms 65-12,509
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 32(1966).4:396

%A Cooke,, Joseph R.
%D 1962
%T Review of R. B. Jones, <Karen linguistic studies>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 82
%N 2
%P 241-6

%A Cooke,, Joseph R.
%D 1963
%T Chiengmai Pho Karen, a preliminary grammatical sketch
%M ms.

%A Cooke,, Joseph R.
%D 1963
%T Review of Abramson, <The vowels and tones of Standard Thai>
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 65
%P 1406-7

%A Cooke,, Joseph R.
%D 1969
%T <Pronominal reference in Thai, Burmese, and Vietnamese>
%S <University of California Publications in Linguistics>
%u 52
%C Berkeley, CA
%I University of California Press
%Z 162p.
%R Reviewed by R. Campbell, <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 92(1972).1:158-9
%R Reviewed by R. B. Jones, <Language> 46(1970).1:214-17
%R Reviewed by K\"unstler, <Przeglad Orientalistyczny> 1971.1:89-90
%R Reviewed by Lehman, <Journal of Asian Studies> 29(1970).3:733-4
%R Reviewed by Meier, <Zeitschrift f"ur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft, und Kommunikationsforschung> 25(1972):428-30
%R Reviewed by Nguy\^en D. H., <General Linguistics> 10(1970):190-1
%R Reviewed by L. Thompson, <American Anthropologist> 72(1970):190-1

%A Cooke,, Joseph R.
%D 1972
%T Review of R. Campbell, <Noun substitutes in modern Thai>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 92
%N 2
%P 362-3

%A Cooke,, Joseph R.
%D 1979
%T Forms and meaning of the Thai particle <si>
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Southeast Asian linguistic studies> 4
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.49
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 61-98

%A Cooke,, Joseph R.
%D 1980
%T The Thai <Khlong> poem: description and examples
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 100
%N 4
%P 421-37
%O Linguistic analysis

%A Cooke,, Joseph R.
%D 1982
%T Thai nasalized vowels
%J <Warasan manutsasat>
%V 10
%N 3
%P 59-68

%A Cooke,, Joseph R.
%A Hudspith,, J. Edwin
%A Morris,, James A.
%D 1976
%T Phlong (Pwo Karen of Hot District, Chiang Mai)
%E Smalley,, William A.
%B <Phonemes and orthography: language planning in ten minority languages of Thailand>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.43
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 187-220

%A Coplar,, Theodosia
%X see Kanda Sittachitta and Theodosia Coplar

%A Cooper,, James S.
%D 1965
%T Halang verb phrase
%J <Te Reo>
%V ?
%P 28-34
%+ Also published 1966 in David D. Thomas, ed. <Papers on four Vietnamese languages> (<Te Reo reprints>, no. 2), Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand, 187-200

%A Cooper,, James S.
%D 1966
%T Halang verb phrase
%E Thomas,, David D.
%B <Papers on four Vietnamese languages>
%S <Te Reo reprints>
%u 2
%C Auckland
%I Linguistic Society of New Zealand
%+ Originally published 1965, <Te Reo> ??:28-34

%A Cooper,, James S.
%D 1971
%T {\halang <Bai h\uok n\;or Hal\uang>}
%t Halang language lessons
%C Saigon
%I B\^o Giao-duc
%Z 40p.
%+ Republished 1981

%A Cooper,, James S.
%D 1973
%T An ethnography of Halang rhymes
%E Thomas,, David D.
%E Nguy\^en \-Dinh Hoa
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, IV
%S <Center for Vietnamese Studies, Language series>
%u 4
%C Carbondale, Illinois
%I Center for Vietnamese Studies
%P 33-41

%A Cooper,, James S.
%D 1981
%T {\viet <Bai hoc ti\^eng Halang>} = {\halang <Bai h\uok n\;or Halang>} = {\eng <Halang language lessons>}
%S {\viet <T\;u sach Ng\^on-ng\;u d\^an-t\^oc thi\^eu-s\^o Vi\^et-Nam>}
%s ?
%u cuon 6, phan 2
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 42p.
%+ Republication of 1971
%# UCSD Central PL4438 .C65 1981

%A Cooper,, James S.
%A Cooper,, Nancy
%D 1964
%T <Halang dictionary>
%M ms.

%A Cooper,, James S.
%A Cooper,, Nancy
%D 1966
%T Halang phonemes
%E Thomas,, David D.
%E Nguy\^en \-Dinh Hoa
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, II
%S <Linguistic Circle of Saigon>
%u publication no. 3
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Linguistic Circle of Saigon
%Z 111p.
%+ Also published <V*an-hoa Nguy^et-san> 14(1965):1212-23

%A Cooper,, James S.
%A Cooper,, Nancy
%D 1976
%T <Halang linguistic articles>
%C ?
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics/Mainland Southeast Asia Branch
%Z 12, 7, 9p.
%+ Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 1mf.

%A Cooper,, James S.
%A Cooper,, Nancy
%D 1976
%T <Halang rhyming dictionary: Halang--English>
%C ?
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics/Mainland Southeast Asia Branch
%Z 195p.
%+ Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 6mf.

%A Cooper,, James S.
%A Cooper,, Nancy
%D 1976
%T <Halang vocabulary: Halang--Vietnamese--English thesaurus, a computer printout>
%C Huntington Beach, CA
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 79p.
%+ Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 3mf.

%A Cooper,, Nancy
%X see Cooper,, James S., and Nancy Cooper

%A Cooper,, Robert George
%D 1976
%T <Resource scarcity and the Hmong response: a study of settlement and economy in Northern Thailand>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Hull

%A Cooper,, Robert George
%D 1983
%T Sexual inequality among the Hmong
%E McKinnon,, John
%E Wanat Bhruksasri
%B <Highlanders of Thailand>
%C Kuala Lumpur
%I Oxford University Press
%P 174-86
%O Ethnographic information, with demographic map

%A Cooper,, W. G.
%D 1914
%T A note on Talaing Nissayas and vocabulary
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 4
%P 125-35

%A Cooper,, W. G.
%D 1915
%T <A Mon (Talaing) thinbongyi>
%t Mon spelling-book {\? is title in Mon then?}
%C Rangoon
%I Irrawaddy Press
%Z 43p.

%A Cordier,, G.
%D 1930
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire annamite--fran\,cais \`a l'usage des \'el\'eves des \'ecoles et des annamitisants>}
%t ??
%C Hanoi
%I Imprimerie Tonkinoise
%Z 1433p.

%A Cordier,, G.
%D 1932
%T {\fr <Cours de la langue annamite. Ann\'ee pr\'eparatoire: Grammaire et exercices, 2e annee>}
%t ??
%C Hanoi ?
%Z 257p.

%A Cordier,, G.
%D 1934
%T {\fr <Cours de la langue annamite. Ann\'ee pr\'eparatoire: Grammaire et exercices, ee annee>}
%t ??
%C Hanoi ?
%Z 219p.

%A Cordier,, G.
%D 1935-36
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire fran\,cais-annamite>}
%t ??
%C Hanoi
%I Imprimerie Tonkinoise

%A Cordier,, Henri
%D 1892
%T Review of Cadi\`ere, {\fr <Phon\'etique annamite>}
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 3
%P 190-1

%A Cordier,, Henri
%D 1904
%T <{\lat Bibliotheca sinica}: {\fr dictionnaire bibliographique des ouvrages relatifs \`a l'empire chinois}>
%Z 4 vols.
%e 1st ed.
%C Paris
%I Librairie Orientale et Americaine

%A Cordier,, Henri
%D 1905
%T <{\lat Bibliotheca sinica}: {\fr dictionnaire bibliographique des ouvrages relatifs \`a l'empire chinois}>
%Z 4 vols.
%e 2nd ed.
%C Paris
%I E. Guilmoto

%A Cordier,, Henri
%D 1908
%T {\fr Les Mosos}
%t The Mosos
%J <T'oung Pao>, series 2
%V 9
%P 663-88
%O Moso, Madrolle (=Tseku)

%A Cordier,, Henri
%D 1909
%T Review of Vial, {\fr <Dictionnaire fran\,cais-lolo>}
%J <T'oung Pao>, series 2
%V 10
%P 706-9

%A Cordier,, Henri
%D 1912
%T Review of Tandart, {\fr <Dictionnaire fran\,cais-cambodgien>}
%J <T'oung Pao>, series 2
%V 13
%P 744-5

%A Cordier,, Henri
%D 1912-32
%T <{\lat Bibliotheca indosinica}: {\fr Dictionnaire bibliographique des ouvrages relatifs \`a la p\'eninsule indo-chinoise}>
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%u 15-18
%C Paris
%I Imprimerie Nationale, Ernest Leroux
%Z 5 vols.
%O Vol. 1: Le Birmanie, l'Assam, le Siam, le Laos, 192, columns 1-1104; vol. 2: P\'eninsule Malaise, 1913, columns 1105-1510; vol. 3: Indochine fran\,cais, 1914, columns 1511-2280; vol. 4: Indo-chine fran\,cais, 1915, columns 2281-3030; vol. 5: Index by Roland Cabaton, 1932, columns 3031-3341

%A Cordier,, Henri
%D 1914
%T Review of Ball, <Chinese and Sumerian>
%J <T'oung Pao>, series 2
%V 15
%P 300-1

%A Cordier,, Palmyr
%D 1908
%T {\fr <Cours de tib\'etain classique>}
%t Course on Classical Tibetan
%C Hanoi
%Z 60p.

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%D 1944
%T <Outline of Burmese grammar>
%S <Language>
%u 20.4, supplement
%S <Language dissertation>
%u 38
%C Baltimore
%I Linguistic Society of America
%Z 34p.
%+ Reprinted 1977, New York: Kraus Reprint Corp.
%O Author's Ph.D. thesis, Yale University, 1944
%R Reviewed by Benedict, <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 67(1947):65-7
%R Reviewed by McDavid, <Language> 21(1945):290-3

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%D 1946
%T <Guide's manual for spoken Burmese, basic course, units 1-30>
%? prepared by U Shwe Waing, U Tun Wai, and Tha Gyo Wai
%C New York
%Z 4, 496p.

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%D 1946
%T <Spoken Burmese, basic course>
%C New York
%Z 2 vols.
%+ Reprinted 1979, Ithaca, NY: Spoken Language Services

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%D 1950
%T Review of J. A. Stewart, et al., <A Burmese--English dictionary, Part I>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 70
%P 133-4

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%D 1957
%T <Burmese chrestomathy>
%S <American Council of Learned Societies Program in Oriental Languages, Publication series>
%u A-Texts-4
%C Washington, DC
%I American Council of Learned Societies
%Z ix, 393p.
%R Reviewed by Allot, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 22(1959).3:601-3
%R Reviewed by Minn Latt, <Archiv Orient'al'ni> 27(1959).3:512-3

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%D 1967
%T Burma
%E Sebeok,, Thomas A.
%B <Linguistics in East Asia and Southeast Asia>
%S <Current trends in linguistics>
%u 2
%C The Hague and Paris
%I Mouton
%P 777-81
%O Includes 50-item bibliography of post-World War II works on Tibeto-Burman languages

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%D 1970
%T Aspect in the Burmese verb expression
%J <Actes du Congr\`es International des Linguistes>
%V 10
%N 4
%P 303-4

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%A McDavid,, Raven I.
%D 1958
%T Causatives in Burmese
%J <Studies in Linguistics>
%V 1
%N 18
%P 1-6

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%A Musgrave,, John K.
%D 1958
%T <Burmese glossary>
%C New York
%I American Council of Learned Societies
%Z 209p.
%R Reviewed by Andreev, <Lexicographical collection> 6(1963):189-90
%R Reviewed by Allott, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 22(1959).3:601-3
%R Reviewed by Minn Latt, <Archiv Orient'al'ni> 17(1959).3:512-3

%A Cornyn,, William S.
%A Roop,, D. Haigh
%D 1968
%T <Beginning Burmese>
%S <Yale Linguistic Series>
%C New Haven
%I Yale University Press
%Z xiii, 501p.
%R Reviewed by Allott, <Asia Major> 15(1969).1:119-21; <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 33(1970):669-71
%R Reviewed by D. Bernot, <Bulletin de la Soci'et'e Linguistique de Paris> 66(1971-72):368-70
%R Reviewed by R. B. Jones, <Modern Language Journal> 54(1970).3:209-10
%R Reviewed by Okell, <Journal of the American Oriental Society> 90(1970).2:399-400
%R Reviewed by Richter, <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung> 68(1973):509-11

%A Costa,, Giulio
%D 1954
%T The Garo code of law
%J <Anthropos>
%V 49
%P 1041-66
%O Legal terms

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%D 1966
%T Affixes in Katu
%E Thomas,, David D.
%E Nguy\^en \-Dinh Hoa
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, II
%S <Linguistic Circle of Saigon>
%u publication no. 3
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Linguistic Circle of Saigon
%P 63-86
%+ Also published 1965, <V*an-hoa Nguy^et-san> 14:1033-56

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%D 1966
%T <Katu dictionary>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/Vietnam Branch

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%D 1969
%T The Katu noun phrase
%E Johnston,, Richard
%E et al.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, III
%S <Linguistic Circle of Saigon>
%u publication no. 4
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Linguistic Circle of Saigon
%P 21-35
%+ Also published 1966, <V*an-hoa Nguy^et-san> 15.2-3:475-89

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%D 1971
%T {\viet <Ng\;u-vang Katu>}: {\eng <Katu vocabulary>}
%S <Vietnam Montagnard Language Series>
%u 5
%C Saigon
%I Department of Education
%Z 12, 124p.
%+ Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 2mf.
%O A 4,000-word Katu--Vietnamese--English vocabulary, with Vietnamese and English indices
%R Reviewed by Meier, <Zeitschrift f"ur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft, und Kommunikationsforschung> 28(1975):460-1

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%D 1974
%T {\? <Br\~u--Vi\^et--Anh>}
%t Bru language lessons
%M Summer Institute of Linguistics/Vietnam Branch

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%D 1980
%T Death and burial in Katu culture
%E Gregerson,, Marilyn
%E Thomas,, Dorothy
%B <Notes from Indochina on ethnic minority cultures>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Museum of Anthropology>
%u publication no. 6
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 99-108

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%D n.d.
%T <Katu texts>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%D n.d.
%T <Katu thesaurus>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%A et al.
%D 1976
%T <Katu linguistic articles>
%M Summer Institute of Linguistics/Mainland Southeast Asia Branch
%Z 10, 24,15, 8p.
%+ Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 2mf.

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%A et al.
%D 1976
%T <Katu rhyming dictionary>
%C Huntington Beach, CA
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 260p.
%+ Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 5mf.

%A Costello,, Nancy A.
%A et al.
%D n.d.
%T <Katu--English--Vietnamese dictionary>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Cotter,, Michael
%D 1977
%T <Vietnam: a guide to reference sources>
%C Boston
%I G. K. Hall
%Z 272p.
%O Language dictionaries, 25-37; linguistics, 65-7
%R Reviewed by Roff, <Journal of Asian Studies> 39(1980).4:862-5

%A Court,, Christopher
%D 1962
%T Review of Smalley, <Outline of Khmu' structure>
%J <Oceania>
%V 33
%N 4
%P 303-4

%A Court,, Christopher
%D 1972
%T The tones of the Traat dialect
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Noss,, Richard B.
%B <Tai phonetics and phonology>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute for English Language
%P 47-9
%O Thai

%A Court,, Christopher [translator]
%D 1972
%T Two-way and three-way splitting of tonal systems in some Far Eastern languages
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Noss,, Richard B.
%B <Tai phonetics and phonology>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute for English Language
%P 58-86
%O Translation of Haudricourt, Bipartition et tripartition des syst\`emes de tons dans quelques langues d'Extr\^eme-Orient, 1961, with an additional note by Christopher Court

%A Court,, Christopher
%D 1974
%T Tonalized Malay vocabulary in Satu, Thailand, where Northern Malay meets Southern Thai
%M First International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics (Honolulu, Hawaii)

%A Court,, Christopher
%D 1975
%T The segmental and suprasegmental representation of Malay loanwords in Satun Thai: a description with historical remarks
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Chamberlain,, James R.
%B <Studies in Tai linguistics in honor of William J. Gedney>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 67-88

%A Court,, Christopher
%D 1975
%T Towards a structural typology of the Tai syllable - and an asegmental phonology?
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 8 (University of California, Berkeley)

%A Court,, Christopher
%D 1980
%T What can tone sandhi tell us?; some case studies from Chinese and Tai
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Court,, Christopher
%D 1981
%T Creating new words in contemporary Thai: between laissez-faire and language planning
%E Omar,, Asmah Haji
%E Mohd,, Noor Ein
%B <National language as a medium of instruction>
%C Kuala Lumpur
%I Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka
%P 331-48

%A Court,, Christopher
%D 1985
%T Observations on some cases of tone sandhi
%E Thurgood,, Graham
%E Matisoff,, James A.
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: the state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday>
%S <Pacific linguistics>
%u C.87
%C Canberra
%I Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University
%P 125-37

%A Coussot,, Alfred
%A Ruel,, Henri
%D 1898
%T {\fr <Douse mois chez les sauvages du Laos>}
%t Twelve months among the savages of Laos
%C Paris
%O Vocabulary of Khmer, Lao, and Jarai, 339-50 - SJS

%A Couvert,, R.
%D 1968
%T {\fr <Alphabetisation fonctionelle (Laos)>}
%t Functional alphabetization (Laos)
%C Paris
%I UNESCO
%% Huffman has title in quotes

%A Cowan,, H. K. F.
%D 1938
%T {\fr Rectification de quelques affixes \vcams, rendus inexactment dans les grammaires}
%t ??
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 16
%P 181-91
%O Cham

%A Cowan,, H. K. F.
%D 1947
%T {\dut Aanteekeningen betreffende de verhouding van het Atjehsch tot de Mon-Khmer-talen}
%t ??
%J <Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land-, en Volkenkunde van Nederlandsch-Indi"e>
%V 104
%P 429-514

%A Cowan,, H. K. F.
%D 1957
%T Prospects of a `Papuan' comparative linguistics
%J <Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land-, en Volkenkunde van Nederlandsch-Indi"e>
%V 113
%N 1
%P 70-91
%O Summarizes his theory of the relationship of Achinese to Mon-Khmer

%A Cowan,, H. K. F.
%D 1964
%T Review of Shorto, ed., <Linguistic comparison in South-East Asia and the Pacific>
%J <Lingua>
%V 13
%N 3
%P 305-11

%A Cowan,, H. K. F.
%D 1974
%T Evidence for long vowels in early Achehnese
%J <Oceanic Linguistics>
%V 13
%N 1-2
%P 187-212
%O Lexical comparisons with Cham, Bahnar, Stieng, and Khasi

%A Cox,, Helen M.
%D 1960
%T <A preliminary guide to the study of the Yao language>
%C Chiengmai
%I Overseas Missionary Fellowship
%Z 106p.
%+ Revised ed. 1967

%A Coyaud,, Maurice
%D 1975
%T Review of Nishida, {\fr <Le tosu, langue de groupe lolo>}
%J <Bulletin de la Soci'et'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 70
%N 2
%P 430-1

%A Coyaud,, Maurice
%D 1978
%T {\fr Grammaire lolo: dialecte de xide}
%t Grammar of Lolo, dialect Xide
%J <Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area>
%V 4
%N 1
%P 75-7
%O R\'esum\'e of an article by Chen Shi-lin, <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen> 1964.4:334ff.

%A Coyaud,, Maurice
%D 1981
%T {\fr <Contes de Thailande>}
%t Stories of Thailand
%C Paris
%I Soci\'et\'e d'Etudes Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de France
%Z 154p.
%O Description of Thai, 13-34

%A Coyaud,, Maurice
%D 1981
%T {\fr Un texte Miao du Guizhou}
%t A Miao text from Guizhou
%J <Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Orientale>
%V 9
%P 73-82

%A Cramer,, Carol J.
%D 1970
%T <Bibliography on the Lisu>
%C Bangkok
%I Battelle Memorial Institute, Thailand Information Center
%Z 25p.

%A Crawfurd,, John
%D 1820
%T <History of the Indian Archipelago>
%C Edinburgh
%I Constable
%Z 3 vols.
%O Kentak vocabulary, 125-91 - SJS

%A Crawfurd,, John
%D 1828
%T <Journal of an embassy from the Governor-General of India to the courts of Siam and Cochin China; exhibiting a view of the actual state of those kingdoms...>
%C London
%I Henry Colburn
%Z vii, 598p., 15 plates, 2 maps
%O Contains comparative vocabulary of English, Lao, Thai, Mon, Khmer, Chong, Vietnamese, and Cham - SJS

%A Crawfurd,, John
%D 1852
%T <A grammar and dictionary of the Malay language, vol. 1: Dissertation and grammar>
%C London
%I Smith, Elder
%Z 84p.
%O Kentak vocabulary, clxxi-clxxii - SJS

%A Credner,, W.
%D 1935
%T {\germ Kulturgeographische Beobachtungen in der Landschaft um Tali (Y\"unnan) mit besonderer Ber\"ucksichtigung des Nan Tsao Problems}
%t Cultural geographical observations in the region around Tali (Y\"unnan) with special reference to the problem of Nan Tsao
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 27
%P 135-57
%O Vocabulary: TB: Hou-shan (Lolo), 3 vocabularies of Minchia; TK: Pu-yi, Thai, with map showing Tai areas

%A Cr\'emieux,, Maxime
%D 1899
%T {\fr <Notions d'annamite vulgaire>}
%t Ideas on common Annamite
%C Paris
%I J. Andre
%Z 240p.
%O Grammar

%A Crisfield,, Arthur G.
%D 1974
%T Lao final particles
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%B <Southeast Asian linguistic studies> 1
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.31
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 41-5

%A Crisfield,, Arthur G.
%D 1978
%T <Sound symbolism and the expressive words of Lao>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Hawaii
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 39.8:4916-A; University Microfilms 7903492

%A Critchfield,, Jean
%X see also Braine,, Jean Critchfield

%A Critchfield,, Jean
%D 1962
%T Car-Nicobarese phonology
%M Unpublished ms., Berkeley, CA
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 32(1966).4:393

%A Critchfield,, Jean
%D 1963
%T A binary comparison of the Car and Central dialects of Nicobarese
%M Unpublished ms., Berkeley, CA
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 32(1966).4:393

%A Critchfield,, Jean
%D 1963
%T Car Nicobarese vocabularies
%M Unpublished ms., University of Chicago

%A Critchfield,, Jean
%D 1963
%T Loanwords in Car-Nicobarese
%M Unpublished ms., Berkeley, CA
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 32(1966).4:393-4; includes some discussion of Burmese as a donor language

%A Critchfield,, Jean
%D 1964
%T Portuguese loanwords in Car Nicobarese
%M Paper read to the Western Branch of the American Oriental Society, Berkeley, CA

%A Critchfield,, Jean
%D 1964
%T Car Nicobarese morphology I: the substantive
%M Unpublished ms., Berkeley, CA
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 32(1966).4:394

%A Crooke,, W.
%D 1892
%T Vocabulary of the Korwa language
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>, 1st series
%V 61
%N 1
%P 125-8

%A Cross,, Edmund B.
%D 1866
%T Karens and their language
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 9
%P xi-xii

%A Cross,, Edmund B.
%D 1896
%T <A dictionary of the Sgaw Karen language>
%C Rangoon
%I Baptist Mission Press

%A Crowley,, Dale P.
%A Khambir Suvanat
%D 1966
%T <A sequential course in Thai>
%S <University of Hawaii Peace Corps training project>
%C Hilo, Hawaii
%I University of Hawaii

%A Csoma de K\"or\"os, Alexander (Csoma S\'andor, k\"or\"osi)
%D 1834
%T <Essay towards a dictionary, Tibetan and English>
%? prepared with the assistance of Band\'e Sang-Rgyas Phun-ts'oge
%C Calcutta

%A Csoma de K\"or\"os, Alexander (Csoma S\'andor, k\"or\"osi)
%D 1934
%T <A grammar of the Tibetan language in English>
%C Calcutta

%A Csoma de K\"or\"os, Alexander (Csoma S\'andor, k\"or\"osi)
%D n.d.
%T <Sanskrit--Tibetan--English vocabulary, being an edition and translation of the Mah\=avyutpatti>
%R Reviewed by Chavannes, <T'oung Pao>, series 2, 12(1911?):436

%A Cu \-Dinh Tu
%D 1974
%T {\viet \-D\uac \-di\^em \-dat cua ti\^eng ta qua cac ph\;u\;ong ti\^en ng\;u \^am}
%t Characteristics of expressive phonology in our language
%J <Ng^on-ngu>
%V 1974
%N 3
%P 56-60

%A Cuaz,, Marie Joseph, Bishop of Hermopolis
%D 1903
%T {\fr <Essai de dictionnaire fran\,cais--siamois>}
%t Essay at a French--Siamese dictionary
%C Bangkok
%I Imprimerie de la Mission Catholique
%Z 28, 4, 1012p.

%A Cuaz,, Marie Joseph, Bishop of Hermopolis
%D 1904
%T {\fr <Etude sur la langue laocienne; appendice: vocabulaire So>}
%t Study of the Laotian language; appendix: So vocabulary
%C Hong Kong

%A Cuaz,, Marie Joseph, Bishop of Hermopolis
%D 1904
%T {\fr <Lexique fran\,cais--laocienne>}
%t French--Laotian lexicon
%C Hongkong
%I Imprimerie de la Soci\'et\'e des Missions Etrang\`eres
%Z lxxvi, 490p.

%A Cuaz,, Marie Joseph, Bishop of Hermopolis
%D 1906
%T {\fr <Manuel de la conversation franco--laocienne>}
%t French--Loatian conversation manual
%C Hongkong
%I Imprimerie de Nazareth
%Z vi, 7-296p., table

%A Cubuat
%D 1976, 1977, 1979
%X see Watson,, Richard, Saundra Watson, and Cubuat

%A Cubuat
%A Watson,, Richard
%D 1976
%T <{\pacoh Bai ihoc cang Pac\uoh}: {\viet Bai hoc ti\^eng Pac\uoh} : {\eng Pacoh language lessons)}>
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics/Mainland Southeast Asia Branch
%Z x, 42p.

%A Cui Zhichao (Ts'ui Chi-ch'ao)
%X see Dai Qingxia and Cui Zhichao

%A Cuisinier,, Jeanne
%D 1951
%T {\fr <Pri\`eres accompagnant les rites agraires chez les Muong de Man Duc>}
%t ??
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>} 33
%C Hanoi

%A Culshaw,, Wesley J
%D 1939
%T Some notes on Bangaigan
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 15
%P 427-31
%O Listed in Hugoniot under Santali

%A Cummings,, Joseph
%D 1984
%T <Thailand phrasebook>
%C Berkeley, CA
%I Lonely Planet Publications
%Z 94p.

%A Cunningham,, Joseph Davey
%D 1844
%T Notes on Moorcroft's travels in Ladakh, and on Gerard's account of Kun\'awar
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 13
%P 172-253
%O Vocabulary, TB: Milchang (Kanauri), Spiti, Thebor, 225-8

%A Cunningham,, Joseph Davey
%D 1854
%T <Ladakh, physical, statistical, and historical, with notices of the surrounding countries>
%C London
%O Vocabulary, TB: Spiti, Thebor

%A Cushing,, Josiah Nelson
%D 1880
%T Grammatical sketch of the Kakhyen language
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> n.s.
%V 12
%P 395-416
%O Kachin

%A Cushing,, Josiah Nelson
%D 1887
%T <Grammar of the Shan language>
%e 2nd ed.
%C Rangoon
%I American Baptist Mission Press
%Z 4,118p.
%+ 1st ed., 1871

%A Cushing,, Josiah Nelson
%D 1906
%T <Elementary handbook of the Shan language>
%e 2nd ed.
%C Rangoon
%I American Baptist Mission Press
%Z 276p.
%+ 1st ed., 1880; 2nd ed. reprinted 1971, Farnborough: Gregg, 5, 272p.

%A Cushing,, Josiah Nelson
%D 1914
%T <A Shan and English dictionary>
%e 2nd ed.
%C Rangoon
%I American Baptist Mission Press
%+ 1st ed., 1881; 2nd ed. reprinted 1971, Farnborough: Gregg, 1, 15, 708p.

%A Cushman,, Richard D.
%D 1970
%T <Rebel haunts and lotus huts: towards an ethnohistory of the Kuangshe Yao>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Cornell University

%A Cust,, Robert Needham
%D 1878
%T <A sketch of the modern languages of the East Indies, accompanied by two language maps>
%C London
%I Tr\"ubner
%Z xii, 198p.
%O Chapter VI: Khasi family, 117-8; Tai family, 119-23 (reference to Thai, Lao, Shan, Ahom, Aiton, Khamti, Tai, Mow); chapter VIII: Mon-Annam family

%A Cust,, Robert Needham
%D 1884
%T Grammatical data and vocabulary of the language of the Korku: a Kolarian tribe in Central India
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> n.s.
%V 16
%P 164-79

%A C\;uu Long Giang
%A Toan Anh
%D 1974
%T {\viet Cao nguy\^en mi\^en th\;u\;ong}
%t Anthropology of minority tribes of Vietnam
%C Saigon
%Z 558p., illustrations, map


%% D (Huffman pp. 87-116), input by Seiichiro Keach Inaba, edited by David Stampe, April 1995

%A Dagyab,, L. S.
%D 1966
%T {\tib <??>}
%t Tibetan dictionary
%C Panjab
%I Imperial Printing Press
%Z 772p.

%A Dahal,, Ballabh Mani
%D 1971
%X see Caughley, Dahal, and Bandhu

%A Dahal,, Ballabh Mani
%D 1976
%T Linguistic perspectives and priorities in Nepal
%E Sharma,, P. R.
%E Friedman,, L. C.
%B <Seminar papers in linguistics>
%C Kirtipur
%I Institute of Nepal and Asian Studies, Tribhuvan University
%P 153-67

%A Dahal,, D. R.
%D 1975
%T Kiranti reviewed in the Nepali context
%J <Panchayat Darpan> (Jawalakhel, Nepal)
%V 5
%N 15
%P 89-96

%A Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia)
%D 1964
%X see Hu Tan and Dai Qingxia

%A Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia)
%D 1979
%T {\ch Wo guo zang mian zu song jin yuan yin lai yuan chu tan}
%t Etymology of the Tibeto-Burman lax and tense vowels
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 1979
%N 1
%P 31ff

%A Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia)
%D 1980
%X see Zhou Yaowen and Dai Qingxia

%A Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia)
%D 1981
%T {\ch ??}
%t On the morphology of the causative category in the Zaiwa language
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1981
%N 4
%P 36-41
%O With romanized Zaiwa (= Jinghpaw) words

%A Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia)
%D 1982
%X see Ma Hueliang and Dair Qingxia

%A Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia)
%D 1984
%T {\ch ??}
%t The origin of the weakened syllables of some Tibeto-Burman languages
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1984
%N 2
%P 39-44
%O With roman examples

%A Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia)
%D nda.
%T {\ch T'ang-t'an sung-chin y\"ua-an-yin}
%t ??
%J <Hsiao-shu ming-ts'u y\"u-yun lun-chi>
%V 2
%P 2:35-48
%O On normal [lax] vowels and laryngealized [tense] vowels in Hani, Kachin, Yi, and Wa - BSTL

%A Dai Qingxia (Tai Ch'ing-hsia)
%A Cui Zhichao
%D 1983
%T {\ch ??}
%t A brief description of the Achang language
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1983
%N 3
%P 69-80
%O With romanized Achang citations

%A \-Dai Xu\^an Ninh
%D 1969
%T {\viet M\^ot s\^o v\^an \-d\^e v\^e cu phap ti\^eng Vi\^et hi\^en \-dai}
%t Some problems in modern Vietnamese syntax
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1969
%N 2
%P 57-61

%A \-Dai Xu\^an Ninh
%D 1973
%T {\viet Co n\^en xem c\^au \-d\;on co trang t\;u la m\^ot ki\^eu c\^au ghep kh\^ong?}
%t Should a simple sentence containing an adverb be considered a type of compound sentence?
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1973
%N 3
%P 49-54

%A \-Dai Xu\^an Ninh
%D 1974
%T {\viet V\^on t\;u t\^oi thi\^eu}
%t Basic (Vietnamese) vocabulary
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1974
%N 4
%P 59063

%A \-Dai Xu\^an Ninh
%D 1976
%T {\viet Ti\^en t\;oi m\^ot quy\^en t\;u \-di\^en ti\^eng Vi\^et theo h\^e th\^ong khai ni\^em}
%t Towards a systematic and ideological Vietnamese dictionary
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1976
%N 4
%P 26-33

%A Dainamco
%D 1982
%T <Cambodian--English, English--Cambodian dictionary>
%C Ft. Lewis, WA
%I Dainamco
%Z 358p.
%O A xerox copy of Dem Sos, Lim Hak Kheang, and Madeline E. Ehrman 1975, but with the Khmer title (and the `z' section of the English--Khmer) copied from Huffman and Proum 1978

%A Dajao Jaken (Th\;oi)
%A Thomas,, David
%D 1974
%T {\chrau <Mins\ua trong Chrau>}: {\viet <Bai hoc ti\^eng Chrau>}: {\eng <Chrau conversation lessons>}
%C Saigon
%I Department of Education
%Z x, 30p.

%A Dajao,, Ken
%X see Thomas,, D., Thomas,, D., Th\^o, Nhu, and Dajao

%A Dala,, H.
%D 1942
%T {\?? <India Pren>}
%t Geography of India
%C Churachandpur, Manipur
%O Mru

%A Dala,, H.
%A Ngarua,, Menkrawi
%D 1939
%T {\mru <Rik chhang mi bowih>}
%t A Mru primer
%C Churachandpur

%A Dala,, H.
%A Ngarua,, Menkrawi
%D 1940
%T {\mru <Satang iung Johan rui ami>}
%t Gospel according to St. John
%C Churachandpur

%A Dala,, H.
%A Ngarua,, Menkrawi
%D 1941
%T {\mru <Maruchah Kristian meng bawih>}
%t Christian songs
%C Chruachandpur
%O In all the four above, the Lushei alphabet was adjusted to Mru by Dala, a Lushei who lived for ten years among the Mru, and by Menkraw, a Mru who knew Lushei - BSTL ??COPY

%A Dalgado,, Sebasti\~ao Rodolfo
%D 1913
%T {\ptg <Influencia do vocabul\'ario portugu\^es em l\'inguas asi\'aticas (abrangendo c\^erca de cinquenta idiomas)>}
%t ?
%C Coimbra
%I Imprensa da Universidade
%Z xcii, 253p., map
%O Arranged under Portuguese words; Index to Cambodian words, 198; to Khasi words, 227; to Nicobarese words, 235; to Thai words, 237

%A Dalgado,, Sebasti\~ao Rodolfo
%D 1936
%T <Portuguese vocables in Asiatic languages...>, translated into English with notes, additions and comments by Anthony Xavier Soares
%C Baroda
%I Oriental Institute
%Z cxxvi, 520p.
%O Index to Khmer words, 437; to Khasi words, 439; Nicobarese, 493; Thai 495-6

%A Dalton,, Edward Tuite
%D 1866
%T <Brief vocabulary of the Moonda and cognate languages of the Kolarian type>
%C Calcutta
%O Munda

%A Dalton,, Edward Tuite
%D 1872
%T <Descriptive ethnology of Bengal>
%C Calcutta
%I Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing
%Z vi, 340p., 34 plates, tables
%O Vocab, AA: Mon, Khase, 235-41; TB: Abor, Angami, Arung, Biate, Bodo (Mech), Burmese, Chutiya, Dhimal, Dophla (Dafla), Empeo, Garo, Hruso, Kachin, Karenni, Khami, Khari, kiranti, Koch, Konch, Kumi (N. Khami), Lepcha, Limbu, Meithei, Mech, Mikir, Miri, Mithan, Mru, Murmi, Red Karen, Sho, Tableng, Tengima, Thado, Tibetan, White Karen, 71-121; Tk: Ahom, Khamti, Lao, Thai

%A Dalton,, Edward Tuite
%D 1971
%T A list of a few Tai words
%E Gogoi,, Lila
%B <The Tai Khamtis>
%C Chawkham, NEFA
%P 187-9
%+ Reprint from Dalton 1872

%A Dam Bo (i.e. Dournes,, Jacques)
%D 1950
%T {\fr <Les populations montagnardes du Sud-Indochinois (P\'emsiens)>
%t The Montagnard populations of South-Indochina (P\'emsiens)
%J <France-Asie>, 5e ann\'ee
%V 5 {\fr<Num\'ero sp\'ecial consacr\'e aux populations montagnardes du Sud-Indochinois>}
%v Special number devoted to Montagnard populations of South Indo-China
%P 49-50
%O {\fr. Chap. II: Les tribus, leurs dialectes et leurs visages. La parole une et multiple}
%o ?
%O Author assumes all dialects under consideration to be `indon\'esienner', linguistic division between Raglai-Noang-Jarai-Rad\'e and Biat-Stieng-Bahnar plus Ma-Sr\^e - SJS

%A \-Dam Trung Phap
%D 1980
%T <A contrastive approach for teaching English as a second language to Indochinese students>
%C San Antonio, Texas
%I Intercultural Development Research Association

%A Damais,, L. C.
%D 1955
%T {\fr Les \'ecritures d'origine indienne en Indon\'esie et dans le Sudest Asiatique continental}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 30
%N 4
%P 365-82
%O Mon and Tai scripts

%A Damant,, Gaborn Henry
%D 1875
%T Notes on Manipuri grammar
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 44
%P 173-81
%O Meithei

%A Damant,, Gaborn Henry
%D 1875
%T Specimen of the Manipuri alphabet
%J <Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 1875
%P 17
%O Meithei

%A Damant,, Gaborn Henry
%D 1877
%T Note on the old Manipuri character
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 46
%P 36-8, 2 plates

%A Damant,, Gaborn Henry
%D 1880
%T Notes on the locality and population of the tribes dwelling between the Brahmaputra and Ningthi rivers
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 12
%P 228-58
%O Vocab, TB: Anal, Andro, Angami, Dimasa (Hill Kachari), Empeo, Garo, Hallam, Kabui, Koch, Kwoireng, Lotha, Lushei, Meithei, Maram, Maring, Mech, Mikir, Muthun, Namsang, Phadang, Maitrai, Rabha, Rengama, Sema, Tableng, Thado, 254-8 - BSTS; TK: Ahom, Aiton, Khamti, Shan, 228-58 - SJS

%A Damm,, Hans
%D 1969
%T Review of Milner and Henderson, eds., <Indo-Pacific linguistic studies>
%J <Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenl\"andischen Gesellschaft>
%V 119
%N 1
%P 224-5

%A Damrak,, Wilaiwan
%X see Wilaiwan Damrak

%A Damrong Mapawongse
%D 1979
%T <A phonological description of the Nakhon Thai dialect>
%U M.A. thesis, ILCRD, Mahidol University

%A Damrong Rajanubhap
%D 1935
%T Some loan words in Siamese
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 28
%P 188-93
%O Thai

%A Damrong Rajanubhap
%D 1940
%T {\thai Winitchain\uam}
%t On the origin of Meklong and Jetavan
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 32
%P 1-15

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1974, 1976
%X see Lindell and Damrong

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1976
%X see Lindell, Swahn, and Damrong

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1976-79
%X see Lindell and Damrong

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1977
%T {\khmu <Loem ton phasa kammu>}
%t Kammu primer
%C Lund
%+ 2nd revised ed. 1981, published by Kammu Association: Paris
%O Khmu

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1977
%X see Lindell, Swahn, and Damrong

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1978, 1980
%X see Lindell, Svantesson, and Damrong

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1980
%X see Lindell, Swahn, and Damrong

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1981
%X see Lindell, Svantesson, and Damrong

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1981
%X see Lindell, Svantesson, Damrong, and Lundstrom

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D 1984
%X see Lindell, Swahn, and Damrong

%A Damrong Tayanian
%D forthcoming
%X see Lindell, Svantesson, and Damrong

%A Dan Ba Jia Cuo
%D 1979
%T {\ch An mu duo zang yu chu tan (zang wen)}
%t Exploration of Anmuduo Tibetan
%J <Qinghai xueyuan xuebao>
%V 1979
%N 3-4
%P 118ff
%O Amdo

%A Danda,, Dipali G.
%D 1978
%T <Among the Dimasa of Assam: an ethnographic study>
%C New Delhi
%Z 192p.

%A Dandaron,, B. D.
%X see Semichov, Parfionovich, and Dandaron

%A \-Dang Ch\^an Li\^eu
%A Bui Y
%D 1976
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en Anh--Vi\^et>}
%t English--Vietnamese dictionary
%C Hanoi
%I Giao-duc
%Z 1022p.
%R Reviewed by Nguy\^en \-Dinh Hoa, <Language> 55(1979).2:490-1

%A \-Dang N\ua Qua
%X see Thi\^en and \-Dang

%A \-Dang Nghi\^em Van
%D 1968
%X see La and \-Dang

%A \-Dang Nghi\^em Van
%D 1971
%T {\viet B\;u\;oc \-d\^au tim hi\^eu tinh hinh s\;u dung nhi\^eu ti\^eng noi \;o mi\^en B\uac n\;u\;oc ta}
%t First steps in understanding the multilingual situation in our northern highlands
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1971
%N 3
%P 35-42

%A \-Dang Nghi\^em Van
%D 1972
%T An outline of the Thai in Vietnam
%J <Vietnamese Studies>
%V 32
%P 143-99
%O Thai = Tai; ethnolinguistic map of N. Vietnam following p. 199

%A \-Dang Nghi\^em Van
%D 1973
%T The Khmu in Vietnam
%J <Vietnamese Studies>
%V 36
%P 62-40 {\? sic, non-ascending page sequence in Huffman}
%O Ethnographic; 18,000 Khmuin North Vietnam, called variously by their neighborgoods: Xa Cau, Kha Klau, Mang, Tenh, Pu Thenh, Tay Hay, Mun Xen, etc.

%A \-Dang Nghi\^em Van
%D 1974
%T {\viet Ban v\^e m\^ot vai t\^oc danh goi theo vi tri trong xa h\^oi}
%t Discussion of some family names based on social position
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1974
%N 1
%P 16-21

%A \-Dang Nghi\^em Van
%A C\^am Trong
%A Kha V\uan Ti\^en
%A Tong Kim \^An
%D 1977
%T {\viet <T\;u li\^eu v\^e lich s\;u va xa h\^oi d\^an t\^oc Thai>}
%t Documents on the history and society of the Tai
%C Hanoi
%I Khao hoc xa hoi
%Z 493p.
%O On the Black Tai
%R Reviewed by Nguy\^en Xu\^an Linh, <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien> 9(1978).1-2:285-7

%A \-Dang Nghi\^em Van
%A Nguy\^en Truc Binh
%A Nguy\^en V\uan Huy
%A Thanh Thi\^en
%D 1972
%T {\viet <Nh\;ung nhom d\^an t\^oc thu\^oc ng\;u h\^e Nam A \;o t\^ay b\uac Vi\^et Nam>}
%t Austroasiatic ethnic groups in northwestern Vietnam
%C Hanoi
%I Nha Xuat Ban Khao Hoc Xa hoi
%Z 425p.
%O Vocab, AA: Kh\'ang, M\~ang, Xinh Mul

%A Dang Qu
%D 1954
%T {\ch <Zang zi yung fa ju li (Zang wen)>}
%t Examples of lexical usage in Tibetan
%C ?
%I Ethnic Publishing House

%A \-Dang Thai Mai
%D 1960
%T The place of Vietnamese language in the building of a new culture of the Vietnamese people
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 43
%P 33-6

%A \-Dang Thai Mai
%D 1972
%T {\viet L\^oi noi lai trong v\uan ch\;u\;ong}
%t Techniques of word play (reversal) in literature
%J <V\uan nhg\^e>
%V 1972
%P 441-7

%A \-D\uang Thanh Ph\;u\;ong
%D 1980
%T {\fr Quelques donn\'ees du bilinguisme tay nung-vietnamien dans la province du Cao Lang}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 11
%P 1-4
%? (=Cheminements: \'ecrits offerts \`a Georges Condominas):317-26. (Translated from the Vietnamese by Nguy\^en Xu\^an Linh)

%A \-D\uang Th\^e Binh
%A et al.
%D 1982
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en anh--vi\^et hi\^en \-dai>}
%t Modern English--Vietnamese dictionary
%C Hongkong
%I Lee Man Publishing
%Z 1959p.

%A \-D\uang Thi Lanh
%D 1980
%T {\rus <Prosodicheskaia organizatsilia osnovnykh kommunikativnykh tipovvyskazyvanii v'etnamskogo iazyke (Eksperim.-fonet. issled.)>}
%t The prosodic organization of the basic communicative types of expressions in Vietnamese: experimental phonetic research
%U Kandidat nauk in Philological Sciences, Moskovkii gosudarstvennyi universitet imeni M. V. Lomonosova, Filologischeskii fakul'tet

%A \-D\uang V\uan Ng\;u
%D 1961
%T {\viet Tham lu\^an v\^e cai ti\^en ch\;u qu\^oc ng\;u}
%t Discussing the improvement of the national script
%J <V\uan \-d\^e cai ti\^en ch\`u qu^oc ng\;u>
%V 1961
%P 269-76

%A Dani,, Ahmad Hassan
%D 1960
%T Review of Bessaignet, <Tribesmen of the Chittagong Hills>
%B <Social Research in East Pakistan>
%S <Asiatic Society of Pakistan>
%u publication no. 5
%C Dacca
%I Asiatic Society of Pakistan
%P 372-3

%A Dantsuji,, Masatake
%D 1982
%T An acoustic study on glottalized vowels in the Yi (Lolo) language - a preliminary report
%J <Studia Phonologica>
%V 16
%P 1-11

%A Danmimathana,, Nantana
%X see Nantana Danvivathana

%A Dao Bu
%D 1980
%T {\ch Shuo shuo zang wen}
%t Discussion on Tibetan
%J <Minzu tauanjie>
%V 1980
%N 6
%P 46ff

%A \-Dao \-D\uang Vy
%D 1957
%T {\viet <Phap--Vi\^et t\;u-\-di\^en, loai hian-y\^eu>}
%t Concise French--Vietnamese dictionary
%C Saigon
%e 2nd ed.
%Z 1280p.

%A \-Dao \-D\uang Vy
%D 1957
%T {\viet <Vi\^et--Phap t\^an t\;u-\-di\^en>}
%t New Vietnamese--French dictionary
%C Saigon
%Z 1458p.

%A \-Dao \-D\uang Vy
%D 1977
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en Phap--Vi\^et va Vi\^et--Phap>}
%t French--Vietnamese and Vietnamese--French dictionary
%C Gennevilliers, France
%I Que Me Publishing House

%A \-Dao \-D\uang Vy
%A et al.
%D 1960-61
%T {\viet <Vi\^et-Nam bach-khoa t\;u-\-di\^en co b\^o-chu ch\;u Han, Phap va Anh>}
%t Vietnamese encyclopedic dictionary with annotations in Chinese, French, and English
%C Saigon
%Z 3 vols.

%A \-Dao Duy Anh
%D 1936
%T {\viet <Phap--Viet t\;u-\-di\^en>}
%t French--Vietnamese dictionary
%C Paris
%I Minh-T\^an
%Z 1958p.
%O Sino-Vietnamese words transcribed in Chinese

%A \-Dao Duy Anh
%D 1951
%T {\viet <Gian-y\^en Han--Vi\^et t\;u-\-di\^en>}
%t Concise Sino-Vietnamese dictionary
%e revised and enlarged by Han Man T\;u
%C Paris
%I Minh-T\^an
%Z 2 vols.

%A \-Dao Duy Anh
%D 1970
%T {\viet V\^e cach phe\^in-\^am va phe\^in-dich `Qu\^oc-\^am' va `\'Uc-trai thi-t\^ap'}
%t On the transcription and translation of the `Qu\^oc-\^am thi-t\^ap' and `Uc-trai thi-t\^ap'
%J <Tac-ph\^am m\;oi>
%V 6
%P 99-104

%A \-Dao Duy Anh
%D 1970
%T {\viet V\^e m\^ot s\^o t\;u c\^o trong truy\^en Ki\^eu}
%t On some archaic words in the Tale of Ki\^eu
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1970
%N 3
%P 63-5

%A \-Dao Duy Anh
%D 1974
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en truy\^en Ki\^eu>}
%t A dictionary of the Tale of Ki\^eu
%C Hanoi
%I Nha xuat ban Khoa hoc Xa hoi
%Z 558p.

%A \-Dao Duy Anh
%D 1975
%T {\viet <Ch\;u n\^om: ngu\^on g\^oc, c\^au tao, di\^en bi\^en>}
%t The nom characters: Their origin, structure, and development
%C Hanoi
%I Khoa hoc xa hoi
%Z 223p.

%A Dao Shixun
%D 1956
%T {\ch Daile yu qing kuang jie shao}
%t Introduction to Daile
%J <Chung-kuo Y\"u-wen>
%V 1956
%N 7
%P 44ff
%O Tai L\"u ?

%A Dao Shixun
%D 1980
%T {\ch Xishuangbanna Dai wen}
%t The Tai language of Sipsongpanna
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1980
%N 1
%P 70ff
%O Tai L\"u ?

%A Dao Shixun
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t The influence of the Pali language upon the Dai language
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1982
%N 6
%P 1-16

%A \-Dao Than
%D 1962
%T {\viet M\^ay v\^an \-d\^e ng\^on ng\;u hi\^en nay}
%t Some problems of present-day Vietnamese
%J <Nghi\^en c\;u V\ua-hoc>
%V 1962
%N 5
%P 60-73

%A \-Dao Than
%D 1964
%T {\viet \-Di t\;oi th\^ong nh\^at m\^ot s\^o qui t\uac dung d\^au ng\uat c\^au}
%t Toward a standardization of the use of punctuation marks
%J <T\^ap chi v\uan hoc>
%V 1966
%N 1
%P 70-80
%O Vietnamese

%A \-Dao Than
%D 1966
%T {\viet \-Di tim m\^ot vai \-d\uac \-di\^em cua ng\^o ng\;u truy\^en Ki\^eu}
%t Looking at some characteristics of the language of the Tale of Kieu
%J <T\^ap chi v\uan hoc>
%V 1966
%N 1
%P 67-75

%A \-Dao Than
%D 1970
%T {\viet Nh\;ung \-d\uac \-di\^em cua t\;u lay ti\^eng Vi\^et}
%t The characteristics of repetitive words in Vietnamese
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1970
%N 1
%P 54-64

%A \-Dao Thi H\;oi
%D 1965
%T <Representation of time and time relationships in English and Vietnamese>
%U Ed.D. dissertation, Columbia University
%Z 205p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 27.4:1046-A; University Microfilms 66-2655

%A \-Dao Thi H\;oi
%A Nguy\^en Ngoc Bich
%D 1982
%T <Practical Vietnamese for educators>
%S <Teacher Corps Program>
%u 78
%C Arlington, VA
%I Teacher Corps Program

%A \-Dao Trong T\;u
%D 1956
%T {\viet M\^ot vai y ki\^en v\^e phi\^en \^am ti\^eng n\;u\;oc ngoai}
%t Some ideas on the transcription of foreign languages
%J <T\^o qu\^oc>
%V 1956
%N 39
%P 25

%A \-Dao Trong T\;u
%D 1956
%T {\viet V\^e v\^an \-d\^e phi\^en \^am}
%t The problem of phonetic transcription
%J <To quoc>
%V 1956
%N 42
%P 26

%A \-Dao V\uan T\^ap
%D 1949
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en Phap--Vi\^et ph\^o-th\^ong>}
%t Popular French--Vietnamese dictionary
%C Saigon
%I Vinh-bao
%Z 1242p.
%+ Reprinted 1966

%A \-Dao V\uan T\^ap
%D 1951
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en Phap--Vi\^et y\^eu-l\;u\;oc>}
%t Basic French--Vietnamese dictionary
%C Saigon
%I Vinh-bao
%Z 354p.

%A \-Dao V\uan T\^ap
%D 1953
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en Han--Vi\^et y\^eu-l\;u\;oc>}
%t Basic Chinese--Vietnamese dictionary
%C Saigon
%I Vinh-bao
%Z 467p.

%A Dao Xiaozhong
%X see Tao Hsiao-chung

%A Dao Youliang
%X see Tac Yu-liang

%A Daoratanahong,, Lakana
%X see Lakana Daoratanahong

%A Darawong,, Saowarat
%X see Saowarat Darawong

%E Dardjowidjojo,, Soenjono
%D 1973
%T <Cultural-linguistic aspects in Asian language teaching>: <Proceedings of the First Annual Meeting of the American Council of Teachers of Uncommonly-Taught Asian Languages>
%S <Working Papers in South-east Asian Studies>
%u 1
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Southeast Asia Program
%Z 96p.
%O S

%A Darjeeling
%% ??
%D 1874
%T <Lepcha primer in Lepcha characters>
%C Darjeeling

%A Darjeeling
%% ??
%D 1893
%T {\?? <R\'ong-sa v\'am. L\=apch\=a-g\=ita-sa\:mgraha>}
%t ?
%C Darjeeling
%O Lepcha

%A Darnault,, Robert
%D 1939
%T {\fr <Cours de dialecte th\^o: comprenant des \'el\'ements de grammaire, un vocabulaire fran\,cais-th\^o, une conversation usuelle>}
%t ?
%C ?
%I Imprimerie du Nord

%A Das,, Amal Kumar
%D 1958
%T Language and dialects of the tribals of West Bengal
%J <Vanya-jati> (Delhi)
%V 8
%N 3
%P 130-6
%O Reference to Santali

%A Das,, A. R.
%D 1977
%T <A study on the Nicobarese language>
%C Calcutta
%I Anthropological Survey of India
%Z 86p.

%A Das,, Bhuban Mohan
%D 1955
%T Rabha kinship terms
%J <Man in India>
%V 35
%P 52-6

%A Das,, Bhuban Mohan
%D 1960
%T Semantic variations among the Hill and Plains Garo of Assam
%J <Man in India>
%V 40
%P 128-48

%A Das,, B. P.
%X see Zide,, Norman H., and Das,, B. P.

%A Das,, Rajat Kanti
%D 1981
%T An analysis of the Maring consanguineal kin groups
%J <Journal of the Indian Anthropological Society>
%V 16
%N 2
%P 107-19

%A Das,, Rakal
%D 1871
%T An introduction to the Mundari language
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 40
%P 46-66

%A Das,, Sarat Chandra
%D 1888
%T The sacred and ornamental characters of Tibet
%J <Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 57
%P 41-8

%A Das,, Sarat Chandra
%D 1902
%T <A Tibetan--English dictionary with Sanskit synonyms>
%e revised and edited by Graham Sandberg and A. William Heyde
%C Alipore
%I West Bengal Government press
%Z 1353p.
%+ Reprinted 1951, 1960, 1970, Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass; reprinted 1970, Mystic, CT: Lawrence Verry, 1, 384p.
%R Reviewed by W. Simon, <Transactions of the Philological Society> (1964):85-107

%A Das,, Sarat Chandra
%D 1915
%T <An introduction to the grammar of the Tibetan language, with the texts of Situ sum-tag, Dag-je salwai me-long, and Situi shal lung>
%C Darjeeling
%Z 325p.
%+ Reprinted 1972, Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass

%A Das,, Sarat Chandra
%D 1975
%T <Tibetan-Sanskrit dictionary>
%e 3rd ed.
%C Delhi
%I Motilal Banarsidass
%+ 4th ed., 1982, Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass

%A Das,, Tarakchandra
%D 1945
%T <The Purums...>
%C Calcutta
%O Terms of relationship, 147-52; numerals, 264; words and very short texts, passim - BSTL

%A Das Gupta,, Dipankar
%D 1966
%T A note on linguistic changes in Bhumij and Juang
%J <Bulletin of the Philological Society of Calcutta>
%V 6
%P 91-8

%A Das Gupta,, Dipankar
%D 1978
%T <Linguistic studies in Juang, Kharia Thar, Lodha, Mal-Pahariya, Ghatoali, Pahariya>
%C Calcutta
%I Anthropological Survey of India, Government of India
%Z 255p.
%O AA:Juang, Kharia; TB: Ghatoali, Lotha, Mal, Pahari

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1963
%T <An introduction to the Gallong language>
%C Shillong
%I Philology Section, Research Department, NEFA
%O Galo

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1968
%T <An introduction to Central Monpa>
%C Shillong
%I Philology Section, Research Department, NEFA

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1968
%T <Galo language guide>
%C Shillong
%I North-East Frontier Agency, Arunachal Pradesh
%Z 68p.

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1969
%T <Dafla language guide>
%C Shillong
%I North-East Frontier Agency, Arunachal Pradesh
%Z 114p.

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1971
%T <An introduction to the Nocte language>
%C Shillong
%I Philology Section, Research Department, NEFA

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1976
%T Agglutination in Adi languages of Arunachal
%J <Journal of the Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh>
%V 2
%N 4
%P 18-21

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1977
%T <A phrase book in Miju>
%C Shillong
%I Director of Information and Public Relations, Arunachal Pradesh
%Z 103p.

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1977
%T Patterns of interrelationship among the languages of Arunachal (Singpho, Nocte, Gallong, Miju, and Monpa): toward a more precise classification
%J <Journal of the Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh>
%V 3
%N 2
%P 13-25

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1977
%T A few features in some of the languages of Arunachal Pradesh
%J <Journal of the Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh>
%V 3
%N 3
%P 31-5

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1977
%T A few aspects of the Minyong language
%J <Journal of the Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh>
%V 3
%N 4
%P 15-22

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1977
%T The Tagins and their language
%J <Journal of the Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh>
%V 3
%N 1
%P 6-11

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1978
%T Language in Adi culture
%J <Journal of the Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh>
%V 4
%N 1
%P 36-41

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1978
%T A note on the Tangsa language
%J <Journal of the Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh>
%V 4
%N 2
%P 6-16

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1979
%T A note on the Wancho language of Arunachal Pradesh
%J <Journal of the Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 25-37

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1979
%T <A phrasebook in Singpho>
%C Shillong
%I Director of Information and Public Relations on behalf of the Government of Arunachal Pradesh
%Z 95p.
%O Jinghpaw

%A Das Gupta,, Kamalesh
%D 1980
%T Grammatical categories of the Idu language
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 13 (University of Virginia, Charlottesville)
%O Read by title only

%A Dash,, J.
%D 1980
%T A peep into the Juang kinship system
%J <Orissa Historical Research Journal> (Bhubaneswar)
%V 24-26
%P 113-22

%A Dass\'e,, Martial
%D 1974
%T {\fr <Le probl\'eme des minorit\'es ethniques in Asie du sud-est continentale>}
%t ?
%U Doctorat d'Etat, Montpellier I
%Z 360p.

%A Datta,, Parul
%D 1978
%T <The Noctes>
%C New Delhi
%Z 317p.

%A D'Attaides,, P.
%D 1902
%T <Short lessons in colloquial English and Burmese>
%C Bassein
%Z 67p.

%A Daudin,, P.
%D 1937
%T {\fr Sigillographie sino-annamite}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 12
%N 1
%P i-x, 1-322

%A Dauff\'es,, A. E.
%D 1906
%T {\fr Notes ethnographiques sur les Kos}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 6
%P 327-34
%O Brief vocabulary of Akha of Muong-sing - BSTL

%A Dauphin,, Antoine
%D 1975
%T {\fr <Lexique de terminologie linguistique, vietnamien--fran\,cais (avec introduction et commentaires)>}
%t ?
%U Doctorat de 3e cycle en linguistique, Paris V (Ren\'e Descartes)
%Z 228p.
%O A copy is available at the Biblioth\'eque de la Sorbonne, no. I 3146-4

%A Dauphin,, Antoine
%D 1976
%T {\fr <Cours de vietnamien, li\'ere ann\'ee>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Langues de l'Asie>}
%u 1
%C Paris
%I Asiath\'eque
%Z 153p.
%R Reviewed by Nhuy\^en Tr\^an Hu\^an, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 66(1979):316-19

%A Dauphin,, Antoine
%A Dauphin,, Ha
%D 1977
%T {\fr <Cours de vietnamiean, 2\'eme ann\'ee>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Langues de l'Asie>}
%u 2
%C Paris
%I Asiath\'eque
%Z 135p.
%R Reviewed by Nguy\^en Tr\^an Hu\^an, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 66(1979):316-19

%A Dauphin,, Ha
%X see Dauphin,, Antoine, and Dauphin,, Ha

%A Davenport,, Mrs.
%D 1883
%T <A collection of words and phrases in English and Siamese for schools and beginners>
%? prepared by Mrs. Davenport, revised by N. A. McDonald; re-revised and rearranged with additions by Rev. S. G. Mcfarland
%C Bangkok
%I Bradley's Press
%Z 152p.

%A Davias-Baudrit,, J.
%D 1966
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire rhad\'e--fran\,cais>}
%t Rhad\'e--French dictionary
%C Banmethuot, Vietnam
%I Mission Catholique
%Z mimeo., 514p.
%O Rad\'e

%A Davias-Baudrit,, J.
%D 1969
%T {\fr <Le\,cons de Rhad\'e>}
%t ?
%C Dalat, Vietnam
%I Centre Montangard de Cam Ly
%Z 99p.
%+ Summer Institute of Linguistics/Manila
%O Rad\'e

%A Davidson,, F. A. L.
%D 1889
%T <Anglicized colloquial Burmese...>
%C London

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1975
%T A new version of the Chinese--Vietnamese vocabulary of the Ming Dynasty - I
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 38
%N 2
%P 296-315

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1975
%T A new version of the Chinese--Vietnamese vocabulary of the Ming Dynasty - II
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 38
%N 3
%P 586-608

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1977
%T Review of Nguy\^en Phu Phong, {\fr <Le syntagme verbal en vietnamien>}
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 40
%N 1
%P 226

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1978
%T Review of Jenner, et al., ed., <Austroasiatic studies>
%J <Journal of Southeast Asian Studies>
%V 9
%N 1
%P 141-3

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1980
%T Review of Jenner, ed., <Mon-Khmer studies VI>
%J <Journal of Southeast Asian Studies>
%V 11
%N 2
%P 408-10

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1981
%T Review of Boscher, {\germ <W\"orterbuch Vietnamesisch--Deutsch>}
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 44
%N 1
%P 207-9

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1982
%T Review of DeFrancis, <Colonialism and language policy in Vietnam>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 45
%N 1
%P 213-14

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1982
%T Review of Dell, {\fr <La langue bai>}
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 45
%N 3
%P 615-16

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1982
%T Review of Po Dharma, {\fr <Compl\'ement au catalogue des manuscrits \vcam>}
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 45
%N 3
%P 626-7

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1982
%T Review of Watson,, Richard, Watson, and Bubuat, <Pacoh dictionary>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 45
%N 1
%P 214-15

%A Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1987
%T <Lu Su Thai: essays in honour of E. H. S. Simmonds>
%S <Collected papers in Oriental and African studies>
%C London
%I School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
%Z x, 190p.
%O Thai
%# U. Hawaii ASIA PL4158.L35 1987

%E Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1989
%T <South-East Asian linguistics: essays in honour of Eug\'enie J. A. Henderson>
%S <Collected papers in Oriental and African studies>
%C London
%I School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
%Z xi, 235p.

%E Davidson,, Jeremy H. C. S.
%D 1991
%T <Austroasiatic languages: essays in honour of H. L. Shorto>
%S <Collected papers in Oriental and African studies>
%C London
%I School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
%Z viii, 249 p., ill.
%# U. Hawaii ASIA PL4281.A97 1991

%A Davies,, C. H.
%D 1914
%T A common Burmese cipher
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 4
%P 139-44

%A Davies,, Henry Rudolph
%D 1894
%T <Diary of the expedition with the Chinese deputies to find the Huchi, Tienma, and Hanlung gates>
%C Rangoon
%I Superintendent, Government Printing
%Z 3, 28, 2, 15p.
%O Contains Khmu--Palaung--English vocabulary - SJS

%A Davies,, Henry Rudolph
%D 1909
%T <Yun-nan: the link between India and the Yangtze>
%C Cambridge
%I University Press
%Z xii, 431p., 73 plates, map
%O Vocab, AA: Khmer, K'amu (Khmu), La, Mon, Plalaung, P'u-man (Phuman), and Wa in pocket at back; TB: Achang, Burmese, Kachin, Lahu, Lashi (Letsi), Lisu, Lolo, Mahei, Maru, Menghwa, Minkia (Minchia), Megyaw (Phun), Phru-mi, Szi (Tsaiwa), Tibetan (Tseku), Woni, vol. 2; MY; classifies MY as AA, 341

%A Davies,, Somchit
%X see also Somchit Piyatham

%A Davies,, Somchit
%D 1972
%T Some notes on final stops in Phuket dialect
%J <W\=aras\=an manutsas\=at>
%V 3
%N 1
%P 1-7
%O Tai

%A Davies,, Somchit
%D 1979
%T A comparative study of Yong and standard Thai
%E Thongkum,, Theraphan L.
%E Panupong,, Vichin
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%E Tingsabadh,, M. R. Kalaya
%B <Studies in Tai and Mon-Khmer phonetics and phonology in honour of Eug\'enie J. A. Henderson>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 26-48

%A Davis,, John J.
%D 1973
%T Note on Nyaheun grammar
%E Thomas,, David D.
%E Nguy\^en \-Dinh Hoa
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, IV
%S <Center for Vietnamese Studies, Language series>
%u 4
%C Carbondale, Illinois
%I Center for Vietnamese Studies
%P 69-75

%A Davis,, John J.
%D 1980
%T Nyaheun medicine and some problems posed to western medical practice
%E Gregerson,, Marilyn
%E Thomas,, Dorothy
%B <Notes from Indochina on ethnic minority cultures>
%S <Summer Institute of Linguistics Museum of Anthropology>
%u publication no. 6
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%P 107-12

%A Davis,, Richard B.
%D 1970
%T <A Northern Thai reader>
%C Bangkok
%I The Siam Society
%Z 91p.
%R Reviewed by Gething, <Journal of Oriental Studies> 12(1974):131-2
%R Reviewed by Purnell, <Journal of the Siam Society> 59(1971).2:245-8

%A Davis,, Richard B.
%D 1984
%T <Muang metaphysics: a study of Northern Thai myth and ritual>
%C Bangkok
%I Pandora
%Z 324p.

%A Davison,, Walter F.
%D 1974
%T Review of Anthony, <A programmed course in reading Thai syllables>
%J <Pasaa>
%V 4
%N 2
%P 79-85

%A Davydon,, L. A.
%D 1962
%T Review of Ignatenko, {\rus <Karmannyi birmansko--russkii slovar'>}
%J <Norody Azii i Afriki>
%V 2
%P 249

%A Dawa-Sengei-Dvangma
%D 1959
%T Tibetology in Sikkim
%J <Maha Bodhi>
%V 67
%P 133-7

%A Dawson,, Willa
%D 1980
%T <Tibetan phonology>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Washington
%Z 150p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 41/11A-4699; University Microfilms 8109722

%A Dawson,, Willa
%D 1980
%T Tibetan tone and the suffix -pa: a case for two binary tonal features
%M Winter mtg. of the LSA

%A Dawson,, Willa
%D 1980
%T The vowel feature `constricted' in Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 13 (University of Virginia, Charlottesville)

%A Dawson,, Willa
%D 1981
%T Tibetan tones: evidence for two-tiered representation
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 14 (University of Florida, Gainesville)

%A Dawson,, Willa
%D 1982
%T Underlying tonal form in spoken Lhasa Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A Day,, Arthur Colin
%D 1962
%T Final consonants in northern Vietnamese
%J <Transactions of the Historical Research Institute>
%V 3
%P 98-109

%A Day,, Arthur Colin
%D 1966
%T <The syntax of Tho, a Tai language of Vietnam>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of London
%Z 149p.
%R Reviewed by Meier, <Zeitschrift f\"ur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft, und Kommunikationsforschung> 25(1972):525-6

%A Day,, Arthur Colin
%D n.d.
%T <Tho phonology>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Day,, Arthur Colin
%A et al.
%D 1977
%T <Articles on Vietnamese phonology>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 88p., 2mf.

%A Day,, Arthur Colin
%A Day,, Jean
%D 1961
%T <Tho dictionary: Tho--Vietnamese--English>
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z 99p.

%A Day,, Arthur Colin
%A Day,, Jean
%D 1962
%T <Tho dictionary and text>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Day,, Jean
%D 1961, 1962
%X see Day,, Arthur Colin, and Day,, Jean

%A Day,, Jean
%D 1962
%T A comparison of the tones of White Tai and Tho
%M ms., Saigon; Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota
%Z 18p.

%A Dba\:n-ldan (Lama Wang-dan)
%D 1902
%T <Tibetan primers 1, 2>
%? transcribed and translated by \.Sat\=i\.sachandra Vidy\=abh\=usana
%C Calcutta
%Z 26, 50p.

%A Dbangpo,, Thubldan
%X see Luo Bingfen and Dbangpo

%A dBya\:ns tsan dga-bai blo gros
%D n.d.
%T {\tib <Rtahs-kyi \~ad\'zug-pai dka gnas bdag g\'zan bya da\:n byed las gsum-gyi k'yad-par zin-tu p'ye-ba nyu\:n gsal \~ap'rul-gyi lde-mig t\'ses buaba (b\'zugs-so)>}
%t ?
%Z 7p.
%O Tibetan

%A dBya\:ns tsan dga-bai blo gros
%D n.d.
%T {\tib <Rhai\:n dbye brgyad da\:n bya byed las sogs-k'yad-par mdo tsam brad\'zod-pa dka gnad-bai me-lon \'zes bya-ba (b\'zugs-so)>}
%t ?
%Z 7p.

%A dBya\:ns tsan dga-bai blo gros
%D n.d.
%T {\tib <Rtags-kyi \~ad\'zug-pai dgo\:ns \~agrel rab gsal sna\:n-ba \'zes bya-ba (b\'zugs-so)>}
%t ?
%Z 19p.
%O Commentary to Rtags-kyi \~ad\'zug-pa - BSTL

%A DeArmond,, Richard C.
%D 1965
%T Grammatical categories of the Gutob verb
%M Unpublished ms., Milwaukee

%A DeArmond,, Richard C.
%D 1976
%T Proto-Gutob-Remo-Gtaq stressed monosyllabic vowels and initial consonants
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%E Thompson,, Laurence C.
%E Starosta,, Stanley
%B <Austroasiatic studies>
%S <Oceanic Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 13
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%V I
%P 213-28

%A DeArmond,, Richard C.
%D n.d.
%T Compound words in Gutob
%M ms.
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 31(1965).4:338-9

%A DeArmond,, Richard C.
%D n.d.
%T On intonation in Gutob
%M ms.
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 31(1965).4:339

%A DeArmond,, Richard C.
%D to appear
%T The structure of the Gutob verb in a generative grammar: syntactic aspects vs. semantic aspects
%B <Proceedings of the Conference on Asian Syntax and Semantics>
%C Seattle

%A Debavalya,, Kesmanee
%X see Kesmanee Debavalya

%A Debbarm\=a,, Late Radhamohan
%D 1966
%T {\?? <Kak-B\`ar\`ak-m\=a: Tripura Vyakaran>}
%t Tripuri grammar
%C Tripura
%I Education Directorate

%A Debbarm\=a,, Amjitbandhu
%D 1967
%T {\?? <Kak-rab\=am>}: {\eng <English--Tripuri dictionary>}
%C Angartala, Tripura
%I Sri Saktipada on behalf of the Education Directorate, Government of Tripura, Agartala
%Z 273p.

%A Debyasuvarn,, Boonlua
%X see Boonlua Debyasuvarn

%A Dechathamrong,, Onthai
%X see Onthai Dechathamrong

%A Deeney,, John J., S.J.
%D 1975
%T <Ho grammar and vocabulary>
%C Chaibasa, Bihar
%I St. Xavier's high School
%Z 216p.
%O English--Ho vocabulary, 185-216

%A Deeney,, John J., S.J.
%D 1978
%T <Ho--English dictionary>
%C Chiabasa
%I Xavier Ho Publications
%Z 376p.

%A Deepadung,, Sujaritlak
%X see Sujaritlak Deepadung

%A Deepuengton,, Pawadee
%X see Pawadee Deepuengton

%A Deepungton,, Panida
%X see Panida Deepungton

%A Deeyoo Palikupt
%D 1983
%T <Central Thai and Northeastern Thai: a linguistic and attitudinal study>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Texas at Austin

%A DeFrancis,, John
%D 1978
%T <Colonialism and language policy in Vietnam>
%S <Contributions to the Sociology of Language>
%u 19
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%Z 264p.
%R Reviewed by J. Davidson, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 45(1982).1:213-14
%R Reviewed by Whitmore, <Journal of Asian Studies> 38(1979).3:620

%A DeGeorge,, J. B.
%D 1921-25
%T {\fr Legends Tay, Annam}
%t Thai and Annamese legends
%J <Anthropos>
%V 16-20  ??
%P 633-59, 40-68, 496-515, 952-80

%A DeGeorge,, J. B.
%D 1927-28
%T {\fr Proverbes, maximes et sentences tays}
%t Thai proverbs, maxims, and sentences
%J <Anthropos>
%V 22/23
%P 911-32/596-616

%A Dehong dai zu Jingpo zu zi zhi zhou wen jiao ke
%D 1965
%T {\ch <Jingpo zu xue Han hua>}
%t The Jingpo people learn to speak Chinese
%C ?
%I Yunan Ethnic Publishing house

%A Dejvongsa,, Soulang
%X see Soulang Dejvongsa

%A Deka
%D 1867
%T Have the Miao-Tsz a written language?
%J <Notes and Queries on China and Japan>
%V 1
%N 8
%P 104

%A Deka
%D 1867
%T Written language of the Miao-Tsz
%J <Notes and Queries on China and Japan>
%V 1
%N 9
%P 116

%A Deka
%D 1867
%T Spoken language of the Miao-Tsz
%J <Notes and Queries on China and Japan>
%V 1
%N 10
%P 131-2

%A D\^el R\;omah
%D 1970
%T {\viet Pham tru v\^o sinh h\;uu sinh trong danh t\;u ti\^eng Jarai}
%t Animate and inanimate categories in Jarai nouns
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1970
%N 1

%A D\^el R\;omah
%D 1977
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en Vi\^et--Gia Rai>}
%t Vietnamese--Jarai dictionary
%C Hanoi
%I Khoahoc Xa-hoi
%Z 722p.

%A D\^el R\;omah
%A Tr\;u\;ong V\uan Sinh
%D 1974
%T {\viet Vai net v\^e m\^ot s\^o nh\^on ng\;u malay-p\^olin\^edia \;o Vi\^et-Nam}
%t Notes on some Malayo-Polynesian languages in Vietnam
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1974
%N 1
%P 22-33
%O Phonology of Rad\'e (Ed\^e, Rhad\^e), Jarai (Giarai, Gi\;orai, Djarai), R\;oglai (Raglai), Chru (Tiuru), Bih, Haroi (Ch\uam hroi, Hroy, Harwai) and Cham

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1977
%T From ergative to accusative in Tibet-Burman
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 10 (Georgetown University, Washington, DC)

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1977
%T The Tibeto-Burman tense/aspect mechanisms
%J <University of Michigan Papers in Linguistics>

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1978
%T Implications from Sino-Tibetan for a proposed structural principal of language
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 11 (University of Arizona, Tucson)
%O Discusses various TB languages

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1978
%T Mood particles in Sino-Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 11 (University of Arizona, Tucson)
%O Examples from various TB languages

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1978
%T Empathy hierarchies and Jinghpaw agreement phenomena
%M Paper presented to the LSA, Dec. 1978

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1979
%T Aspect, transitivity, and viewpoint
%M UCLA Tense and Aspect Symposium

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1979
%T Remarks on Tibeto-Burman verb agreement patterns
%M ms., Indiana University Linguistics Department

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1980
%T The category of direction in Tibeto-Burman
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 13 (University of Virginia, Charlottesville)

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1980
%T <Deictic categories in the Tibeto-Burman verb>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Indiana University
%Z 295p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 41.6:2584-85-A; University Microfilms 802918

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1981
%T An interpretation of split ergativity and related patterns
%J <Language>
%V 57
%N 3
%P 626-57
%O Example from Kham, Tangut (Hsi-hsia), Jinghpaw, Sizang Chin, Tiddim Chin, Nocte, Jyarong, and Syuwa

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1981
%T The category of direction in Tibeto-Burman
%I University of California/Berkeley
%V 6
%N 1
%P 83-102

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1981
%T Lhasa Tibetan: a case study in ergative typology
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 14 and LSA Winter Meeting

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1981
%T Review of Kepping, {\rus <Sun' tszy v tangutskom perevode>}
%J <Language>
%V 57
%N 4
%P 972-3

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1981
%T Review of Koshal, <Ladakhi grammar>
%J <Language>
%V 57
%N 4
%P 972

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1983
%T Etymological notes on Tibeto-Burman case particles
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 16 (University of Washington, Seattle)

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1983
%T Tangut and Tibeto-Burman morphology
%I University of California/Berkeley
%V 7
%N 2
%P 100-8

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1983
%T Towards a history of Tai classifier systems
%? Symposium on Categorization and Noun Classification
%Z 28p.

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1984
%T Grammaticalized verbs in Newari and Tibetan
%M Paper presented to the LSA Winter Meeting

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1984
%T Versatile verbs in Lhasa Tibetan
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 17 (University of Oregon, Eugene)

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D 1984
%T Review of Koshal, <Conversational Ladakhi>
%J <Language>
%V 60
%N 3
%P 678

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%D forthcoming
%T Evidentiality and volitionality in Tibetan
%E Chafe,, Wallace
%E Nichols,, Johanna
%B <Evidentiality: the linguistic coding of epistemology>

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%A Diehl,, Lon
%A Maran,, LaRaw
%D 1977
%T A localistic account of aspect in Jinghpaw
%M Paper presented to the Tense and Aspect Conference, University of Michigan, April

%A DeLancey,, Scott
%A Diehl,, Lon
%A Maran,, LaRaw
%D 1977
%T Tense and aspect in Tibeto-Burman
%M Paper presented to the Tense and Aspect Conference, University of Michigan, April

%A Delcros,, Henri
%A Subra,, Jean
%D 1966
%T {\fr <Petit dictionaire du language des Khmu' de la r\'egion de Xieng Khouang>}
%t ?
%C Vientiane
%I Mission Catholique
%Z mimeo., 138p.
%O Nearly 4,000 entries

%A Dell,, Fran\,cois
%D 1969
%T {\fr Langues en contact et changements phon\'etiques: notes sur l'histoire des finales en by-ye (dioi)}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 64
%N 1
%P 184-220

%A Dell,, Fran\,cois
%D 1981
%T <La langue bai: phonologie et lexique>
%S {\fr <Mat\'eriaux pour l'\'etude de l'Asie moderne et contemporaine: Etudes linguistiques>}
%u 2
%C Paris
%I Editions de l'Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales
%Z 175p.
%O Minchia
%R Reviewed by Davidson, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 45(1982).3:615-16
%R Reviewed by Thurgood, <Language> 58(1981).3:732

%A Dellenbach,, Marguerite Lobsiger
%D 1953-54
%T {\fr Recherches ethnologiques au N\'epal}
%t ?
%J <Le Globe> (M\'emoires de la Soci\'et\'e de G\'eographie de Gen\'eve)
%V 92(1953)/53(1954) {\? sic; recte 52 or 93 ?}
%P 1-62/1-79

%A Deller,, K.
%D 1964
%T Review of Shorto, Jacobs, and Simmonds, <Bibliographies of Mon-Khmer and Tai linguistics>
%J <Orientalia> ??
%V 33
%P 162-3

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1967
%T Notes on Akha segmental phonemes and tones
%E Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em
%E A. Tr\^an H\;u\;ong Mai
%% ?? order of name
%E Dellinger,, David W.
%B <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 1>
%S <Linguistic Circle of Canberra Publ.>
%u series A, no. 9
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 35-43

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1967
%X see Nguy\^en \-D\uang Li\^em, A. Tr\^an H\;u\;ong Mai, and Dellinger ??

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1968
%T Ambivalence in Akha phonology
%J <Anthropological Linguistics>
%V 10
%N 8
%P 16-22

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1969
%T <Akha: a transformational description>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Australian National University
%Z 271p.

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1969
%T A generative approach to the phonology of Akha
%M Paper presented to the AULLA 12th congress

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1969
%T Some comments on Akha: its relationships and structure, and a proposal for a writing system, part 1
%E Hinton,, Peter
%B <Tribesmen and peasants in North Thailand (Proceedings of the first symposium of the Tribal Research Centre)>
%C Chiengmai
%I Tribal Research Centre
%P 108-13

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1970
%T The morphology of nouns and verbs in Akha
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 3 (Cornell University, Ithaca, NY)

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1971
%T Phonetic changes in borrowed words in Akha
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 4 (Indiana University, Bloomington)

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1971
%T Review of Anthony, et al., <Foundations of Thai, Books I and II>
%J <Linguistics, An International Review>
%V 76
%P 123-7

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1972
%T Phonological specification and some phonological rules in Akha
%J <Linguistics, An International Review>
%V 81
%P 5-24

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1973
%T Some deep structures of the Thai verb phrase
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 6 (University of California/San Diego)

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1973
%T Structure and rules in Akha morphology
%E Dellinger,, David W.
%E Hope,, E. R.
%E Katsura,, Makio
%E Nishida,, Tatsua
%B <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 3>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.30
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 1-18

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1973
%T Review of R. Campbell, <Noun substitutes in modern Thai>
%J <Linguistics, An International Review>
%V 100
%P 103-5

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1974
%T Acquainting students with dialect
%E Dellinger,, David W.
%B <Language, literature, and society: Working papers, 1973 Conference of the American Council of Teachers of Uncommonly-Taught Asian Languages>
%S <Northern Illinois University Center for Southeast Asian Studies, Occ. Papers>
%u 1
%C DeKalb, IL
%I Northern Illinois University Center for Southeast Asia Studies
%P 10-15
%O Dialect variation in Burma, Thailand, and Cambodia

%E Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1974
%T <Language, literature, and society>
%S <Northern Illinois University Center for Southeast Asian Studies, Occ. Papers>
%u 1
%C Dekalb
%I Northern Illinois University Center for Southeast Asian Studies
%Z 80p.
%O S

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1975
%T Thai modals
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Chamberlain,, James R.
%B <Studies in Tai linguistics in honor of William J. Gedney>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 89-99

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%D 1980
%T <First year Thai programmed reader>
%e revised ed.
%C DeKalb
%I Northern Illinois University Center for Southeast Asian Studies

%A Dellinger,, David W.
%A Hope,, R. E.
%A Makio Katsura
%A Tatsuo Nishida
%D 1973
%T <Papers in South East Asian linguistics> No. 3
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.30
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%Z 82p.
%O S

%A Deloustal,, Raymond
%D 1914
%T {\fr Des d\'eterminatifs en annamite}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 14
%N 5
%P 19-40

%A Delvert,, Jean
%D 1961
%T {\fr <Le paysan cambodgien>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Le Monde d'Outre-mer: pass\'e et pr\'esent>}
%u 1\'ere s\'erie, Etudes X
%= ?
%C Paris
%I Mouton
%Z 740p.
%O Ethonolinguistic map, fol. p. 688

%A Dementiev,, Y. P.
%X see Long Seam and Dementiev

%A Demi\'eville,, Paul
%D 1946
%T Review of Wulff, {\germ <Chinesisch und Tai>}
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 43
%P 144-8

%A Demi\'eville,, Paul
%D 1946
%T Review of Wulff, {\germ <\"Uber das Verh\"altnis des Malayo-Polynesischen zum Indochinesischen>}
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 43
%P 144-8

%A Demi\'eville,, Paul
%D 1949
%T Review of F. Thomas, <Nam, an ancient language of the Sino-Tibetan borderland>
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 45
%P 264-7

%A Deng Yanru
%D 1957
%T {\ch <Cong bai yu de yan jiu zhong shi wo men kan dao shenme?>}
%t What have we learned from studies on Bai?
%C ?
%I Yunnan Peoples' Publishing House
%O Minchia

%A Deng Ziqin
%D 1980
%T {\ch Ye wen `yi nuo' yin zhang ba yu}
%t `Yi nuo' seals and epilogues in Yi
%J <Liangshan yi zu nu li zhi yan jiu>
%V 1980
%N 1
%P 88ff.

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D 1967
%T Chinese and Thai
%J <Monumenta Serica>
%V 26
%P 35-41

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D 1972
%T On Haudricourt's `The origin of tones in Vietnamese'
%J <Workpapers of the Summer Institute of Linguistics, University of North Dakota>
%V 16
%P 75-7
%+ Also published 1972-73, <Monumenta Serica> 30:622-33

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D 1972
%T Miao-Yao manuscript
%J <Journal of Tunghai University>
%V 13
%P 1-66

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D 1974-75
%T Beyond tone in Sino-Tibetan
%J <Monumenta Serica>
%V 31
%P 334-43

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D 1974-75
%T Chinese tones and Southeast Asian languages
%J <Monumenta Serica>
%V 31
%P 319-33

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D 1977-78
%T Grammatical comparison in Sino-Tibetan: A review article on James A. Matisoff, <The grammar of Lahu>
%J <Monumenta Serica>
%V 33
%P 300-8

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D 1979
%T The `Ch'ung nin' problem and Vietnamese
%J <Tsing Hua Journal of Chinese Studies>
%V 12
%N 1
%P 217-26

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D 1981
%T Tibetan and Mon-Khmer: a short communication
%E Gonzales,, Andrew
%E Thomas,, David
%B <Linguistics across continents: studies in honor of Richard S. Pittman>
%S <Linguistic Society of the Philippines monograph series>
%u 11
%C Manila
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Linguistic Society of the Philippines
%P 145-6

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D 1984
%T A place for Southeast Asian languages in Chinese historical linguistics
%I National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African Languages and Cultures
%V 22
%P 99-103
%O Reference to VM, TK, MY

%A Denlinger,, Paul B.
%D forthcoming ??
%T An introduction to Miao-Yao linguistics
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 97(1977)
%N 2
%P 189-90

%A Dentan,, Robert K.
%D 1964
%T Senoi
%E LeBar,, Frank M.
%E Hickey,, Gerald C.
%E Musgrave,, John K.
%B <Ethnic groups of mainland Southeast Asia>
%C New Haven
%I Human Relations Area Files Press
%P 176-81

%A Dentan,, Robert K.
%D 1967
%T The mammalian taxonomy of the Senoi Semai
%J <Malayan Nature Journal>
%V 20
%P 100-10

%A Dentan,, Robert K.
%D 1968
%T <The Semai: a non-violent people of Malaya>
%S <Case studies in cultural anthropology>
%C New York
%I Holt, Rinehart and Winston
%Z 141p.
%+ Reprinted 1979
%O Ethnographic data; glossary of Semai terms, 137-9
%R Reviewed by Benjamin, <American Anthropologist> 72(1970):658-60

%A Dentan,, Robert K.
%D 1970
%T Hocus-pocus and extensionism in Central Malay: notes on Semai kinship terminology
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 72
%N 2
%P 358-62

%A Dentan,, Robert K.
%D 1970
%T Labels and rituals in Semai classification
%J <Ethnology>
%V 91
%P 16-25

%A Dentan,, Robert K.
%D 1977
%T Review of I. Carey, <Orang Asli: the aboriginal tribes of peninsular Malaysia>
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 79
%P 944-5

%A Dentan,, Robert K.
%D n.d.
%T Semai language
%M Summer Institute of Linguistics/Vietnam Branch

%A Dentan,, Robert K.
%D n.d.
%T <An outline of Semai grammar>
%M ms.

%A Denwood,, Philip
%D 1973
%T Review of Benedict, <Sino-Tibetan: a conspectus>
%J <Journal of Oriental Studies>
%V 11
%N 2
%P 261-2

%A Denwood,, Philip
%D 1979
%T Review of Helffer, {\fr <Les chants de l'\'epop\'e\'e tib\'etaine de Ge-sar...>}
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 42
%P 159-60

%A Denwood,, Philip
%D 1981
%T Linguistic studies in Ladakhi
%E Aris,, M.
%E San Suu Aung
%B <Tibetan studies in honor of Hugh Richardson>
%C Atlantic Highlands, NJ
%I Humanities Press
%P 93-6

%A Derrick-Mescua,, Maria
%A Berman,, Judith
%A Carlson,, Mary Beth
%D 1982
%T Some secret languages of the Hmong
%E Olney,, Douglas P.
%B <The Hmong in the West: observations and reports>, Papers from the 1981 Hmong Research Conference, University of Minnesota
%C Minneapolis
%I Center for Urban and Regional Affairs
%P 142-59

%A Decours-Gatin,, Chantal
%D 1983
%T {\fr <Guide de recherche sur le Vietnam>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Bibliographies archives et biblioth\'eques de France>}
%C Paris
%I l'Harmattan
%Z 259p.

%A Desgodins,, (Abb\'e) Auguste
%D 1873
%T {\fr Mots principaux des langues de certaines tribus qui habitent les bords du Lan-tsang-kiang, du Loutze-keang et Irrawaddy}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Geographique>, series 6
%V 5
%P 144-50
%O Vocab, TB: Lisu, Loutze (Melam), Minchia, Moso, Tibetan (Tseku); TK: Khamti

%A Desgodins,, (Abb\'e) Auguste
%D 1880-81
%T {\fr Vocabulaire de plusieurs tribus des bords du Lan-Trang-Kiang ou Haut Me-kong, Lou-Ts\'e-Kiang ou Haute Salouan et Haut Irraouawaddy}
%t ?
%J <Annales de l'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 3
%P 42-8
%O Same text as preceding item - SJS

%A Desgodins,, (Abb\'e) Auguste
%D 1899
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire thib\'etain--latin--fran\,cais>}
%t Tibetan--Latin--French dictionary
%C Hongkong
%Z xii, 1091p.

%A Desgodins,, (Abb\'e) Auguste
%D 1899
%T {\fr <Essai de grammaire thib\'etaine pour le langage parl\'e...>}
%t ?
%C Hongkong
%Z viii, 92p.

%A Desgodins,, C.-H.
%D 1872
%T {\fr <La mission du Thibet de 1855 \`a 1870...>}
%t ?
%C Verdun
%O Melam vocab, 159-60

%A Des Michels,, Abel
%D 1869
%T {\fr Du syst\'eme des intonations chinoises et de ses rapports avec celui des intonations annamites}
%t ?
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 6
%N 4
%P 96-110

%A Des Michels,, Abel
%D 1887
%T {\fr <M\'emoire sur les origines et le caract\'ere de la langue annamite>}
%t ?
%C Paris

%A Des Michels,, Abel
%D 1896
%T {\fr <Les six intonations chez les annamites>}
%t The six intonations among the Annamites
%C Paris
%I Maisonneuve
%Z 14p.

%A Dessaint,, Alain Y.
%D 1971
%T Lisu annotated bibliography
%J <Behavior Science Notes>
%V 6
%N 2
%P 71-94
%O Mostly ethnographic, some linguistic

%A Dessaint,, Alain Y.
%D 1972
%T <Economic organization of the Lisu of the Thai highlands>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Hawaii
%Z 216p.

%A Dessaint,, Alain Y.
%D 1972
%T Review of Paul Lewis, <Ethnographic notes on the Akhas of Burma>
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 74
%P 852-3

%A Dessaint,, Alain Y.
%D 1980
%T <Minorities of Southwest China: an introduction to the Yi (Lolo) and related peoples and an annotated bibliography>
%C New Haven, CT
%I Human Relations Area Files Press
%Z 373p.
%O Ethnographic and linguistic
%R Reviewed by Lolinger, <Journal of Asian Studies> 40(1981).3:581-2

%A Dessaint,, William Y.
%D 1963
%T <Ethnographical survey of the Lisu in Chiangdao district>
%M ms., London, School of Oriental and African Studies
%Z 112p.

%A Dessaint,, William Y.
%D 1973
%T The Mal of Thailand and Laos
%J <Bulletin of the International Commission on Urgent Anthropological and Ethnological Research>
%V 15
%P 9-25

%A Dessaint,, William Y.
%D 1981
%T The T'in (Mai), dry rice cultivators of Northern Thailand
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 69
%N 1-2
%P 107-37
%O Ethnography

%A Dev Sarma,, Dwijamani
%D 1957
%T <The Anglo-Manipuri dictionary>
%C Imphal
%I The Government Press
%Z vi, 443p.
%O Intended for Manipuri students of English, but gives a Meithei--English dictionary - BSTL

%A Dev Sarma,, Dwijamani
%D 1974
%T <The Anglo-Manipuri dictionary>
%e 4th ed.
%C Imphal
%I Sekhar Bros.
%Z 462p.

%A Dev\'eria,, Gabriel
%D 1891
%T {\fr Les lolos et les miao-tze, a propos d'une brochure de M. P. Vial}
%t ?
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 18
%P 356-9
%O Review of Vial 1890

%A Dev\'eria,, Gabriel
%D 1898
%T {\fr L'\'ecriture du royame de Si-hia ou Tangout}
%t ?
%B <M\'em. pr\'esent\'es \`a l'Acad. Inscr. B.-L.>, 1. s\'erie, 2.1
%C Paris

%A Dev\'eria,, Gabriel
%D 1898
%T {\fr St\'ele Si-hia de Leang tscheou}
%t ?
%J <Journal Asiatique>, 9. s\'erie
%V 11
%P 53-72

%A Dey,, Pradip
%D 1975
%T Echo-word constructions with special reference to Ladakhi
%J <Indian Journal of Linguistics>
%V 2
%N 2
%P 92-8

%A dGe-bses t\'s'os-grags
%D 1950
%T {\tib <Brda-dag mi\:n ts'ig sgal-ba>}
%t ?
%C Lhasa
%Z 2 vols.
%O Tibetan

%A dGe-b\'ses t\'s'os-kyi grags-pas
%D 1957
%T {\tib <Brtsams-pai brda-dag mi\:n ts'ig gsal-ba b\'zugs-so. Ko-hsi Ch'\"u-cha Tsang wen tz'\uu-tien>}
%t ?
%C Peking
%Z 19, 971p.
%O Tibetan--Chinese dictionary from xylograph of Tibetan dictionary - BSTL

%A Dhall,, G. B.
%D 1957
%T The languages and dialects spoken in Orissa
%J <Indian Linguistics>
%V 17
%P 39-43
%O Reference to AA: Gadaba (Gutob), Juang, Kisan, Kol, Mundari, Bhumij, Santali, Saora (Sora); TB: Hajar

%A Dhammanungune,, Somchai
%X see Somchai Dhammanungune

%A Dhammarja,, P. S.
%A Vou-Ong,, Ly
%D 1980
%T {\fr <Lexique fran\,cais--khmer expliqu\'e>}
%t ?
%? avec la collaboration de M. Tan-Uk-Nam-Ieng, co-\'edit\'e par Accueil aux R\'efugi\'es, et par Perspectives Indochinoises ??
%C Paris
%Z 258p.

%A Dhanan Chantrupanth
%A Chartchai Phromjakgarin
%D 1978
%T <Khmer (Surin)--Thai--English dictionary>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Language Institute, Indigenous Languages of Thailand Research Project
%Z xxv, 593, 4, 26, 17, 3p.

%A Dhananjayanond,, Puttachart
%X see Puttachart Dhananjayanond

%A Dhani Nivat,, Prince
%D 1935
%T Some loan words in Siamese
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 28
%P 188-93

%A Dhani Nivat,, Prince
%D 1939
%T Kralahom
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 31
%P 177-8

%A Dhani Nivat,, Prince
%D 1939
%T The word Jetavan in old Siamese
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 31
%P 49-55

%A Dhani Nivat,, Prince
%D 1944
%T The word Jetavan again
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 35
%P 191-3

%A Dhani Nivat,, Prince
%D 1970
%T The transcription of Siamese
%E Tej Bunnag
%E Smithies,, Michael
%B <In Memoriam Phya Anuman Rajadhon: Contributions in memory of the late president of the Siam Society>
%C Bangkok
%I The Siam Society
%P 69-70

%A Dhani Nivat,, Prince
%A Seidenfaden,, Erik
%D 1939
%T Early trade relations between Denmark and Siam
%J <Journal of the Siam Society>
%V 31
%P 1-15
%O With plates of 17th cent. Thai manuscript letters, and remarks on linguistic and orthographic problems - SJS

%A Dhasmana,, M. M.
%D 1979
%T <The Ramos of Arunachal: a socio-cultural study>
%C New Delhi
%I Concept
%Z 298p.
%O Ethno, TB: Ramo

%A Dhawaj Poonotoke
%D 1972
%T {\thai <'Aks\=\,on thai n\=\,oi: k\=an s\,uks\=a nai d\=an 'akkharawittaya>}
%t Thai Noi paleography
%U M.A. thesis, Department Oriental Languages, Silpakorn University
%Z 150p.
%O The spread of the sukhothai alphabet in northeastern Thailand and the Lan Xang kingdom, generally known as `Thai noi' - English summary

%A Dhirajit Leetrakul
%D 1978
%T <Linguistic taboo in Thai>
%U M.A. thesis, ILCRD, Mahidol University

%A Dhongthon,, Tanpi Gyaltshan
%D 1973
%T <The new light English--Tibetan dictionary>
%C Dharmsala, Himachal Pradesh
%I Library of Tibetan works and archives
%Z 523p.
%? Foreword by the Dalai Lama
%O Approx. 40,000 entries designed to help Tibetans in their study of English - RTBL

%A Dhuraratsadorn,, Luang Boriphandh
%X see Boriphand Dhuraratsadorn,, Luang

%A Diack,, Alexander Henderson
%D 1986
%T <The Kulu dialect of Hindi...>
%C Lahore
%O Vocab, TB: Gara (Bunan), Kanauri, Kanashi, Patan (Manchati), Rangloi

%A Dickason,, David H.
%D 1956
%T <English loanwords in Thai, especially as used by teachers and students in Bangkok>
%C Bankok
%I College of Education

%A Dickason,, David H.
%D 1957
%T <A practical handbook of English usage for Thai teachers and students: some common errors and how to eliminate them>
%C Bangkok
%I Khurusapha Press
%Z 135p.

%A Dickson,, H. B.
%D 1908
%T <Sema Naga primer>
%C Assam
%Z 24p.

%A Diehl,, Lon
%D 1977
%T Some remarks on tense-aspect systems in Tibeto-Burman
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 10 (Georgetown University, Washington, DC)

%A Diehl,, Lon
%D 1977
%X see DeLancey, Diehl, and Maran

%A Diehl,, Lon
%D 1981
%T Spatial postpositions in Jinghpaw: a lexical generative approach
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 14 (University of Florida, Gainesville)

%A Diehl,, Lon
%D 1982
%T Nonspatial users of Jinghpaw postpositions: a localistic account
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A \-Di\^en Hai
%D 1948
%T {\viet <Danh-t\;u th\^ong-th\;u\;ong>}
%t {\fr Termes vietnamien usuels avec explications en langue fran\,caise}
%= Common Vietnamese terms with explanations in the French language
%C Saigon
%I Ph\^o-Th\^ong

%A Diengdoh,, A. K.
%D 1965
%T <Leemuel's Anglo-Khasi pocket dictionary>
%C Shillong
%I Harrison

%A Di\^ep Quang Ban
%D 1972
%T {\viet Xung quanh vi\^ec ph\^an bi\^et c\^au ghep v\;oi c\^au \-d\;on}
%t Concerning the distinction between compound and simple sentences
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1972
%N 4
%P 36-40

%A \-Di\^eu Bi
%X see Haupers,, Ralph, and \-Di\^eu Bi

%A \-Di\^eu Chinh Nhim
%A Jean Donaldson
%D 1971
%T {\whitetai <P\uap san khh\~am pak T\~ay--Keo--Eng>}: {\viet <Ng\;u-v\;ung Thai (Trang)--Vi\^et--Anh>}: {\eng <(White) Tai--Vietnamese--English vocabulary>}
%C Saigon
%I Department of Education
%Z xvii, 476p.
%? Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 6 mf.
%O About 4000 words
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 68(1973):492-3

%A \-Di\^eu Mui
%X see Phillips,, Richard L. and \-Di\^eu Mui

%A \-Di\^eu Yeem
%X see Haupers,, R., Haupers, and \-Di\^eu

%A Diew Lingx Gnimz
%X see Chaband,, E. and Diew

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1968
%T Proto-Semai phonology
%J <Federated Museums Journal> n.s.
%V 13
%P 65-74

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1972
%T Notes on expressive meaning
%J <Papers of the Chicago Linguistic Society>
%V 8
%P 440-7
%O Semai

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1972
%T {\fr Ambigu\"it\'e morphologique en semai}
%t ?
%E Barrau,, Jacques
%E et al.
%B {\fr <Langues et techniques, nature et soci\'et\'e (Volume presented to Andre\'e G. Haudricourt on his 60th birthday)>}
%b ?
%C Paris
%I Klincksieck
%V I
%P 91-4

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1973
%T Review of R. Johnston, et al., eds., <Mon-Khmer studies III>
%J <Language>
%V 49
%N 1
%P 233-4

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1974
%T Austro-Asiatic languages
%B <Encyclopedia Britannica>
%e 15th ed.
%V 2
%P 480-4
%O Divides AA into three major branches: Mon-Khmer, Munda, and Nicobarese

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1974
%T Body moves in Semai and French
%J <Papers of the Chicago Linguistic Society>
%V 10
%P 128-38

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1974
%T The KmMu' principle
%E Hamp,, Eric P.
%B <Parmentier festschrift>
%C Chicago
%I University of Chicago Press

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1975
%T {\fr Les langages mon-khmer de Malaisie, classification historique et innovations}
%t The Mon-Khmer languages of Malaysia: historical classification and innovations
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 6
%N 4
%P 1-20

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1975
%T Remarks on the Jeh-H\uet language
%E Werner,, R.
%B <Jah H\uet of Malaysia: art and culture>
%C Kuala Lumpur
%I University of Malaya Press

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1975
%T Resultative verb pairs and the optative in some Mon-Khmer languages
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 8 (University of California, Berkeley)w

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1976
%T Expressives in Semai
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%E Thompson,, Laurence C.
%E Starosta,, Stanley
%B <Austroasiatic studies>
%S <Oceanic Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 13
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%V I
%P 249-64

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1976
%T <An appraisal of Benedict's views on Austroasiatic and Austro-Thai relations>
%S <Discussion Paper no. 82, Center for Southeast Asian studies, Kyoto University>
%C Kyoto
%I Center for Southeast Asian studies, Kyoto University

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1976
%T Minor-syllable vocalism in Senoic languages
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%E Thompson,, Laurence C.
%E Starosta,, Stanley
%B <Austroasiatic studies>
%S <Oceanic Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 13
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%V I
%P 229-48

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1976
%T Non-Khmer numerals in Aslian languages
%E Diffloth,, G\'erard
%E Zide,, Norman H.
%B <Austroasiatic number systems>
%S <Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 174
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%P 31-8

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1976
%T Jah Hut, an Austroasiatic language of Malaysia
%B <Aspects of vernacular languages in Asian and Pacific societies>
%S <Working Papers in Southeast Asian Studies>
%u 2
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Southeast Asia Program
%B <Southeast Asian linguistic studies>  {\?? which title?}
%V 2
%P 73-118

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1976
%T <Proto-Mon-Khmer final spirants>
%S <Discussion Paper no. 88, Center for Southeast Asian studies, Kyoto University>
%C Kyoto
%I Center for Southeast Asian studies, Kyoto University
%+ Also published in Hashimoto,, Mantaro J., ed., <Genetic relationship, diffusion and typological similarities of East and Southeast Asian languages>, Papers of the 1st Japan-U.S. Joint Seminar on East and Southeast Asian linguistics, Tokyo: Japan Society for the Promotion of Science, 1976, 210-29

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1976
%T <Translation of a part of A. A. Moskalev's Grammar of the Chuang language>
%S <Discussion Paper no. 91, Center for Southeast Asian studies, Kyoto University>
%C Kyoto
%I Center for Southeast Asian studies, Kyoto University

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1977
%T Non-Khmer initial palatals and `substratumized' Austro-Thai
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, VI
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%P 39-58
%O Review article on Benedict, Austro-Thai

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1977
%T Proto-Waic and the effects of register on vowel gliding
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 10 (Georgetown University, Washington, DC)

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1977
%T Towards a history of Mon-Khmer: Proto-Semai vowels
%J <T\=onan Ajia Kenky\=u>
%V 14
%N 4
%P 463-95

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1978
%T Expressive phonology and prosaic phonology in Semai
%M Paper presented to the 188th meeting of the American Oriental Society

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1978
%T Proto-East-Austoasiatic short central vowels
%M SICAL

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1979
%T Aslian languages and Southeast Asian prehistory
%J <Federated Museums Journal> n.s.
%V 24
%P 3-16

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1979
%T Copying and transporting of the final in northern Non-Khmer languages
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1979
%T Expressive phonology and prosaic phonology in Mon-Khmer
%E Thongkum,, Theraphan L.
%E Panupong,, Vichin
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%E Tingsabadh,, M. R. Kalaya
%B <Studies in Tai and Mon-Khmer phonetics and phonology in honour of Eug\'enie J. A. Henderson>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 49-59
%O Examples from Khasi, Sre, and Semai

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1979
%T The Bulang (Sam Tao) language
%? TICAL
%? (To appear in PHSAL)

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1980
%T Austroasiatic, the indigenous Southeast Asian language family
%M Paper presented at the 32nd meeting of the AAS, panel entitled `New directions on Southeast Asian linguistics'

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1980
%T {\thai Ph\=as\=a \~nah kur, m\,on b\=or\=an, kap '\=an\=acak thaw\=ar\=awad\=i}
%t Nyah Kur, old Mon, and the Kingdom of Dvaravadi
%J <Bulletin of the Faculty of Arts, Chulalangkorn University>
%V 12
%N 1
%P 54-85
%? Translated by Theraphan L. Thongkum

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1980
%T To taboo everything at all times
%J <Proceedings of the Berkeley Linguistic Society>
%V 6
%P 157-65
%O Linguistic taboo in Semai

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1980
%T <The Wa language>
%? = <LTBA> 5.2
%Z 192p.
%O Part 1: The Wa group of languages; Part2: historical phonology of Wa; Part 3: Waic etymological lexicon

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1981
%T <Reconstructing Dvaravati-Old Mon>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University
%Z 127p.

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1982
%T On the Palaungic branch of Mon-Khmer
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)
%O Reference to Danaw, Riang, Palaung, Bulang, Wa, Lawa, Phalok, La, Son, En, Mok, Angku, Kon Keu, P'uman, Pou Ma, Kiorr

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1982
%T Proto-Mon registers: two, three, four...?
%J <Proceedings of the Berkeley Linguistic Society>
%V 8
%P 148-57

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1982
%T {\fr Registres, d\'evoisement, timbres vocaliques: leur histoire en katouique}
%t Registers, devoicing, vocalic timbres: their history in Katuic
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, XI
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%P 47-82

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1983
%T Parthenogenesis of register in North Bahnaric
%? BLS 9:??-??

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1984
%T <The Dvaravati--Old Mon language and Nyah Kur>
%S <Monic Language Studies>
%u 1
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Printing House
%Z 402p.
%O Index of modern spoken Mon, 367-75; index of Old Mon, 377-86; index of English glosses, 387-402

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1985
%T Non-universals of register
%M Paper presented at the Conference on Language Typology and Universals, University of Wisconsin/Milwaukee, March 29-30, 1985
%O Reference to AA: Bru, Chong, Kuy, Mon, Mon-Khmer, and Wa

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D 1985
%T The registers of Mon vs the spectrographist's tones
%J <University of California at Los Angeles/Working Papers in phonetics>
%V ?
%P ?

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D forthcoming
%T On the Bulang (Blang, Phang) languages
%B <Papers from the Helsing\/or symposium on Austroasiatic linguistics and literature>
%C Copenhagen/London
%I SIAS/Curzon
%P 95-105

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D in preparation
%T <Etymological dictionary of Mon-Khmer>

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%D in preparation
%T <An outline of Semai grammar>

%E Diffloth,, G\'erard
%E Stampe,, David
%D forthcoming
%T <Papers of the Second International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics, Mysore, India, CIIL>
%O Papers listed as SICAL 1978

%A Diffloth,, G\'erard
%A Thongkum,, Theraphan L.
%D 1985
%T <Mon and Nyah Kur linguistic studies>
%S <Monic Language Studies>
%u 3
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Printing House

%E Diffloth,, G\'erard
%E Zide,, Norman H.
%D 1976
%T <Austroasiatic number systems>
%S <Linguistics>
%u Special issue 174
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%Z 112p.
%O S

%A Diguet,, Edouard
%D 1892
%T {\fr <El\'ements de grammaire annamite>}
%t Elements of Annamite grammar
%C Paris
%I Challamel

%A Diguet,, Edouard
%D 1895
%T {\fr <Etude de la langue ta\"i, pr\'eced\'ee d'une notice sur les races des hautes r\'egions du Tonkin; comprenant grammaire, m\'ethode d'\'ecriture ta\"i et vacabulaires>}
%t ?
%C Hanoi
%I F. H. Schneider
%Z 88, 2, 192p.
%O Black Tai

%A Diguet,, Edouard
%D 1908
%T {\fr <Les montagnards du Tonkin>}
%t The Montagnards of Tonkin
%C Paris
%I Augustin Challamel
%Z 159p.
%+ Reprinted 1981, NY: AMS Press
%O Ethnographic

%A Diguet,, Edouard
%D 1909-11
%T {\fr El\'ements de grammaire Th\^o et vocabulaire}
%t Elements of Th\^o grammar and vocabulary
%J <Revue coloniale>
%V 1909/1910/1911
%P 525-37, 618-25 / 65-81, 180-92, 240-4, 306-11, 369-73, 379-84, 437-41, 505-12 / 45-51, 108-14, 174-9, 244-52, 308-14

%A Diguet,, Edouard
%D 1910
%T {\fr <Etude le la langue th\^o>}
%t A study of the Th\^o language
%C Paris
%I Augustin Challamel
%Z iv, 132p.
%O Vocab, TK: Black Tai (5-34), Th\^o

%A Dik Keam
%D 1964
%T <Rapid study of Cambodian for foreign beginners>
%C Phnom Penh
%I The Author
%Z 109p.

%A Dik Keam
%D 1967
%X see Pa Vanna and Dik Keam

%A Dik Keam
%D 1968
%T {khm <Phiasaasaah kmae>}
%t {\fr La langue khm\'ere}
%= The Khmer language
%C Phnom Penh
%I Culture, Civilisation, et Litt\'erature Khm\'ere
%Z 35p.
%O A discussion of some general linguistic notions with regard to Khmer

%A Dik Keam
%D n.d.
%T {khm <K\^amnaet n\=ing wiwoat qaqs\^a\^a kmae>}
%t The origin and evolution of Khmer writing
%S {\fr <Cultures, Civilisation, et Litt\'eratures Khm\'eres>}
%u no. 6
%C Phnom Penh
%Z 30p.
%O Contains charts from French sources showing the chronological development of the Khmer writing system

%A Dikshit,, K. N.
%D 1927
%T Note on an Ahom pillar inscription
%B <Annual Report of the Archeological Survey of India, 1924-25>
%C Calcutta
%I Government of India Central Publications Branch
%P 157-8

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1972
%T Recent directions in Thai syntax: a critique
%M Unpublished paper, Cornell University
%O Critique of Haas 1951, Noss 1964, Chalao 1961, Udom 1963, Stine 1968, Scovel 1970, Kanchana Sindhvananda 1970, Pongsri 1970, and Vichin 1970

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1975
%T An analysis of areal and social variables in Southern Thai speech
%J <International Journal of the Sociology of Language>
%V 5
%P 131
%O Research-in-progress report

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1976
%T A note on PT *ml-
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%B <Tai linguistics in honor of Fang-kuei Li>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 39-46
%O Proto-Tai

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1976
%T <Toward a model of Southern Thai diglossic speech variation>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Cornell University
%Z xiii, 337p., illus.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 38.7:4135-A; University Microfilms 77-18,199

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1979
%T High tone - low tone
%J <Pasaa>
%V 9
%N 2
%P 19-40
%O A general discussion of tone with special reference to Thai, but mentioning Karen, Mandarin, Cantonese, Amoy, Black Miao, and Yao

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1979
%T Tones, segments and Thai regional society
%E Thongkum,, Theraphan L.
%E Panupong,, Vichin
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%E Tingsabadh,, M. R. Kalaya
%B <Studies in Tai and Mon-Khmer phonetics and phonology in honour of Eug\'enie J. A. Henderson>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 60-93

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1979
%T Review of F. K. Li, <A handbook of comparative Tai>
%J <Journal of Asian Studies>
%V 38
%N 3
%P 616-17

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1979
%T Review of Nguyen Dang Liem, <Southeast Asian linguistic studies, Vols. 1 and 2>
%J <Asian Studies Association of Australia Review>
%V 2
%N 3
%P 93-5

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1979
%T The fate of Standard Zhuang
%M Paper presented to the 1979 Winter meeting of the Linguistic Society of America
%O Chuang

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1980
%T Cross-cultural pain semantics
%J <Pain> (<Journal of the International Association for the Study of Pain>)
%V 9
%P 9-26
%O Thai: semantics

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1982
%T A new high tone in Southern Thai
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Papers in South East Asian linguistics 8>: <Tonation>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.62
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 133-54

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1985
%T Classifiers and standardization: some South and Southeast Asian comparisons
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Language policy, language planning, and sociolinguistics in South-East Asia>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.67, <Papers in South-East Asian linguistics>, 9
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P ?

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D 1985
%T High and low Thai: views from within
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Language policy, language planning, and sociolinguistics in South-East Asia>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u A.67, <Papers in South-East Asian linguistics>, 9
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P ?

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D forthcoming
%T Islam and Southern Thai ethnic reference
%E Forbes,, A. D.
%B <The Muslims of Thailand: historical and cultural studies>

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D forthcoming
%T Reflections on Tai diglossic mixing
%J <Orbis>

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D forthcoming
%T Thai epic romance: from polysemy to the norm
%E Gerstle,, C. A.
%B <Studies in Asian romantic poetry>

%A Diller,, Anthony V. N.
%D forthcoming
%T Vowels and tones in Southern Thai: a diachronic anomaly
%E Suriya Ratanakul
%E Thomas,, David
%B <Papers in Southeast Asian languages and linguistics in honor of Andr\'e Georges Haudricourt>

%A Diller,, Anthony
%A Barz,, R. K.
%D forthcoming
%T Document production in Hindi and Thai via a software interface

%A Diller,, Anthony
%A Juntanamalaga,, P.
%D forthcoming
%T <A reference grammar of Thai>

%A Din,, Maung Ba
%D 1902
%T <Dictionary of law terms in English and Burmese>
%C Rangoon
%Z 102p.

%A Ding,, Wen-jiang
%D 1935
%T {\ch <Cuan wen cong ke>}
%t Collection of Lolo characters
%S <Academia Sinica / Institute of History and Philology, Special Publication>
%u 11
%C Peking
%I Academia Sinica / Institute of History and Philology

%A \-Dinh \-D\^o
%A \-Dinh M\^oc
%A Jacqueline Mailer
%D 1974
%T {\cua <Bay gok pok kool Kua>}: {\viet <Bai hoc tie^ng Cua>}: {\eng <Cua language lessons>}
%C Saigon
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics
%Z viii, 37p.
%+ Republished 1977, Manila: Summer Institute of Linguistics

%A \-Dinh L\^e Ch\;u (?; Russian transliteration: Din' Le Tkhy)
%D 1980
%T {\rus <K probleme dialectnogo var'irovaniia (na materiale sistemy initsialei severnykh govorov v'etnamskogo iazyke)>}
%t On the problem of dialect variation: based on materials pertaining to a system of initials in the northern dialects of the Vietnamese language
%U Kandidat nauk in Philological Sciences, Leningradskii gosudarstvennyi universitet imeni A. A. Zhdnova

%A \-Dinh M\^oc
%X see \-Dinh \-D\^o, \-Dinh M\^oc, and Maier

%A \-Dinh Nghia
%D 1970, 1971
%X see Trebilco,, Joyce, and \-Dinh Nghia

%A \-Dinh Nghia
%D 1974, 1976
%X see Trebilco,, Oliver, Trebilco,, Joyce, and \-Dinh Nghia

%A \-Dinh Trong Hi\^eu
%D 1976-77
%T {\fr Les d\'enominations botaniques en Vietnamien}
%t ?
%I Section d'Etudes Vietnamiennes, U. E. R. de Langues et Civilisations de l'Asie Orientale, U. de Paris VII
%V 3
%P 17-52

%A \-Dinh Trong Hi\^eu
%D 1981
%T {\fr <Ethnobotanique vietnamienne: \'etat des questions, recherches, et perspectives>}
%t ?
%U Doctorat de 3e cycle en ethnologie, Paris VII
%Z 205p.

%A \-Dinh V\uan C\^au
%X see Maier,, Jacqueline, and \-Dinh V\uan C\^au

%A \-Dinh V\uan \-D\;uc
%D 1972
%T {\viet M\^ay suy nghi v\^e cum t\;u}
%t Some thoughts on compounds
%J <Th\^ong bao khoa hoc, v\uan hoc, ng\^on ng\;u>
%V 5
%P 103-13

%A \-Dinh V\uan \-D\;uc
%D 1974
%X see Nguy\^en Tai C\^an, et al.

%A diPaulo,, Marianna
%D 1977
%T Causatives in Burmese
%J <Texas Linguistic Forum>
%V 8
%P 95-128

%A Direkchai Mahathanansin
%D 1973
%T {\thai <Laksana lae khr\=ong s\=ang ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Characteristics and structure of the Thai language
%C Bangkok
%I Suriwong Book Center

%A Direkchai Mahathanansin
%D 1975
%T {\thai Wikhr\,o lae wic\=an kham long th\=ai nai ph\=as\=a thai}
%t Analysis and commentary on final particles in Thai
%J <Bulletin of the Faculty of Arts, Chulalangkorn University>
%V 9
%P 128-39
%O Review article on Amara 1974 and Udom 1975

%A Direkchai Mahathanansin
%D 1981
%T {\thai <N\=uai kham ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t The morphemes of Thai
%U Department of Thai, Faculty of Humanities, Chiengmai University
%Z 90p.

%A Direkchai Mahathanansin
%D 1982
%T {\thai K\=an sad\=aeng khw\=am pen cao kh\=ong nai ph\=as\=a thai: k\=an s\,uks\=a ch\=oeng 'atth\=as\=at pariwat}
%t The expression of possession in Thai: a generative semantic study
%J <R\=uam bot khw\=am ph\=as\=a lae ph\=as\=as\=at>
%V 2
%N 1
%P 3-16

%A Direkchai Mahathanansin
%D 1982
%X see Em-on and Direkchai

%A Direkchai Mahathanansin
%D in progress 1983
%T {\thai <Nawathat kh\=\,ong samn\=uan thai>}
%t New ideas on Thai idioms
%M Department of Thai, Faculty of Humanities, Chiengmai University

%A Direkchai Mahathanansin
%D in progress 1983
%T {\thai <Wikhr\,o wayy\=ak\=\,on thai>}
%t Analysis of Thai grammar
%M Department of Thai, Faculty of Humanities, Chiengmai University

%A Diredchai Mahathanansin
%A Surin Thongsingh
%D n.d.
%T {\thai <Phattan\=ak\=an kh\=\,ong ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Development of the Thai language
%M Department of Thai, Chiengmai University
%e mimeo.

%A Diringer,, David
%D 1948, 1968
%T <The Alphabet: a key to the history of mankind>
%C London
%I Hutchinson
%e 3rd ed., completely revised with the collaboration of Reinhold Regenburger
%Z 2 vols, 473, 452p.
%? 1st ed. 1948
%O Specimens of writing systems, vol. 2: Burmese, Thai, Khmer, Cham, Chakma, Khun, Ahom, Khamti, and Aiton, 280-92; Lolo, Yao, Miao, 109; Moso, Nkhi, 110; Hsi-hsia 111-3; Mon, Pyu, 255; Tibetan, 261; Lepcha, 262; Limbu, 273

%A Dirr,, Adolf
%D 1894
%T {\fr <Theoretische-praktische Grammatik der annamitischen Sprache>}
%t Theoretical-practical grammar of the Annamite language
%S {\germ <Bibliothek der Sprachenkunde>}
%u 42
%C Vienna
%I A. Bartlebens Verlag
%Z 164p.

%A Diskul,, Subhadradis
%X see Subhadradis Diskul

%A D\:nul-t\'su yab-stas
%X see Thon-mi and D\:nul-t\'s'u

%A \-D\^o Ngoan
%X see H\^o Gia H\;u\;ong, \-D\^o Ngoan, and Boscher,, Winfried

%A \-D\^o H\;uu Ch\^au
%D 1962
%T {\viet <Giao trinh Vi\^et Ng\;u, T\^ap II>}
%t Vietnamese course, vol. II
%C Hanoi
%I Nha xuat ban Giao duc
%Z 196p.

%A \-D\^o H\;uu Ch\^au
%D 1969
%T {\viet M\^ot s\^o y ki\^en v\^e vi\^ec giai thich nhhia cua t\;u trong t\;u \-di\^en ti\^eng Vi\^et}
%t Some ideas on the definition of words in Vietnamese dictionaries
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1969
%N 2
%P 43-50

%A \-D\^o H\;uu Ch\^au
%D 1970
%T {\viet M\^ay nh\^an xet v\^e tinh ch\^at loai bi\^et va khai quat cua t\;u v\;ung Vi\^et}
%t Observations on specific and general characteristics of Vietnamese vocabulary
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1970
%N 4
%P 10-17

%A \-D\^o H\;uu Ch\^au
%D 1973
%T {\viet Khai ni\^em `tr\;u\;ong' va vi\^ec nghi\^en c\;uu h\^e th\^ong t\;u v\;ung}
%t The concept of `field' and research on the lexical system
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1973
%N 2
%P 45-53

%A \-D\^o H\;uu Ch\^au
%D 1973
%T {\viet Tr\;u\;ong t\;uv\;ung va hi\^en t\;u\;ong \-d\^ong nghia, trai nghia}
%t Lexical field and the phenomenon of synonymy and antonymy
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1973
%N 4
%P 47-56

%A \-D\^o H\;uu Ch\^au
%D 1974
%T {\viet Tr\;u\;ong t\;uv\;ung - ng\;u nghia va vi\^ec dung t\;ung\;utrong tac ph\^am nhg\^e thu\^at}
%t connotative meanings and their use in literary work
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1974
%N 3
%P 44-55, 60

%A \-D\^o H\;uu Ch\^au
%D 1977
%T {\viet \-Doc `T\;u \-di\^en ti\^eng Vi\^et ph\^o th\^ong, t\^ap I'}
%t Review of <Popular Vietnamese dictionary>, vol. I
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1977
%N 3
%P 61-71

%A \-D\^o H\;uu Ch\^au
%D 1977
%T {\viet Thi nghie^m li\^en t\;u\;ong t\;udo va nh\;ung li\^en h\^e ng\;u nghia gi\;ua cac t\;u trong h\^e th\^ong t\;u v\;ung ti\^eng Vi\^et}
%t Free association experiments and the semantic relationship between words in the Vietnamese lexical system
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1977
%N 1
%P 25-39

%A \-D\^o H\;uu Ch\^au
%A Nguy\^en V\uan Thac
%D 1977
%T On the lexical system of Vietnamese
%J <Vietnamese Studies>
%V 40
%P 124-47

%A \-D\^o Quang Chinh
%D 1972
%T {\viet <Lich s\;u ch\;u qu\^oc-ng\;u, 1620-1659>}
%t ?
%C Saigon
%I T\;u sach Ra kh\;oi
%Z 171p.

%A \-D\^o Thi\^en
%D 1974
%T {\viet V\^e vi\^ec dich li\^en t\;u and sang ti\^eng Vi\^et}
%t On the translation of the conjunction in Vietnamese
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1974
%N 4
%P 26-31

%A \-D\^o Thi\^eu Li\^et
%D 1957
%T {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en qu\^an-s\;u Phap--Anh--Vi\^et>}
%t French--English--Vietnamese military dictionary
%C Saigon
%I Di\^en-H\^ong
%Z 529p.

%A \-D\^o V\uan Hy
%D 1971
%T {\viet M\^ot vai y-ki\^en v\^e vi\^ec dich nghia, phi\^en-\^am va giai-thich th\;o qu\^oc-\^am cua nha \-dai-v\uan-hao Nguy\^en Trai}
%t Some ideas on the translation, transcription, and explication of the great writer Nguy\^en Trai
%J <T\^ap chi v\uan hoc>
%V 128
%P 49-68

%A \-Doan Quan T\^an
%D 1954
%T {\fr Le fran\,cais et le vi\^etnamien dans l'enseignement au Vi\^et-Nam}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 29
%P 59-97

%A \-Doan Qu\^oc Sy
%A \-Doan Vi\^et B\;uu
%D 1960
%T {\viet <L\;u\;oc khao v\^e ng\;u-phap Vi\^et-Nam>}
%t Outline of Vietnamese grammar
%C Saigon
%I Tr\;u\;ong s\;upham
%Z 189p.

%A \-Doan Thi\^en Thu\^at
%D 1962
%T {\viet L\;u\;oc ghi v\^e thanh \-di\^eu ti\^eng M\;u\;ong Ngoc Lac (Thanh hoa)}
%t Brief note on the tones of M\;u\;ong Ngoc Lac (Thanh hoa)
%J <Th\^ong bao khoa hoc ng\;u v\uan>
%V 1
%P 174-80

%A \-Doan Thi\^en Thu\^at
%D 1972
%T {\viet C\;o s\;o th\;uc t\^e cua vi\^ec xac \-dinh ti\^eng ti\^eu chu\^an cho ng\^on ng\;u Tay Nung}
%t A practical basis for defining basic words in the Tai Nung language
%J <Th\^ong bao khoa hoc, v\uan hoc, ng\^on ng\;u>
%V 5
%P 65-89

%A \-Doan Thi\^en Thu\^at
%D 1972
%T {\viet H\^e th\^ong ng\;u \^am ti\^eng Tay Nung}
%t The phonological system of Tai Nung
%J <Tim hi\^eu ng\^on ng\;u cai d\^an t\^oc thi^eu s\^o \`o Vi\^et-nam>
%V 1
%P 71-104

%A \-Doan Thi\^en Thu\^at
%D 1974
%X see Nguy\^en Tai C\^an, et al.

%A \-Doan Vi\^et B\;uu
%X see \-Doan Qu\^oc Sy and \-Doan Vi\^et B\;uu

%A Dodd,, William Clifton
%D 1920
%T The relation of Chinese and Siamese
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, North China Branch>
%V 51
%P 1-12
%O History, ethnography, and nomenclature

%A Dodd,, William Clifton
%D 1923
%T <The Tai race: elder brother of the Chinese>
%? Results of experience, exploration, and research of W. C. Dodd, compiled and edited by his wife
%C Cedar Rapids, Iowa
%I The Torch Press
%O Vocb., TK: Thai, Shan, Black Tai, Th\^o, Chin Tai, Kh\"un, Kon Yai, L\"u, Pu Tai, Tai Lai, Tai Nam, Tai N\"ua, To-jen, Yuan

%A Doehring,, Hans-Georg
%D 1969
%T {\germ <Zur vietnamesischen Satzstruktur. Versuch konfrontativer Untersuchungen vietnamesischer und deutscher S\"atze>}
%t On Vietnamese sentence structure. Essay on a contrastive investigation of Vietnamese and German sentences
%C Leipzig
%I Herder-Institut, Karl-Marx Universit\"at
%Z 43p.

%A Doehring,, Hans-Georg
%D 1972
%T {\germ <Konfrontative Untersuchungen deutscher und vietnamesischer Satzstrukturen>}
%t Contrastive investigations of German and Vietnamese sentence structure
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Leipzig, Karl-Marx-Universit\"at (Sektion Kulturwissenschaft und Germanistik)
%Z 295p.

%A Doerfer,, G.
%D 1967
%T Review of R\'ona-Tas, <Tibeto-Mongolica>
%J <Asian and African Studies>
%V 3
%P 195-7

%A Donahue,, Joseph R.
%D 1974
%T The Vietnamese way of names and food
%J <Vietnam Magazine>
%V 7
%N 3
%P 4-6

%A Donald,, Susan Lea
%D 1978
%T <The perception of voicing contrasts in Thai and English>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Connecticut
%Z 126p.

%A Donaldson,, Jean
%D 1961
%T <White Tai thesaurus (Viet Nam)>
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Donaldson,, Jean
%D 1962
%T A study of the n\u\.ang tone in the northern dialect of Vietnamese
%J <V\uan-hoa Nguy\^et-san>
%V 12
%N 7
%P 1151-4

%A Donaldson,, Jean
%D 1963
%T <White Tai phonology>
%U M.A. thesis, Hartford Seminary Foundation
%Z 50p.
%+ Published (in mimeo.?) as Hartford Studies in Linguistics 5

%A Donaldson,, Jean
%D 1971
%X see \-De\^iu Chinh Nhim and Donaldson,, Jean

%A Donaldson,, Jean
%D n.d.
%T White Tai trial orthography
%M ms., Summer Institute of Linguistics/University of North Dakota

%A Donaldson,, Jean
%A et al.
%D 1976
%T <White Tai language lessons>
%M Summer Institute of Linguistics/Mainland Southeast Asia Branch, 111 lessons
%+ (Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications, 3 mf.)

%A Donegan,, Patricia Jane
%D 1978
%T Austroasiatic vowel systems
%M Second International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics, Mysore, India, Central Institute of Indian Languages

%A Donegan,, Patricia Jane
%A Stampe,, David
%D 1983
%T Rhythm and the holistic organization of language structure
%E Richardson,, John
%E Marks,, Mitchell
%E Chukerman,, Amy
%B <Papers from the Parasession on the interplay of phonology, morphology, and syntax>
%C Chicago
%I Chicago Linguistic Society
%P 337-351
%O AA: on the history, typology, and drift of Munda vs Mon-Khmer

%A Dong Ga
%A Luo Sang Chi Lie
%D 1980
%T {\ch <Zang yu wen fa zhan wen ti chu tan>}
%t Exploration of the development of Tibetan
%C ?
%I Sichuan Ethnic Publishing House

%A Dong Weiguang
%A Cao Guangqu
%A Yan Xuequn
%D 1984
%T Genetic relationship between Chinese and Don-Tai languages
%I National Inter-University Research Institute of Asian and African Languages and Cultures
%V 22
%P 105-21

%A Dor\'z,, Ts.
%D 1961
%T <Bod-kyi sdak-yig bslab-deb>
%C Ulan-Bator
%I T\.uv\.el bichigt suraltsakh d\.evt\.er
%Z 320p.
%O Tibetan: grammar - BSTL

%A Dotson,, L. O.
%X see Embree and Dotson

%A Dourisboure,, Le P\'ere P.-X.
%D 1889
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire bahnar--fran\,cais>}
%t Bahnar--French dictionary
%C Hongkong
%I Imprimerie de la Soci\'et\'e des Missions Etrang\'eres
%Z xiv, 363p.

%A Dourisboure,, Le P\'ere P.-X.
%D 1929
%T {\fr <Les sauvages Bah-nars (Cochinchine orientale), souvenirs d'un Missionnaire>}
%t ?
%C Paris

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%X see also Dam Bo

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1948
%T {\fr Chants antiques de la montagne}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 24
%P 1-98
%O Transcription of a Sr\^e myth

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1950
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire Sr\^e (K\"oho)--Fran\,cais. Receuil de 8,000 mots et expressions du dialecte p\'emsien Sr\^e; populations montagnardes du Sud-Indochinois, tribu des Sr\^e>}
%t ?
%C Saigon
%Z xxx, 269, 13p.
%R Reviewed by Haudricourt, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 47(1951).2:270-4
%R Reviewed by Martini, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises> n.s. 27(1952):99-109
%R Reviewed by Smalley, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 47(1955):653-61

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1951
%T {\fr Nri: Receuil des coutumes sr\^e du Haut-Donnai, receuillies, traduites et annot\'ees}
%t ?
%J <France-Asie>
%V 1951
%P vii-43

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1952
%T {\fr Le chant et l'\'ecriture}
%t Song and writing
%J <France-Asie>
%V 73
%P 229-34
%O Discusses problems of transcribing Sr\^e oral literature

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1953
%X see Bochet and Dournes

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1954
%T {\fr F\^etes saisonni\'eres des Sr\^e}
%t Seasonal festivals of the Sr\^e
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 46
%N 11
%P 599-620

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1954
%T {\fr Le monde v\'eg\'etal du montagnard est-il anim\'e?}
%t The plant world of the Montagnard: is it animate?
%J <Journal d'Agriculture tropicale et de Botanique appliqu\'ee>
%V 1954
%P 214-19
%O Sr\^e view of the vegetational universe

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1955
%T {\fr Deuxi\'eme contribution \`a l'ethnobotanique indochinoise, les plants util\'es des Sr\^e}
%t ?
%J <Journal d'Agriculture tropicale et de Botanique appliqu\'ee>
%V 1955
%P 64-86

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1964
%T {\fr <Ebauche de dictionnaire de la lanque j\"orai>}
%t ?
%C Cheoreo

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1970
%T {\fr <Situation du J\"orai dans le monde austron\'esien>}
%t The place of the J\"orai in the Austronesian world
%M multigraph
%Z 44p.

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1971
%T {\fr Hommes ou esclaves? Remarques lexicographiques}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 2
%N 1
%P 48-50

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1972
%T {\fr <Coordin\'ees, structures j\"orai familiales et sociales>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Travaux et M\'emoires de l'Institut d'Ethnologie>}
%u 77
%C Paris
%I Institut d'Ethnologie
%Z 323p., 49 photos, gloss., lex., index, cartes
%O Glossary of Jarai terms, 303-8
%R Reviewed by Matras-Troubetskoy, <L'Homme>(?)

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1972
%T {\fr Propos d'ethnocuisine j\"orai}
%t ?
%J <Journal d'Agriculture tropicale et de Botanique appliqu\'ee>
%V ?
%P ?

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1973
%T {\fr <Chi-Ch\^e, la botanique des Sr\^e>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Journal d'Agriculture tropicale et de Botanique appliqu\'ee>}
%u 20.1-2
%C Paris
%I Laboratoire d'Ethnobotanique
%Z 189p.

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1973
%T {\fr P\"otao, les ma\"itres des \'etats, position de th\'ese}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 4
%N 4
%P 19-26

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1974
%T {\fr Une documentation sur les parlers k\"oho}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 161-70
%O Map, biblio, and list of vernacular manuscripts

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1975
%T {\fr La proie et l'ombre, de civettes, de noms et d'autre choses (J\"orai et Sr\^e)}
%t ?
%J <Journal d'Agriculture tropicale et de Botanique appliqu\'ee>
%V 22
%N 10-12
%P 341-57

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1975
%X see Ferreiros and Dournes

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1976
%T {\fr <Le parler des J\"orai et le style oral de leur expression>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I Publications orientalistes de France
%Z 343p.

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1977
%T {\fr <Akhan: contes oraux de la for\^et indochinoise>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I Payot
%Z 278p.

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1978
%T Austroasiatic versus Austronesian Indochinese contacts: linguistics and folk literature in south Indochina
%J <Proceedings of the International Congress of Anthropological And Ethnological Sciences>
%V 10
%N 2
%P 76-7
%? (Abstract)

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1978
%T {\fr <Mythes sr\'e: trois pi\'eces de litt\'erature arale d'une ithnie austroasiatique>}
%t ?
%C Paris
%I SELAF
%Z 312p.

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1978
%T Review of Boulbet, {\fr <Paysans de la for\^et>}
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 9
%N 1-2
%P 289-92

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1978
%T Review of Minority Rights Group, <The montagnards of South Vietnam>
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 9
%N 1-2
%P 287-8

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1979
%T {\fr Relations entre l'Austroasiatique et l'Austronesien dans la peninsule indochinoise}
%t Relations between Austroasiatic and Austronesian in the Indo-Chinese peninsula
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 10
%N 2-4
%P 367-81
%O Claims that `Chru-Cham' (MA) and `Chru-Koho' (AA) are mutually comprehensible, and suggests that Chru, Jarai, Rad\'e, R\,oglai, etc. are originally AA languages which have been `Chamisized'

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1980
%T Review of Thierry, {\fr <Etude d'un corpus de contes cambodgien traditionnels>}
%J <L'Homme>
%V 20
%N 3
%P 152-7

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D forthcoming
%T {\fr H'Bia, introduction au parler j\"orai}
%t H'Bia, an introduction to J\"orai speech
%J <Cahiers de l'Homme>

%A Dournes,, Jacques
%A Seo,, Jean
%D 1943
%T {\fr Chants anteques de la montagne. La tradition des montagnards du Hut-Donnai, receuillie avec le concours de Jean Seo et traduite par Jacques Dournes}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 24
%N 3-4
%P 9-111

%A Doutreligne,, Denis
%D 1923-24
%T {\fr Notes sur le langage des Dioy (Thai, Tho) du Kouy Tcheau m\'eridional. Pr\'eced\'ees d'un sommaire historique et linguistique et suivies d'un vocabulaire: He-Miao, Pe-Miao, Dioy et Fran\,cais}
%t ?
%J <Anthropos>
%V 18-19
%P 329-83

%A Doutreligne,, Denis
%D 1926-32
%T {\fr Contributions \`a l'\'etude des populations Dioy du Lang Long (Prov. Kouy Tcheau m\'eridional, Chine)}
%t ?
%J <Anthropos>
%V 21(1926)/22(1927)/24(1929)/25(1930)/26(1931)/27(1932)
%P 462-83/550-70/523-7/163-72/35-53/457-500
%O Includes: Notes sur le langage. Le vocabulaire de la langue dioy, 26:35-50; Quelques notes sur la construction des phrases po\'etiques ou vers dans la po\'esie dioy, 27:457-8 - SJS

%A Dowd,, W. F.
%A Kenowar,, Beni
%D 1907
%T <Ao--English vocabulary>
%C Calcutta
%Z 44p.

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1961
%T Phonology of the word in Highland Yao
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 24
%N 3
%P 531-41

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1963
%T Chinese, Thai, and Miao-Yao
%E Shorto,, Harry L.
%B <Linguistic comparison in South East Asia and the Pacific>
%S <Collected papers in Oriental and African studies>
%C London
%I School of Oriental and African Studies
%P 133-9

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1967
%T Tone-change and tone-shift in White Meo
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 30
%N 3
%P 589-99

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1967
%T Review of Milner and Henderson, eds., <Indo-Pacific linguistic studies>
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 30
%N 2
%P 475

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1971
%T The further relationships of the Miao-Yao languages
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 4 (Indiana University, Bloomington)

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1972
%T Miao-Yao morphophonemics (including causatives)
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 5 (University of Michigan, Ann Arbor)

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1973
%T Strata of Chinese loanwords in the Mien dialect of Yao
%J <Asia Major>
%V 18
%N 1
%P 1-33

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1978
%T The Tai-Yao connection
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 11 (University of Arizona, Tucson)

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1979
%T The rimes of Proto-West-Miao
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 12 (Paris)

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D 1982
%T Problems in the reconstruction of Proto-Miao-Yao
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 15 (Peking)

%A Downer,, Gordon B.
%D forthcoming
%T The Tai elements in Khmu
%E Svantesson,, Jan-Olaf
%B <Papers from the Helsing\/or symposium on Austroasiatic linguistics and literature>
%C Copenhagen/London
%I SIAS/Curzon
%P 107-14

%A Downing,, Bruce T.
%D 1979
%T A Vietnamese--English dialect
%? with Kenneth and Nga Truitner
%J <Minnesota papers in linguistics and philosopy of language> 6

%A Downing,, Bruce T.
%D 1982
%T Vietnamese learning Swedish and Hmong learning French: a comparison of language policies and programs
%E Downing,, Bruce T.
%E Olney,, Douglas P.
%B <The Hmong in the West: observations and reports>, Papers from the 1981 Hmong Research Conference, University of Minnesota
%C Minneapolis
%I Center for Urban and Regional Affairs
%P 249-67

%A Downing,, Bruce T.
%D forthcoming
%T G.I. slang: a Vietnam vocabulary

%A Downing,, Bruce T.
%D forthcoming
%T Language adaptation of the Hmong in Minnesota
%E Tsuchida,, Nobuya
%B <Asians in Minnesota>

%A Downing,, Bruce T.
%A Dwyer,, Sharon
%D 1981
%T <Hmong refugees in an American city: a case study in language contact>
%S <ERIC Report>
%u ED 206 202
%C Washington, DC
%I ERIC Clearinghouse for Language and Linguistics
%Z 31p.
%+ Also published in <MinneTESOL Journal>, 1982

%A Downing,, Bruce T.
%A Olney,, P. Douglas
%D 1982
%T <The Hmong in the West: observations and reports>
%B <Papers from the 1981 Hmong Research Conference held at the University of Minnesota in October 1981>
%C Minneapolis
%I Southeast Asian Refugee Studies Project, Center for Regional and Urban Affairs, University of Minnesota
%Z 410p.
%O S; 20 articles on Hmong linguistics, English language training, culture and culture change, and resettlement issues

%A Dpal-k'a\.n lo-ts\=a-ba
%D 1957
%T {\tib <Kag-yig \.nag-shron \~agrel-ba>}
%e new ed.
%C Hsi-ning
%Z 163p.
%O On correct Tibetan usage and writing - BSTL

%A Drage,, Godfrey
%D 1907
%T <A few notes on Wa>
%C Rangoon
%I Superintendent, Government Printing
%Z 104p.

%A Dragunov,, A. A.
%D 1929
%T Binoms of the type <ni tsu> in the Tangut--Chinese dictionary
%J <Akad. Nauk Doklady>, series B
%P 145-8
%R Reviewed by Pelliot, <T'oung Pao>, series 2, 29(1932):165-6

%A Dragunov,, A. A.
%D 1931
%T Review of W. Simon, {\germ <Tibetisch--Chinesische Wortgleichungen>}
%J <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung>
%V 26
%P 1085-90

%A Dragunov,, A. A.
%D 1936
%T Voiced plosives and affricates in Ancient Tibetan
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 7
%P 165-74

%A Dragunov,, A. A.
%D 1939
%T {\rus Osobennosti fonologischeskoi sistemy drevnetibetskogo iazyka}
%t Peculiarities of the Old Tibetan phonological system
%J <Zapisti instituta vostokovedeniia Akad. Nauk SSSR>
%V 7
%P 284-95

%A Drake,, John
%D 1903
%T <A grammar of the K\'urk\'u language>
%C Calcutta
%Z 190p.
%O AA:Korku

%A Drans,, Jean
%D 1939
%T {\fr Receuil de textes fran\,cais class\'es m\'ethodiquement et par ordre de difficult\'e avec traduction siamoise}
%t ?
%C Bangkok
%I Bangkok Times Press
%Z xii, 145p.

%A Drans,, Jean
%D 1942
%T {\fr <Contribution \`a l'\'etude de la phon\'etique siamoise. Les consonnes nasales initiales>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Publication de la Maison Franco-Japonaise>}
%u s\'erie B, tome I
%C Tokyo
%I Maison Franco-Japonaise
%Z 4, iv, 30p.
%R Reviewed by F. K. Li, <Harvard Journal of Asiatic studies> 11(1948):223

%A Dren-kba\.n rtsis-zur-rgya-mts'o
%D n.d.
%T <Bod-kyi brdai bye-brag blo-ldan nyer-mk'oi sgron-gsal>
%? Pu-lu\.n-ka Monastery (2 mi. W. of Sera), 25 leaves
%O On the three tenses - BSTL

%A Dreyer,, June T.
%D 1980
%T Language planning for China's ethnic minorities
%J <Pacific Affairs> (Vancouver)
%V 51
%N 3
%P 369-83

%A Drouin,, E.
%D 1901
%T {\fr Sp\'ecimen de textes leptcha}
%t Specimen of Lepcha texts
%J <Journal Asiatique>, 9. s\'erie
%V 17
%P 558-63

%A Drouin,, S.
%A K'Nai
%D 1962
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire fran\,cais--montagnard (k\"oho)>}
%t French--Montagnard (K\"oho) dictionary
%Z 4 vols., mimeo.
%C Dalat

%A Druart,, G.
%D 1934
%T <Kharia--English dictionary>
%C Calcutta
%O Bound with Floor and Gheysens, <English--Kharia dictionary>

%A Du Yijian
%D 1957
%T {\ch <`Bai wen' zhi yi>}
%t Questions about Bai
%C ?
%I Yunnan Peoples' Publishing House
%O Minchia

%A Dua,, Hans Raj
%X see Misra and Dua

%A Duan Ling
%X see Mu and Duan

%A Duangchan,, Paiboon
%X see Paiboon Duangchan

%A Duangduen Suwattee
%D 1968
%T <A contrastive analysis of English and Thai verbs>
%U M.A. thesis, University of North Carolina

%A Duangduen Suwattee
%D 1971
%T <A linguistic analysis of difficulties in the English verbal system encountered by native speakers of Thai>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of North Carolina
%Z 213p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 32.2:952-A; University Microfilms 71-21,005

%A Duangduen Suwattee
%D 1974
%T Some problems encountered by Thai students in the learning of English verbs
%J <Pasaa>
%V 4
%N 2
%P 51-65

%A Duangduen Suwattee
%A Pranee Kullavanijaya
%D 1976
%T A study of <'y>, <y>, <h\~n>, and <\~n>
%E Gething,, Thomas W.
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Kullavanijaya,, Pranee
%B <Tai linguistics in honor of Fang-kuei Li>
%C Bangkok
%I Chulalongkorn University Press
%P 214-24

%A Duangduen Rungsaengchan
%A Luesak Piyaram
%D 1983
%T {\thai K\=an kr\=\,on s\=iang nai ph\=as\=a kham\=en thin surin}
%t Phonological reduction in Surin Khmer
%B {\thai <B\=or\=anakhad\=i> 26 ({\eng <Archeology '83>})
%b ??
%C Bangkok
%I Faculty of Archeology, Silpakorn University
%P 203-7

%A Duanghom,, Srinuan
%X see Srinuan Duanghom

%A Duangporn Kamlert
%D 1976
%T <Causative sentences in Thai>
%U M.A. thesis, University of the Philippines
%Z 83p.

%A Duangta Iamchote
%D 1971
%T <The definite and indefinite articles in English and their Thai equivalents>
%U M.A. thesis, Chulalongkorn University

%A Duangta Suphol
%D 1982
%T {\thai Kham '\=artik\=oel (article) kap nak r\=ian thai}
%t Articles and the Thai student
%J <W\=aras\=an manutsas\=at>
%V 10
%N 3
%P 40-58

%A Dubois,, Marcel
%D 1909
%T {\fr <Cu\^oc-ng\;u et m\'ecanisme des sons de la langue annamite - Etude phon\'etique pratique>}
%t ?
%C Hanoi-Haiphong
%I Imprimerie d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%Z 78p.

%A Dubois,, Marcel
%D 1910
%T {\fr <Annamite et fran\,cais - \'etude phon\'etique partique>}
%t ?
%C Hanoi-Haiphong
%I Imprimerie d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%Z 52p.

%A \-D\;uc Ky
%D 1971
%T {\viet \-Di\^em sach Thu\^at ng\;u ng\^on ng\;u hoc Nga--Vi\^et}
%t Review of Russian--Vietnamese linguistic terminology
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1971
%N 1
%P 66

%A \-D\;uc Ky
%D 1973
%T {\viet V\^e v\^an \-d\^e bi\^en soan thu\^at ng\;u cua ta hi\^en nay}
%t On the problem of creating modern technical vocabulary
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1973
%N 3
%P 31-5

%A \-D\;uc Ky
%D 1974
%T {\viet \-Di\^em sach T\;u-\-di\^en Meo--Vi\^et}
%t Review of Meo--Vietnamese dictionary
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1974
%N 4
%P 68-70

%A Duff-Sutherland-Dunbar,, George
%D 1915
%T Abors and Galongs
%J <Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal>
%V 5 (Extra number)
%O Vocabulary, TB: Abor, Galong, 11-12; Memba, 107

%A Duffin,, C. H.
%D 1913
%T <A manual of the pwo-Karen dialect>
%C Rangoon

%A Dulson,, A.
%D 1969
%T {\germ Eine vorgeschichtliche Sprachgemeinschaft in Zentralasien}
%t A prehistoric linguistic unity in Central Asia
%J <Acta Linguistica Hafniensia>
%V 19
%P 19-37
%O Reference to Burmese and Tibetan

%A Dumoutier,, Gustave Emile
%D 1891
%T The Black River of Upper Tonquin and Mount Ba Vi
%J <China Review>
%V 19
%P 139-68
%O Includes notes on nomenclature of Tai and other tribes, and a short note on language of the Black River Tai by E. H. Parker - SJS

%A Dumoutier,, Gustave Emile
%D 1891
%T {\fr Notes sur la Rivi\'ere Noire et le Mont Ba-Vi (Tonkin)}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de G\'eographie historique et descriptive>
%V 1891
%N 4
%P 150-199
%O Linguistique, 195-6; vocabulary, Th\^o Th\^o of Cao-Bang, Th\^o of Upper Red River, Man, and M\;u\;ong of the Hang-Hao (Yun-nan) - SJS
%% Huffman has 150-109

%A Duncanson,, Dennis J.
%D 1971
%T Review of Durand, {\fr <L'oeuvre de la po\'etesse vietnamienne Ho'^-Xu\^an-H\;u\;ong>}
%J <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society>
%V 1971
%P 96-8

%A Dundas,, W. C. M.
%D 1908
%T <An outline grammar and dictionary of the Kachari (Dimasa) language>
%C Shillong
%I Eastern Bengal and Assam Secretariat Press
%Z 170p.
%O Based on Mani Charan Barman's Kachari grammar - BSTL

%A Dunn,, C. W.
%X see Stewart,, J. A., et al., eds., 1940-81

%A Dunnigan,, Timothy
%A Vang Tou Fu
%D 1978
%T Hmong language loyalty and survival strategies in an urban environment
%M Paper presented at the 7th annual University of Wisconsin linguistics symposium

%A Dunnigan,, Timothy
%A Vang Tou Fu
%D 1982
%T Negotiating marriage in Hmong society: an example of the effect of social ritual on language maintenance
%J <Minnesota papers in linguistics and the philosophy of language>
%V 6
%P 28-46

%A D\;u\;ong Danh Ri\^en
%D 1976
%T <English grammar for Vietnamese>
%C New York
%I Ungar
%Z 300p.

%A D\;u\;ong Danh Ri\^en
%D 1977
%T {\viet <V\uan-pham Anh-v\uan>}: {\eng <English grammar for Vietnamese>}
%C New York
%I Frederick Ungar
%Z 214p.

%A \-D\;u\;ong \-D\;uc Nh\;u
%D 1963
%T <A spectrographic study of the vowels of Northern Vietnamese>
%U M.A. thesis, University of London

%A D\;u\;ong Lan Hai
%D 1972
%T {\viet Ban th\^em m\^ot s\^o \-di\^em xung quanh vi\^ec vi\^et hoa t\^en ri\^eng}
%t More points on the capitalization of proper names
%J <Ng\^on-ng\;u>
%V 1972
%N 1
%P 53-60

%A D\;u\;ong Quang Ham
%D nda.
%T {\viet Ban v\^e ti\^eng An Nam}
%t Discussing Vietnamese
%J <Nam-phong>
%V 22
%P 287-97

%A Duong Sarin
%D 1976
%T {\viet La d\'eveloppement de la langue nationale et de la litt\'erature khm\'ere}
%t The development of the Khmer national language and literature
%J <East Asian Cultural Studies>
%V 15
%P 169-76

%A D\;u\;ong Thanh Binh
%D 1971
%T <A tagmemic comparison of the structure of English and Vietnamese sentences>
%S <Janua linguarum>
%u <series practica>
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%Z 232p.
%R Reviewed by B\;uu Khai, <Journal of Oriental Studies> 12(1974):128-30
%R Reviewed by Honey, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 35(1972).1:183
%R Reviewed by Manley, <Linguistics> 157(1975):164-6
%R Reviewed by Nguyen Phu Phong, <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris> 70(1975):439-41
%R Reviewed by D. D. Thomas, <Lingua> 31(1973).1:77-8

%A D\;u\;ong Thanh Binh
%A William Gage
%D 1975
%T <Vietnamese--English phrasebook with useful word list (for English speakers)>
%S <Vietnamese refugee education series>
%u 2
%C Arlington, VA
%I Center for Applied Linguistics
%Z 74p.

%A DuPerron,, P. Castillon
%D 1954
%T {\fr Etude d'un peuplement Man Xanh-Y}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 19
%P 22-42
%O Yao, Xanh-Y

%A Dupla
%A Nguy\^en V\uan Sanh
%D 1900
%T {\fr Vocabulaire annamite--fran\,cais}
%t Annamite--French vocabulary
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 39
%P 1-95

%A DuPoncear,, Peter
%D 1838
%T <A dissertation on the nature and character of the Chinese system of writing, in a letter to John Vaughan, Esq. ... to which is subjoined a vocabulary of the Cochinchinese language (by Joseph Morrone)>
%S <Transactions of the Historical and Literary Society of the American Philosophical Society>
%u 11
%C Philadelphia
%Z xxxii, 375p.

%A Dupont,, Pierre
%D 1954
%T {\fr <La version m\^one du N\=arada-j\=ataka>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%u xxxvi
%C Saigon
%I Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme Orient
%Z 281p.
%R Reviewed by Shorto, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 21(1958):199-200

%A Dupont,, Pierre
%D 1959
%T {\fr <L'arch\'eologie m\^one de Dv\=aravat\=i>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Publications de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>}
%u 41
%C Paris
%I Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme Orient

%A Durand,, Eug\'ene-Marie
%D 1906
%T Review of Aymonier and Cabaton, {\fr <Dictionnaire \vcam--fran\,cais>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 6
%P 347-8

%A Durand,, Eug\'ene-Marie
%D 1907
%T {\fr Notes sur les Chams VI: Les Bas\^en}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 7
%P 313-21
%O Discusses origin of some Cham words connected with the Brahmin priestly caste - SJS

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1952
%T {\fr Notes sur les pays tai de Phong-th\^o}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises> n.s.
%V 27
%P 193-231
%O Vocabulary, AA: Kouei (Kuy); TK: Nhang (Dioi), Thou (Th\^o), 214-221

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1953
%T {\fr L'avenir des \'etudes vi\^etnamiennes}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises> n.s.
%V 28
%P 69-71

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1960
%T Review of Nguy\^en Bat Tuy, {\viet <Ng\^on-ng\;u hoc Vi\^et-nam>}
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 248
%P 290-3

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1961
%T {\fr Conclusions s\'emantiques et syntaxiques tir\'ees de l'\'etude des impressifs en vietnamien}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 56
%P xii-xiv (r\'esum\'e)

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1961
%T {\fr Les impressifs in Vi\^etnamien, \'etude pr\'eliminaire}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 36
%N 1
%P 5-51

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1962
%T Review of B\;uu C\^am, {\viet <D\^an-nh\^ap nghi\^en-c\;uu ch\;u-n\^om>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 50
%P 561

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1964
%T Review of L\^e ngoc Tru, {\viet <Chanh-ta vi\^et-ng\;u>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 52
%N 1
%P 247-53

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1966
%T Review of Tr\;u\;ong V\uan Chinh and Nguy\^en Hi\^en L\^e, {\viet <Khao lu\^an ng\;u phap vi\^etnam>}
%J <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 53
%N 1
%P 303-5

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1967
%T {\fr <Les transcriptions de la langue vietnamienne et l'oeuvre des missionnaires europ\'eens>}
%t ?
%E Drake,, F. S.
%B <Symposium on historical, archeological and linguistic studies on Southern China, South-East Asia and the Hong Kong region>
%C Hongkong
%U Hongkong University Press
%P 288-94

%A Durand,, Maurice
%D 1968
%T {\fr <L'oeuvre de la po\'etesse vietnamienne H\^o-Xu\^an-H\;u\;ong, textes, trad., et notes>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme Orient, Collection de textes et documents sur l'Indochine>}
%u 9, Textes n\^om. 2
%C Paris
%I Adrien Maisonneuve
%Z 192p.
%R Reviewed by Duncanson, <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> 1971:96-8

%A Durand,, Maurice
%A Tr\^an Ham T\^an
%D 1953
%T {\fr Culte de la baleine: Chant des p\^echeurs de Tr\;u\;ong-\-d\^ong}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e des Etudes Indo-chinoises>
%V 28
%P 183-219

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1912
%T Note on the word Talaing
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 2
%P 100-1

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1912
%T Further note on the word Talaing
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 2
%P 246-8

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1913
%T Burmese philology
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 3
%P 12-21

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1913
%T Talaing Nissayas
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 3
%P 103-46
%O Mon vocabulary, 114-45 - SJS

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1914
%T Talaing Nissayas: some further corrections
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 4
%P 135-6

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1915
%T {\burm <Kla\~njo-kye:z\=u>}
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 5
%P 98-102
%% Title is italicized

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1916
%T Extract from the Burmese face of the Myazedi inscription, Pagan
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 6
%P 203-5

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1916
%T {\burm <Kla\~njo-khe{\# subscript 3}z\=u{# subscript 3}>}
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 6
%P 95-8

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1916
%T Literal transliteration of the Burmese alphabet
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 6
%P 81-90

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1919
%T The Burmese face of the Myazedi inscription at Pagan
%J <Epigraphia Birmanica>
%V 1
%N 1
%P 1-46

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%D 1921
%T <A list of inscriptions found in Burma (Archeological Survey of Burma), Part 1: The list of inscriptions arranged in the order of their dates>
%C Rangoon
%I Superintendent, Government Printing
%Z 216p.
%O Inscriptions in Burmese, Pali, Mon, Sanskrit, Pyu, Thai, Chinese, and Tamil

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%A et al.
%D 1914
%T Replies to Mr. Cooper's note on Talaing Nissayas and vocabulary
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 4
%P 233-6

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%A Blagden,, C. O.
%D 1919
%T <The Myazedi inscriptions>
%S <Epigraphia Birmanica>
%u 1.1
%C Rangoon
%I Government Printing and Stationery
%Z v, 68p.

%A Duroiselle,, Charles
%A Blagden,, C. O.
%D 1919-36
%T <Epigraphia Birmanica, being lithic and other inscriptions of Burma>
%S <Archeological Survey of Burma>
%C Rangoon
%I Government Printing and Stationery
%Z 5 vols.

%A Durr,, Jacques A.
%D 1949
%T {\fr Mat\'eriaux pour servir \`a une \'etude comparative des langues sino-tib\'eto-birmanes bas\'ees sur l'interpretation des faits de langue tib\'etains: r\'esum\'e}
%t ?
%B <Proceedings of the International Congress of Orientalists>
%V 21 (Paris)
%P 206-7

%A Durr,, Jacques A.
%D 1950
%T {\fr <Deux trait\'es grammaticaux tib\'etaine>}
%t ?
%C Heidelberg
%Z 95p.
%R Reviewed by Regamey, <Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure> 9(1950):92-8
%R Reviewed by J. Schubert, <Sinologica> 4(1954):60
%R Reviewed by J. Schubert, <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung> 49(1954):366-7
%R Reviewed by Snellgrove, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 16(1954):179-82

%A Durr,, Jacques A.
%D 1950
%T {\fr <Morphologie du verbe tib\'etain>}
%t ?
%C Heidelberg
%Z 192p.
%R Reviewed by Regamey, <Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure> 9(1950): 92-8
%R Reviewed by Lamotte, <Le Mus\'eon> 64(1951):366-7
%R Reviewed by J. Schubert, <Sinologica> 3(1953):312
%R Reviewed by J. Schubert, <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung> 49(1954):261-2

%A Durr,, Jacques A.
%D 1954
%T {\germ Wie \"ubersetze ich Tibetisch? oder Probleme der vergleichenden Sprachwissenschaft der tibetisch-barmanischen Sprachengruppe}
%t ?
%B {\germ <Asiatica, Festschrift Friedrich Weller>}
%b ?
%C Leipzig
%P 53-77

%A Durr,, Jacques A.
%D 1954
%T Review of Nobel, {\? <Suvar\.naprabh\=asottamas\=utra>}
%J <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung>
%V 49
%P 76-9

%A Durr,, Jacques A.
%D 1962
%T Review of F. Thomas, <Ancient folk-literature from northwestern Tibet>
%J <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung>
%V 57
%P 534-7

%A Durrenburger,, E. Paul
%D 1983
%T Lisu: political form, ideology, and economic action
%E McKinnon,, John
%E Wanat Bhruksasri
%B <Highlanders of Thailand>
%C Kuala Lumpur
%I Oxford University Press
%P 215-26
%O Ethnographic, with demographic map

%A Dutsadiporn Chamnirokhant
%D 1983
%T {\thai <Ph\=as\=as\=at ch\=oeng prawat lae ph\=as\=a thai pr\=iap th\=iap>}
%t Historical linguistics and comparative Tai
%C Bangkok
%I Department of Thai, Chulalongkorn University
%Z 199p.

%A Dutsadiporn Chamniroksan
%D 1969
%T {\thai <'Anuph\=ak nai ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Particles in the Thai language
%U M.A. thesis, Department of Thai, Chulalongkorn University

%A Dutta,, D. K.
%D 1979
%T A little-known tribe of Tirap
%J <Journal of the Research Department, Government of Arunachal Pradesh>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 61-7

%A Duyvendak,, J. J. L.
%D 1939
%T Review of St\"ubel, {\germ <Die Li-St\"amme der Insel Hainan>}
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 35
%P 404-7

%A Dwarikesh,, D. P. S.
%X see Zide,, N. and Dwarikesh

%A Dy Phon,, Pauline
%X see Martin,, M., and Dy Phon

%A Dwyer,, Sharon
%D 1981
%X see Downing and Dwyer

%A Dwyer,, Sharon
%D 1982
%T An error analysis of English compositions written by Hmong college students
%E Downing,, Bruce T.
%E Olney,, Douglas P.
%B <The Hmong in the West: observations and reports>, Papers from the 1981 Hmong Research Conference, University of Minnesota
%C Minneapolis
%I Center for Urban and Regional Affairs
%P 226-48

%A Dyen,, Isidore
%D 1960
%T Review of Grace, <The position of Polynesian languages within the Austronesian (= Malayo-Polynesian) family>
%J <Journal of the Polynesian Society>
%V 69
%P 180-4

%A Dyen,, Isidore
%D 1965
%T Formosan evidence for some new Proto-Austronesian phonemes
%E Milner,, G. B.
%E Henderson,, Eug\'enie J. A.
%B <Indo-Pacific linguistic studies>
%S <Lingua>
%u 14-15
%C Amsterdam
%I North Holland Publishing Co.
%V 1
%P 285-305

%A Dyen,, Isidore
%D 1965
%T <A lexicostatistical classification of the Austronesian languages>
%S <International Journal of American Linguistics>
%u Memoir 19
%C Baltimore
%I Waverly Press
%Z 64p.
%O Reference to Chru of Vietnam
%R Reviewed by Elbert, <American Anthropologist> 67(1965):153-4
%R Reviewed by A. Healey, <Linguistics> 52(1969):11-25

%A Dyen,, Isidore
%D 1971
%T The Austronesian languages and Proto-Austronesian
%E Sebeok,, Thomas A.
%B <Linguistics in Oceania>
%S <Current trends in linguistics>
%u 8
%C The Hague and Paris
%I Mouton
%P 5-54
%O Discusses hypotheses concerning external relationships of AA

%A Dyen,, Isidore
%D 1971
%T The Chamic languages
%E Sebeok,, Thomas A.
%B <Linguistics in Oceania>
%S <Current trends in linguistics>
%u 8
%C The Hague and Paris
%I Mouton
%P 100-10


%% E (Huffman pp. 116-123), input and edited by David Stampe, April 1995

%A E Shwe,, U
%X see (see Novikov, Kolobkov, and E Shwe)

%A Eagling,, C. G.
%D 1952
%T <Elementary Thai for English-speaking students>
%C Bangkok
%I Prachandra Press
%Z 195p.

%A Eakin,, P. A.
%D 1932
%T <Manual for the study of the Siamese language phonetically, prepared for use in the language school for new missionaries of the American Presbyterian Mission>
%e 3rd ed.
%C Bangkok

%A Earle,, Michael A.
%D 1966
%T Vietnamese syllable nuclei: an interpretation of some acoustic characteristics
%M Paper read at the summer meeting of the Linguistic Society of America

%A Earle,, Michael A.
%D 1975
%T <An acoustic phonetic study of Northern Vietnamese tones>
%S <Speech Communications Research Laboratory Monograph series>
%u 11
%C Santa Barbara, CA
%I Speech Communications Research Laboratory, Inc.
%Z 214p.

%A Eastes,, A. E.
%X see (see Ko and Eastes)

%A Eberhard,, Alide
%X see (see Eberhard, Wolfram)

%A Eberhard,, Wolfram
%D 1943, 1968
%T <The local cultures of South and East China>
%? Translated from the German of 1943 by Alide Eberhard
%C Leiden
%I E. J. Brill
%Z 522p.

%A Ebihara,, May
%D 1964
%T Khmer
%E LeBar,, Frank M.
%E Hickey,, Gerald C.
%E Musgrave,, John K.
%B <Ethnic groups of mainland Southeast Asia>
%C New Haven
%I HRAF Press
%P 98-105

%A Ebihara,, May
%D 1968
%T <Svay, a Khmer village in Cambodia>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Columbia University
%Z 717p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 32.1:44-B; University Microfilms 71-17,577
%O Ethnography

%A Echols,, John M.
%D 1966
%T Notes on the materials for the study of Atjeh
%J <Indonesia>
%V 1
%P 124-30

%A Eckert,, Penelope
%D 1970
%T Relativization in Cambodian
%M Columbia University term paper

%A Edgar,, J. Huston
%D 1932
%T An English--Giarung vocabulary
%J <Journal of the West China Border Research Society>
%V 5, supplement.
%O Gyarong

%A Edgar,, J. Huston
%D 1932
%T Sumerian and Tibetan equivalents
%J <Journal of the West China Border Research Society>
%V 5
%P 68

%A Edgar,, J. Huston
%D 1932
%T The Tibetan tonal system
%J <Journal of the West China Border Research Society>
%V 5
%P 66-7

%A Edgar,, J. Huston
%D 1934
%T Language changes in west China
%J <Journal of the West China Border Research Society>
%V 6
%P 258-60
%O Vocabulary, TB: Chiang, Gyarung, Lolo, 259

%A Edgerton,, Franklin
%D 1944
%T Review of Gould and Richardson, <Tibetan word book>
%J <Language>
%V 20
%P 174-5

%A Edkins,, Joseph
%D 1871
%T <China's place in philology>
%C London
%O Argues for a common origin of European and Asian languages

%A Edkins,, Joseph
%D 1871
%T A vocabulary of Miau dialects
%J <Chinese Recorder and Missionary Journ.>
%V 3
%P 96-9, 134-7, 147-50
%O Vocab, MY: Miao; TK: Chung Miau (= Chungchia - BSTL), Pa pe; TB: Lolo

%A Educational Services
%D 1960
%T <Cambodian: Language familiarization manual>
%C Washington, DC
%I Prepared for the Department of Defense by Educational Services
%Z 43p.

%A Educational Services
%D 1960
%T <Lao: Language familiarization manual>
%C Washington, DC
%I Prepared for the Department of Defense by Educational Services
%Z 41p.

%A Educational Services
%D 1960
%T <Thai: Language familiarization manual>
%C Washington, DC
%I Prepared for the Department of Defense by Educational Services
%Z 44p.

%A Educational Services
%D 1960
%T <Vietnamese: Language familiarization manual>
%C Washington, DC
%I Prepared for the Department of Defense by Educational Services
%Z 43p.

%A Edwards,, Evangeline Dora
%A Blagden,, Charles Otto
%D 1940-42
%T A Chinese vocabulary of Cham words and phrases, transcribed, translated, and edited by E. D. Edwards and C. O. Blagden
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 10
%P 53-91

%A Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%D 1949
%T {\fr <Carte ethnolinguistique de l'Indochine>}
%t Ethnolinguistic map of Indo-China
%C Hanoi
%O Scale 1:2,000,000

%A Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%D 1949
%T {\fr <Schema d'implantation des montagnards du sud indochinois>}
%t ?
%C Hanoi

%A Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%D n.d.
%T <Unpublished manuscripts on Nung at Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient: Ms. no. 207.I.5: Nung of Giao-ho, near Phong; VII.1: Nung of Lang-s\;on; VIII.2: Nung of That-khe; IV.7;: Nung of Ha-giang; IV.1: Nung of Ha-giang; VIII.6: Nung of M\;u\;ong-khouang; VIII.7: Nung of Kao-kay; VIII.9: Nung of Bao-thang; VIII.10: Nung of M\;u\;ong-khung; IV.6: `Th\^o' of Ha-giang>
%C Paris
%I Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient

%A Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient
%D n.d.
%T <Unpublished manuscripts on Tai languages at Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient: Ms. no. 207, V.5: Black Tai of Maido; V.6: Black Tai of Mail-thuong; VI.2 Black Tai of Lai-chau; XIV.2: Black Tai of S\;on-la; XiX.6: Black Tai of Thach L\;u\;ong; I.2: Th\^o of Bac-giang; I.3: Th\^o of Bac-giang; II.3: Th\^o of Cao-ky; II.4: Th\^o of Cho-ra; II.5: Th\^o of Bac-can; III.1: Th\^o of Soc-giang; III.2: Th\^o of Don-my; III.5: Th\^o of Trung-khanh-phu; III.7: Th\^o of Cao-bang and Lang-son; III.8: Th\^o of Cao-bang; III.9: Th\^o of Cao-binh and Nguyen-binh; XIX.4: Thai of Y\^en-bai; VI.3-4: White Tai of Lai-chau>
%C Paris
%I Ecole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient

%A Efimova,, O. E.
%A et al.
%D 1960
%T {\rus <Russko--v'etnamskii slovar'>}
%t Russian--Vietnamese dictionary
%? edited by Nguy\^en V\uan Thanh
%C Moscow
%Z 604p.

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1957
%T The eighth earthly branch in Archaic Chinese and Tai
%J <Oriens>
%V 10
%P 196-9

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1957
%T Essentials of Shan phonology and script
%J <Academia Sinica/Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology>
%V 29
%P 121-9

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1958
%T Pidgin Portuguese, A.D. 1621
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 46
%P 111-14
%O Thai

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1959
%T Essentials of Kh\"un phonology and script
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 24
%N 3-4
%P 123-46

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1959
%T A note on some Chinese numerals as loan words in Tai
%J <T'oung Pao>
%V 57
%N 1-2
%P 67-74
%O Reference to Thai, L\"u, and Kh\"un

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1959
%T Swatow loan-words in Siamese
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 23
%P 137-56

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1960
%T The etymology of Siamese <d\^ajjin> `to hear'
%J <T'oung Pao>, series 2
%V 48
%P 423-5

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1960
%T The romanization of Shan
%J <Burma Research Society Fiftieth Anniversary Publication>
%V I
%P 47-9

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1961
%T Studies in Thai dialectology
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 26
%N 1-2
%P 43-91
%O On Kh\"un, L\"u, and dialects in Thailand - SJS

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1960-71
%T Review of R. Campbell, <Noun substitutes in modern Thai>
%J <Lingua>
%V 26
%N 3
%P 333-4

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1971
%T Phonation types in Chinese and South East Asian languages
%J <Acta Linguistica Hafniensia>
%V 13
%N 2
%P 159-72
%O Reference to Burmese, Mon, Thai, and Vietnamese

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1971
%T Problems in the description of Akha
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 4 (Indiana University, Bloomington)

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1971
%T Some Akha basic features
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 4 (Indiana University, Bloomington)

%A Egerod,, S\/oren (translator)
%D 1971
%X see Phayaphrom

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1972
%T The tones of Phuket and Ko Samui: a correction
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Noss,, Richard B.
%B <Tai phonetics and phonology>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute for English Language
%P 50-1

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1973
%T Further notes on the Akha
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 6 (University of California/San Diego)

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1973
%T Review of Benedict, <Sino-Tibetan conspectus>
%J <Journal of Chinese Linguistics>
%V 1
%N 3
%P 498-505

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1974
%T Further notes on Akha sentence particles
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 7 (Georgia State University, Atlanta)

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1974
%T Sino-Tibetan languages
%B <Encyclopedia Britannica>
%e 15th ed.
%V 16
%P 796-906

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1974
%T Review of Shorto, <A dictionary of the Mon inscriptions>
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 36
%P 531-2

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1976
%T Benedict's Austro-Thai hypothesis and the traditional view of Sino-Thai relationship
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 6
%P 51-60

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1976
%T Review of Conrady, {\germ <Eine indochinesische Causativ-Denominativ-Bildung>}
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 6
%P 51

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1976
%T Review of D. D. Thomas, <Chrau grammar>
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 37
%P 291-2

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1977
%T Review of Heimbach, <White Meo--English dictionary>
%J <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung>
%V 72
%P 94

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1978
%T An English--Rad\'e vocabulary
%J <Bulletin of the Museum for Far Eastern Antiquities>
%V 50
%P 490104

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1982
%T An English--Mlabri basic vocabulary
%J <Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies Newsletter>
%V 16
%P 14-20
%O Some 600 words in phonological transcription

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1982
%T A linguistic typology on the border between Himalayan and trans-Himalayan languages, exemplified by Akha
%M Paper presented to the Linguistic Society of Bergen, Nov. 1, 1982

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1984
%T The language of the Mlabri or Spirits of the Yellow Leaves: preliminary observations on its affiliation
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 17 (University of Oregon, Eugene)

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1985
%T Typological features in Akha
%E Thurgood,, Graham
%E Matisoff,, James A.
%E Bradley,, David
%B <Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan area: the state of the art. Papers presented to Paul K. Benedict for his 71st birthday>
%S <Pacific linguistics>
%u C.87
%C Canberra
%I Department of Linguistics, Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University
%P 96-104

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%D 1985
%T Little Claus in Akhaland
%E McCoy,, John
%E Light,, Timothy
%B <Contributions to Sino-Tibetan studies>
%S <Cornell Linguistic Contributions>
%u vol. 5
%C Leiden
%I E. J. Brill
%O Texts in Akha

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%A Hansson,, Inga-Lill
%D 1974
%T An Akha conversation on death and funeral
%J <Acta Orientalia>
%V 36
%P 225-84
%O Includes brief outline of phonology and basic grammar; text and translation; 21 pages of vocabulary

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%A Hansson,, Inga-Lill
%D 1976
%T Aspects of Akha grammar
%B <Lampang Reports, Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies, Spec. Publ. 5>
%P 230-43

%A Egerod,, S\/oren
%A Hashimoto,, Mantar\=o J.
%D 1982
%T Concord, vowel harmony, and accents: a typo-geographical view of suprasegmental government
%J <Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages>
%V 19
%P 1-19

%A Ehrenfels,, U. R. von
%D 1953
%T Khasi kinship terms in four dialects
%J <Anthropos>
%V 48
%P 396-412

%A Ehrman,, Madeline E.
%X see Lim, Ehrman, and Kem Sos

%A Ehrman,, Madeline E.
%X see Kem Sos, Lim Hak Kheang, and Ehrman,, Madeline E.

%A Ehrman,, Madeline E.
%A Kem Sos
%D 1972
%T <Contemporary Cambodian: grammatical sketch>
%C Washington, DC
%I Foreign Service Institute
%Z xii, 115p.

%A Ehrman,, Madeline E.
%A Kem Sos
%A Lim Hak Kheang
%D 1974
%T <Contemporary Cambodian: the land and the economy>
%C Washington, DC
%I Foreign Service Institute
%Z xvii, 358p.
%O Reader

%A Ehrman,, Madeline E.
%A Kem Sos
%A Lim Hak Kheang
%D 1974
%T <Contemporary Cambodian: political institutions>
%C Washington, DC
%I Foreign Service Institute
%Z xiii, 373p.
%O Reader

%A Eickstedt,, Egon von
%D 1942
%T {\germ \"Uber Herkunft und Typus der Miau-St\"amme in Westchina}
%t ?
%J <Sinica>
%V 17
%P 121-35

%A Eimer,, Helmut
%D 1968
%T {\germ Ein Saskya pa-Gebet}
%t A Saskya pa-prayer
%J <Zentral-asiatische Studien>
%V 2
%P 151-78
%O Edited, with translation and notes

%A Eisengarten,, Renate
%D 1982
%T {\germ `Involuntativ'-Kategorisierung im Indonesischen und Vietnamesischen - ein neurer Beweis austrischer Sprachzusammengeh\"origheit}
%t Involuntative categorization in Indonesian and Vietnamese - a new ?? of Austric language relatedness
%B <Wissenschaftliche Beitr\"age der Friedrich-Schiller-Universit\"at Jena>
%P 59-83

%A Ejiri Eitaro
%D 1944
%T {\jap <Taigo bunten>}
%t Thai grammar
%C Osaka/Tokyo/Kyoto
%I Oyshima Suppan Kabuskiki Kaisha {\? Kabuskiki ?}
%Z 353p.

%A Ekachit Kraivichian
%D 1983, in prog.
%T {\thai <With\=i k\=an mung khw\=am son cai th\=i n\=am wal\=i nai ph\=as\=a thai>}
%t Focus on noun phrases in Thai
%U M.A. thesis, Department of Linguistics, Chulalangkorn University

%A Ekahitanon,, Suthi
%X see Suthi Ekahitanon

%A Ekawit Chinowat
%D 1983
%T {\thai <S\,uks\=a pr\=iap th\=iap with\=i s\=ang kham nai ph\=as\=a k\=uy, br\=u, lae s\=o>}
%t A comparative study of the morphological processes of Kuy, Bru, and So
%U M.A. thesis, Chulalangkorn University
%Z 121p.
%O With English abstract

%A Ekvall,, Robert B.
%D 1977
%T Correlation of contradictions: a Tibetan semantic device
%E McCormack,, William C.
%E Wurm,, Stephen A.
%B <Language and thought: anthropological issues>
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%P 325-6

%A Elbert,, Samuel H.
%D 1965
%T Review of Dyen, <The lexicostatistical classification of the Austronesian languages>
%J <American Anthropologist>
%V 67
%P 153-5

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1961
%T {\rus Slozhnye glagoly v brmanskom iazyke}
%t Complex verbs in the Burmese language
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 305
%P 51-64

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1962
%T {\rus O chastiakh rechi v birmanskom iazyke}
%t On parts of speech in the Burmese language
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 306
%P 63-7
%+ Also published 1963, in Pinus,, E. M., and Ivanov,, S. N., eds., <Filologiia stran vostoka>, Leningrad: Izd. Leningrad U.

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1964
%T {\rus K voprosu o kategorii vremeni i vida v birmanskom iazyke}
%t On the question of the category of tense and aspect in the Burmese language
%M Konferentsiia po iazykam Iugo-Vostochnoi Azii, Moscow

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1965
%T {\rus O skhodstve i razlichniiakh birmonskogo, tamil'skogo i kkhmerskogo iazykov}
%t Concerning the similarities and differences of the Burmese, Tamil, and Khmer languages
%E Niklol'skii,, L. B.
%B {\rus <Lingvisticheskaia tipologiia vostochnye iayki>}
%b Linguistic typology and oriental languages
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 143-8

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1966
%T {\rus <Chastnye grammaticheskie kategorii glagola v sovremennom birmanskom iazykov>}
%t Specific grammatical categories of the verb in modern Burmese
%U Kand. dis. Leningradskii gosudarstvennyi universitat imeni A. A. Zhdanova
%Z 157p.

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1972
%T {\rus O slovosochetaniiakh v kkhmerskom iazyke}
%t On word phrases in Khmer
%J <Vestnik Leningradskogo gosudarstvennogo Universiteta>
%V 28
%N 8
%P 128-9

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1973
%T {\rus O strukture kkhmerskogo iazyke}
%t On the structure of Khmer
%E Ivanov,, S. N.
%E et al.
%B {\rus <Voprosy filologii stran Azii i Afriki II>}
%b Philological problems in the countries of Asia and Africa II
%C Leningrad
%I Leningrad University
%P 42-8

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1973
%X see Kasevich and Elovkov

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1974
%T {\rus Glagol'nye sochetaniia v kkhmerskom iazyke}
%t Verbal combinations in Khmer
%J <Vestnik Leningradskogo gosudarstvennogo Universiteta>
%V 1974
%N 20
%P 151-5

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1977
%T {\rus O leksike, obshchei dlia kkhmerskogo i taiskogo iazykov}
%t On the vocabulary common to both Khmer and Thai
%E Syromiatnikov,, N. A.
%B {\rus <Iazyki zarubeshnogog vostoka, Sbornik statei>}
%b Languages of the foreign East, Collection of articles
%C Moscow
%I Nauka
%P 29-36

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%D 1977
%T {\rus <Ocherki po leksikologii iazykov iugo-vostochnoi Azii>}
%t Notes on the lexicology of Southeast Asian languages
%C Leningrad
%I Izdatel'svo Leningradskogo Universiteta
%Z 151p.

%A Elovkov,, D. I.
%A Andreev,, N. D.
%D 1961
%T {\rus Iz nabliudenii nad fonteikoi kkhmerskog iazyka}
%t Observations on the phonetics of the Khmer language
%J <Uchenye zapiski Leningradskogo ordena Lenina gosudarstvennogo Universiteta im. A. A. Zhdanova>
%V 194
%N 12
%P 100-7

%A Embree,, John F.
%A Dotson,, D. O.
%D 1950
%T <Bibliography of the peoples and cultures and mainland Southeast Asia>
%C New Haven, CT
%I Yale University
%+ 2nd. ed.: New York: Russel and Russel, 1972

%A Embree,, John F.
%A Thomas,, William L.
%D 1950
%T <Ethnic map and gazeteer of northern Southeast Asia> {\? sp. gazetteer?}
%S <Yale East Asia Studies>
%C New Haven, CT
%I Yale University

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%D 1941
%T Review of Read, <Balti grammar>
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 61
%P 112-3

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%D 1944
%X see Ly \-D\;uc L\^am, Emeneau,, M. B., and Steinen,, Diether von den

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%D 1947
%T Homonyms and puns in Vietnamese
%J <Language>
%V 23
%N 3
%P 199-209

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%D 1950
%T Languages and non-linguistic patterns
%J <Language>
%V 26
%P 199-209
%O Discussion of the Vietnamese pronominal system

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%D 1951
%T <Studies in Vietnamese (Annamese) grammar>
%S <University of California Publications in Linguistics>
%u 8
%C Berkeley/Los Angeles
%I University of California Press
%Z 236p.

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%D 1954
%T Linguistic prehistory of India
%J <Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society>
%V 98
%P 282-93

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%D 1956
%T India as a linguistic area
%J <Language>
%V 32
%N 1
%P 3-16
%O Includes discussion of Munda

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%D 1961
%T Review of Pinnow, {\germ <Versuch einer historischen Lautlehre der Kharia-Sprache>}
%J <Journal of the American Oriental Society>
%V 82
%N 1
%P 107-9

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%D 1965
%T <India and historical grammar>
%C Annamalainagar
%I Annamalai University
%Z 75p.
%O Reference to AA and TB

%A Emeneau,, Murray B.
%A Steinen,, Diether von den
%D 1944
%T <A course in Annamese: lessons in the pronunciation and grammar of the Annamese language>
%C Berkeley, CA
%Z mimeo.

%A Emmerick,, R. E.
%D 1967
%T <Tibetan texts concerning Khotan>
%S <London Oriental Series>
%u 19
%C London
%I Oxford University Press
%R Reviewed by J. W. de Jong, <Indo-Iranian Journal> 13(1971).3:222-5
%R Reviewed by W. Simon, <Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society> 1971:74.5

%A Emmerick,, R. E.
%D 1973
%T Review of Blondeau, {\fr <Mat\'eriaux pour l'\'etude de l'hippologie... tib\'etaines>}
%J <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies>
%V 36
%P 698-700

%A Emmerick,, R. E.
%D 1975
%T A chapter from the <Rgyud-b\'zi>
%J <Asia Major>
%V 19
%N 2
%P 141-62
%O Text, commentary, and translation

%A Emmerick,, R. E.
%D 1978
%T Some lexical items from the <Rgyud-b\'zi>
%B <Proceedings of the Csoma de K\"or\"os memorial symposium>
%S <Bibl. Orientalis Hungarica>
%u 23
%C Budapest
%I Akademiai Kiad\'o
%P 101-8

%A Em-on Chittasobhon
%D 1984
%T Minority languages in Thailand
%M Paper read at the Chiengmai Symposium on Language and Linguistics (Chiengmai University)

%A Em-on Chittasobhon
%A Direkchai Mahathanansin
%D 1982
%T {\thai Wikhr\,o ph\=as\=a th\=i pra\=akot nai wannakhad\=i ch\=oeng s\=ana\=a lann\=athai}
%t Linguistic analysis of the Lanna Thai religious literature
%? Research supported by the James Thompson Foundation
%Z 150p.
%+ Also published 1981 in Phensri Duk, ed., <K\uan samman\=a r\=\,uang watthanatham ph\=\,un b\=an: khati' khw\=am ch\=\,ua, sinlapakam lae ph\=as\=a>, Bangkok: Chulalongkorn University, Thai Studies Program, 40p.

%A Endicott,, Kirk
%D 1975
%T Brief report on the Semaq Beri of Pahang
%J <Federated Museums Journal> n.s.
%V 20
%P 1-24
%O Ethnographic and demographic data

%A Endle,, Sidney
%D 1884
%T <Outline grammar of the Kach\'ari (B\oa\.r\oa) language, as spoken in District Darrang>
%C Shillong
%O TB: Kachari, Hill Tippera

%A Endle,, Sidney
%D 1911
%T <The Kach\'aris>
%C London
%O Songs, 51-2; folktales, 54-70; grammar, 71-80; folktales by J. D. Anderson, 97-121; map of Barish area follows 121 - BSTL

%A Endo Noriko
%X see Ishii, Akagi, and Endo

%A Engl\"ander,, Gottfried
%A M\"ockel,, Werner
%D 1970
%T {\germ <Glossar Deutsch--Vietnamesisch f\"ur den mathematisch-naturwissenschaftlichen Unterricht>}
%t German--Vietnamese glossary for mathematical and scientific purposes
%C Leipzig
%I Herder Institut, Karl-Marx-Universit\"at
%Z 135p.

%A English Language Services, Inc.
%D 1961
%T <An intermediate and advanced Laotian refresher course>
%C Washington, DC
%I English Language Services, Inc.

%E Enoki,, Kazuo
%D 1961
%T <A survey of bibliographies in Western languages concerning East and Southeast Asian studies>
%S <Centre for East Asian Cultural Studies, Bibliography 4>
%C Tokyo
%I Centre for East Asian Cultural Studies
%Z iv, 227p.

%A Enr\'iquez,, Colin Metcalfe Dallas
%D 1919
%T <Kachin military terms>
%C Rangoon
%Z 92p.

%A Enr\'iquez,, Colin Metcalfe Dallas
%D 1921
%T The Yawyins or Lus
%J <Journal of the Burma Research Society>
%V 11
%P 70-4
%O A few words, 73 - BSTL

%A Enr\'iquez,, Colin Metcalfe Dallas
%D 1924
%T <Races of Burma>
%C Delhi
%I Manager of Publications
%Z 92p.
%+ Reprinted New York: AMS Press, 1981)
%O Ethnography

%A Epstein,, V. G.
%D 1958
%T {\rus K voprosu o transkribirovanii birmanskikh imen sobstvennykh}
%t On the question of the transcription of Burmese proper names
%J <Sovetskoe Vostokovendenie>
%V 1958
%N 5
%P 127-30

%A Epstein,, V. G.
%D 1959
%T {\rus <Pravila russkoi transkiptsii birmanskikh geograficheskikh nazvanii>}
%t Rules of Russian transcription of Burmese geographical names
%C Moscow
%I Izd-vo vostochnoi lit-ry
%Z 54p.

%A Erickson,, Donna M.
%D 1974
%T Fundamental frequency contours of the tones of standard Thai
%J <Pasaa>
%V 4
%N 1
%P 127-30

%A Erickson,, Donna M.
%D 1975
%T Phonetic implications for an historical account of tonogenesis in Thai
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Chamberlain,, James R.
%B <Studies in Tai linguistics in honor of William J. Gedney>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 100-11

%A Erickson,, Donna M.
%D 1976
%T <A physiological analysis of the tones of Thai>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Connecticut
%Z xii, 155 leaves, ill.
%L Melvyl

%A Erickson,, Donna M.
%D 1978
%X see Abramson and Erickson

%A Errington,, Joseph
%D 1976
%T Sound change in Khmer
%J <Papers of the Chicago Linguistic Society>
%V 12
%P 168-82

%A Errington de la Croix,, J.
%D 1882
%T {\fr Etude sur les Sakaies de P\'erak (presqu'\^ile de Malacca)}
%t ?
%J <Revue Ethnographique>
%V 1
%P 317-41
%O Vocabulary, AA: Temiar, 327-9 - SJS

%A Esche,, Annemarie
%D 1976
%T {\germ <W\"orterbuch burmesisch--deutsch>}
%t Burmese--German dictionary
%C Leipzig
%I Verlag Enzyklop\"adie
%Z 546p.
%R Reviewed by Allot, <Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies> 42(1979):168-9
%R Reviewed by Be\vckova, <Archiv Orient\'al\'ni> 46(1978).4:358-62
%R Reviewed by Kaden, <Zeitschrift f\"ur Phonetik, Sprachwissenschaft, und Kommunikationsforschung> 33(1980):243-5
%R Reviewed by Okell, <Orientalistische Literaturzeitung> 74(1979):495-7

%A Esche,, Annemarie
%D 1981
%T {\germ Einige Erfahrungen bei der Abfassung der ersten W\"orterbuchs Burmesisch--Deutsch}
%t ?
%E Andronov,, M.
%E Morgenroth,, W.
%E Richter,, E.
%B {\germ <S\"udasiatische sprachwissenschaftliche Studien>}
%b South Asian linguistic studies
%S <Linguistische Studien Berlin>
%u Reihe A, Arbeitsberichte 82
%C Berlin
%I Akademie der Wissenschaften der DDR
%P 47-66

%A Esquirol,, Joseph
%D 1932
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire kanao--fran\,cais et fran\,cais--kanao (kanao ou le Miao)>}
%t ?
%C Hongkong
%Z 519p.

%A Esquirol,, Joseph
%A Williatte,, Gust
%D 1908
%T {\fr <Essai de dictionnaire Dioi--fran\,caise. Reproduisant la langue parl\'ee par les tribus Thai de la haute Rivi\`ere de l'Ouest, suivi d'un vocabulaire fran\,caise-dioi>}
%t ?
%C Hongkong
%I Imprimerie de la Soci\'et\'e des Missions Etrang\`eres
%Z lvi, 670p.
%R Reviewed by E. Huber, <Bulletin de l'Ec\^ole Fran\,caise d'Extr\^eme-Orient> 9(1909):394-7

%A Estrade
%D 1895
%T {\fr <Dictionnaire et guide franco--laotiens. Prononciation en fran\,cais avec signes conventionnels. Transcription de tous les termes en caract\`eres Laotiens. Manuel de conversation>}
%t ?
%C Toulouse
%I G. Berthoumieu
%Z 325p.

%A Etienne-Gallois,, Auguste Alphonse
%D 1874
%T {\fr <La langue et la litt\'erature du royaume tha\"i ou de Siam>}
%t The language and literature of the Kingdom of Thai or Siam
%C Paris
%I Challamel
%Z v., 40p.

%A Evacuee (pseudonym)
%D 1944
%T <How to speak Burmese>
%C Bombay
%Z 2, 79p.

%A Evans,, Cleo
%X see Leuz,, Christopher, Evans,, Eugene, Evans,, Cleo, et al.)

%A Evans,, Eugene
%X see Leuz,, Christopher, Evans,, Eugene, Evans,, Cleo, et al.)

%A Evans,, George Patrick Elystan
%D 1911
%T <Big game shooting in Upper Burma: with a glossary of Burmese words>
%C London
%O Glossary of hunting terms, 226-31 - BSTL

%A Evans,, Helen
%A Bowen,, Peggy
%D 1963
%T <K\;oho language course>
%C Dalat
%I Christian and Missionary Alliance
%Z mimeo.
%% Huffman's spelling Helan corrected on basis of Melvyl entry - DS

%A Evans,, Helen
%A Bowen,, Peggy
%D 1976
%T <K\;oho language course>
%C Dallas
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics Microfiche Publications
%Z 160p.
%e 2 vols., 2 mf.
%% Huffman's spelling Helan corrected on basis of Melvyl entry - DS

%A Evans,, Ivor Hugh Norman
%D 1915
%T Semang vocabulary obtained in Perak and Pahang
%J <Journal of the Federated Malay States Museum>
%V 6

%A Evans,, Ivor Hugh Norman
%D 1924-29
%T An ethnological expedition to South Siam
%J <Journal of the Federated Malay States Museum>
%V 12
%P 35-57
%O AA: Tonga

%A Evans,, Ivor Hugh Norman
%D 1927
%T <Papers on the ethnology and archeology of the Malay Peninsula>
%C Cambridge
%I Cambridge University Press
%Z x, 164p.
%O Tonga vocabulary, 8-12 - SJS

%A Evans,, Ivor Hugh Norman
%D 1937
%T <The Negritos of Malaya>
%C Cambridge
%I Cambridge University Press
%Z xiii, 323p.
%+ Reprinted London: Frank Cass, 1968
%O Linguistics, 277-89; appendix IV: List of Negrito words identified in the comparative vocabularies in Skeat and Blagden 1906 - SJS

%A Everitt,, Fay
%D 1967
%X see Taylor,, D., and Everitt,, Fay

%A Everitt,, Fay
%D 1970
%X see Taylor,, D., and Everitt,, Fay

%A Everitt,, Fay
%D 1972
%X see Taylor,, D., Everitt,, Fay, and Tamang,, Kama Bahadur

%A Everitt,, Fay
%D 1972
%T Sentence patterns in Tamang
%E Trail,, Ronald L.
%B <Patterns in clause, sentence, and discourse in selected languages of India and Nepal>
%C Kathmandu
%I Summer Institute of Linguistics and Tribhuvan University
%V 1
%P 197-234

%A Everitt,, Fay
%D 1972
%X see Tamang,, Kama Bahadur, Taylor,, D., and Everitt,, Fay

%A Ewald,, L.
%D 1881
%T {\germ <Grammatik der T'ai oder siamesischen Sprache>}
%t Grammar of the Thai or Siamese language
%C Leipzig
%I T. O. Weigel
%Z viii, 112p., table

%A Ewan,, W. G.
%X see Hombert, Ewan, and Ohala

%A Ewan,, W. G.
%X see Hombert, Ohala, and Ewan

%A Eynde,, Karel van den
%X see Tr\^an V\uan Toan and Eynde,, Karel van den


%% F (Huffman pp. 123-134), input and edited by David Stampe, May 1995

%A Fabricus,, P.
%D 1959
%T The rebirth of the Cambodian language: a study of the administrative vocabulary
%J <Cambodia Today>
%V June 1959
%P 19-22

%A Faltis,, Joseph
%D 1967
%T <Quickie lessons in Vietnamese, using the absorbamatic method>
%? illustrated by Christian Jan Faltis
%C Woodland, CA
%I Foto Features
%? Distributed by J. Winston Co., Palo Alto, CA
%Z 40p.

%A Fang Bolong
%D 1981
%X see Zhou Yaowen, Fang, and Meng

%A Fang Bolong
%D 1982
%T {\ch ??}
%t The special functions of the classifiers and demonstratives in consecutive modifiers in the Dai language
%J <Minzu yuwen>
%V 1982
%N 3
%P 30-2
%O With romanized citations

%A Fang Fenghe
%X see Zhou Yaowen and Fang Fenghe

%A Fang Guoyu
%D 1956
%T {\ch <L\"ue lun bai zu de xing cheng (Guan yu bai yu de xi shu wen ti)>}
%t Discussion on the Formation of the Bai People (the Question of the Origin of the Bai Language)
%C ?
%I Yunnan People's Publishing House
%O Minchia
%% Orig. has "May" after publisher

%A Fanshawe,, H. C.
%D 1884
%T Kulu language spoken at Malana
%J <Panjab Notes and Queries>
%V 1
%N 376/471/554
%P 43-44/56/68
%O Kanashi - BSTL
%% numbers and pages sic

%A Faraut,, Emile
%A Raquez,, P.
%D 1907
%T {\fr <Le cambodgien tel qu'on le parle>}
%t Cambodian as it is spoken
%C Phnom Penh
%I Coudurier et Mont\'egout
%Z 190p.

%A Faraut,, F.
%D 1911
%T {\fr <Etude sur la v\'erification des dates des inscriptions siamoises>}
%t Study of the verification of dates of the Siamese inscriptions
%C Saigon
%I Imprimerie Commerciale, Par La Mission Pavie

%A Faris,, James
%X see Newcomer and Faris

%A Farrars,, Bertha
%X see Farrars,, Max, and Farrars, Bertha

%A Fasold,, Ralph William August
%D 1968
%T <Noun compounding in Thai>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of Chicago

%A Faulmann,, Karl
%D 1880
%T {\germ <Illustrierte Geschichte der Schrift...>}
%t Illustrated history of writing...
%C Wien
%I A. Hartleben
%Z xvi, 632p.
%O Scripts, TB: Lepcha 452ff, Tibetan 480ff; TK: Thai 489-93

%A Feer,, L\'eon
%D 1877
%T {\fr Etudes cambodgiennes. La collection Hennecart de la Biblioth\'eque National}
%t Cambodian studies. The Hennecart collection of the Biblioth\'eque National
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 1877
%P 161-234
%O Contains the following vocabularies: Khmer--Latin, Latin--Khmer, Khmer--French, French--Khmer, Khmer--Latin--French, Latin--French--Vietnamese, Khmer--Vietnamese; also contains list of Khmer plant names with Latin botanical names and plant uses - SJS

%A Feer,, L\'eon
%D 1879
%T {\fr Les nouveaux caract\`eres cambodgiens de l'Imprimerie nationale}
%t ?
%J <M\'emoires de la Soci\'et\'e Acad. indo-chin.>
%V 1
%P 270-2

%A Feer,, L\'eon
%D 1880-81
%T Review of Aymonier, {\fr <Dictionnaire khmer--fran\,cais>}
%J <Annales de l'Extr\^eme-Orient>
%V 3
%P 37-41

%A Feer,, L\'eon
%D 1898
%T {\fr Sp\'ecimen de la langue lepcha (ou rong)}
%t Specimen of the Lepcha (or Rong) language
%J <Journal Asiatique>, 9. s\'erie
%V 12
%N 177-88
%O Text and glossary

%A Feingold,, F.
%D 1976
%T On knowing who you are: intraethnic distinctions among the Akha of northern Thailand
%E Banks,, David J.
%B <Changing identities in modern Southeast Asia>
%C The Hague
%I Mouton
%P 83-94
%O Ethnolinguistic data

%A Feng Han-yi
%A Shryock,, J. K.
%D 1938
%T The historical origin of the Lolo
%J <Harvard Journal of Asiatic studies>
%V 3
%N 2
%P 103-27

%A Feng Zheng
%D 1979
%T {\ch <Guo wai xi zang yan jiu gai kuang (Bao gua yu yan)>}
%t Overseas Tibetan studies (including language)
%C ?
%I Chinese Social Sciences Publishing House
%% Orig. has July after publisher

%A Feng Zheng
%D 1979
%T {\ch Jin shi wu nian lai guo wai yan jiu zang yu qing kuang jien shu (1963-1977)}
%t Brief introduction to overseas research on Tibetan over the past fifteen years (1963-1977)
%J <Yu yan xue Dong tai>
%V 1/2
%P 6ff/12ff

%A Ferkinghoff,, Klaus
%D 1962
%T {\germ <Deutsch--Vietnamesisch W\"orterbuch>}. {\viet <T\;u-\-di\^en \-D\;uc--Vi\^et>}
%t German--Vietnamese dictionary
%C Wiesbaden
%I Harrassowitz
%Z 110p.

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1970
%T {\fr Les Kahmou, histoire et l\'egende}
%t ?
%J <l'Unit\'e Nationale> (Vientiane)
%V 10
%P 35-7

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1970
%T {\fr Situation ethnographique du Laos}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin du Syndicat National des Instituteurs>
%V ?
%P 16-23

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1971
%T {\fr La langue souei: mutations consonantiques et bipartition du syst\`eme vocalique}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 66
%N 1
%P 379-88

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1971
%T {\fr Simplification des groupes consonantiques dans deux dialectes austroasiens du Sud-Laos}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 66
%N 1
%P 389-403
%O AA

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1971
%X see Matras and Ferlus

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1972
%T {\fr La cosmogonie selon la tradition khmou}
%t Cosmogony in the Khmu tradition
%E Barrau,, Jacques
%E et al.
%B {\fr <Langues et techniques, nature et soci\'et\'e (Volume presented to Andre\'e G. Haudricourt on his 60th birthday)>}
%b ?
%C Paris
%I Klincksieck
%V 1
%P 277-82

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1972
%T {\fr Note sur les dialectes austroasiens du sud Laos}
%t Note on the Austroasian dialects of southern Laos
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 3
%N 2
%P 35-49

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1972
%T {\fr Un an de mission de recherches ethnolinguistiques au Laos}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 3
%N 2
%P 31-3

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1972
%X see Matras and Ferlus

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1974
%T {\fr D\'elimitation des groupes linguistiques austroasiatiques dans le centre indochinois}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 15-23

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1974
%T {\fr Le groupe viet-m\;u\;ong}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 69-77
%O Classification, vocabulary, and bibliography

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1974
%T {\fr La langue ong, mutations consonantiques et transphonologisations}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 113-21

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1974
%T {\fr Le javanais en khamou}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 171-5
%O Word-play

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1974
%T {\fr Les langues du groupe austroasiatique-nord}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 39-68
%O Classification, maps, vocabulary, and bibliography

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1974
%T {\fr Lexique souei--fran\,cais}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 5
%N 1
%P 141-59
%O About 1000 words

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1974
%T {\fr Problemes de mutations consonantiques en Thav\;ung}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 69
%N 1
%P 311-23
%O AA: M\;u\;ong

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1974
%T Review of K. Smith, <A phonological reconstruction of Proto-North-Bahnaric>
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 6
%N 1
%P 115-29

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1975
%T {\fr Le Phou Noy: phonologie et morphologie}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 6
%N 4
%P 21-56

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1976
%T {\fr Du nouveau sur la spirantisations ancienne en vietnamien}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 71
%N 1
%P 305-12

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1976
%T {\fr Les traits s\'emantiques dans le vocabulaire Phou Noy}
%t ?
%M Sino-Tibetan Conference 9 (Copenhagen)

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1977
%T {\fr Etude d'une strate de changements phon\'etiques dans l'ancien Cambodge}
%t ?
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, VI
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%P 59-67

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1977
%T {\fr L'infixe instrumental <rn> en Khamou et sa trace en vietnamien}
%t ?
%J <Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Orientale>
%V 2
%P 51-5

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1977
%T {\fr Un mythe khamou: l'origine des baguettes divinatoires}
%t ?
%B <LACITO-Documents, Austron\'esie> {? LACITO ??}
%C Paris
%I Soci\'et\'e d'Etudes Linguistiques et Anthropologiques de France
%V I
%P 24-31

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1977
%T {\fr Les pronoms personnels en Phou Noy}
%t ?
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 72
%N 1
%P 305-11

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1978
%T {\fr Comparaison de deux dialectes lamet et restitution de la proto-langue}
%t Comparison of two Lamet dialects and reconstruction of the proto-language
%M ms.

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1978
%T {\fr Evolution des obstruents m\'ediales en vietnamien}
%t Evolution of medial obstruents in Vietnamese
%M Second International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics, Mysore, India, Central Institute of Indian Languages

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1978
%T {\fr Reconstruction de /ts/ et /t\vs/ en Mon-Khmer}
%t Reconstruction of /ts/ and /t\vs/ in Mon-Khmer
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, VII
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%P 1-38

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1978
%T Review of Huffman, <Intermediate Cambodian reader>
%J <La Linguistique>
%V 14
%N 2
%P 163

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1979
%T {\fr Formation des registres et mutations consonantiques dans les langues mon-khmer}
%t Formation of registers and consonant mutations in the Mon-Khmer languages
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, VIII
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%P 1-76

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1979
%T {\fr Lexique Thav\;ung--Fran\,cais}
%t Thav\;ung--French lexicon
%J <Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Orientale>
%V 5
%P 71-94

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1979
%T {\fr La r\'ecit khamou de <Chuang> et ses implications historiques pour le nord-Laos}
%t ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 10
%N 2
%P 327-65
%O Khmu text, 330-65

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1980
%T {\fr La r\'ecit du clan du drongo chez les khamou}
%t ?
%B {\fr <Cheminements: \'ecrits offerts \`a Georges Condominas>}
%b ?
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 11
%N 1-4
%P 306-7
%O Analysis of a brief Khmu text

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1980
%T {\fr Le verbe en Phou Noy}
%t The verb in Phou Noy
%J <Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Orientale>
%V 8
%P 113-33
%O TB: Phunoi: grammar

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1981
%T {\fr A propos d'un allongement vocalique devant la finale <r> in khmer ancien}
%t On a vowel lengthening after final <r> in Old Khmer
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 12
%N 1
%P 101-10

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D 1983
%T {\fr Essai de phon\'etique historique du m\^on}
%t Essay on a historical phonetics of M\^on
%E Clark,, Marybeth
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%B <Mon-Khmer studies>, XII
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%P 1-90

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D forthcoming
%T {\fr Sur l'origine g\'eographique des langues Viet-m\;u\;ong}
%t On the geographic origin of the Viet-M\;u\;ong languages
%E Svantesson,, Jan-Olaf
%B <Papers from the Helsing\/or symposium on Austroasiatic linguistics and literature>
%C Copenhagen/London
%I Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies/Curzon

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%D n.d.
%T {\fr Vocabulaires et notes personnelles sur les parlers des Kha Thav\;ung, Kha Phon Soung, et Kha Pakatan}
%t Vocabularies and personal notes on the languages of the Kha Thav\;ung, Kha Phon Soung, and Kha Pakatan
%M ms.

%A Ferlus,, Michael
%A Nguy\^en Phu Phong
%D 1967-77
%T {\fr Analyse de quatre articles d'ethno-linguistique Vi\^et-M\;u\;ong publi\'ees \`a Hanoi}
%t Analysis of four Vi\^et-M\;u\;ong ethnolinguistic articles published in Hanoi
%J <Cahiers d'Etudes Vietnamiennes>
%V 3
%P 3-16

%A Fernandez,, Frank
%D 1963
%T <A phonology of Remo>
%U M.A. thesis, University of North Carolina

%A Fernandez,, Frank
%D 1968
%T <A grammatical sketch of Remo: a Munda language>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, University of North Carolina
%Z 170p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 29.7:2232-3-A; University Microfilms 69-1613

%A Fernandez,, Frank
%A King,, Robert D.
%D n.d.
%T <A grammar of Hill Remo>
%O Abstract in <International Journal of American Linguistics> 31(1965).4:340-1; never finished

%A Ferrand,, Gabriel
%D 1907
%T Review of Aymonier and Cabaton, {\fr <Dictionnaire \vcam--fran\,caise>}
%J <Journal Asiatique>
%V 10
%P 381-3

%A Ferrari,, Alfonsa
%D 1958
%T <Mk'yen brtse's Guide to the holy places of Central Tibet>
%S <Istituto Italiano per il Medio ed Extremo Oriente>
%u <Serie Orientale Roma>, 16
%X see completed and edited by Luciano Petech, with the collaboration of Hugh Richardson
%C Rome
%Z 199, 53p., photgraphic reproductions, map
%O Tibetan, Sanskrit, and general indices make this in effect a vocabulary of geographical names - BSTL

%A Ferreiros,, Albina
%D 1973
%T {\fr <Les Kon Cau de la D\`a-Nying, contribution \`a l'\'etude ethnologique des Cru (K\"odu) et Cil du district de \-Don-D\;u\;ong>}
%t ?
%S {\fr <Micro\'editions Universitaires>}
%C Paris
%I Hachette
%O Texts, AA: Cil (= Chil); MA: K\"odu (= Kadu)

%A Ferreiros,, Albina
%A Dournes,, Jacques
%D 1975
%T {\fr Deux versions d'un mythe}
%t Two versions of a myth
%J <Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien>
%V 6
%N 4
%P 97-124
%O Texts, AA: Sr\^e; MA: Chru

%A Ferrell,, Raleigh
%D 1971
%T {\fr Le P'u-man, langue austroasiatique}
%t P'u-man, an Austroasiatic language
%J <Bulletin de la Soci\'et\'e Linguistique de Paris>
%V 6
%N 2
%P 405-12
%O Phu-man

%A F\'evrier,, James Germain
%D 1948
%T {\fr Histoire de l'\'ecriture}
%t History of writing
%C Paris
%I Payot
%Z 608p.
%+ 2nd ed., 1959
%O See 2nd ed.

%A F\'evrier,, James Germain
%D 1959
%T {\fr Histoire de l'\'ecriture}
%t History of writing
%e 2nd ed.
%C Paris
%I Payot
%Z 616p.
%+ 1st ed., 1948
%O Scripts, AA: Annamite 89, Khmer 358-61, Mon 369; TB: Lepcha 355, Limbu 355, Lolo 82, Moso 85, Tibetan 351; TK: Khamti 366, Lao 367, Shan 367, Tai 366, Thai 363-4; MY: Miao, Yao 83

%A Fiks,, A. I.
%D 1966
%T A short Vietnamese language program: training course and research vehicle
%J <International Review of Applied Linguistics>
%V 4
%P 235-54

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1965
%T <Phonemes of Mal>
%U M.A. thesis, Indiana University

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1971
%T <T'in, a historical study>
%U Ph.D. dissertation, Indiana University
%Z 174p.
%# Dissertation Abstracts Intl. 32.5:2664-5-A; University Microfilms 71-29,569

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1971
%T The T'in of northern Thailand: an ethnolinguistic survey
%J <Behavior Science Notes>
%V 7
%P 19-31

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1972
%T Tone in a dialect of T'in
%J <Anthropological Linguistics>
%V 14
%N 4
%P 111-18

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1973
%T Rice in a grammar of T'in
%J <Journal of Linguistics>
%V 9
%N 2
%P 209-21

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1973
%T The passive in Thai
%J <Anthropological Linguistics>
%V 15
%N 1
%P 33-41

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1973
%T Pronouns in Northern Thai
%J <Anthropological Linguistics>
%V 15
%N 8
%P 345-61

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1973
%T Thai loanwords in T'in
%M Paper presented to the Northern Thai Society, August 15, 1973

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1973
%T <T'in, a historical study>
%C Chiengmai
%I Chiengmai University, Department of Sociology and Anthropology, Faculty of Social Sciences
%Z 132p.

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1973
%T <T'in culture: an ethnography of the T'in tribe of northern Thailand>
%C Chiengmai
%I Chiengmai University., Department of Sociology and Anthropology, Faculty of Social Sciences
%Z mimeo.

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1975
%T A grammar of verb serialization in Thai
%E Harris,, Jimmy G.
%E Chamberlain,, James R.
%B <Studies in Tai linguistics in honor of William J. Gedney>
%C Bangkok
%I Central Institute of English Language
%P 112-29

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1976
%T Mal (Thin)
%E Smalley,, William A.
%B <Phonemes and orthography: language planning in ten minority languages of Thailand>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u C.43
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%P 239-57

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1976
%T <Phonemes of Mal>
%C Lincoln, Nebraska
%I Lincoln Christian College Press

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1976
%T On */r/ in T'in
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%E Thompson,, Laurence C.
%E Starosta,, Stanley
%B <Austroasiatic studies>
%S <Oceanic Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 13
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%V 1
%P 265-84

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1978
%T Toward a grammar of relative clauses in T'in
%E Jenner,, Philip N.
%E Thompson,, Laurence C.
%E Starosta,, Stanley
%B <Austroasiatic studies>
%S <Oceanic Linguistics, Special publication>
%u 13
%C Honolulu
%I University of Hawaii Press
%V 1
%P 285-308

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1978
%T <T'in: a historical study>
%S <Pacific Linguistics>
%u B.49
%C Canberra
%I Australian National University
%Z vi, 111p.
%R L. C. Thompson, <Journal of Asian Studies> 102(1982).3:581-2

%A Filbeck,, David
%D 1979
%T Residential/nonresidential deixis for <come> and <go> in Mal
%M Paper presented to the winter meeting of the Linguistic Society of America

%A Filimonova,, T. R.
%D 1980
%T {\rus <Vzaimosviazi stikhotvornogo razmera i stikh hotvornoi rechi vo v'etnamskoi narodnoi i literaturei poezii>}
%t The interconnections of verse meter and verse speech in Vietnamese folk and literary poetry
%U Kandidat nauk in Philological Sciences, Moskovskii gosudarstvennyi universitet imeni M. V. Lomonsova - Inst. stran A